VOL. 110, PARTS 1 & 2

30 MAY, 1986

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Contents

Barker, S. Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and

a checklist - - - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. & Lungershausen, K. The ultrastructure of male nuptial pads in some

Australopapuan frogs - - - - - - - - -

x, Baker, G. H. Coleoptera, Scorpionida and Reptilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook

National Trust Reserve, South Australia - - - - - -

Lioyd, L. N. & Walker, K. F, Distribution and conservation status of small freshwater

fish in the River Murray, South Australia — - - - - -

Russell, B. C. A new species of Suezichthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian

Bight) - - - - - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J., Davies, M. & Aplin, K. A new stream-dwelling SpeeiaS of Litoria (Anura:

Hylidae) from New Guinea - - - - - - -

Branden, K. L., Edgar, G. J. & Shepherd, S. A. Reef fish populations of the Investigator

Group, South Australia: a comparison of two census methods - -

% Mawson, P. M. Redescription of Tetrameres certa (Leidy, 1886) Nematoda: Habro-

nematoidea - - - - - - - - - - -

Allan, R. J., Bye, J. A. T. & Hutton, P. The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South - - -

Brief Communications:

Shea, G. M. & Miller, B. The occurrence of Hemiergis initialis (Werner, 1910) (Lacertilia:

Scincidae) in South Australia - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. On the systematic position and type locality of the frog Pachybatrachus petersii

Keferstein, reported from Australia - - - - - - -

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 110, PART 1

OW)

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC.

CONTENTS, VOL. 110, 1986

PART I & 2, 30 May

Barker, S. Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species

and a checklist - - - s - 4 . - 4

Tyler, M. J. & Lungershausen, K. The ultrastructure of male nuptial pads in some

Australopapuan frogs - - - ‘ 2 3 z a »

Baker, G. H. Coleoptera, Scorpionida and Reptilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook

National Trust Reserve, South Australia - : - - - -

Lloyd, L. N. & Walker, K. F. Distribution and conservation status of small freshwater

fish in the River Murray, South Australia - - - - -

Russell, B. C. A new species of Suezichthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian

Bight) - 2 3 7 ~ Z L : f “ 3 5

Tyler, M, J., Davies, M. & Aplin, K. A new stream-dwelling SpeaIES of Litoria (Anura:

Hylidae) from New Guinea - - “ Be a }

Branden, K. L., Edgar, G. J. & Shepherd, S. A. Reef fish populations of the Investigator

Group, South Australia: a comparison of two census methods - -

Mawson, P. M. Redescription of 7etrameres certa (Leidy, 1886) Nematoda: Habro-

nematoidea - - _ 2 E : o ‘ , 2

Allan, R. J., Bye, J. A. 1, & Hutton, P. The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South - -

Brief Communications:

Shea, G. M. & Miller, B. The occurrence of Hemiergis initialis Genet, wie} (Lacertilia:

Scincidae) in South Australia = - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. On the systematic position and type locality of the frog Pachybatrachus

petersii Keferstein, reported from Australia - - - - -

PARTS 3 & 4, 28 November

Koste, W. & Shiel, R. J. New rotifera (Aschelminthes) from Tasmania - - -

Davies, M. & Littlejohn, M. J. Frogs of the genus Uperoleia sy (Anura:

Leptodactylidac) in south-eastern Australia - - - -

Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. Earthquakes in South

Australia - : - - - ~ - ~ - - -

Burton, T. C. & Stocks, R. A new species of terrestrial microhylid frog from Papua

New Guinea - - - = ‘ rs < BI s =

Thomas, I. M., Ainslie, R. C., Johnston, D. A., Offler, E. W. & Zed, P. A. The effects

of cooling water discharge on the intertidal fauna in the Port River

Estuary, South Australia = - - 3 - Z - # -

Brief Communications:

Lange, R. T. A systematic effect of stocking intensity upon the specific defoliation rate

of saltbush by sheep - = - z “ . a a i

Guerin, B. New records of spiders (Arachnida: Araneae) from South Australia - -

Guerin, B. Celaenia atkinsoni (Arachnida, Araneae): new record for South Australia

with a description of the male - - - - - - -

Jago, J. B. An alleged Archaeocyath from Cape Denison, Antarctica - - - -

Barlow, B., Denham, D., Jones, T., McCue, K., Gibson, G. & Greenhalgh, S. The

Musgrave Ranges earthquake of March 30, 1986 - - - -

Shepherd, S. A. & Gray, J. D. Food of the anemone Anthothoe albocincta at West Island,

South Australia - 2 # i ‘ : = : ‘

Tyler, M. J. & Watson, G. F. On the nomenclature of a ee tree frog from

Queensland - - - - - - -

Insert to Transactions of the Roval Society of South Australia, Vol. Ii, Parts | & 2, 28 November, 1986

111

145

155

159

173

177

181

183

187

19]

193

STIGMODERA ( CASTIARINA) (COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE):

TAXONOMY, NEW SPECIES AND A CHECKLIST

BY §. BARKER

Summary

Twenty-two species are resurrected from synonymy. S. acuta Deuquet, S$. alternozona Thomson, S.

bicolor C & G, S. bimaculata Saunders, S. colligens Kerremans, $. danesi Obenberger, S. desideria

Carter, S. deyrollei Thomson, S. eborica Carter, S. garrawillae Carter, S. haroldi Saunders, S.

humeralis Kerremans, S. julia Thomson, $. montigena Oke, $. ochreiventris Saunders, S. placens

Kerremans, §. puella Saunders, S. puerilis Kerremans, S. puteolata Carter, S. terraereginae

Blackburn, S. trimaculata Saunders, S. tyrrhena Blackburn. Two sub-species (S. picta malleeana

Carter and S. grata dicoflava Carter) are raised to specific rank. Eighteen new synonyms

(Castiarina) are recognised (valid name is given last); timida Kerremans = australasiae C & G;

aliceae Barker = bicolor C & G; kalbarri Barker = bucolica Kerremans; goldingi Barker = danesi

Obenberger; chobauti Théry = sancta Carter = deyrollei Thomson; clarki Carter = eremita

Blackburn; yllgarni Obenberger = flaviceps Carter; fairmairei Kerremans = hoffmanseggi Hope;

electa Kerremans = inconspicua Saunders; blackburni Carter = julia Thomson; dawsonensis Carter

= liliputana Thomson; alpestris Barker = montigena Oke; cara Blackburn = ochreiventris Saunders;

auripennis Barker = pallas Blackburn ; aurolimbata Carter = puella Saunders; transversepicta

Thomson = scalaris (Boisduval); cordifer Kerremans = thomsoni Saunders.

STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) (COLEOPTERA; BUPRESTIDAE): TAXONOMY,

NEW SPECIES AND A CHECKLIST

by S, BARKER*

Summary

Bakker. (like) Sremadera (Custlurtna) Coleoptera; Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and a

vhwekhst. Trans, R. Sac, S, Aust. (UL), 1-36, 30 May, 1986,

Twenty-two species are resurrected from synonymy. §. aewfa Deuquet, &. alernozona Thomsen.

S bicolor © & G, 8, biraenlaia Saunders, 3. valligens Kerremans, 5. danesy Obenberger, S. desidenia Carter,

S. deyrollei Thomson, S. eborice Carter, 5. garrawillae Carter, 8. haroldi Saunders, 5, humeralis Kerremans,

S julia Thomson, S santigena Oke, 5, ochreiventris Saunders, S. placeny Korremans, 5. puella Saunders,

S. puerilis Kerremans, 8. putealara Carter, 8. ferraereginue Blackburn, & trimaculuia Saunders, 8 Qverhena

Blackburn, Tvo sub-species (S. picta malleeana Carter and S. gra(adisceflava Carter) are raised (o specific

rank, Bighleen new synonyns of Sgnodera (Casriarina) are recognised (valid name is given last): Minide

Kerremans = austratusiae © & G; alleewe Barker = bicolor & G: kulbarri Barker — bucolicu Kerrenyans;

evoldinet Barker=dunesi Obenberacr; chobout: Theryssaneta Carter=deyrollei Thomson, clarki

Cartur=eremifa Blackburn; v/learn) Obenberger «fluviceps Carter, fairmuatrel Kerremans = hoffmansege!

Hope; electa Kerremans-Meonspiewa Saunders; blaekbureat Carter=/ulia Thomson; dawsonensis

Carters /ilipatana Thomson, u/pesiris Barker ~montigena Oke; cara Blackburn © ochrelventris Saunders;

auripennis Barkers pallax Blackburn; aurolinibata Carterspuella Saunders; crvasversepicra

Thomson =sealaris (Boisduval), cordifer Kerremans » thanteni Saunders.

Twenty-five new spevies of Stigmodera (Casi/arimas are deseribed: S. ythertanensis sp. nov.,

5, blackdownensis sp. nay. 5. browning? sp. nay. &. burast sp. noy,, &-capensis sp, nay, 5. Caels/ sp. fav,

Sveracen(asp nov. & dessarté sp. (ov, S. discolorita sp. nav, 8. evrensis sp, nov., S. fusca sn. nov., S. Aileri

4p. tev, So incognita sp. nov. 9. Kempsterisp. nov, 5. dukin/ sp. nov. S melrasensis sp, nov, 5. pearsont

sp. nov, 8, palla sp. nov., 8. mufa sp, nov. &. stellaia sp. nav, 5. dasmaniensis sp, nov, 8, turbulenta sp,

nov, S. wnealtd sp. nov, So tivdelined sp. nov. S. warningensis sp. nov.

A checklist of the three hundred arid seventy-five species in the sub-genus Casylurina is given with

species disrribucon indicared hy state ar country.

Key Woxbs; Coleoplera, Buprestidae, Stigmodera (Custiurinas syronyims, wew specles, checklist,

Introduction

The taxonomy of the buprestid sub-venus

Stigmodera (Castiarina) Castlenau & Gary has been

in a state of Mux aver recent years, Barker (1979,

1980, 1983) has described fifty-five new species and

synonymised many others. Examination of freshly

collected specimens and of specimens deposited in

anumber of museums has indicated the existence

of many more undescribed species and cast doubi

upon the validicy of others, Twenty-five new species

of Stigmodera (Castiarina) ape described here, the

status of a Further forty-two species and two sub-

species reassessed and a checklist of the species

recognised within the sub-genus with their

distribution provided,

Materials und Methods

The abbreviations used in che cext for museum

aud private collections are as follows (Watt 1979):

AHQA Mr A. Hiller, Mc Glorious, Qld) AMSA

Australian Musem, Svdney; ANIC Austrahan

* Deparment of Zooloxy, Uniyersixy of Adelaide,

Baw 498, CPO, Actelaide, S. Aust, SOM,

National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra;

ASSA Mr A. Sundholm, Sydney, N.S.W.; AWHO

Mr A, Walford-Huggins, Mt Molloy, Qld; BMNH

British Museum (Natural History), London, DPIQ

Department gl Primary Industries, Mareeba, Qld;

EAQA Mr E, E, Adams, Edungalba, Qld; GBVA

Mr G. Burns, Mornington, Viey HMOE Hope

Museum, Oxford, England; JGAA Mrs J, Gardner,

Adelaide, S. Augty MNHN Muséum National

d'Histoire Naturelles, Paris; MPWA Mr M. Powell,

Mr M. Golding and Mr T. M.S. Hanlon, Attadale,

W,.A,; NMPC National Museum, Prague, Czecho-

slovakia; NMVA National Museums of Vieroria;

OMBA Queensland Museum, Brisbane; RMBB

L'Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique,

Brussels; RWSO Mr R. Westcott, Salem, Oregon;

SAMA South Australian Museum, Adelaide;

WAMA Western Australian Museum, Perth; WADA

Western Australian Department of Agriculture,

South Perth,

Members of species groups referred to in rhe text

are Indicated in the cheeklist by a lower case Teller

i) parenthesis, They are: fa} 8, /lavopicta

(Boisduval), [b] &. Adaris Hope, [c] S. sexeurrara

Macleay, [d] §. weima Saunders, fe) S. ervenrara

2 5. BARKER

(Kirby), [f7 5, daadiate Macteay, [h] S. Alu C&G,

Li] % defectabilés Vope, Lj] & srraeninew Macleay,

[k] &. gihhieollis Saunders, [I] S. fulviventris

Macleay, [m} 8, commeey Carter, [In] S. distineuende

Saunders, [o} S. predicts Saunders mimicry group,

Ip] &. decemmaculuta (Kirby), Iq] S scalaris

(Boisduval), [r] 8. simulera C&G, |s} 8. octospilota

CX G, [ & octomaculaa Sanders, fu) S.

atricollis Saunders, [v| & sexplagiata Gory, [w] %

mifasciata C & Cj, A complete list af species groups

and a key eventually will be published as part of

a revision of Srigmodera (Custivrina) in

preparation.

Species resurrected from svnonyinw

Harker (1983) synonyniised & dunes: Obenberger

tholotype male, Qld, NMPC 24415) with &.

caslelnaudi Saunders (holotype female, Adelaide,

BMNEL). In &. danest the background colour of the

elyirg and sides of the propotum is orange while

in S, castelhavd? i is red, External morpholagy and

male penitalia sre different and indicate that they

both are valid belonging in two different species

broups§. danesi oceurs in WA, and S. Aust. and

is figured under the desetiplion of itg synonym &

goldina® Barker (holotype male, Coolgardie,

WAMA) (Barker 1983, Figs, 2E, 8D)_

] have re-examined the holotypes of & pueri/ix

Kerremans (holotype lemale, Aust., BMNH) and

S tinida Kerremans (holotype male, Adelaide,

RMNA) and find (hat 5, puerilis is a valid species

and 8. divide isa synonym of & ausrrulasiae C & G

(holotype female, Aust. MNHN). Barker (1983)

confused these mwo species, synonvmised §. puerilis

With S. ausiralesiae and figured S$. pueritis

mistakenly calling it S rvnea.

Barker (1979) followed Carter (1916, 1929, 1931)

lit avnonymising S. dicolor C & G (holotype,

Kangaroo Ih, MNHN) with §, J/lanepitta

(Boisduval) (holotype not located). S& bicalar isa

member of ite S, craentata (Kirby) (holotype, Aust.,

AMINA) specyes group and is a smaller species than

5. Hlavopicia, Male genitaha are very dislinet and

place §. flavanion in its own species eroup (Rarket

1980, Fig. JE, Barker 1983, Big. (¥). S. dlenlor

vecurs in the Mo Lofty Ranges and on Kangaroo

I. S. Aust. and is Meured under whe deseripnon

al’ S. aliveae Barker (holoiype male, Mr Lofty,

SAMA) us synurivert (Barker 1980, Fig. 2B).

Carrer (1937) considered S puelle Kerremans

(holotype, Aust., BSINH) to be a synonym of S.

Seen raja Macleay (holotype female, Pert Denison,

ANIC) and Barker (1979) followed. S. paella isa

member of the & soxendiala species proup, but

hecause of differences in external ntorphology and

niale genitalia (bigs 1B, 1B), | consider 1 a valid

species, S. aurolimbata Carter (holotype male,

Cairns, Old, NMYVA) is ils synonym,

Backer (1980) syoouymised & velligens

Kerremans (holotype female, Qld, BMNH) with &

carmined Saunders (holarype, N.SW,, BMNE). &

collivens has very pale yellow elytra with dark fascia

and oecurs near Coonabarabran, N.SW. and in

southern Qld. [tis larger than 8. cunrtines whieh

has red elytra and occurs tn NeSMW,, Vic., S. Aust.

and W.A, Although male genitalia are quite similar,

as in ollrer members af the S, vicina Saunders

species group (Barker 1983, Figs. 3K, 3L), che

differences in colour, elytral pattern and distribution

justify separation and | consider both to be valid

species.

Barker (1979) synonymised &. desideria Carter

(two Feniale syntypes, Cue, W.A,, NMVA) with &.

longicollis Saunders (holotype fenrale, horth-western

Australia, BMINH), | have re-examined a series of

bath forms. S. desideria has heavier markings than

5. longicollis, is larger, Matter, occurs further cas

in WA. than §, forigico/lis and male genitalia differ

(Figs 1G, IH). | consider 5. desideria a valid species.

Carter (1931) fisted S. Agroldi Saunders

(replacement name for S. viridiventris Saunders

homonym) (holotype female, BMNH) a5 a synonvint

of S, vegera Hope (holotype male, HMOE 974) bur

inexplicably listed So cruenialu (Kirby) as a

synonym of S, vegefa despile the fact that S&.

crventata has date priority. Barker (1979) listed S.

vegeta and & huroldi as synonyms of 8, cruenteta.

§. erveniata has a blue body and red elytra with

the following blue markings: very broad pre-medial

fascia; post-medial fascia; apical mark. S, baroledi

has a preen head, pronotum and underside and

yellow elvira with the following durk markings: pre-

medial fascia not reaching the margin, projecting

anteriorly trom the end; post-medial fascia reaching

margin: anv apical mark (Fig. 4A), ifs disinibulion

is unvertain a5 the two specimens available in whe

BMNH cellection are labelled, N.SW. and Nov

Hollandiae. oveictentalis, respectively. Ir is larger

than S. vegere which has blue-green head,

pronoium and undersurface and red elytra with the

following dark markings: pre-wpical fascia extend-

ing from the posterior edge 16 reach margin; post-

medial fascia reaching margin; an apical mark. All

are valid species belonging in the 5, efventara

(Kirby) species group. S haroldi is the largest

member,

Barker (1979) followed Carter (1940) who

synonymised & mondigena Oke (holotype female,

Warburion Ranwes, Vic. NMVA) with S, /lave-

purpurea Carier (balorype female, Medlow, N.SW.,

NMVA). S. mtortrigena is a valid species and 3

member of the S. cruentata (Kirby) species group.

It is figured under its synonym S. wlpestris Barker

TAXONOMY OF STIGMQDERA (CASTIARINA}

eonrng OP

‘ar = W

Fig. 1, Photomicrographs of male genitalia of the following Stigmodera (Castiarina) species: A. §, hilaris Hope,

B. Ss. aged Saunders, C, S. melrasensis sp. nov., D, 8. capensis sp. nov., E. 8. sexgultata Macleay, F. 8. goodingi

Barker, G. 5, desideria Carter, H. S. longicollis Sauriders, 1. S, trimaculata Saunders, J, S. rerraereginae Blackburn,

K. S, biguttata Macleay, L. S. alternozona Thomson, M, S. deyrollei Thomson, N. 8. eupricollis Saunders, O.

S. hoffmanseggi Hope, P. S. eborica Carter, Q. S. mroribunda Saunders, R. S. punctiventris Saunders, 8. 8. birmaculata

Saunders, T. S. viridolinea sp. nov., U. 8. subtincta Carter, V. S. ignea Blackburn, W. S. burnsi sp. nov.

4 S BARKER

{holotype male, Upper Tumut Gorge, N.SA¥,,

QMISA) (Barker 1983, Figs. (W, 61D), and is a widely

distributed species in Vic. and N.SW, S, /love-

purpurea belougs in its Ow! species group.

Barker (1979) synonymised S. frimaculara

Saunders (holotype female, morth-west Aust,

BMNH) and §, ferraereginee Blackburn (holotype

female, Endeavour River. NMVA) (Fig. 41) with 5.

biguitata Macleay (holotype female, Port Denison,

ANIC), I have examined fresh specimens and male

genitalia (Figs 1, 1. 1K) and find (hat all are valid

species. 5, ferraereginae und S, bieulfata vocur in

northern Qld and 8. trimeeculara in NT. and nerch-

west WA, They belong tw the S$. diguifate species

gtoup,

Carler (1916, 1929, 1931) syaonymined S.

allernazonu Thomsen, & devrol/ei Thomson anid

S. julia Thomsen with §. cupricalfis Saunders.

Barker (1979) agreed and also placed §, chobautt

Thery, 5, fairmiairel Kerremans and S, saneta Carter

as synonyms of §, eupricellis, Afrer pe-exanuiing

the rypes and male genitalia (Figs IL. IM. IN, 10)

{ find chat there are five valid species. 5. eupricalliy

Saunders (holotype female, Aust., BMINH) occurs

in Qld. The head, pronotum.and undersurface are

coppery-bronze, ihe elytra yellow with (We lascla

and an apical mark (Fig. 4H), S. alfernozana

Thomson (bolotype male, Aust. MNHN) is a Jarger

species found in the Mt Lofty Ranges, S. Aus. Teo

Specimens have been located in the MNHWN, BMNH

and SAMA. The head and pronotum are dull green,

the undersurtace bright green and the elyira red wiih

two fascia and an apical mark (Fig, 4G), In &

deyrollei Thomson (halotype lemale, Aust,

MNHN) the head and pronotum are green or

eolden green, the Undersurface green and the elytra

yellow witt (wo fascia and an apieal mark. it Gecurs

in southern Qld, NWSW. and Vic, (Fig, 47), &

chobanty Thery (holotype, Mt Victoria, MNNHN) is

\ts senior synonym and S, sancta Carter (holotwpe

Male, Beechworth, Wic, NMVA) its junior synonym.

The latter form has the pte-medial Fiseia on the

elytra missing. The male genitalia do not differ [rom

Khe typical form of 8S. deyroflet. S. julie is known

only from (three female specimens: the type [nt

MNEIN; a single specimen in the BMNH tron Port

Lincoln, S, Aust. (rem the Blackburn collection;

the female holorype of S. blackburn Carier, §,

Aust.. SAMA. The head and body are nondescript

dark, the clyirain hve specimens are probably pale

yellow with a red margin, there are rwe pre-medial

Spols, a post-medial fascia and un apteal mark

(Fig. 46). S. Blackburni Carter is js synonym,

These all belong in the 5, cupricollis species group,

3, hoffmanseggt Hope (syntype mule, WAL ¢siv),

HMOE |O0i) 2.2) overs in eastern and southern

Australia (net in WA), Male genitalia are

distinctive (Fig. 10} and place it in the S. w/w?

C&G species group. S. fairniairer Kerremans

{halorype male, Aust., BMNH) is its synonym.

Barker (1979) listed & eberiee Carter (holotype,

Ebon NSW. NMVA) as 3 synonym of SS.

moribunda Saunders (holotype male, Aust,

BMNH). 5, eborica is found in the Armidale district

N,SMV, The head pronorum and undersurface are

bright ereen. The elyira are pale yellow and have

the following black markings: a spor over cael

humeral callus; narrow pre-apival faselay a narrow

apical mark (Fig, 4C), The head, pronuruny and

undersurface of S. moribunda are dull green, the

elytra are pale yellow and have the following black

markings: 4 pre-medial fascia; a post-medial fascia;

a matk covering tke whale apical area (Fig. 4D).

Specimens with the heaviest pattern Secur ip coastal

areas in N.S. There is a-cline with loss of partern

in Speaamens trom further inland in N.S A

ralundaia Saunders (female holotype, 8. Aust. (sic),

BMNH) is its synonym. Male genitalia are different

from those of S. eharica (Figs IP, 1), | eansider

& ¢borica © be a valid species.

Carter (1929, 1931) listed S. Lyrrhene Blackburn

thololype male, Old, BMMNH) as a synenyin of §,

sepremenriata Waterhouse (holarype temale, Old,

BMNH). This synonymy was followed by Barker

{(979). S. tyrrhena has a-green head and bady, the

elytra are yellow with a red margin and the following,

black markings Iwo pre-medial spots and an

anterior sulural tiark; a posi-medial fascia; an

apical mark (Fig. 7G). Specimens attributable to

5S. septemgutiata in Wwe SAMA are broader and have

a ercen Head and bods, yellow elytra wirh a red

manin arid the following black markings: (wo pre-

medial spots and an anterior sutural mark; two

post-medial spors: narrow pre-apical mark. Their

thalé genitalia are different (Figs 3P, 3Q). | consider

S, tyreheda a valid species, Both belong in the 3.

delevtubilis Hope (halotwpe female, Pore Phillip,

HMOE, 996) species eroup (Fig. 76}.

Carter (1914, 1929) listed S Dimuciu/aia Saunders

(holotype female, north-west Ausi,, BMNH) as a

Fig. 2. Photomicrographs of orale genitalia of the following, Srginuidera (Casticrina) species: A. S, Atiateralis Ketromatis,

B, S. wetertensis Hlackbury, C. 8 gibbieallis Saunders, 0. S. erevaita Blockburn, E. S rufa sp nav. FS. eerenses

sp, noy,, G, S. slellafe sp. nov., HOS incognita-sp. 00V,, LS. refolimitiata Carter, J. S falviventriw Macleay, K-

S. atherionensis sp. nov, L, S. jexell’ Sautiers, M.S aehresveviters Saunders, N.S. straminéa Macleay, O. 8 plavens

Keremans, BS, divcofleva Carer, QS, bluckdownensis sp, nov, BR, S swbyratm Blackbur, 5, S, garrawillae Carrer,

‘LS. eneaia sp. nove U, S. simulata O & G, V, & convexa Carter, W. 8, putevlata Carter, &, 3) terrier? Bar key,

VOR Aempasreri sp, nov,

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

6 & BARKER

valid species and S punctiveniris Saunders, 8,

suite Blackburn, van nveur Blackbornm and &

igned Blackburn as its synonynis. Carter (1933) later

recognised Four as Valid species, S. bpraculate

oocurs in northewest WA, and Qld but rs rare ah

collections. The edges of the pronotum are fattened

und the texture of the centre marbled wirh wlahrous

areas (Pic, SA). It is a larger species than &

straminea Macleay (holotype, Part Denison, ANIC)

aid was incorrectly synonymised with that speevies

by Barker (1979), S. purnerivenrris Saunders

(holotype female, Gawler, BMNH) has dark blue

head, pronorum and undersurface The elytra are

red with two dark blue fascia and an apical mark

It occurs in the Norseman and Euela districts af

W.A, and in the Big and Little Deserts, Vic, and

in N.SMW. &. piset/ormis Carter (syntypes male and

feniale, ANIC) js its synonym,

3. gitata is represented by two female specimens

in the BMNH. The holotype labelled “Lyndoch, 5.

Aust.”"and the other “Adel.” | have nor located any

other specimens, It is a typical mallee species with

pale yellow elytra and the resi of the body bnght

green) (Fig, 5D). Blackburn (1890) oripinally

described what he thought might be a variety and

he commenced the description with the following:

“bor(?) Minor” The latin word minor is unitalicised

and is vot a name, no name is given in the paper.

Carter (1929) listed minor Blackburn as a variety

name thus creating a nomen niidiuirn, 11 ty Wkely that

the species Bluckburn deserrbed asx aun unnamed

Variety of S. suata has been mistakenly identified

as S, euttdra, & species pot represented in any

Australian collection (har | have seen, It is described

herein as S. viridalinea Barker sp, nov, (Figs 17, 56).

S ignea Blackburn (holotype, S. Aust, BMINH) is

a Valid species Found in W.A., S, Aust. and View

Available male genitalia are figured (Figs |R, 15,

1T, WV, 2N).

Barker (1979) listed S, Awereralis Kerremans

(holotype. S-S.W., BMNH) as 4 synonym of &

virtoriensis Blackburn (halotype female, Ballarat,

BMNH). The (wo belong in the §. gibineatits

Saunders (hatotype male, Adelaide, AMNH) species:

yvroup. & vicroriensis las three fascia on the elytra

and oveurs in Vic. and southern N.S.W. (Pig, 6HY;

S sensitiva Kerremans (holotype; Aust., HMNH)

wis synonym. So Aumerelis has a lighter elyteal

pattern und oecursin northern NWSW. and southern

Did (Pig. 6G), Male genitalia differ (Pigs 2A, 2B,

20), | eonsider S. Auhendtis Kerremans (a be a Valid

species; S, liltvard? Carter (svatypes, N.SW,,

NMVA) is its synonym.

Burker (1979) followed Carter (1931, 1940) who

invorreetly synonyntised Sovhretverriy Saunders

(holotype mabe, Aust., BMAD) (bigs $C, 2M) with

5. fulviventris Macleay thatotype, Port Dentwon,

ANIC) (Figs 2), 710), The latter species forms a

nalural group with S$, jekelli Saunders (holotype

female, Adelaide, BMNH), S pallas Blackburn

(holotype male, Thurs. Is.) and & uthertonensis

Barker sp. nov. (Figs 2K, 7B). S. guriigers

Blackburn (syatype male, Vie NMVA) and

mackayana Carter (holotype male, Mackay, SAMA)

are its synonyms. 5. echreiveruris belongs in the 8.

Stramiiniea Macleay (holotype, Port Denison, ANIC)

species group, together with S placens Kerremans

{holotype male, Aust., BMNH), Their male geni-

talia are illustrated (Figs 2M, 2N, 20)..8. straminea

accurs i central and northern Qld and has ivary

elytra with either a post-medial spot on each elytron

and a 4rmall apical mark or no elytral markings. -

addenda Kerremans (holotype Aust., BMNH) and

S, joharinae Thery (holowpe male, Townsville, Qld,

MNHAQN) are ily synonyms, S. placens bas a dark

head and pronotum and pale yellow elytra with two

broud black taseia reavhing the margin and a black

apical mark (Fig, 568), lt oveurs in central coastal

NSW, S. ochréiveitirs isa variably marked species.

The head and pronolum are shining coppery anc

the elytra pale yellow with black markings varying

Irom two Facia und an apical mark. to four spobs

on the elytra and 4 remnany apical mark (Pig. 3C)-

fi oeeurs in (he Stanthorpe district, Qld and

northern NUSW, S. can Blackburn (holotype fale,

Darling Downs, Old, NNMLVA} ts its synonym,

Barker (1979) synonymised .S. pulee/ata Carter

(holotype gale, Lake Nineham, WA. ANIC) with

§, comeva Carter (syntypes, Kalgoorlie, W.A.,

NMVA). | have re-examined a series of specimens

in the SAMA callection and male genitalia (Figs

2¥V, 2W) and find that they represent two species,

Barker (1983, Fig. 3W) wrongly illustrated the

ecnitalia of 8. pufeolata.as S, convexu, 5, convex

has # closely punclured pronotum and {5 found at

Southern Cross and Kalgoorlie, WiA, § puleolala

has very coarsely punctured pronolum and occurs

further vorth and inland in W.A. und at Ooldea,

S. Aust.

Barker (1983) synonymised §, garrawillae Cartet

(holotype male. Mullaley, N.XW., nol Tocated) with

S svberata Blackburn (replacement name for §

cumpesiris Kercemans, homonym) (holotype, Aust,,

BMNH), The female allotype (Mullaley, N.SW.,

ANIC) has broken tips to che elytral apices sa that

it has Not been possible to confirm the presence of

spineless apives (Carter, 193]), | have now examined

topulype male and female specimens and agree that

the apices are spineless. S. subgrata has bispinose

clytral apices and gecurs in Sydney and the Blue

Mis. Beeause of colour and pattern differences, a

different disaibudow and differences in male

genitalia (Pigs 2R, 28) 1 cousider S. garmawi/iae to

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

V7 a1 he

; Limm]

v - WwW ' X

Fig. 3. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of the following Stigmtodera (Castiarina) species: A. S. malleeana Carter,

B, S. decemmuculata (Kirby), C. S. browningi sp. nov., D. S. pallidiventris C & G, E. S. tasmaniensis sp. nov.,

F. S. octospilota C & G, G, S. pearsoni sp. nov., H. S. octomaculata Saunders, |. S. cracenta sp. nov., J. 8. atricollis

Saunders, K. S. hilleri sp. nov., L. S. fusca sp. nov., M. S. warningensis sp. nov., N. S. turbulenta sp. nov., O.

S. dessarti sp. nov., P. 8S. septemguttata Waterhouse, Q. S. tyrrhena Blackburn, R. S, delectabilis Hope, S. 8. pulla

sp. noy., T. S. /ukini sp. nov., U. S. trifasciata C & G, V. S, coolsi sp. nov., W. S, browni Carter, X. S. discolorata

sp. noy., Y. S. cruentata (Kirby).

4 S. BARKER

be a valid species. fl belongs in the 3, dewinguende

Saunders species group,

The identivy of four members of the &. producta

Saunders (holotype fernale, BMNH) mimicry grotip

is conlused, Barker (1979) synonyniised 8, wera

Deuquet (holotype mule, Acacia Pliteau, N.S.W,,

AMSA) with & delicatula Kerremans (holotype

fenale, N.SW,, BMNH), Both of these are valid

species and are Lhe most offen seen in collections.

A third species was deseribed as & pseudasilica ty

Barker (1983, Fig. 62). Que of the paratypes

designated was the female paratype of 8. acura

Detiquet held in the RMBB collection, The

iNustration given by Deuquet (1956, Fig. i) as &

acuia Was autually of this specimen, and the type

of &. ucita, a separare species, was not ilusurated.

Barker (1983, Fi, 4A) figured S. wcura and wrongly

ealled |t S delicatula, S. spectabilis Kerremans

appenrs to be represented m collections by only

ihre specimens: the holowpe female, N.SW,,

BMNH; two lemiales collected hy Mr A, Hiller at

Mt Cilarlous, Old,

Sub-species elevated to specific rank

§. picia tnalleeuna Carter 1929 (Fig. SK) occurs

in mallee areas in Vie, and & Aust... 9 pice C&G

is a smaller species Which Occurs on the coastal

plains in W.A, St lias dark purple-Hliue head and

pronouumy in S. valleeane they are bright blue.

Both species belong in the S$. devenmruculara

(Kirby) species group, and alihough S. wialleeana

close to S$. decemmeculata male genitalia ure

different (Figs JA, 3B), | consider & malleeana ta

be a valid species. | have not been able to locate

types,

& subgrate discoflava Carter 1930 aecurs in the

Sraniherpe distinct, Gid, and the basal colour of

tbe elytra is red with brassy-green markings

(Tig. 51), whetcas S. svbgrata Blackburn oecurs in

Sydney and the Glue Mts aud the basal colour of

the elytra 6 red wirh blue markings. Male genitalia

ave differen (igs 2P, 2K} bt eonsider & diseoflava

Carter & valid species. Both of these species belong

in the S. dispivguende Saunders species group,

holotype and an allaiypeare located iq tic SAMA

collection

New syronpms in Stigiiedera (Castiarina)

S, tonide Kerremians S. australasiae C&C (see

jp. 2) 8 ulicede Barker = S, bivalor © & G (see

ph 2) 8 Autres Barker (Holotype male, Kalburri

Nulional Park, WAMA)«5. buco/ica Kereemans

1898 tholorype female, Australia, BMT). the

holorype of S&S. bueahra is @ badly faded ani

Uiscoloured specimen, difficult la recognise, The

species Geeurs in the Northampten aod Murehison

River districts, W.A,, on the flowers of

Threplomene sp, S. gelding Barker=§. daresi

Obenberger (see po 2h AX vhohauli Thery = S.

sancta Carter = 8. devrallei Thomson (see p. 4}.

S, clarki Carter (holotype male, Busselton, WAL,

NMVA)-S. eremila Blackburn (holotype Eucla,

W.A, , BMNH), This species belongs m the 4,

gibbicallis Saunders species group. The lateral

margins of the pronotum are pale vellow as 1s the

basal colour ot the elytra. {t hag been confused with

S rufa Barker sp. nov. named herein trom W.A.,

which has red lateral margins to the pronotum and

elytra with red basal color.

S. plgayn( Obenberger (holotype male, Yilgarn,

W.A., NMPC 23393)=S. fMaviceps Carter (syntype

male, Geraldton, WA, NMVA), Barker (1983)

synonymised this species with & pallidivenirts

C&G, Although the colour and elytral markings

of te two species are similar, differences in

s{rneture of male genitalia and external morphology

place them in different species groups, 5, /laviceps

Was bispinase elytra while 8. pallidivenrris has

wispinose elytra, 8, fuirmuire’ Kerremans=S.

holfmanseges Hope (see p, 4),

S. glecta Kerremans {holotype Australia,

BMNH}-S. dnconsptreuu Saunders (holotype

female, Aust.. BMNH), 5. electa was wrongly

svnonymised with S. /aena Thomson by Barker

(1979), The type of §. e/ecta |s a small specimen,

easily confused with the ollver species, % (aera

occurs in W,A, and is a member of the $. /levontere

(Boisduval) species group while 5. jreonspticua

occurs in NSW, and southern Qld and belongs in

its own species group. &. blackburni Carter 3, julie

Thomsdan dsee p. 4),

5, dewsorlersis Blackbur 1890 (holotype female

Dawson River, Old, BMNH)-S8. Jiliputane

Thomson (holotype male, New Holland, MINHM).

The holotype of 8, f/ipuiuny is a smaller specimen

and hag no pre-apical yellow spot on rhe elytra

whlch {6 all black from before the middle. The

holotvpe of S dowsenensisis a larger specimen and

has a large pre-apical yellow spet on each elytron.

It is possible that the size and pattern differences

are sex-liriked, S. alaesiris Barker-S, montigens

Oke (see p, 2). 8, cura Blackburn - & echreivenrris

Saunders {see p, 4),

§. wveipennis Barker (replacement name for &

aurifera Carter 1922, homonym: holotype female,

Kuranda, Qld, NMVA) ~ S& pallas Blackburn

{Wolotype male, Thursday ts, RMN). There are

few specimens of S. pal/as in Australian collections

and the holotype of S. aurifend had been confused

with an unidentified species also found in Qld. 5.

aurolimbaia Carter = & puella Saunders (see p. 2).

& transversepiets Thamson (holotype female

Swan River (sie), MNTIN) © & scalaris (Boisduyal)

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINAS 9

(holotype female, MNHN), There is a NSW,

specimen ofS. scaluris in ANIC identical to the

holarype of S. rransversepicta, Both have reduced

elytral pattern, The species has never been recardet|

‘reliably from W.A.

S. cardifer Kerremans (syntype male, W.A, (sic),

BMNH)-=S. thomson’ Saunders (bolorype female,

Aust, BMNE). The pattern on the elytra of the

holotype of S. cordifer is typical of specimens

collected in Tasmania attributable ta & /homsont,

S. fhomsont is a widespread species in eastern

Australia but does not oecur in W.A.

Species Descriptions

Stigmodera (Castiarina) rita sp. no,

PIGS 26, GA

| ap ace eremity (Barker, 1979: 17) nee Blaekburn

#90,

Holotype, 2, Tallering Sin, Pindar, W,A,,

27.1%, 1980, S, Barker & DJ, Willtatns, WAMA.

Allotype. 9 same data as holotype, WAMA,

Paratypes, W.A..9 oor, 10 9 @, Same data as

holotype. WAMA & SAMA; co, 2 9 @, Pindar,

Nov, 1957, B. Barker, SAMA; 3 oc, Murchison,

20.x11.1967, & AL Uiher Baker, WAMA; 9 Payne's

Find, 18ix.970, 8, Barker, SAMA; 2crcr, 1 &,

Youanmi, 5.ix,1971, FA. Uther Baker, WAMA; 9

ao, 3 99, Mary Springs, 8ix.1970, AL & E,

Curnaby, SAMA; 2 oo Ankertell, A. Ao Brown,

SAMA; 3 o o,f @, Pindar, 2 7/11.1x4.1976, 2B

MeMillan, WAMA; 2 oor, 3 9 G, Tallering Sin,

Pindar, 28.9.1980, 5. Barker D. 1 Milliants, WAMA

& SAMA; 1) 9, 17 km W Mullewa, 294%,1980, S.

Barker, DJ. Williams, SAMA. 1 2, 16 km E Mt

Magnet, 20.\x.1980, & Barker, DO J Willlams,

SAMA; | co, 2 29, 1-2 km SW Tamala TO,

Shark Bay, 23/°25,ix,1980, 8. Barker DJ, Willianis,

SAMA: 2 ocr, 3 © 9, Mary Springs, §.ix.1970_

K & E. Carnaby, RWSO;2 a c,1 9, Marloo Sin,

Wurarga, Goer/ing, RMBB, i co, | 9, Wurarga,

H, Brown, RMBB.

Colour, Vead, antennae, undersurface and legs

black with blue reflections, Scutellum dark blue,

Pronotum black with blue refleetions tn middle red

al Sides. Elytra red with following black markings:

basal margin; pre-medial fascta the ends expanded

anteriorly obliquely over humeral callus reaching

anterior margin, and posteriorly siquously reaching

lateral margin (in most specimens there js litle

posterior expansion) enclosing basal spot and one

on margin; broad post-medial tascia peachine

margin, extending anteriorly and posteriorly along

sinurey mark covering whole af apex Hairs silver.

Shape and seulpiure. Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae? segments

1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed, Pronotum closely

punctured, small basal fovea extending forwards to

middle as thin glabrous line, small basal notches

closer to margin (han 10 middle; projecting forwards

in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely

hisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded

OL (6 Widest part before middle, rounded to apex.

Sciutellum seutiform, withoul punctures, glabrous,

flar. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals canvex al sides

and apex, less so in middie, punctured; laterally

angled oul from base, rounded at humeral callus,

concave then rounded out after middle and

narrowed to bispinase apex; marginal spine sharp,

sulural spine minute, rounded and indented

between, apices barely diverging, apical margin sub-

serrate, Uncersurface with clase shallow punctures,

hairy, hairs long. S52 truncate in both sexes,

Size. Males, 108=+0.12*«3.9+004 mim (38)

Females, 11.6 + 0.15 44.3- 0,08 mm (31).

Male gentalia. (Pig. 2B) Curved in dorso-ventral

plane. Parameres gradually angled outwares from

hasal piece, rounded off and tapered to apices,

Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away.

Apophysis of basal piece wide. Aedaegus in §-

gibbicollis (Fig. 2C) 1s larger. Parameres broader at

basal piece and not angled as far apart towards

apex, wfadually rounded then abruptly, clase Lo

apex, Median Jobe poimted, sides acutely angled

uway. Apophysis of basal picve wide.

Distribution. W.Ac Murchison District, Goldfields,

Shark Bay, Mullewa District,

Remarks. Adult specimens are commonly roupd

associaled with Eremophila sp. Member of the §.

gibbicollis Saunders species eroup, This species has

been misidentified as S, eremma Blackburn in

Australian collections, ag it has been unrecognised

that S$, elarki Carler is a synonym of S. eremila

Blackburn, S. rufa can be readily distinguished from

3, eremita (Fig. 6F) which has yellow elvira and

yellow lateral markings on the pronatum, arid &

evrensis Barker sp now. (Pig. 6B) which has vellow

to orange elytra atid lateral markings on the

prenotum. In S. rufa the red colour of the

pronatum anqd elytra tades tn ald specimens. The

specific name is derived fram rufs L, red,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) ey resis sp. poy.

FIGS 2F, 6B

Holotype, 2, | km W tron Knob S$. Aust.

28.16.1982. 8. Barker, J Gurdner, H. Vanderwaude,

SAMA | 21158.

Allobype. 2, same dala as holowpe. SAMA T 21159,

10 S. BARKER

Paratypes 8. Aust.: 7 oo, 9 9 9, same data as

holotype SAMA; 1 o@, 4 9 9°, 7 km E Kimba,

14.x,1982, S. Barker, P Kempster, H. Vanderwoude,

SAMA.

Colour. Head blue. Antennae: segments 1-3 green-

bronze; 4-11 bronze. Pronotum dark blue in middle,

yellow to orange at sides. Scutellum dark blue.

Elytra yellow to orange with following dark blue

markings; narrow basal margin; short pre-medial

fascia not reaching margin, ends expanded

anteriorly meeting basal margin and enclosing basal

spot on each elytron; post-medial fascia expanded

anteriorly on suture and connected along suture to

pre-medial fascia; mark covering apex and

connected along suture to post-medial fascia.

Undersurface blue. Legs: femora blue; tibia and

tarsomeres bronze-green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: segments

I-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely

punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to

middle as glabrous line, apical margin projecting

in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally

rounded from base to apex, widest before middle.

Scutellum scutiform, without punctures, glabrous,

flat, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals

convex, less so in middle, punctured and wrinkled;

laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral

callus, concave, rounded after middle, narrowed to

bispinose apex; sharp marginal spine, minute sutural

spine, margin rounded and indented between spines,

apices hardly diverging, apical margin subserrate.

Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of

abdominal segments glabrous; moderately hairy,

hairs medium length. S;: truncate in male;

rounded in female.

Size. Males, 12.0 + 0.19 4.4 + 0.08 mm (9). Females,

13.8 + 0.19x5.2+ 0.08 mm (14).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 2F). Curved in dorso-ventral

plane. Parameres gradually angled outwards from

basal piece to widest part after middle, abruptly

rounded to apices. Median lobe pointed, sides

obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece

medium width.

Distribution: S. Aust.: Upper Eyre Peninsula.

Remarks. This species belongs in the S. gibbicollis

Saunders species group. It most resembles S. rufa

Barker sp. nov., but has yellow to orange not red

markings on the pronotum and elytra, is a larger

species, and is associated with Acacia papyrophylla

not Eremophila species. The specific name is

derived from the type locality Eyre Peninsula.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) stellata sp. nov.

FIGS 2G, 6E

Holotype. &, Parmango’s Rd, 18 km S Deralinya

ruin, Balladonia, W.A., 22.x.1982, S. Barker, P. G.

Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, WAMA.

Allotype. 9, 92 km S of Balladonia, W.A.,

9.xii.1974, S. Barker, SAMA I 21160.

Paratypes. W.A.: 1 9, 8 km E_ Yellowdine,

13.xi.1980, 77 M.S. Hanlon, MPWA;1 9, Johnston

Lake, 8.xi.1981, M. Powell, MPWA; 4 a0, 1 9,

§ km S Lake Cronin, 8.xi.1981, S. Wilson, D.

Knowles, M. Powell, MPWA; 1 9, 28 km N

Ravensthorpe, 15.xi.1981, 7) M. S. Hanlon, MPWA;

1 o, Parmango’s Rd, 20 km SW Deralinya ruin,

20.xi.1982, S. Barker, P G. Kempster, H.

Vanderwoude, SAMA; 2 oc’, 17 km N Dempster’s

Rd, Scadden Rd crossing, 18.x.1982, S. Barker, P. G.

Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA; 1 o, 35 km

W Salmon Gums, 8.x.1983, G. Browning, G. Mutze,

SAMA; 1 9, 5 km SW Lake Cronin, 24.xi.1977,

K. T. Richards, WADA; 1 o, 3 9 9, 80 km E

Hyden, 24.xi.1977, K. T. Richards, WADA; 1 9,

Boyatup, 13.x.83, WADA,

Colour. Head, antennae, scutellum, undersurface

and legs bronze. Pronotum bronze in middle, yellow

at sides. Elytra yellow with following black

markings with blue reflections: basal margin; broad

premedial fascia reaching lateral margin, expanded

forwards from anterior edge over humeral callus

and meeting basal margin, enclosing large basal

spot and small spot on lateral margin; broad post-

medial fascia reaching margin, convex forwards;

pre-apical mark covering apex and spines, enclosing

yellow pre-apical spot on each elytron in most

specimens, absent in a few; all marks connected

down suture. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head with close punctures,

shallow median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae:

segments 1-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum with

close punctures, small basal fovea extending forward

to middle as thin glabrous line, basal notches

represented by glabrous areas closer to margin than

middle; projecting forward slightly in middle of

apical margin, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest

part before middle, rounded to apex. Scutellum

scutiform, without punctures, glabrous, excavate

along mid-line. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals

convex and punctured, less so in middle; laterally

angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus,

concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to

bispinose apex; marginal spine medium sized but

blunt, sutural spine minute, rounded and indented

between, apical margin sub-serrate. Undersurface

with close shallow punctures, except edges of

IAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTTARINA) {1

abdominal segments which aré glabrous, densely

hairy, hairs medium-length, Sy: truneate in inale:

indented in middle in female.

Size. Males, 124+0.3324,540.16 mm (1),

Females, 13.7 + 0.20+5.2 4 0.10 mm (10).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 2G) Curved in dorso-veriral

plane. Parameres angled outwards [rom basal piece,

parallel-sided from before middle; rounded off and

tapered (o apices, Median lebe pointed, sides angled

away. Apopbysis of basal piece wide, slightly

clongate. Parameres in S. erentita Blackburn

(Fig, 2D) atigled outwards from basal picee,

rounded before middle, narrowed and paraltel-

sided, rounded off ta apices. Median lobe pointed,

sides acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal piece

narrow ald tapered to apices,

Remarks, Member of §. gihbicollts Saunders species

group. Closest to S. evernita but male genitalia

differ, is a larger species than 5, erentila, S, stellaja

is slightly cylindrical jn shape while S. eremvifa is

more dorso-ventrally thatiened. 5. s7éllata Occurs 1

the Goldfields and Esperance districts W,A,, §,

eremila in the Murchison distnel W,A. The adults

of 8. stellata are found on the Mowers of Melaleuca

sp. The specific name is derived from s/e//atus L-

starred,

Stigmoedera (Custiariaa) incognita sp. roy.

FIGS 2H, 6D

Holotype. a, 83 kin E Lake King, W.A., 24.x.1983,

M. Powell, WAMA,

Allatype Q, same data as holotype, WAMA.

Puratypes. 1 9, same data as holotype. MPWA; I

a, Yellowdioe, 13.41.1977, M, Powell, SAMA,

Colour Head, antennae, scutellum, undersurface

und Jegs coppery-bronzve. Pronolum coppery bronze

in middle, red at sides, Elytra yellow with red

margins and following markings: bronze narrow

basal margin, the following black with blue

reflections; pre-medial fascia reaghing margin

expanded anteriorly reaching basal margin,

enclosing yellow basal spols on each elytran and

clongate red spal on the margin; broad post-medial

fascia reaching murgin; pre-apical spade-shaped

mark, all marks connected down suture. Hairs

silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head closely puncturect,

shallow median suleus, shert muzzle. Antennae

compressed: segments 1-3 obconic; S-1L toothed.

Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending

forwards to middle as glabrous line, basal norehes

represented by glabrous area an each side closer fo

margin (han middle; apical margin projecting in

middle, basal margin bisinuate; laterally purallel-

sided at base, rounded ta widest part before middle,

rounded and narrowed to apex; overall slightly

bulbous, Scutellum scutiform, glabrous, Mat. Elytra

punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured and

wrinkled: literally angled out [rom base, rounded

at husneral callus, concave, rounded after middle,

tapered then strongly rounded to bispiriose apex:

both spines minute and blunt, margin rounded and

indented between spines, apices hardly diverging,

apical margin subservate. Undersurface, with

shallow punctures, edges of abdaminal segments

glabrous, densely hairy, Waus medium length. S.:

inale truncare; female truncate and slightly indented

in middle,

Size. Males, 13,.1*3.) mm (2). Females, 15.8

6.0 mm (2),

Male genitalia. (Fig, 2H). Curved in dorso-ventral

plane, Parameres angled outwards from basal piece,

raunded after middle, parallel-sided then rounded

and tapered (o apices. Median lobe pointed, sides

angled away, Apophysis of basal piece mediuin

width. ln §. rufallmbate Carter (Fig, 21) parameres

are unvled outwards from basal piece, rounded al

middle, parallei-sided, rounded oulwards and

narrowed 1o upices. Median lobe pointed, sides

acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal picee

thedium width, slightly widened at apex,

Disrrihution, W.A. Great Southern district

Remarks. Member of the 8, gibbicollis Saunders

Species group on basis of colour, pattern, oiale

genitalia and external morphology. Most resembles

8. rifolimbata (Pig, 6C) but the pranotum is bronze

inthe middle and distinctly bulbous, whereas. in S-

rufolimbaia the pronotum is blue in the middle and

rounded. The specific name is derived fram

incognitus L, unknown.

Stigmodera (Custinring) ungata sp. nov.

PIGS 27, 6k

Holotype: &, Kiata, Vie, Dee. 1967, Kh. Hateley,

SAMA I 21161,

Allatype. 9, same data as holotype, SAMA T 21162.

Parawvpes. Viet 1 9, 14 km S Murrayville,

3),.4,1982, A & DB Gardner, SAMA; 1 9 Sea Lake,

Nov.1916, G. Gandie, NMVA, 1 @ Salisbury,

6-xi1.1958, & Jenz, NM VA.

Colowr. Head, aniennac, pronotum, undersurface

and legs bronze with coppery reflections. Scutellum

black. Elytra vellow with red margins and following

black markings, basal murgin: pre-medial fascia

represented by elongate mark On suture, sinuous

mark running over humeral cullus and around to

lateral margin; post-medigl faseia reaching margin;

pre-apical anchor-shaped mark, the last two

connected down suture. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, eyes

bulbous, shallow median sulcus, muzzle short.

Antennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed.

Pronotum closely punctured, punctures larger at

sides than in middle, small basal fovea extending

to middle as glabrous line, basal notches closer to

margin than middle; projecting forwards slightly in

middle of apical margin, basal margin virtually

straight; laterally angled inwards from base,

rounded to widest part before middle, rounded and

narrowed to apex. Scutellum cordiform, glabrous,

excayate in middle. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals

punctured, convex at apex and sides almost flat in

middle; laterally angled outwards from base

rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after

middle and tapered to bispinose apex; marginal

spine small and blunt, sutural spine slightly larger

and sharper, rounded between, apices diverging,

Undersurface with close shallow punctures, edges

of abdominal segments glabrous, dense long hair.

57: truncate in male; narrowly truncate in female.

Size. Male, 12.4x15.1 mm (1). Females, 13.6x

5.5 mm (4).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 2T). Parameres parallel-sided

from basal piece, angled outwards before middle,

gradually rounded and narrowed to apices. Median

lobe blunt, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece medium width. Aedaegus in S,

simulata C & G (Fig. 2U) larger. Parameres

gradually angled outwards from basal piece,

gradually rounded and narrowed to apices. Median

lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece wide.

Distribution. Vic: Big and Little Desert.

Remarks. Belongs in the S, simulata species groups.

Distinguished by the prominent anchor-shaped

mark at the apex of the elytra and male genitalia.

The specific name is derived from uncatus L.

hooked.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) kempsteri sp. nov.

FIGS 2Y, 7A

Holotype. @, 7 km E Norseman, W.A,, on

Eremophila ionantha, 17.x.1982, PR G. Kempster,

WAMA.

Allotype. 9, same data as holotype, WAMA.

Paratypes. W.A,: 5 oo, 25 km SW Deralinya ruins,

Balladonia district, 20,.x.1982, S. Barker, P G.

Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, WAMA & SAMA; 5

aoa,2 99, 18km SW Deralinya ruins, 22.x.1982,

S. Barker, P. G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude,

WAMA & SAMA.

2 S. BARKER

Colour. Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum,

undersurface and legs bronze. Elytra pale yellow

with following black markings: narrow basal

margin; pre-medial fascia, expanded anteriorly over

humeral callus from anterior end and posteriorly

to margin from posterior end; post-medial fascia

reaching margin, projecting forwards slightly past

middle of anterior edge and backwards slightly past

middle of posterior edge, expanded anteriorly and

posteriorly on suture; pre-apical spade-shaped mark

covering tip of apex, all marks connected down

suture. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle very short. Antennae:

segments 1-3 obconic; 4 -11 toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, very small basal fovea extending

forwards to middle as impressed line; projecting

forwards slightly in middle of apical margin, basal

margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base

to apex, widest before middle. Scutellum scutiform,

without punctures, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals flat in middle, elsewhere convex, with deep

punctures; laterally angled out from base, rounded

at humeral callus, concave then rounded after

middle to spineless apex; apex narrowly truncate

or very slightly rounded, apices diverging.

Undersurface shallowly punctured, very hairy, hairs

moderately long. S5: truncate in both sexes.

Size. Males, 11.5 40.32x4,.4+4 0.12

Females, 12.0x4.5 mm (3),

Male genitalia. (Fig. 2Y). Parameres parallel-sided

from basal piece, rounded outwards to widest part

after middle, parallel-sided, abruptly rounded near

apex. Median lobe with blunt point, sides obtusely

angled away. Basal piece of apophysis medium

width, Aedaegus of S. turneri Barker (Fig. 2X) is

of same proportion but larger. Median lobe with

blunt point, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece wide.

Distribution. W.A.: Balladonia and Norseman

Districts.

Remarks. Adults are associated with Eremophila

sp. Member of the S. convexa Carter species group,

closest to S. turneri Barker. Similar in colour and

markings to S. sagittaria C & G which belongs in

its Own species group. S. kempsteri is distinguished

from that species by its bispinose elytra; S. sagittaria

has trispinose elytra. Named after Mr P. G.

Kempster, Adelaide.

(11).

Stigmodera (Castiarina) athertonensis sp. nov.

FIGS 2K, 7B

Holotype. o, Mt Carbine, Qld, 9.i.1981, S. Barker,

SAMA IT 21163.

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 13

Allaiype 9, Davies Creek State Forest, Qld,

41,1981, 5, Barker, SAMA 1 21164.

Paraiypes. Qlds 1 cr. Talga, 21.<11.1977, NV, Gough,

DPIQ: 1 9, Mc Carbine, LLiid978, A, h Storey,

DPIO: 1 &, Kuranda, 28.41.1973, 4. & M, Walford-

Huggins, AWHQ.

Colour, Head purple with green muzzle. Antennae

green with yellow reMections, Pronotum purple.

Scutellum coppery. Elytra yellow with following

dark blue markings: narrow basal margin with

green reflections; spot over each humeral callus.

remnant of pre-medial fascia with purple

reflections; post-medial lascta reaching margin with

purple reflections; mark covering apex with purple

reflections, all marks connected down suture,

Undersurface; sternum purple; abdomen testaceous

wilh green or purple reflections. Legs: femora green

ventral surfave, blue-green dorsal surface; tibia and

tarsomeres blue-green, Hairs silver.

Shupe and scu/pture. Head closely punevured, broad

median sulcus, medium muzzle, Antennae:

segments I-3 obeanie; 4-l! toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards

to middle as glabrous line, basal notches closer ta

margin than middie; apical margin projecting in

middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally

parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest part before

middle. rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum

stutiform, punctured, flat. Elyira punctate-striate,

intervals heavily punetured: laterally anvled out

from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave,

rounded aller middle, rounded und narrowed Jo

bispmose upex: both spines small, margin rounded

and indented between spines, apices diverging,

apical margin Subserrate. Undeérsurface with shallaw

punctures, moderatey fairy, hairs shorr on

abdomen, medium length on sternum. S.: truncate

in both sexes.

Size. Males, 15.6+6,2 mm (2), Females, 16.9 -

6.7 mm (3).

Male zenitalia, (Vig, 2K). Heavily chitinised as are

other members of §, jekell’ Saunders species vroup.

Parameres. parallel-sided at basal piece, rounded

outwards, widest after middle, gradually rounded

to apex, Median lobe wlth sharp point, sides anuled

away, then drop more or less vertically. Apaphysis

of basal piece short and wide, Aedaewus in S. fekelli

(Vig, 20) larger Parameres parallel-sided at basal

Piece, rounded ourwards after middle, then parallel-

sided and rounded off abruptly, tapered Lo ypices.

Median lobe and apophysis of basal picce Similat

to those in S, arhertanersis.

Distribttian. Qld: Atherton Tableland,

Remarks, Member of the S. jekell/ species vroup.

Distinguished [rom other meaibers of the group by

the purple bead and pronotum. A larger species

than §. fu/eiventris Macleay (Fig. 7C) which oceurs

iti southern Queensland, NSW, and Vie. 5. jekell?

oecursin S. Aust. and S redriventris Blackburn in

W.A. The specific name is derived from the type

lovality.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) melrasensis sp. nov.

PIGS IC, 5H

ffoloivpe. o, Mt Remarkable N.B, Melrose, 8.

Ausr., 6.1.1980, 8. Barker, SAMA 1 21168,

Allotype. 2, sama data as holotype, SAMA} 21166.

Paratypes. S. Austs 19 crc, 4 OO. samy duta as

holotype, SAMA: 17 oc, 12 © 9, Mt Romarkable

N.P., Melrose, 30.41.1968, S. Borker, SAMA,

Colour Head, antennac, pranotum, seutellum,

undersurface and legs green with gold reflections,

Elytra pale yellow with following variable markings:

narrow green basal margin; dark blue mark covering:

humeral callus, reaching apical and laters! margins;

triangular blue pre-medial mark on eachi side of

suture; post-medial blue fascia, convex antertarly

and posteriorly and ejiher reaching margin, nat

touching margin, represented by a inedial spot on

each elytron or entirely absent; pre-apical blue mark

which may be reduced of absent; green mark down

suture covering apical spines. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punceured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae segments:

1-3 obconic, 4-1) toothed. Pronotum closely

pufictured, small basal fovea extending to apical

margin as medjum impressed lie, basal notches

closer fo margin than middle: apical margin

straizht, basal bisinuate: laterally parallel-sided at

base, rounded to apex, widest at middle, Scutellum

scutifarm, punctured, excavate. Elyira punctate

striate, all intervals conyex, punchured und wrinkled:

laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral

callus, convave then rounded after middle, rounded

and narrowed ta bispinase apex; marginal spine

large, Sulural minule, margin rounded and indented

between, apives slightly diverging. Undersurface

elosely punctured, moderately hairy, hairs slrort,

Ss: truncare in both sexes.

Size. Males, 7.3 +01! + 2.6 0.03 mim (37). Femules,

77201128 +004 mm U7).

Mole genitalia. (Fig, 1). Parameres parallel-sided

frorn basal piece until after middle, rounded our no

Widest part, rounded and narrowed to apex, Median

lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece medium width. Parameres of S.

Ailaris Hope (Fig, 1A) are broader at basal piece,

sides slightly angled outwards then rounded ou jo

widest part after middle, rounded and tapered to

apices: Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled

away, Apophysis of basal piece medium width

14 TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

0 5

Fig. 4. A. Stigmodera haroldi Saunders, B. S. turbulenta sp. nov., C. S. eborica Carter, D. S. moribunda Saunders,

E. S. julia Thomson, F. S. warningensis sp. nov., G. S. alternozona Thomson, H. S. cupricollis Saunders, I. S.

terraereginae Blackburn, J. S. deyrollei Thomson.

S. BARKER 15

Fig. 5. A. Stigmodera bimaculata Saunders, B. S. placens Kerremans, C. S. ochreiventris Saunders, D. S. guttata

Blackburn, E. S. viridolinea sp. nov., F. S. burnsi sp. nov., G. S. capensis sp. noy., H. S. melrosensis sp. nov., I.

S. discoflava Carter, J. S. blackdownensis sp. nov., K. S. malleeana Carter, L. S. browningi sp. nov.

16 8, BARKER

Distribution: & Aust. Mt Remarkable.

Remarks. A\l specimens Were collected on the

Flowers a! Burseria spinosa, Member of 8. hilaris

Species group. Superficially resembles S, sexgulteta

Macleay, but male genitalia differ from that spectes

(Fig. 16) which belongs in its own species aroup.

The specific name ss derived roy the type locality

Melrose.

Stigmaderm (Castigcinu) capensis sp. nev.

FIGS 1D, 5G

S. avrolimbute (Barker 1983 Kin, 2W) gee Carter 1922,

Halotvpe. a, Cape York, Qld, SAMA #21147.

Allotype 2, Cape York, Qld, SAMA | 21568,

Paratype. |, Cape York, Old, SAMA.

Colour Head, antenriag, pronotum, scutellum,

undersurface and legs green with yellow reflections.

Elytra yellow with follawing markings: black with

green reflections on narrow basal margin and along

suture, oblique broad black vita over each humeral

callus; broad posi-medial black fascia reaching

margin; black apical mark, all marks broadly

connecred down suture. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad

median sulcus, shart muzzle. Antennae cornpressed,

seuments: 1-3 obconic: 4-1! toothed. Pronotun

closely punctured, narrow basal fovea extending

forwards to apical margin as glabrous line, bisal

notches represented by small glabrous ares on each

side closer to margin than middle; apical margin

straight, basal margin bisinuates laterally parallel-

sided at hase, rounded to widest part before middle,

rounded and nurrowed to apex. Scurellum seati-

form, punctured, flat, Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals convex, punctured and wrinkled; laterally

angled out from base, rounded al humeral callus,

concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to

hispinuse apex; inarginal spine broad bur sharp,

miinuic sutural spine, margin rounded and indented

between spines, apices diverging. Undersurface

shallow punctures, sparse short hairs. S>: crunvate

in bath sexes,

Size. Males, 7-2 «2.6 mm (2). Female, 6.4.2.5 mm (1),

Male genitalia, (Fig, 1D). Parameres slightly angled

cauiwands from basal piece, rounded after middle

to Widest part, capered, poinied at apices. Median

lobe puinred, sharp, sides acutely angled away,

Apophysis of basal piece broad, In S. goodingi

Barker (Fig. JF) dimensons of gedaegus similar.

but apices of parameters mare pointed and centre

of median lobe less so, Apophysis af hasal piece

mare tapered.

Distribution, Qld: Cape York -

Remarks, Member of the S. sexguttalu Macleay

(Fig. 1B) species group. Superficially resembles a

stnal) specimen of S. sexp/agiara Gory, However

mule gennaha are not wedge-shaped as in 5,

sexplagiata species group, The specific nanie is

derived from cap L. Cape, referring To the type

locality Cape York,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) browmingi sp. wo.

FIGs 3¢, 51,

Holotype, & 59 km 3 Balladonia, W.A., on

Eremophila dempsteri, 3.x,1983, G, Browning, G.

Mutze, WAMA.

Alletype. 9, same data as holotype, WAMA.

Paraiypes, WAL IS oo, 2 9 9, same data as

holorype, WAMA & SAMA,

Colour Head bronze with yellow frontal spor.

Antennae blue-green, Pronotum bronze with blue

reflections, yellow at sides. Scutellum dark blue,

Elytra pale yellow with following dark blue

markings: narrow basal margin; broad pre-medial

fascia, both ends expanded anteriorly over humeral

callus meeting basal margin, enclosing yellow basal

spot and elongate yellow mark on margin; broad

post-medial fascia reaching margin: apical mark

enclosing pre-apical yellaw spot io most specimens,

Undersurface pale yellow with dark blue markings

over sutures and at edges of abdominal segments

and lateral marks on each side of Sy, Ss and So.

Legs dark blue. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head closely and shallowly

punctured, no median sulcus, very short muzzle,

eyes bulbous, Anlennac compressed, segments: |-4

obvonic; 5-11 toothed. Pronotum closely and

shallowly punctured, minute basal fovea, basal

notches on cach side claser 1o margin than middle;

apical margin slightly projecting in middle, basal

margin almost straight; rounded tron base, widest

before iniddle, rounded and narrowed to apex.

Seutellum seutiform, elabrous and flat, Elytra

pusnctate-striute. intervals canyex, punctured and

wrinkled: laterally angled our from base, rounded

at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle

and narrowed fo trispiniose apex; small marginal

sping, larger middle spine, small sutural spine,

margin rounded between spines, apives diverging.

Undersurface shallow punctures, edges ol

abdorninal segments glabrous, short sparse hairs.

Ss: lruncate in both sexes.

Size. Males, 8.9 2 U.11 3.2 + 0.05 mm U6), Females,

9.0.3.3 mm (3).

Male genitalia, (Fig. MC), Pacameres slightly angled

outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle

ro widest part after middle, gradually rounded and

narrowed to apices, Median lobe pointed, sides

acutely angled away: Apophysis of basal piece

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODER.) (CASTLARINA)

narrowed to apex, Parameres in S. pallidiventris

C&G (fig. 3D) shebtly angled outwards from

basal piece, rounded before middle to widest part

alter middle, slightly narrowed, abruptly rounded

to apex. Median lobe pointed, sides vradually

angled away, Apophysis af basal plece narrowed to

apex.

Distribution, WA. Balladonia district,

Remarks, Belongs in the 8, decermaculara (Kirby)

Species group of which il is the smaliest. Most

resembles §. pellidiveniris but bas no red markings

on the pronotum, elytra or uridersurface as in that

species, Specimens were collected an the flowers of

Eremaphila denipsieri, Named after Mr G,

Browning, Adelaide.

Stipmodera (Castisrina) taamanionsis sp. nov,

FIGS 36, 7

Halorype. o, Bruny Is, Tas., 3bxhJ981, GF

Bornemissza, SAMA | 21169.

Allaiype. 2. Entrance Mt Field §.P., Tas, 26.1.1983.

JM. dS. Barker, HL vanderwande, SAMA 1 21170.

Paratypes, Vasc 2 G 9, Lake Leake, 1HiL1974, OC.

Hocking, SAMA; 1 2, Waterhouse, 44,1982, G.

Bornemissza, SAMA, | 2, Hobart, Lea, SAMA;

40, Bruny LL, 3.1984, G. A Bornermisscu,

SAMA; |G, Geeveston, 2461984, GG. Burns

GBVA, 1 o,1 &, Zeehban, 21.1984, G. G. Burns;

GBVA; | or, National Park, 21.7 (985, G. G. Burns,

GBVA.

Colour. Head and antennae blue or blue-green with

a prominent yellow frontal spot, Pronotum black

with blue-green reflecuions in middle, yellow at

sides. Scutellum blue-green. Elytoa yellow wib

following dark blue markings: narrow basal margin,

broad pre-media! fascia; broad post-medial fascia;

pre-apical mark covering apex, all marks coalesced

along margin to form § yellaw marks on each

elytron, consisting of a basal spot, elongate mark

an the margin at humeral callus, elongate medial

mark, narrow fascia after middle, small pre-apical

spot. Undersurface yellow with dark blue markings

an margin and sutures. Legs dark blue, Hairs silver.

Shape and scwlpture. Head with shallow punctures,

shallow median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae:

segments 1-4 obconic, S-11 toothed. Pronatum wilh

shallow punctures, basal fovea extending to middle

as glabrous line, basal notches closer 1o margin than

middle; projecting forwards broadly in middle of

apival margin, basal margin almost straight;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded hefore

middle and narrowed to apex. Scitellum seutiform,

without punetiires, excavare. Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals convex With puncusres; laterally angled out

imi

from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave

rounded after middle to trispitiose apex; margivial

spine small and blunt angled outwards to che Jarge

and blunt middle spine, shghtly indented fo minute,

blunt sutural spine Undersurface with shallow

punctures, moderately hairy, hairs moderately long,

57: truncate in male; indented in iniddle and with

a distinet lip in female.

Size, Males, 12.7 + 0,233.0 > 0.08 mnt (7). Females,

14.7 4 0.36 © 5.7 40.12 mm (7).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 3B). Parameres angled

outwards Irom basal piece, rounded before middle,

parallel-sided and pounded abruptly then tapered

to apex, Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled

away al first then sinuously at greater angle.

Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Parameres

in. actaspilota (Fig. 3P) slightly angled outwards

from basal piece, rounded before middle, parallel

sided then abruptly rounded and lapered to apices.

Median lobe pointed bur blunr, sides angled away.

Apophysis of basal piece medium width,

Distribution. Tasmania.

Remarks. Member of the S acrospilom C & G

species group. Only representative oecutring itt

Tasmania. The elytral pattern is darker than in S.

avrospilota. The specific name has been derived

from the area of occurrence, Tasmania,

Sttgmodera (Castiarina) pearsoni sp. av.

FIGS 34, 61

Hololype. o, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, Nov,J982,

S. Pearson, QMBA,

Allowwpe. 9, same data as holotype, QMBA.

Paratypes, Qld. 2 oom, same data as holorype,

OMBA, 3 co, | O, Blackdown Tableland,

6.x,|973, EE Adams, SAMA & EAQA; | o, 1

®, Blackdown Tableland, & & Adams, SAMA &

EAQA,

Colour, Head dark blue, bronze-preen at base.

Antennae bronze-green. Pranotum dark blue in

middle, bronze-green at anterior ntargin, light blue

or bronze-green at angles. Scurellurn and under-

surface dark blue. Elytra red-brown with narrow

dark blue basal margin. Legs blue. Hairs silver.

Shape und sculpture, Head closety punctured, broad

median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments

1-3 obeonic; 4-1) toothed. Pronotum closely

punctured, small basal fovea extending forwards to

middle as glabrous impressed line, apical margin

projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded before

middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum

scutiform, punctured, flat. Elytra costate, scutellary,

Ist, 3rd and Sth intervals raised, intervals between

18 TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

Fig. 6. A. Stigmodera rufa sp. nov., B. S. eyrensis sp. nov., C. S. rufolimbata Carter, D. S. incognita sp. nov., E.

S. stellata sp. nov., F. S. eremita Blackburn, G. S. humeralis Kerremans, H. S. victoriensis Blackburn, I. S. pearsoni

sp. nov., J. S. hilleri sp. nov., K. S. uncata sp. nov., L. S. cracenta sp. nov.

S. BARKER 19

Fig. 7. A. Stigmodera kempsteri sp. nov., B. S. athertonensis sp. nov., C. S. fulviventris Macleay, D. S. discolorata

sp. nov., E. S. delectabilis Hope, F. S. dessarti sp. nov., G. S. tyrrhena Blackburn, H. S. pulla sp. nov., |. S. fusca

sp. nov., J. S. tasmaniensis sp. nov., K. S. lukini sp. nov., L. S. coolsi sp. nov.

20 5S. BARKER

flat, punctured and rough; laterally parallel-sided

at base, slightly angled outwards, rounded at

humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and

narrowed to bispinose apex; both spines minute,

margin rounded and indented between spines;

apices hardly diverging, apical margin subserrate.

Undersurface shallow punctures, edges of abdomi-

nal segments glabrous, sparse short hairs. S3:

truncate in male; rounded in female.

Size. Males, 9.9 + 0.30.x 3.84 + 0.10 mm (7). Females,

1.34.3 mm (3).

Male genitalia, (Fig. 3G). Parameres slightly angled

outwards from basal piece then angled further

outwards before middle, rounded then angled

further outwards until widest part, abruptly

rounded and tapered to apices. Median lobe

pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of

basal piece narrow. Aedaegus of S. octomaculata

(Fig. 3H) larger but has same proportions except

that apophysis of basal piece is wider.

Distribution. Qld: Blackdown Tableland,

Expedition Range.

Remarks. The adults have been collected on the

flowers of Leptospermum sp. Member of the S.

octomaculata Saunders species group. It is the only

lycid mimicking species known from this group.

Named after Mr S. Pearson, Ranger, Blackdown

National Park.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) blackdownensis sp. nov.

FIGS 2Q, 5J

Holotype. &, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, 6.x.1973,

E. E. Adams, ANIC.

Allotype. 9, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, Nov.1982,

S. Pearson, QMBA.

Paratypes. Qld: 4 o@, 7 99, same data as

holotype, EAQA, ANIC, AWHQ, SAMA; 3 oo’,

1 9, Blackdown Tableland, 23.ix.1973, E. &.

Adams, EAQA, AWHQ; 7 oc, 3 9 9, Upper

Stoney Creek, Blackdown Tableland, 9.xi.1981, S.

Barker, P- Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA; 5

oo, 4 99, same data as allotype, QMBA.

Colour. Head, antennae, scutellum either green with

gold reflections, blue-green or blue. Pronotum

either green with gold reflections, blue-green or blue

in the middle, brown lateral margin. Elytra brown

with the following green marks: narrow basal

margin; elongate spot over each humeral callus, spot

on suture in between; post-medial fascia projecting

anteriorly in middle on each side and anteriorly and

posteriorly on suture; preapical spade-shaped mark,

all marks connected down suture. Undersurface

blue-green. Legs: femora blue-green; tibia and tarsi

green with gold reflections. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

muzzle short. Antennae segments: 1-3 obconic; 4-11

toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, small basal

fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line;

projecting anteriorly in middle of anterior margin,

basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded

from base, widest before middle rounded and

narrowed to apex, lateral margin dorso-ventrally

compressed at base, with a large shallow fovea at

each basal angle. Scutellum scutiform, flat,

glabrous. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex,

slightly punctured in middle, heavily at sides;

laterally angled outwards from base, rounded at

humeral callus, concave, then rounded after middle

and narrowed to bispinose apex; marginal spine

small, sutural spine minute, margin rounded and

indented between, apices diverging, apical margin

subserrate. Undersurface shallowly punctured,

moderately hairy, hairs short. S,: broadly rounded

in male; narrowly rounded in female.

Size. Males, 10.2 +0.21x4.0+0.08 mm _ (20.)

Females, 11.2 + 0.18x4.4+0.06 mm (16).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 2Q). Parameres slightly angled

inwards from basal piece then rounded and angled

outwards, abruptly rounded at apices. Median lobe

bluntly pointed in middle, sides acutely angled away.

Apophysis of basal piece narrow,

Distribution. Qld: Blackdown Tableland,

Expedition Range.

Remarks. Belongs in S. distinguenda Saunders

species group. The elytral pattern most resembles

S. garrawillae Carter but is a different colour, the

elytra are bispinose whereas spines are absent in S.

garrawillae and male genitalia are different

(Fig. 2S). The specimens were collected on the

flowers of Baeckea sp. The tableland area where this

species and the previous one were collected is a

vegetational island, with endemic plant and insect

species. The name is derived from the type locality.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) cracenta sp. nov.

FIGS 3], 6L

Stigmodera atricollis (Barker, 1983; Fig. IF) nec

Saunders 1869.

Holotype. o, Tallering Stn, Pindar, W.A.,

27.1x.1980, S. Barker, D, J. Williams, WAMA.

Allotype. 9, Tallering Stn, Pindar, W.A., 28.ix.1980,

S. Barker, D. J. Williams, WAMA.

Paratypes. W.A.. 2 oc, 1 ©, same data as

holotype, SAMA; 2 oo, 1 9, same data as

allotype, SAMA; | o, 1 9, Shark Bay, 20.ix.1969,

F.) H. Uther Baker, SAMA; 1 9, Mt Magnet,

20.viii.1967, FH. Uther Baker, SAMA; 1 9, E

Murchison, Mansbridge, SAMA; 2 00,3 99,

TAXONOMY OF STIGMOBERA (CASTLARINA) 2)

Mary Springs, 8.4x.1970,,.A. & & Carnaby, SAMA;

Lo, 10 kro W Gaseoyne Jen, 22.ix.1980, Do

Williains, S. Barker, SAMA; 1 &, 1 9, Marloo

Stn, Wurarga, 1931-194), A, Goerling, ANLC; 2

ceo, Cus, 7. MW Brown, NMVA; 1 cy Ll 9,

Yampire Gorge, Hamersley Range, 26.viii.1967, BA.

Urher Baker, SAMA.

Colour. Head, antennae, pronotum and scutellum

dark blue, Undersurface blue Elytra yellaw with

following black niarkings! narrow basal margin,

pre-medial fascia not reavhing margin extending.

anteriorly to humeral callus from the end,

represented by three spots in.a few specimens; broad

post-miedial fascia projecting anteriorly in middle

ofeach side and along sujure: mark covering whole

apex. Legs: femora aud tibia dark blue; tarsomeres

blue-green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Wead closely punctured,

shallow median sulcus, very short muzzle, eyes

bulbous, Antennae compressed; seements 1-3

abconiv; 4-I1 toothed. Pronotum shallowly

punctured, glabrous, small basal fovea; apical

margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely

bis{nuates laterally parallel-sided al base, rounded

lo witlest part after middle, rounded to apex.

Scutellum scutiform, glabrous, excavate glong

anterior margin. Elytra puretate-striate, intervals

fal, shallowly punctured; laterally angled out from

base, rounded ac humeral callus, concave then

rounded after middle, tapered to bispinose apex:

long sharp marginal sping, small sharp sutural spine,

margin rourided and deeply indented between

spines, apices diverging, apical margin subserrate.

Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of

abdominal segments glabrous, sparse hairs, Sy

truncate in male, narrowly (Tuncale in female.

Size. Males, 9.2 © O0.1643,1+0,06mm (13). Females,

N12 015 63.4 +0007 mar (11).

Male genitafie, (Fig. 31), Parameres slightly angled

outwards fron basal piece, becoming parallel-sided

afler middle, then rounded and narrowed to apices.

Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away.

Apoaphysis of basal piece narrowed front base

rounded aut at apex, medium width. Parameres in

§, alricollts Saunders (Fig. 34) angie outwards from

basal piece ntore or less Continuously, rolunding off

just before apex. Median lobe pointed, sharp, sides

angled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium

widely.

Distribution. WA. Shack Bay Murchison and

Maullewa districts.

Remarks. Belougs in S atrical/lis Saunders species

group but is 4 smaller species chan S. arricallis and

has sharper elytral spines, The specie tare 1s

derived fron crécerns L. slender.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) hilleri sp. nov.

PIGS 3K, 6J

Holotype. o&, Mt Glorious, Qld, 104.1984, .4_ Hiller,

QMBA.

Allotype. 2, Mt Glorious, Qld, 27.xi/.1983, 4.

Hiller, QMBA.

Paratypes, Qld: | o, same data as allotype, SAMA;

Toro, i! OG, MrGlorious, 16.11.1983, 1, Hiller,

AHQA; 3 a0, 1 9, Mt Glorious, 30.x7.198U, 4.

Hillery, AHQA & SAMA, J oo, Mt Glorious,

12,xi1, 1983, 4 Hiller, AHQA.

Colour, Head green with yellow reflections.

Antennae blue-green, Pronotum, scutellum and

undersurface green with yellow reflections. Ebytra

yellow with following dark vreen markings with

yellow reflections down Suture only: narrow basal

margin; broad pre-medial fascia reaching margin;

broad post-medial tascia reaching margin; spade-

shaped pre-apical mark reaching margin enclosing

yellow spot on each side berween it and post-medial

fascia, all marks connected down suture to apex-

Legs blue-green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured, broad

median sulcus, short muzzle. Afrennae! segments

1-3 obconio; 4-1! toothed. Pronotum closely

punctured, basal fovea extending lorwards*to apical

margin as glabrous line; apical margin projecting

broadly in middle, basal miargin bisinuate; laterally

rounded fram base, widest before middle, rounded

to apex. Scutellum seurform, few punctures,

glabrous, flat. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals

convex, punctured apd wrinkled; laterally angled

oul from base, rounded at humeral vallis, concave,

rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose

apex; marginal spine blunt, very small sutural spine,

margin indented between spines, apices diverging.

Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of

abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy,

hairs medium Jength. S7: truncate in male;

indented in middle in female.

Size. Males, 9.74 0.202£3.4 + 0.06 mm (13). Females,

10,0 © O:.28 43.64 0.1) mm (13).

Male genitalia. (Fix. 3K), Parameres angled

oulwards from basal piece, rounded before middle

to widesc part after middle, rounded and narrowed

TO apices. Medisn lobe very wide, pomted but blurt,

sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal

Piece medium width.

Distriniion. Old: Mt Glorious.

Remarks, Collected from Bark/va flowers an the

edye af rain forest. | am unable to assaciate this

species with any other on ibe basis ot male vennalia

and extemal morphology. Named alter Mir A.

Hiller, Mi Ciluricus, (tude

ae s. BARKER

Stigmodera (Castiarina) fusea sp. nov.

FIGS 3L, 71

Holotype. or, N.Q., Dodd, NMVA-

Allotype, 2, Atherton, S.SW, (sic), French eoll..

NMVA.

Paraivpes, Qids | of, Kuranda, M.SW. (sic)

Jan.1905, 2 P Dodd, SAMA. N.SWe L 9, Tweed

River, F841 1923, & M. Benguet, RMEBB.

Colour Head, antennae, undersurface ereen.

Pronetum green along apical margin and al sides,

black in middle Elyira basal colour vellow with ube

following black markings: broad basal margins pre-

medial fascia; post-medial fascia; pre-apical mark

covering apex, All these marks have coalesced al the

sides leaving the following: basal yellow spot on

each side and one at middie; red spot on lateral

margin at humeral callus and one on the lateral

margin in the prestpical area. Legs: ereen of ventral

surface, blue-green on dorsal surface of femur, tibia;

tarsameres blue-green Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head with shallow punctures,

thin median sulcus, muzvle shor Antennae:

seemenis 1-4 obeonic; 5-11 toothed, Pronotum with

shallow punctures, glabrous, basal fovea and basal

notches closer fo margin than middle; projecting

forwards broadly wi middle of apical margin, basal

margin bisinvate; laterally parallel-sided at base,

rounded before middle and tapered to apex,

Scurellum scutiform, Nat wilhoul punctures. Ety(ra

punctate-siniate, intervals without punctures,

glabrous, convex at base and apex, Flat in middle;

laterally angled out trom base, rounded at hurneral

callus (widest part), concave, rounded afler middle

and tapered (o bispinase apex; spines equal Iength,

interval between straight, Undersurface with

shallow punetures, edges of abdominal segments

vlabrous, few short hairs, Sy: truneate in both.

Sexes. Legs: in male 2nd and 3rd with tarsal pads

absent on tarsomeres |, 2, 3, replaced by blunt

median spine.

Size. Males, 11.0%4,3 mm (2), Females, 13-7»

4.8 mm (2),

Male genitalia, (Fig, AL), Parameres parallel-sided

al basal piece, slightly angled outwards before

middle, rounded to widest part, narrowed ta the

apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides angled

away. Apophysis of basal picee medium with,

Distribution. Northern M.SW, and Old,

Remarks. Member of 8. produete Saunders mimiery

group on basis of colour and pattern. Lam unable

19 group S. fusca with any other species on basis

of external morphology or struectire of the mile

genitalia. The specific name is derived from fusers

L, dark.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) warningetsis sp. now

FIGS 3M, 46

Holotype. 3, Mc Warning, NoSW,. 8.4ii,1979,

TM, S. Hanlon, SAMA L 2LI7L

Paratype. 1 a, Mt Glorious. Old. 107,1984, 4.

Hille. AHQA,.

Colour, Head black with blue reflections on muzzle.

Antennae: segment | blue; segments 2-1) bronze-

green. Pronotum and sculellum black. Under-

surface and legs black with blue reflections. Blytra

bright yellow with following black markings:

narrow basal margin, mark down suture; mark

covering apex, Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad

median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments

1-4 obconic; 5- toothed, Pranotum closely

punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to near

apical margin as impressed line, basal notches on

each side closer to margin than middle: apical

margin projecting in middle; basal margin bisinuate;

igterally angleal inwards rom base, rounded to

widest part before middle, rounded and narrowed

to apex. Scutellum cordiferm, punctured, excavate.

Elytra costate, scutellary, 3rd, Sth and 7th intervals

slightly raised, other intervals flat, all punctured;

laterally angled aut from base, rounded at humeral

callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed

to bispinose apex; small, sharp marginal spine,

minute sutural spme, maruin indented but straight

between spines, apices diverging, Undersurface

shallow punetures, hairy, hairs short, Legs: in male

2nd and 3rd with tarsal pads replaced on tarsomeres

1-3 by elongate median ridge. Sy: truncate in male;

female unknown,

Size. Males, 13,7 «4.9 mm (2).

Male genitalia. (Pig, 3M), Large, wedge-shaped,

median labe pointed, sides rounded away, Similar

to §, ligris Barker (1983, Fiz. LP) except median lobe

of S. tigris pointed and sharp, sides angled away

nol rounded,

Distribution, High altitude rain forest in northern

N.SMW. and southern Qld.

Remarks. Member of the S. sexplagiata Gory

species group, Closest to S, digris, differs from (hal

species in pattern, shape, size and shape af elytral

spines, The specific name is derived from the type

locality.

Stigntudera (Castiarina) turbulenta sp. nov.

FIGS 3N, 4B

Holorpe, &, Boxwood Hill, W.A,, [6.xi,1980,

7, M.S. Harlan, WAMA.

TAXONOMY OF STIGMORERA (CASTTARINA) a3

dlatvpe 2, 35-55 kro S&S Yellowdine, WA,

27...1978, T) & Houston, WAMA.

Paratypes, W401 co, Dedati, 2.x.1977, D. Knowles,

MPWA} | &, 1 9, 55 km EB Ayden, (7.x. t981, M4.

Powell, MPWA; | ct, same data as holotype,

MPWA: | ov, Jerramuneup, 16.xi,1980, 7 M.S

Flunion, MPWA; 1 or, EF Hyden, 191.1973, K & £,

Carnaby, SAMA; 1.0, MeDermid Rock, 90 km W

Norseman, Ocl,197%, G. dfarola, WAMA, 1G,

Tarin Rock, WAMA 48-2728 1 9. Kukerin,

WAMA 48-2981: | 9, Reserve 16 kim SSE Merredin,

29.x,1978, 7 & Houston, WAMA; 1 2,2 kim WNW

Wodberiup Fhil, 29/30.si,1979, 7 FE Houston,

WAMA; | oo, Yellowdine, 21.s.L980, RO P

MeMillan, WAMA;3 cot, 1 @, Luke Grace, A. Me

Browe, NMVA; 1G, Kalgoorlie, A Wo Brawn

RMEB; 3 9 2, Murchison, 77. Ho Brown, RMBB,

2 9 9, Ausiralia, Deuquet Calleetion, RMBB; 2

2 9. Albany, Brewer, BMNH-

Colour Head bronze-green with blue muzzle.

Antennae bronze-green, Pronotum dark blue in

middle, bronze-preen at sides. Sculellum dark blue.

Elytra red with tollowing dark blue markings:

narrow basal margin, pre-medial fascia concave

anteriorly, not reaching margin; post-nedial fascia

reaching margin; mark covering apex, last bwe

marks connected down suture, fascia nol carmected,

Undersurface dull blue-green. Lees: femora and

libia blue-green: tarsomeres green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculplure. Head closely punetured,

shallow median sulcus, short muzzle, Antennae:

segments 1-4 obeoniec, 5-1) toothed. Proporuni

closely punctured, stall basal fovea extendine

forwards to middle as glabrous impressed tine;

apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded from base,

widest part hefore middle, narrowed ta apex,

Scutellum cordiform, punctured, excavate Elyira

punctale-striale, intervals convex punetured and

wrinkled; laterally angled out fram base, rounded

at humeral vallus, concave, rounded after middle,

narrowed to bispinose apex; prominent sharp

marginal spine, siall sharp sulural spine, margin

rounded and indented between spies, apices hardly

diverging, apleal Margin rough. Undersurface with

narrow plinctures, hairy, hairs medium length. S45:

truncate in both sexes. Legs: in male 2nd and 3rd

will tarsal pacs missing on rarsomeres 1-3, replaced

by double median spine.

Size, Males, 10.1 40.2143.87 (1.07 mm

Females, 10.7 +.0.27 &4.L +0.10 mim (16),

Male wenliata (Piv. 3M). Wedge-shaped, median

lobe pointed, sides rounded away,

Distribution, WAS Murchison, Goldfields and

Great Sourherd districts,

(10),

Remarks. Member of the S. sexplagiaia Gory

species group. Closest to 8, curnisAd Barker (}Y83,

Pig. TR), but differs in shape, colour and size. The

specific name is derived from furhulentas L.

agiraicd,

Stigmoders (Castisrina) dessarti sp. nov.

FIGS 30, TF

Holotype: oo, WA, ©. Deuguet collection, RM BB.

Paraypes WAS 3 oot, same data as holotype,

RMHB & SAMA. 1 cr, 32 km & Southern Cross,

8.x. 1978, D, Kaowles, MPWA; 1 oo, 35 km E

Jerramungup, 3.sL1979, VW Powel, Mt. Golding,

MPWA,; 1 o, 55 lin E Hyden, (7.x,1981, MZ. Powell,

MPWA,

Colour, Head bronze with blite-green reflections.

Antennae: scements 1-2 blue-green, 3-11 bronze.

Pronojum bronze. Sculellum and undersurface dark

blue. Elytra ced with following dark blue markings:

narrow basal margin; preanedial fascia not reaching

margin, expanded anteriorly at ends, the first two

marks connected dawn sulure; past-niedial fascia

reachine margin; mark covering apex and spines,

the last two marks eonected down suture Legs:

femora and tibia dark blue; tarsomeres blue-green.

Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpiire, Head closely punctured, broad

median suleus, short muzate, Antennae? segments

1-3 abconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronowm vlosely

punctured, basal fovea exiendina forwards to

middle as glabrous. line, basal notches represented

by glabrous area on each side closer 10 margin than

middle; apical margin slightly projecting in middle,

basal maryin bisinuate; larerally parallel-sided at

base, rounded before middle, rounded and narrowed

to apex. Scutellum scurtforin, without punctures,

glabrous, excavate. Elytra punctale-striate, intervals

convex, punctured; laterally angled aut from base,

rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after

middle and Hatrowed |o bispinose apex; marginal

spine slightly larger than sulural spine, margin

straight between spines, apices diverging.

Undersurface will shallow punctures. edges of

abdominal seemenis glabrous, moderately hairy,

hairs medium leneth S>: truncate in nvle; female

unk now,

Size, Males, 1.54 0.25.4.2 * 0.13 mm (7).

Male genitalia. (ig. JO). Parameres angled

outwards [tom basal piece to widest par atter

middle, rounded and tapered to apex, Median Inhe

pointed and sharp, acutely angled away ar sides.

Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Aedacgus

of 8. delecrabilis Hope (Fig. 3R) longer. Parameres

parallel-sided at basal piece, angled outwards before

middle, rounded at widest part after middle arid

24 5, BARKER

lapered ta apices, Median lobe pointed, acutely

angled away at sides. Apophysis of basal piece wide

and elongate.

Distribution, W.A.. Great Southerr district,

Remarks. Member af the & de/ectahilin (Fig. 7B)

species group. Smallest species in the group and the

only one occurring in W.A, Named after Dr P-

Dessart, RMBB,

Stigzmodera (Castiarina) pulla sp, nov,

FIGS 35, 7H

Holotype, o, Wawarra Coastal Range, 23.x1).1952,

C! Deuryuet, QMBA.

Allatype, 9, Miwarra Coastal Range, LS.xi).1948,

C Deuguel, SAMA I 21172.

Paratypes. SSW 2 oo, Waterlall, Schroeder,

ASSA; I oo, Mawarra, 16.xi1,1950, C Deuquet,

SAMA; | O, Mt Keira, 15.41.1957, 4 Balderson,

SAMA: 14 oo, 6 99, Wawarra, C. Deuguet,

RMBR: | @, Jamberoo, 30.x01,1954, C Deuquet,

RMAB,; 1 &. St Albans, Nov., C Deuquet, RMBB,

Colour Head, antennae, scutellum and under-

surface green. Proriotum bronze in middle, green

at sides. Elyzra yellaw wilh following variable black

markings: narrow basal margin; broad pre-mechal

fascia reaching margin; broad post-medial fascia

reaching margin; spade-shaped mark covering pre

apex and apical areas, ends of the fascia all coalesce

along margin; elongate red mark on margin al

humeral callus and apex; basal yellow wark and

medial yellow mark and yellow pre-apical Fascia

may be variably obscured by black, Legs: femora

and tibia: dorsal surface blue-green, ventral surface

green; tarsomeres green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head shallowly punctured,

glabrous, broad median suleus, short muzzle,

Anlennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4-1) toothed.

Pronotwm shallowly punctured, glabrous, basal

fovea, basal notvhes on cach side closer to margin

than middle; apical margin straight, basal margin

bisinuale; laterally parallel-sided at base, raunded

before middle and parrowed (to apex, Seutellurn

scutiform, few punctures, glabrous, excavate, Flytra

nunvtate-striae, intervals convex, lightly punctured,

lateral margin wurned outwards; laterally angled out

from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave,

rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose

Apex; both spines broad and sharp, margin rounded

betWeen spins, apices hardly diverging, Under-

Surface with shallow punctures, sparsely covered

with medium leneth hair; mesosternal pravess

slivhtly inflated, Sp: truneate in both sexes-

Size. Males, 1540200061007 mn

Females, 13.9 40.27» 5.64 O85 men (9),

(19)

Male geniralia. (Fig. 38). Aedacgus shorter than in

S, deleciabilis Hope. Parameres parallel-sided at

basal piece, angled outwards before middle,

rounded at widest part after middle, tapered to

apices. Median lobe broader than in S, delectabilis,

pointed, abtusely angled away at sides, Apophiysis

of basal piece medium width and narrowed towards

apex,

Distribution. N.SW. Northern, east of Dividing

Range

Remarks. Member of the 8. delectuhilis Hope group

on basis of male genitalia and external morpholoyy.

Member of the 5. producra Saunders mimicry group

on the basis of colour and pattern. Only species

belonging to both groups. The specific name is

derived from pullus L, dark coloured.

Stigmodera (Casliarina) Jukini sp. nov.

FIGS 37, 7K

labile fucolica (Barker, LOB; 2) aeo Kereemans

ROH

Holeatype. &, 2b km W Port Lincaln, 8. Aust.

16,.x1.1974. 8. Barker, SAMA | 21173,

Allotvpe. 9, same data as holotype, SAMA J 21174.

Paratvpes, §, Aust: 5 ora, 3 9 9, sanre data as

holotype, SAMA; 10,2 99, SAMA; | @, Port

Lincoln, xi-I872, SAMA; 1 9, Por Lincoln,

Oct.1909, SAMA; LQ, Saunders coll., BMNH; |

>, Port Lincoln, Blackhura, BMNH.

Colour, Head, antennae, seutellum green or blue-

Hreen, Pronotum green, bronze or purple-branve

in centre, green With yellow reflections at the sidew

Elytra orange with following dark blue-green

markings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial Fascrt,

not reaching margin, projecting anteriorly from end

of anterior margin; post-medial Fasiia reaching

margin projecting anteriorly in middle of each

elytron and al suture, projecting posteriorly on

suture; pre-apical spade-shaped mark covering aper

and spines, last twa connected down suture

Undersurface and legs green with yellow reflections,

Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured,

shallow median sulcus, muzzle very short. Antennae

compressed: sepmenis 1-3 obconicy 4-11 toothed.

Pronoun clasely punctured, very small basal fovea

extending forwards to middle as glabrous lime,

projevting forwards in middle of apical margin,

basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded

from base, widest before middle, rounded and

narrowed to apex, Sevitellunmy seutiform with few

punclires, slighuly concave, Elytra pumetate-siriite,

intervals fal in middle, conves at apex and sides,

punctured; laterally anvled oul from base, rounded

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) pa)

at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle

1 bispinose apex; marginal spines small, sutural

ininute, margin rounded and indented between

spines, apices slightly diverging, apical margin sub-

sermite, Undersurface with shallow punctures, sparse

long hair. Sy: turned under and faintly bilobed in

both sexes.

Size. Males, 13.8 + 0.214.5.1 + 0.09 mm (7). Females,

13.7+6,25 «5.4 +012 mm (10),

Mole ventialia. (Fig. 3T). Parameres angled slightly

outwards from base, rounded and widened before

middle, parallel-sided alter middle, rounded

abruptly to apex. Median Jobe pointed, sides angled

away. Apophysis of basal piece narrowed in middle,

but rounded to medium width at apex. Parameres

in S. rrifasciata’C & G (Pig. 3U) are parallel-sided

from basal piece then slightly angled cutwards,

rounded outwards before nuddle to widest part aller

middle, tapered inwards then abruptly rounded and

angled inwarde at apex. Median lobe bluntly

pointed, sices arigled away. Apopliysis of basal piece

medium width,

Distribition, 3. Aust; Southern Eyre Peninsula.

Remarks, The specimens collected in 1974 were

taken on flowers of Boeekeo sp Belongs in the S,

irifusciata species group, Colour, body shape-and

male genitalia of S. buenlica (Barker, 1983, figs, 3A,

6F) are quite distiner fram these of S. /wkind Named

after Mr Dean Lukin, Olympian, Port Lincoln.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) caalsi sp. nov.

FIGS 3V. 7L

Holotype. o, Burracoppin, WiA., 10.%.1936, AL Ee

Brown, RMBB.

Purutypes, W.A. 2 oo, same data as holotype,

RMBB & SAMA,

Colour. Head black with blue reflections, Antennae:

segments 1-2 blue-green; 2-1 bronze-ereen.

Pronolum black in middle, dark blue at sides.

Scuorellum black with wreea reflections, Under-

surlace prey-blue, Legs: femora and tibla blue;

Tarsomeres blue-green, Elytta orange brown with

the following markings with blue releetions:

nartow basal margin; broad pre-medial fascia, not

Teaching margin, projecting anteriorly and

posteriorly af ends; broad past-medial fascia

reaching margin, projecting anteriorly in middle of

anterior marein and posteriorly in middle of

POSletior margin; marx cayering apex, the lascia

and the apical mark connected down suture Hairs

silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, very shor! music. Antennae:

compressed, sxzements 1-3 obconics 4-1) toorhed.

Pronotum closely punctured, minute basal fovea

extending forwards to apical margin as impressed

line, basal notches represented by glabrous area on

each side closer to margia than middle; apical

margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely

bisinuate; laterally rounded from base to widest part

before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex,

Scutellum sculiform, glabrous, excavate. Elytra

punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured and

wrinkled; laterally angled out from base, rounded

at humeral callus, concave, rounded aller middle,

tapered lo Spineless apex; margin indented and

straight in spinal area; apices hardly diverging.

Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of

abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy,

hairs medium length. $4; truncale in male; female

unknown.

Size. Males, 14.1.¢5.4 mm (3).

Male genitalia. (Pig, 3V), Parameres slightly angled

outwards [rom basal piece, rounded before middle,

parallel-sided, slightly rounded. outwards to widest

Part, abruptly rounded and narrowed to apices.

Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides obtusely

angled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium

width, Parameres in S. brown’ Carter (Fig. 3W)

slightly angled outwards from basal pieve to widest

part after middle, rounded and narfawed to apices.

Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides obtusely

angled away, Apophvysis of basal piece broad.

Distribution, WA. Burracoppin.

Rernarks. Member of 5. (rifasciata C & Gi species

group on basis of external morphology and male

genitalia, Closest to S. brown’ Carter but tbat

species has a bispinose apex. The elytral markings

differ from all koown species. Named after

Mansieur Jacques Coolk, RMBB.

Stigmadera (Castiarina) viridolinea sp. nov

FIGS IT, SE

Stiemodera gutiar var. minor Carter 1929 (nomen

nudund),

Holotype. =, Inglewood, Vic, 22,xi),1923, Oke,

NMVA.

Allolype, 2, same dura as bolorype, NMVA.

Parawypes. Vici 2 9 9 same data us holotype,

NMVA; Il oo, 4 9 9, Inglewood, 30.x1, 1915,

NMVA; 2 oc, | &, Inplewood. 14.si/.1916,

NMVA? 23 coo, 14 O99, Inglewood,

Dee s9ts 41916, 2 E Divon, NMVA; 3 aor, 2

@&, Inglewood, tan IIL 197, 2 E Diver,

NMVA, 2 cr, Inglewood, 13.11.1920, 4 & Divor,

NMVAL lL oF, 3 9 9, Inglewood, 27. xi1,1923, ©

Oke, NMVA;7 creer, § GY, Inglewood, 27.x7.1945,

E, Smith, NMVA; 2 oo, 3 29, Inglewood,

26 S. BARKER

NMVA; 4 oo, 7 99, Sea Lake, Nov.1916,

Goudie, NMVA, SAMA; | 9, Sea Lake, NMVA;

2o00,2 9 9, Lake Hattah, J. FE. Dixon, NMVA;

200,29 9, Lake Hattah, 4 & 18.x.1953, J. Plant,

NMVA; 1 ©, Birchip, 1903, NMVA; 1 9, Mallee,

NMVA; 1 o, Ouyen, Dec.1912, NMVA; 2 oo, 3

9° 9, NMVA. S. Aust.: 1 9, Lyndoch, 31.xii.1885,

Dr L. Kidder, SAMA; 1 9, Reed Beds, 12.i1.1911,

S.A, White, SAMA; 1 0°, Gawler, 9.i.1913, SAMA;

1 9, Ardrossan, J G. O. Tepper, SAMA; 1 9,

Lyndoch, Blackburn, SAMA; 1 9, Yorke Valley,

Blackburn, SAMA, | o&, Wirrabarra, Nov., C. H.

Curnow, SAMA; | o&, Alligator Gorge, 8.viii.1972,

S. Barker, SAMA; 1 @&, Sellicks Scrub, 4.xi.1978,

S. Barker, SAMA; 1 @, Halycon Scrub, Black Hill,

2.xii.1984, J & D. Gardner, §. Barker, JGAA;1 0,

SAMA, Aust.: 4 oo, 5 99, SAMA.

Colour, Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum,

sternum and legs green with yellow reflections or

all coppery. Abdomen testaceous in both sexes with

green or coppery reflections. Elytra yellow with

following dark green markings: anterior margin;

mark down suture covering apices in some but not

in others; with or without a post medial spot on

each elytron in 7th and 8th interval from suture.

Hairs silver.

Shape and structure. Head with close shallow

punctures, broad median sulcus, short muzzle.

Antennae: segments I-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed.

Pronotum closely punctured, small basal fovea in

female, in male extending forwards to apical margin

as glabrous line, basal notches well marked in male

surrounded by glabrous area, obscure in female;

projecting forwards in middle of apical margin,

basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally angled

outwards at base, rounded and bulbous before

middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum

scutiform, few punctures, flat. Elytra punctate-

striate, intervals convex, more so at margin and apex

than middle, lightly punctured in middle, heavily

punctured at sides; laterally parallel-sided at base,

slightly angled outwards then rounded at humeral

callus, concave then rounded after middle and

narrowed to bispinose apex; both spines minute,

margin angled and indented between. Undersurface

shallowly punctured, edges of abdominal segments

glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs short. S7:

narrowly truncate in male; rounded and slightly

pointed in female.

Size. Males, 13.7+0.09x5.2+0.04 mm (72),

Females, 14.8 + 0.17x5.7 +. 0.06 mm (62).

Male genitalia. (Fig. 1T). Parameres parallel-sided

from basal piece, rounded outwards before middle

to widest part after middle, slightly angled inwards,

rounded off to narrow apices. Median lobe pointed

and sharp, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece short and medium width. Parameres

in S. subtincta Carter (Fig. 1U) parallel-sided from

basal piece, slightly angled inwards, rounded before

middle, angled outwards to widest part after middle,

rounded to apices. Median lobe sharp and pointed,

sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal

piece medium width.

Distribution. Vic.: Mallee district. S. Aust.: Adelaide

Plains, Yorke Peninsula, Southern Flinders Ranges,

Murray mallee.

Remarks. Member of S. straminea Saunders species

group on basis of testaceous abdomen and structure

of male genitalia. Closest in appearance to S.

subtincta but females of that species have all green

abdomens and males mostly green with the terminal

segments only testaceous. In S. viridolinea both sexes

have testaceous abdomens and a green line down

the suture. Specific name is derived from virido L.

green, linea L. line.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) burnsi sp. nov.

FIGS IW, 5F

Holotype. &, Big Desert, Vic., 6.xi.1978, G. Burns,

NMVA,

Allotype. 9, Sea Lake, Vic., Goudie, SAMA I

21175.

Paratypes. Vic: 3 oo, 3 99, Mallee, Deuquet

collection, RMBB; 4 9 9, Sea Lake, Nov.1916,

Goudie, NMVA & SAMA; 4 oo, Mallee, 7

Dixon, NMVA; 5 oo, 2 9 9, Hattah, Oct.1915,

19, 21.x.1916, NMVA; 1 9, Ultima, Nov.1917,

Goudie, SAMA; 1 9, Gypsum, Nov.1924, C. Oke,

NMVA; 4 co", 1 9, Hattah, 4, 25.x.1953, J Plant,

NMVA; 2 oo’, Hattah, Sep.1940, F E. Wilson,

NMVA; 1 9, Mallee, SAMA. S. Aust.: I 9,

Hayleon Scrub, Black Hill, 2.xii.1984, 2 & D.

Gardner, 8S. Barker, JGAA; 1 o, 1 9, Deuquet

collection, RMBB; 2 co 0, 1 9, Sharp collection;

BMNH; | o, 1 9, Gawler, Pascoe collection,

BMNH; 1 9, Murray Bridge, 10,Dec., Griffith

collection, SAMA; 1 co, Adelaide, RMBB. Aust.:

3 aoc, | 9, Rosenberg & Weyers collections,

RMBB.

Colour. Head bright green. Antennae: segments J-2

green; 3-11 gold and green. Pronotum bright green

with or without gold reflections. Scutellum bright

green with gold reflections. Elytra yellow with

following blue markings: narrow basal margin;

short vitta on each humeral callus; narrow post-

medial fascia, convex anteriorly, concave

posteriorly, not reaching margin; spade-shaped pre-

apical mark often reduced and projecting down

suture to cover apex, all marks connected along

suture. Undersurface: sternum and base of

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODER A (CASTIARINA) 7

ahdomen green; dpical abdominal segments

lestaceors, Legs ereen, Hairs silver,

Shape and seulpture. Head glosely punctured, braad

median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments

1 obconic: 4-1) toothed, Pronotum closely

punetured, very small basal fovea, small basal

notches closer to margin than middle; apical margin

projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base then rounded to

wides! part before middle, rounded and tapered to

apes, Seutellum seutiform, glabrous, flat Elytra

punclale-sirale, ireryals convex and wrinkled,

laterally angled out from base, rounded al humeral

callus, cOnvave, rounded alter middle, tapered to

hbispindse apex; both spines small and blunt, mangin

rounded and indented between spines, apices

diverging. Undersurface with shallow punciures,

edges of abdoininal segments glabrous, moderately

hairy, hairs short. Sz: truncate in male; rounded in

female.

Size. Males, 14,9+0.23«5.74+0,08 mm (27).

Females, 15,7 £0.27 6,0 10.10 mm (20),

Male genitalia. (Fig. \W). Parameres slightly angled

outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle

lO widest part after middle, angled inwards and

rounded to apives. Median lobe pointed, sides

obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece

medium width,

Distribufion, Vie. Mallee, Big and Little Deserts.

5, Aust.: Gawler, Murray mallee,

Remarks. Member of the §. strantinea Saunders

species group on basis of external morphology,

testaceous abdomen alid stricture of male genitalia,

The elytral markings are distinyt from other

members of the group. Named aticr Mr G. Burns,

Mornington, Victoria,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) discolorata sp. nav.

FIGS 38, 70

Holotype. it, Boxwood Hill, SE Ongecup, W.A.,

G/T AOKO, KL ke EL Carnaby. WAMA-

Jilloivpe. 9, Haruitversly River crossing, 24.47, 1979,

Th Houston, A. Chapnan, WAMA.

Paratypes. W.A.: | ot, | O, Warren River, 10 kim

SE Pemberton, 1711971, G 4. AHellawoy,

Hughes, AMSA; 1%, same data as holotype,

SAMA! 1 ©, 64 km NE Esperance, 18,4, 1982, 8.

Burker, B Kempster W vanderwoude, SAMA,

| 2, 55 km W Ravensthorpe, [5,4),1980, 7 AW, S,

Hanlon, MPWA

Colow. Head, antennae, scurelluim, uiidersul face

and les blue, Pronolum dark blue in middle, blue

wl sides. Elytra red with follawine dark blue

tarkings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial fascia

extending anteriorly and posteriorly ar ends,

poslerior projection sometimes reaching margin;

posi-medial fascia reaching margin, mark covering

whole apex, all marks connected down suture. Hairs

silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely puncrured,

median suleus, short muzzle, Antennae: sezmerrs

1-4 obconic: §-1) toothed, Pronotum closely

punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to near

apical margin as glabrous line; apieal margin

broadly projecting in middle, basal margin

hisinuate; laterally parallel-sided af base, rounded

to widest part before middle, rounded anc narrowed

to apex, Scutellum scuriform, few punctures, flac.

Elvira punctate-striate, intervals conves, punctured;

Juterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral

callus, concave, rounded after middle atid narrowed

to bispinase apex: small marginal spine, very small

sharp sutural spine, margin rounded and iridented

between spines, apices hardly diverging. Under-

surface shallow punctures, edges of abdominal

segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs short,

57: male |runcate; female indented i middle,

Size, Males, 9.63.3 mm (2). Females, 8.9« 3.2mm

(5)

Male genitulia, (Fig. 3X). Parameres slightly angled

ounvards from basal piece, rounded aut before

middle ta widest part, faintly notched, parallel-sided

uritil counded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe

pointed and sharp, sides angled away. Apophysis

of basal piece broad. Parameres in 5S, crherifata

(Kirby) (Tig. 3¥) parallel-sided from basal pieve,

rounded outwards before middle, distinctly notched

at widest part after middle angled slightly

ourwarcls, rounded abruptly af apices, Median lobe

pointed but blunt, sides angled away then rounded.

Apuphysis of basal piece broad.

Distribution, This species helongs m the S. erueniata

Speaes group on the basis of structure of mate

venitalia and external morphology. It van be

separated trom other species in the group by the

bicolorous pronatum and red elytra, The specific

name is derived from disco/or |. variegated,

The following species are placed hy me in the sub-

senus Stgmddera (Castiarina) together with the

indicated synonyms.

Genus STIGMODERA Esclhschaltz 1829

Sub-eenus CAST/ARIM4A Castelnal & Gary 1837

ubdaoinalis Saunders $868, 1 dim Sac, 9. 407

SA, V, O, SSW,

acneitata Rerremans (B98, dyin Sav ent Bele. 42, 142

fo] O NSW.

a8 8. BARKER

acute Deuquet 1956, Proc, Linn. Soc. NSE 81, 154 [ol

acuriceps Saunders (869, Inseet. Saund. 3, 19 WA.

vdewahni Obenberwer 1928, Arch. Naturgesch. 1926,

92, 330

deiiieniiis Carer 916, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40,

133 Jo] 0.

adorns, Deuquet $957, Prov Lind, Soc NSM, 82, ‘ee

4, 212 i

SA, V

9,472 SA,

V, NSW.

Jgudabilis Kerrematis 1B98, Annis Soc. Fits Belg. "2, 14

avraticollie Carter (930, Proc. Lint. Soe NSW. 55, 182

adelailae Hope \846, Trans, ent. Sac, Lene,

aeneicornis Saunders 1868, 4 Linn Soe

[Ww] WA,

afabilis Werremans (898, annls Sov, ent, Bele 42,

14} [q] oO

Shipley Rerremuns (902 Gerera Insect. 12, 210

dlexwnery Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soo, & Ausr 40, 119

lil WA,

alternecosta Thomson 1879, Tip, Bupr, App. la, 35

NSW,

alacris Kerremans )840), Bull, Suc. ent. Bele. 1890, 47

disfeot Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe. ent Bele. (890, 48

arenepean Kerrernans 1892, Wén, Soe, revit. Bele.

, 143

quadeenorasa Blackburn 1892, Trans, R, Soc, & Aust

15, 49

libers Kerrenuins }902, Genera Inseet, 52. 209

alernozona Thomson (878, Ty Rupr. 34 [el SA

amabilis C & G 1837, Man. Bupr 2, 19 WA.

amplipennts Sayoders 1865, a Linn, " Suc, 9, 480 {d]

SA, V¥, NSW. Q,

amplicollis Carter 1931, Aust. Zoe! 6, LOT

analis Saunders 1869. Insect, Sunn. 3, 7

niurpinicervex Theanson 1879, Tv Bupr App. la, 3

antharalix © & G 1837, Moa. Bupie 2, 26 WA,

wrvor/fera Blackburn 1892, Trans R, Sow. 8. Aust, 15,

agresiis Kerremats 1B98, Annis Suc. ent. Belg, 42, 140)

tantilla Ooenherger 1922, Arch. Naturgeseh, 1922, 88,

iin

andersuni C & © 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 28 V, NSW, Q.

veray Rerpemans 1898, Annis Soe. ent Bele, 42. 146

dieay Cibenbemer 1922, Arch. Natirweseh. 1922, 88, 119

agulla Barker L980, Trans, R, Suc. S. Aust, 104, §

fal, WA

onnillacen Curter (916, Trans. R. Soc. S Aust. 40, 126

fs] SA, ¥

oviel Cartes 1990, Proc. Linn Soc. NSW §5, $33

NSW

armara thomsen 874 Tye Bupr App la, al NSW

thea Caner (924, Proe, Linn. Sac, NSW, 49, 594

areistrome! Barker 1983, Trans. R, Sac. S. aust, 7, 152

ul SA, NSW, NT, @,

wtherivnetsls Barker SRE, Trans R. Soe. 8. Aust. ue

1 (l

crebetns Sauriders (859, Jrsect, Sewnd, 3, 22 [ul sh

africatlis powlerensis Obenberger 1934, oon tsh Spal.

en VW, 106

africolis moira Obenberger (933, Cas Msi. Spal, ent

30, 106

preacperuind Kerremans TR90, Bull, Seu ent, Adele R90,

47 (aq) Aust.

airaRarted Waterhouse 1874, Trees, Ro ent. Sac, Larre.

1874. S42 O.

uffenvala Carlier ISI, Trams, Ri Saco 8S. ctst, 40,

132

vy,

audax Saunders (869, Jnserr, Sawed 4, 4 (k} WA,

aurantiace Carter (931, lust. Zool 6, 346 WA, SA,

Vv,

aurea Barker 1980, Trans. R. Soc, 8 Aust 104. 6 My

eureola Caner 1913, Proc. Linn, Sac, N.S.W. 37, 499

W.A.

dustralasiae C & G A837, Mon, Bupr 2, 32° SA, V,'T,

NSW, 0.

assimilis Hope 1846, Tranny, ent, Soo, Lond, 4, 212

melbournensis Thamsan (879, Ty Buy App. Va, 44

ae Kerrenians [B98_ Aanis Soc. ent. Bele, 42, 147

hakevi "Burker 1979, Trans. R. Soe, S. Aust, 103, 5 [wl]

fulieaia Saunders (869, Janseer, Suund, 3, 16 SSW, Q.

postica Thomson 1879, Type Bupr. App. la, 37

balthasar/ Ohenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgeseh. 1926, 92,

30 WA

bazilisea Obenberger 1923, Cay ts, Spol. ent, 30, Ws

truncala Carter 1936, Proo, Linn. Sac N.S 61, 100

bella Saunders 1871, Car. Bupr, Syn. Syst., 7] Vv,

NSW, Q.

cruentata C & Ci WW37, Man, Bupr, 2, 29

hella dixon Carter 1926, Prov. Linn. Soe, N,S.M2 5), 57

bicdlar © & G 1837, Mon. Rupr 2, 39 [al SA.

aliceae Barker (980, Trans, Ro Sow S. Aust, 104, 6 tsyn.

hgfasciara (Hope) 183), Gray's Zoologica of iscelinny

1, 25 NSW, Q.

bicincta (Boisdival) 1835, Voyage de Vastctene 89

bicingulata C & G 1837, ‘Mon. Bupr, 2. 30

dejeani Gory 1841, Mon, Bupr 4, err add,

breinera Gary 1841, Mon, Bupr. 4, 131

tmspinosa Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soc env. Bele, 1890, 43

bicincta hina Obenberger 1922, Archiv. Naturg, 1922

Sou itete Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Sac. NSM. 1, 24

himueulata Saunders 1868, 1 Linn. Soe. 9, 4¥1

WA, Q.

Ainorata Saunders 1871, Cal. Bupr, Syn, Syst | e 3 id

W, Q

bimaculata Saunders 1869, Insect. Saune. . ;

blackdawnensis Barker 1986, Trans. Ro See. 8. Aust, 110,

20 [i 0

eee Barker [983, Trams. R, Soc, S. Ausr. 07. 156

w W,

booanvia Carter 1933. Proc. Linn. Soc. NSW 38,

162 WA

boeyanta Carter 1933, Proce. Linn. Suc, NSM, S8, 162

(lnadvert. error) Barker & Edward (963, Hess, usr.

Nav. 4, 170

borealis Barker 1979, Trans. Ro Sex. S Ausl, 103, (3

New Guinea.

bremei (Hope) 1845, Trarts. ent. Suc. Lond. 4, 102

VY, NSW,

brooks) Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 103,

1 Q.

broormensis Carter 1994, Proc, Linn, Soc, NSW 39,253

if] WA

brawni Carter 1916, Trams, K, Soo. §. Aust 40, 12) [w]

Rk Soe.

browatne? Barker 1986, Trans. S. Aus. itd,

16 [pl Ww

hruzella Thumson 1879, Typ. Bupr App. la, at at

by a

araphisure Thomson 1879, Jip. Bupr App. *

wniformis Kerremutis |898, Annis Soc. ent. elt. 4. las

viewrly Obenberver 1922, Arch. Nufurceseh. 1922, 88,

bavolica Kerremans 1898, Anny Soe, ent. Belg, 42, 152

fw) WA,

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

Kalbarri Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sov, S. Aust. 107, 156

noyn.

burchelli © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 33 Ir) NSW, O,

hurnsi Barker 1986, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 1, 26 ui)

SA,

callubriensis Carter 1931, dust 2Zp0l 6, 367) Vy NSW.

campestris Blackburn 1X97, Trans. R Sue S Aust, 2,

31 .

delela Kerremans (902, Genera Insect. 12, 208

saundersiang Obenberger 1922, Ah, Natureesch, 1922,

HH, 120

capensis Barker 1956. Trams. Ro Soc. So lust 110,

16 |e} 0,

carinaiad Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Soc. N.SWO |, 26

Iv]

epacula Obenberger 1922, Arch. Naturvesch, 1922, 8%

carmined Saunders 1868, 4 Linn, Suc, 9, 474 Id] SA,

Vv, NSW,

Jelix Kerremans 1898, Annals Soc, ent, Belg, 42, 142

carnabyi Barker 1979, Trnas, R. Soe S. Aust. 103, 12

WA.

WA,

SA, V.

vasielnaudi Saunders 1869, Jasecr, Sound. 3, 9

thomsaniana Masters 1886, Cai, Coleap,, 97

custe(naud? Thomsen I878, Typ. Bupr., §3

laportet Kerremans IN90, Bull Sow. ent, Belz, (R90), 42

arial nuias Obenberwer 1933. Cus esd. Spal. ent,

i), 104

chinnoeki Barker

1983, Trans. R. Soc, S. Asi, LOT,

166 WA, SA

cincia Blackbur 1890, Trans, Ro Sac. 8. Aust, 13, 187

{s} WA,

rubrocinets Kerremans 1890, Bull. See. evr, Bele. 1890,

cincla tridens Carter 1931, Aust, #eol. 6, 340

cinnamamen Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Sau NoSMY 1, 2

ul Q.

clancula Ohenberser 1922, Arch. Niturseseh, 1922, 4s,

(A, SA.

coceindta (Hope) 1843, Trans, ent. Sac, Lend. 4, (02

WA. Q

elegontuly White 1846, Discnveries in Aust, I hart

Stokes, 1, S07

coeriteipes Saunders 169, Inseet, Sauna. 4, 13° NSW.

coeruleipes muntana Carter 91h, Trans, RB. Soe. S.

Aust 40), 106

ornens Kerremans (890, Bull Soc. enn Bel. 1890, 44

NSW.

coloraia Hope 1847, Trams. ent. Suc. Lone. 4, 284 fa]

SA,

commista Cartet 1924, Prog, Linn, Sec. NSE ah 2 thy

NSW

comin Walertiouse 1874, 7rans. R. ens Sae. band 1a74

aaa Carter 1930, Proc Lint Soe. NSM SS,

533

convexa Canter JOS, Proe, Lina. Sac. NSA 37, 506

m4 WA.

coolst Barker 1986, Trans. R, Sue. S Anse ILO, 25 [wl

WA.

cornishi Barker 1983, Trans. R- See. 8. Aye, In7. Ha fv]

WA, SA,

costalis Saunders 1869, Insect. Sauncd. 3, 4 NSW,

costar Saunders R68, Linn. Sac 9, 470 NSW.

costipennis Saunders (869, /aseci, Suan. 3, 17 NSW.

eracenta Barker 1986, /rans. Ro Soe.

20 |u| WA

crenata (Donovan) ROS, Epyome Inseets New Halland,

pl. 7, tig. 3 WA, SA, VT, NSW, ()!

AL otis VOL

amphicrou (Boisduval) 1835, Voyage de VAstrolobe, 9)

yexspilota C & G 1937, Mon. Bupr 2, 35

ons row dllecta Obenberwer 1933, Cus bv Spol. ent.

70, Ws

amphicrog euterpe Ohenherver 1933, Cas esl. Spal. eni,

30, 10S

crocicolor C & G 1837, Mon Bupr. 2, 44 WA,

Fae mad Satinders (868, Trans, R. ent. Sac. Lone.

1B6

crockerae Barker 1974, Traris, Ro Soe. S Aust, (03, 4

WA,

cruenta C & G UB3I7, Mon, Aupr 2, 29 NSW, Q,

cruentala (Kirby) ISIS, Trans, Linn. Sav. 12. re cl

V, NSW, @

neologa Thomson 18749, Typ. Bupr App. he eH

stillata Clack burh 1890, Trans. R. Suc. §. Aust. 13, 148

coerulea Kecremans (892, Mem. Soc, rn enr Bele. |, 146

coeleslis Kerremans 1890, Bull, Sav ent Belg, 1890, 48

crane Saunders 1868, Linn. Suc 9, 473° WA, SA, VW

cupida Kerremans (898, Anily See. ent. Belg. 42, 138

NSW, Q

eupreoflavea Saunders 1869, Jrsect, Saund, 3, i WA,

SA. V.

mapnetica Carter (943, Prae Linn, Sov, NSH 358, 16L

cupricauda Saunders (868, £ Linn. Sac. 9,475 SA,

NSW.

cupricalliy Saunders 168, J) Litin. Soc. 9, 470 [x] O.

evanipes Saunders 1868, J. Linn. Soc, 9, 4G WA, SA,

Gyan lalaze Obenberver 1933, as és) Spal. ens,

OQ, 73

cydista Rainbow 1904, Ree. Aust Mus, 5, 246

NSW, 0.

Mrhechana Deuquel 1963, Pree. Linn, Sao, NSM) 88, 337

eylimdracea Saunders 1868, 2 Linge Sow 9, 476 (wh

‘SW

danesi Obenberger 1933, Can dsl. Spot entam. 30, 73

WA, SAL

valding! Barker 1983, /rans KR, Soo N Aust 107, 148

nyo,

decemgunara Gory 184i, Mon. Bupr. 4, \a2 WA

parva Saunders 1864, Jasect. Saynd 3, 26

sanerdte calor Carter 1925, Proc. Linn, Saw NSAP 31),

decermmaculata (Kirby) IMIS, Trans. Linn Soe 12, 456

Ip] SA, V, NSW, @

inaequalis Kerremans 1902, Genera Jisece. 12, 7

heliita Obenberger 1933, eas tot Spe, abn 40, 71,

decipiens (Westwood) 1837, Maz, Zool, Mat 1, 2500,

capucina Thomson 1856, Rev Aduy. Zral, 8, Lie

mrreurinuia Macleay W863, Trans. end: Sac. N Su 1,14

vclocostata Carter 1916, Trans..R, Sou 8 4usf a), 190

delectabilis Hope (847, Trams. ne, Sc Lond 4, 284 [I]

SA, Vv NSW,

delectabilis (Vareiventris (henberper 1933, Cus Usi,

Spol. ent. WL 106

delectabilis earneola Ohenberger 1993, Cys esl, Spol,

ent, AU, 106

deliwurila Kerterjans TOL, Genera Inseci. 12, 209

jo} Q.

delia Thomason IR79, Tee. Bxpr Ape tay 43 [ol

Naw,

deceptor Kerremans 1902, Gervera Tiseet. 12, 20%

desert’ Blackburn 1892, Trans. Ro Sor S. Aus 16, de

{uJ WA,

desideria Carter 19l6. Trang. Ro Swe. S, Lust au, 122

{w] WA

dessarit Barker 1986. Trans Re See Ss Tse TH, 24 Wy

Wa,

dengue Caner (827, Pree, line Soe NATH $2, as

NSW,

30 §. BARKER

suiond Carter 1932, Prov, Linn. Saw NSM 357, 104

palagera Carter 1937, Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust, 61, 125

devroller Thomson 1879, Bull, Soo. ert be 9, 125 [2h

VY. NSW, QO.

chabauti Thery 1895, Bull ent. Soc. Fr. (B95, 328 nsyuy

sueeta Carter 1913, Prog, Linn. Soe. N.S.Ae AT, Sal

nsyi,

dilatate Carter 1927, Pray. Linn, Soc, N.S.W 52, 226

{ul '

dilaticollis Carter 1929, Aust. Zoal. §, 294

dlunidiaia Carter (908, Proc. Lina, Soe. NSW 33, 422

V, NSW, (2

dorsalis Obonberger 1922, Arch, Nalurgesch. 1922, 86,

ith

leat Jascjosa Obenberger (922, Arai Nurture, 1922,

dingucnsis Barker 1983, Trans: R, Soc. S. Aust. 107,

diseuplava Carter 1930, Prov, Linn, Soc. NSW'SS, ay

tidirotea Carters I933,-Awer. Zook 6,243 NSW,

iiseolorifa Barker 1986, Trans. Ro Soe 8. Asi, 1, 37 |)

user Blackburn 1892, Travis. BR, Soe. S Aust,

semenovi Obenherger 1928, Aveh. Nafureesch. 1926, 92,

329

fusrincra Saunders 164, 2 Lfan. Soe. 9, 974 fl}.

stevnalis Mackburn 1892, Truns, RK. Sac. 8 Aust, 19,47

baliala Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc. ent, Bely. 42, 144

deliciosa Kerremans (898, Annis Soc. ent, Bele, 42, 145

distineuenda Saunders 1869. Jnsect, Sound, 3, 4 [|

WA, SA, VV. NSW,

flifferens Carter 1931, Aust. Zoul b, 364

doddi Carter 1913, Proc. Linn. Se, NSW, 37, $05 9

doming Carter 1931, lus. Zool 6, 344 [w] WA.

penrgiana Barker 1979, Trans. R, Soo. S. Aust, 103, 7

dryadula Caster 1930, Prac. Linn. Soe. NSW. 55, 535

New Guinea,

duaringae Carter 1929, Proc. Linn. Sac. NSE 34, 68

SA, NSW, (2.

hogania Carter 1930, Proc, Linn. Sav, MSW. 353, 534

ehuricu Caner 1934, Prov. Linn. Sac NSW 59, eee

elderi Blackburn 1892,, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust, 16. 36 |p]

WA, SA.

diverse Kerremans (900, Amals Soe. ent, Belg. 44, 317

elongata Satinders 1868, J. Linn Soc. 9, 480 WA

eneabba Barker VY83, Trans. R, Suc. S$. Aus. ah

[u) ;

eremifo Blackburn 1890, Frans, Ro Soc, & Ausn 13, 153

WA,

clarki Carter 1922, Proc. Lint Soe NAHE A? a9 mayn,

erubescens Blackburn 191, Trans. R. Soe, 8. Aust. 25,

23 Thurs, ts, Q,

trom Kerremans 1908, Dr ent. 2.6, 64

unimaculara Carter 908, Pend. Linn. Soe. NSME 33,

420

ervthramelas (Boisduval) 1835, Voyage de |'Astrolobe_ 75

VT, NSW, NT.

fongula Blackbur 1892, Trans. R, Sve, S Aust, 15,54

cicerini Obenherger 1928, Arch, Nainreesch. 1926, 92,

4341

erv(hroptera (Boixduval) 1835, Voyage de |'Astrolobe, 48

v WA, V, NSW, Q.

canaliculata Blackburn 1892, Trans, Ry Soc. SL Aus/,

15, 51

migrolerminiia Carver (934, Prax, Linn Sec, NSH

59, 257

enclae Barker 1983, Trans. Ro Soc. S Aust. VOT. if

SA.

eyrensis Barker, 1986, Trams, &. Soc, Sotuse 10,9 IK]

SA.

feativa Carter 1916, Trans, R, Soe, S. Aun. 40, 138 OQ.

Jilfermis Blackburn LB92, Trans, Ro See. Sv Aust 15,

217 WA,

protersa Obenberer 1928, Areh. Nattirgeseh. 1926, 92.

332

flava Saunders 1869, /nsect. Saund, 3, 17 WA, SA, V-

flavescens Masters 1886, Car, Coleop., 86

leva Thomson 1878, Typ. Bupr, 35

flavidula Kerremané 1890, Bull. Soe. ent. Belz. (R90. 47

flava Hotulata Obenberger 1922, Archiv. Naturgesch.

1922, 115

flaviceps Carter 1914, Prow. Linn, Sac, NSM, 47, S04

yllgarni Obenherger 1928, Arch. Narurgesch. 1926, 92,

333 navn,

Jlaviceps cupriceps Carter 193), Ausr. Zool. 6, 340

Hlavapicra (Boisduyal) 1835, Voyage de VAstrotabe, 92 \a)

SA, V, T, NSW, QO,

Jlavavarta Saunders 1871, Cat. Bupr. Syn. Syst, 74

flavapicia © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2, 44

Aavapicia nausicaa Obenberner 1993, Cas és, Spal. ent.

30, 110

flavapicta eruta Obenberger 1933, Cas és, Spal ent.

30, 1D ,

flavapicta palaend Ovenberger 1933, Cas esi Spel

ent. 30, VI

flavupicra iris Obenberger 1933, Cus &s/. Spol. ert.

4M, LL

Jlavapicia phoedusa Obenberger 1944, Cus ts. Spal,

el, 30, ILL

Tlavapicta antiope Obenberger 1933, Cas esl. Spo.

ent. 30. W2

flavopicta callidive Obenberger 1933, Cas est Spot

ent 30, 2

Havopurparee Carer 1908, Prac. Linn, Sue. N.S HE 33,

421 V, NSW,

Pluvosignara Macleay 1863, Trans, dar. Soe N.S.HE 1, 30

NSW, Q.

clreumflexa Obenberver 1922, Arch, Nulurgesch, 1922,

KR, 121

Jlayosiznata rufosignara Carter 1931. Aust Zuol 6, 349

fluvoyiridis Carver 1927, Proc. Linn, Sov. N.SJHE $2, 227

{vl NSW-

[lindersi Carter 1922, Proe. Linn. Soe NSM 47, 70

WA, SA,

furresti Barker 1983, Trans. R, Soe S. dust, 17, 154 [py]

WA.

Jfossoria Carter 1927, Pras Linn, Soc, WN SHE 52, 226

Iv V.

Srauciaria Barker 1884, Trans. R. Sec, S$. Aust, V7, 143

\¥ as

JSulviventres Macleay 1863, Trans. ent, Soc, NSHE 1, 22 [ll

Vv, NSW, ©.

gutrigera Blackburn (41, Trans, R. See. S. Aust, 25, 24

muckoyana Carter 1930, Proc, Ling. Sac, NSW 55, 536

Furliva Barker 1983, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aus WT, 14g fal

fuseu Barker 1986, Trams. R. Soe. 8. 4use Vi, 22 la}Q.

vurrawillae Catter 1931, Aus¢ Zool. 6, 348 [mn] NSW,

penrilis Kerremans 1900, Annis Soe. ent Belg. 44, 316

NSW, ©.

gibbieallis Saunders 1868, J, Lian, Soc, 9, 420 [k]

WA, SA, VV NSW...

Jascigera Kerremans 1890, Bull, Sou wnt. Belg. (RW), 42

everting: Carter (937. Trans, R. Soe, S, Aust. 61, 125

woodingi Barker 1983, Trans R. Sow S. Auer 17, 154 [ce]

NSW.

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3]

gravilior Carter 1915, Proe. Linn, Sow N.S.Wo 40, My

pracilis Cartel 1913, Proce. Linn. Sue. N.S.W. 37, 50%

#rata Saunders 1869, /nsget. Saund, 3, Ut [ni] SA,

erdivis Harold 1869, Col Heft. 5, 124 fw] WA,

ahseuripennis Saunders (468, J. Linn. Save. 9 475

encarta Blackbur 1890, Trans, R. Soc. 8S. Aust. 13, (58

SA.

gulaticollts Blackburty 1890, Trans, R, Sow. S. Aust. 13,

157

consularis Kerremans IBYR, lands Soc ent. Belv. p.

149

buiitfera Obenberwer 1922, Arch. Naturgesch, 1922, 88,

12)

hanloni Barker 1983, Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust. 107, 1 (tl

WA.

haraldi Saunders 1871, Cat. Bupr. Syn. Syst, 74 Jel

Aust,

wiridiventris Saunders 1869, /nveet. Sand, 4, 20

harrisont Carter 1925, Prog. Linn. Soc. N.S.WE 50, 230

to} NSW, Q,

harsietiaeé Deuquet 1957, Proc, Linn, Sov, NS Wo 82,

190

haywelli Carver 16, Trans, R. Sac. 8. Aust. 40, 128

hatelevi Barker 1980, Trans. R. Sue S. dust. 104, 4 i

WA, SA, V,

helmsi Carter 1906, Prac. Linn, Soo, N.S.Mo 31, 259

Vo NSW.

Allaris Hope 1846, Trans, ent. Sav. Lond. 4, 213 |b|

V, NSW, Q

ans infasciata Carter 1933, Prov, Linn. Soc, NSM

. 163

hillert Barker W86, Trans. Ro Sao A. lage 110, 21 OQ.

talib ter 1916, Trarts. R. Soe. S. Aus. 40,137

WA.

Carter 1922, Prog. Linn. Soc, NSW 47, 70

NSW, 9.

muslersi Macleay 1872. Trans, ent Sov. NSM 2, 245

haffmiansege Hope 1846. Trarty, ent. Sov. Lane. 4, 211

hoblerag €

NSW, QO.

fairmairer Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc, ent, Bele. 42,

140 fsyn,

hostiliy Blackburn (892, Treas, A: Sou, S. Awse. Mua

‘A

Aumeralis Kerremans 1902, Genera Insect. 12, 207 [k]

NSW, O.

tillvdrdi Carter 1913, Prag Linn, Soe NSM 37, 502

humilis Deuquet 1947, Proc. Litin. Soc, N.SM* 72, 20)

NSW, O:

Aypocrita Barker 1983, Trans. kK, Soe. 5. Aust 107, us

R, Soe S, Aust, 13, 219 ri

WA, SA, V.

unica Kerremans 1898, Avinds See. ent Bele 42, 150

iva Saunders 1869, /nvect. Saund. 3, 12) V, NSW,

jenew Blackburn 1892, Trans.

QO.

dmitater Carter 1930, Proc. Linn, Soo. NSO 55, 180

NSW, Q.

Inunaculata Carter 1915, Prov, Linn, See. NSA 40, 81

WA.

impressicollis Macleay 1863, Trans. ent. Sac. N.S.WE 1, 32

NSW, QO

incognita Harker 1986, Trans, R. Soc, S, Ausi. 10, V1 [ke]

trconsipcua Saunders tes, £ Linn, Sow 9 476 v,

NSW, 0.

wlecia Kerrenans (R98. Analy Soe. ene, Belg, 42, 184

svi

indistincta Saunders (86%, Insect. Sgund. 3 30 \,

NSW,

indistincta ancharifera Obenherger (945, Cas asi.

Spol. entom, 30, 76

indistincta electra Obenberyer 1993, Cas ts. Spor.

entom, 30, 76

indistinera acelivis Obenberver 1933, Cas byl. Spud

entom. 30, 76

indistincta extrema Obenberger 1933, Cus es), Spot,

enfom 30, 76

inermis Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac ene Bele WH), 45

nova Kerremans 1902, Genera Insect, 12, 20%

rubella Carter 1931, Aust Zool 6, 35

inflata Barker |980, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. (0d, 4 fal

NSW

insculpta Carter 1934, Prac. Linn. See. NSM $9.

255 J.

bretgetolhts Blackburn 1900, frans. Ro Sov S Aussi. 24.

5 |w] WA,

Hiden Blackburn 1892, Trans. R. Soe. & Aus, 15, 217

{o] Vv. NSW,

cauarg Kerremans 1900, Artis Sac. ent. Bely. 44, 316

insularis Blackburn 1897, Trris. R. Sac. S. Aust. 21,

Fs tr

cagnala kerremans 1898, Annly Soc. ent. Belg. 42, (36

intucta Carter 1930, Proce. Linn. Sav. NSAP SS, VAL

interstitialis Carter 13h, Ause, Zou! 6, IAs [vl ¥,

jeonde Barker 1983, Trans, R, Soc, 8, Alwsr 107, 164

{2.

Jekelli Saunders 1868, 2 Linn, See. 9, 467 [If SAL,

NSW,

Jospitola C & G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2,38 WA, SA,

NSW.

laceria Ghenberger 1933, Cas éy/. Spal. ent. 30, 109

Janata Blackburn 1890, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. 13,

50 T

tusunt Obenberger 1928,

328

pratensis Carter 1934, Proc. Linn. Soe. NSW. 59, 235

Jucunda Saunders 1868, J. Linn, Soe 9% 481 NSW, Q

observans Kerremans SYS, 4linls Suv, ent. Bele. 42, (39

Julia Thomson 1879, Typ, Bupr App. ls, Alig] SA.

blackburni Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soe. S Aust 40, WS,

Hsyn,

kemipstert Barker ORG, Frans, R, Soc S. dust U0, 12 |]

WA.

Arch Naturgesch, 1926, 92,

kerrémians! Blackburn 1890, Treas. R. Sec. Abuse 13, 47

SA. Vy NSW, ().

apicalis Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe. ent, Bels, 1840, 4§

Kershaw) Carter 1924, Proc. Linn, Soc, NAME 49, sae

V, NS -

Kershaw curtere(la Obenberger 1933, Cas Msi Spel,

entamt. 30, 104

kiatae Barker 1980, Trams. Ro Soe S Ause (dd, 6 V.

kirbyi (Guerin) 1830, Voyawe Coquille 63 fw] SA, V.

NSW-

fgéily Kerremans |898, 4nals Soe. err Bele, 42. (55

Kirbyi pans Ohenberger 1922, Archivo Naturgesch.

1922, 4M, 118

kirby pereand Obenberger 1922, Arehi. Naturpesch

1922, 88,

Kluge C&G 1834, Mon, Bupr.

2, 27. [hy NSW,

kluigi nixa Obenberger 1933,

7§

Cas tsi Spal ent IO

fuena Thorson 1879, Tip. Rupr vipp. ta, 36 fal WA,

verna Carlier 1937, Trans. R, Soe 8. dusn Ol, 1ae

Kascaly Pochon 1967, danas hist, nar. Vlas. Narn hunny.

59, 244)

lgevinolata Carter (S34, Prog. Linn, San NOS ML S$, 154

{d| NSW. O

32 5. BARKER

latipes Carter 1924, Prov, Ling. Sov, N SWE 49, 21

NSW, 0.

legi Carter 1916, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 40, 136 V, 7

lepida Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40, =< a

Jilipatana Thomson 1857, Areh. Enz. 1, 4 NSW, 0.

master’ (Macleay) 1872, Trans, ent. Soe. NSAV. 2, 241

acularis Kerremans 1898, Annis Soe ent, Belg, 42, “155

dawsonensis Blackburn 1890, Trans, BR. Sad, 5, AUST,

13, 135 asyn,

pulchella Carter 1916, Trans. R Soo 8. Aust. 40, 135

lensicollis Saunders 1869, fnseer.. Saund. 3, 21 Wh

‘A.

bicolorella Obenberger 1928, Arch, Naturgesch. 1926,

92.429

prolongata Carter 1935, Proe. Linn. Soe. NS ME 60, 179

Slavocoertilea Carter 1938, Rec. Aust, Mus, 20, 234

loriae Kertemuns 1896, Annali Mus. civ. Stor net.

Giacomo Doria 36, 358 New Guinea, NT, O

dukint Barker 1986, Jrans. R, Soe. S. Aust 110, 2H As

lureipennis Gory iB4l, Mon. Bupr. 4, supp, 130

NSW, Q-

lureipennis distizma Obenberger 1933, Cas est, Spol

ent, 30, 69

/uteovincia Saunders 1868, J. Linn. Soe. 9, 478 Uj)

NSW, ©.

macniitlani Barker 1979, Trans, R. Sac. 3, Aust, 103, § I

mucvulicollis Carter 116, Trans, Ro See S. clase. 40,

2 0,

macuilifer Kerremans 1902, Genera Jnsect. 12, 208 [}}

NSW, ©.

maculifer uerioollis Canter 1929, Proc. Linn. Soc, NSH

§3, 273

mtoculipennis Saunders [R68, 4 Linn, Suc. 9, 480 .

NSW.

magnificollis Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soc. 8, Aust 103, 7

magnifica Blackhurn 1896, Trans, & Soe. S. Ause 20,

mallecana Carter 193),

Aust Zool 6, 340 |p| SA, V,

NSW

mansuela Kerremaus (898, Annis Soc, ent. Bele, 42, 155

mareinata Barker 1983, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. VOT, 151

SA, V.

marginicollis Saunders 1868, 4 Linn, Soc. 9, 469 w

NSW.

bifaseiatella Obenberger 1922, Arch. Natureewh, 1922,

BRL INS

media Hope 1847, Trans, enn. Soc. Lond, 4, 284 Jul

SA, V.

septemnotata Carlier 1916, Trans. R. Suc, 5. Aust, 40, 86

sepremmaculata Blackburn 1892. Trans. &. Soe. 8.

Aust, V5, 45

mmelrosensis Backer 1986, Trans. Ro Soc S Ausr WO 14 leh

metallica Barker 1979, Trotis. R. Soe. 5S. Aust 103, >

WA.

militaris Carter 1922, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S We 47, 71 |r|

Vv, NSW

mimica Barker (980, Trans, R, Soe, S Ausi. 104, 3 [vy]

minute Blackburn 1892, Trans, R, Soc, S. Aust US. 4131

maritizena Oke 1928, Prow Linn. Soe NAME S3, 25 tei

, NSW,

alpestris Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sov. 3. Aust 107, 146

nayn,

thoribunda Saunders 1869, Insect. Sand. 3, 18 NSW.

romuadata Saunders (869, Jaseer Suupd. 3. 19

raitundata enyo Obenberger 1933, Cas ts/. Spo.

entome 12, 732

mustelamajur Thomson 1857, Arch. Brit, 1, WS WA,

SA, VO NSW, Q.

gibbosa Macleay 1463, Trans. ent. Soc. N.S,

crasina Carter 1935, Prac. Linn, Sov. N.S.W 60, 180

manula Kerremans 1890, Bull, Soc. ent. Belg, (890, 48 (b]

nasula Saunders 1869, Jnsect. Saund, 3, 15 v, NSW,

Jossithorax Obenberuer 1928, Arch. Nururgzesen. 1926,

97, 429

neglecta Carter 416, Trans. R. Soe, S. Anse 40, 123

NSW,

103, 4

NT, 0.

nigriventris Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Soc, N.S.HE 1, 27

nigriceps Barker (979, Trens R. Soc, S, Aust.

dbliqua Kerremans )902, Genera frisect 12, 209 [oj

NSW, OQ.

asiridae Deuquet 1934, Prac, Linn, Soe, N.S.M4 63, 309

oblita Carter 193), Aust. Zool. 6, 347 [al NSW, Q.

vbseura Saunders 1869, Tasecr Saured. 3, 26 [e) SA,

obscura posticedivise Obenberger 1933, Cas tsi,

Spal. ent. 30, 106

obseura anticedivisa Obenberger 1933, Cas évl. Spol.

ent, 30, (06

phsepia Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac. ent, Bely. (B90, 44

[d ;

vevidentulis. Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soe §. Ause W3, 9

WA,

delliperd Gory 14l, Mon. Bupr 4, 133 [q] Y.

ochreiventris Saunders 1869, Jnseel, Suund. 3, 8 Ll

NSW, Q,

evra Blackburn 1892, Trans. R- Soo. S Ausr 15, 216,

nsyn.

actomaculata Saunders WOR, J Linn. Sac Fig 472 [t}

SA, V, NSW, Q

ectasignata Carter (919. Prov, Linn. Soe. NS. Wo 44, 139

aclaspiolg © & GUAT, Mon. Bupr. 2, 28 [4] NSW,

jemarata C & G 837, Mon, Bupr 2, 37

oclaspilata raseipes Deuquer 1947, Proe. Linn, Sac,

N.S. BL, 154

ornatd Blackburn 1892, Trans. R. Sae. §. Aust. 15, 53

Vv NSW

ovata Barker 1979, Trans, R, Soe. & Ause 103, 10

WA, SA, ¥.

Trans. R, Soe. S. Aust, 25. 22

Thursday 1s., ©.

vuripennis Barker L979, Trans, R, See. 8, Aust, 103,

2 msyn,

aurifera Carter 1922, Proc. Linn, Soe, NwS.HE 47, 68

pollidipennis Blackburn 1890, Truns, R. Suc, 8S, Aust 13.

5 WA, SA, ¥

pallidiventris © & G N37, Mon, Bupr 2, 42 |p|

WA, SA, ¥.

rustica Kerremans 1898, 4en/s Soe. ent Bele 42, 154

parallela White 1859, Prac. Zool. Sav, Land. 27, 9

WA. SA, VO SSW, O.

elonwerila Macleay 1872, Trans. ent. Sov, N.S.WE 2. 246

parallelipencis Obenberger 19394, Coleap. Car. 12, 725 |W]

WA, SA, V¥, NSW

perallela Saunders 1869, Insee). Saund. 3, 16

parvula Deuquet 1956, Pree Linn. Sac, NSH RI, 155 (b]

NSW, O.

pearsoni Barker ORG. Trans, Ro See S Ause VO, V7 [A

pallas Blackburn 10,

TAXONOMY OF SHIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3

perlonga Carter 1931, dust Zeol, 6, 343 fw] SA, V,

NSW,

pertyi © & G 1837, Mon, Bupr 2. 23 NSW, @

minus Saunders (868, . Lina. See: 9, 479

phaeorhavea (Kirby) URIS, Troms. Linn. See 12, 456

WA, Q.

picta C&G 18397, Mon, Super 2, 46 [pl WA.

purpurea Hope 1846, Trans. ent. Soe, Lund 4.24

laetabilty Kerremans 1898, Annis Sac. ent. Bele. 42, 153

pictipennis Saunders 186%, J Link, Soe Y 471 WA

piliventris Saunders (868, J Linn Sav, 9, 474 Jv] SA,

Vv. NSW,

generosy Kerremans 189%. Anais Soe. ent Bela. 42, 150

placens Kerremans 1898, Annals Soe. ev. Belg. 42, 143 |j]

NSW.

placida Thomson 1879, Typ. Bupr App. ta, 13 Ly)

pPlanata Carter W916, Trans, B, Soe. 8. Aust, 40, =

auricallts Thanisey W877, 4reh Ent |, V4

planipes Barker 1979, Trans. R, See. 5. Ausi. (03, 3

NSW, 0,

powelll Barker 1983, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. LOT, 148 fal

WA, SA.

proetermissa Carter 1921, Proc, Linn, Sac, NSW. 46, 306

Vv, NSW, ©.

producia Saunders (868, 4 Linn, Sov. 9, 482 [of

NSW, O).

acutipennis Thomsan 1879, Typ, @upr App. ta, 33

suicleoiis Kerremans 1902, Genera [seep 12, 209

producla pulymele Obenberger 1933, Guy est Spo,

cnt W, U2

propinqua Carter 16, Trans. Ro Soe, 5. Aust. 40, 124 [aw]

propingua cartériand Gbenherse, 1933, Cus bt

Spot, ent 30, 109

pseudasilida Barker 1983, Trans, R, Soc. S Anes. 107, 16

[0] NSW, 0.

puella Saunders 1869, dasect, Suvnel 3, 15 fe} Oo.

auralintbata Carter V22, Brac Lin. Soe. NSM AT,

68 fisyn.

puerilis Kerremans 1898, Analy Soc. enti, Belg. 42, 147 Te]

NSW, ©

pulehra Saunders 1869, Inseet Suurie, +, 22 WA.

pulehripes Blackburn (R97, Trans Ro Soe. 8, Aust. 21, 41

VO NSW

pulla Barker W986, Trans, R, Soc S Ase V1, 24 i, of

NSW,

punctalissima Saunders 1R69 Mnseer Suuned 3, 14

NSW

punctatosuleata Saunders WAY, Tisece Sauad, 3, 24 [dj

v, NSW, Q.

lifigiasa Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac en), Bele. (890, 45

punctiveniris Saunders 169, daseer Sauna. 3, 17 WA,

pisciforris Carter Wh, Trans, R, Sac 8. Aust 40, 125

putenlata Carter 1999, Peo Linn, Sov. NOSE 64, 300 mf

WA. SA.

quadrifasciata Swunders 1869, J. Lan, Sac, 9, 477

WA. SA, NT

quadriyutiata Macleay 1863, Trtis. ent Sue NSE 1, 28

t),

sentellaris Kerremans 1900, Arnis See. ent. Bele. aa 316

quadriplagiata Carter 1930, Peace flan, Soe NSW SS,

453

quinquepuncala Waterhouse [RT4, Troan, Ro emt Soc,

Lund. (874, S54] ,

radigns Carter, 1933, Brac, Linn, Soe. NSE 58, 160

recrd Saunders 1869, drseer Sune 3. 24 fu) WAL SA,

reclifasciala Saunders WOR, J Linn Suc, 9, 472 nsw

viedluns Rerremans IR98_ 4 nals Sow ene Bele. 42, 143

richardst Barker 1979, Trans. &.. Sue. 8. Aust. 103, 7 {s]

robusta Saunders 1869, Insert, Sand, 4,0 WA, SA,

conn oasniy Obenberger 1993, Cus tsi Spal, ent.

0, 75

robusta unifasctarella Obenberger 1933, Cus ésl.

Spel ent, 30, TS

robusta tristigmata Obenberger 1933, Cas est. Spol.

ent, 3, 7S

roller Kerremans $908, Di ent, Z. 6, 63 Q,

hackeri Carter 1913, Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W. 37, 484

eagudara Carrer 190%, Proc. Land, Sac. NSE 33, als

rasiralis Carter 1917, Prac, Linn. Sac, NSLHY 42, 718

WA.

rostrata Thomson 1879. Ty Bupr App. ja, 36 WAL

rubievnda Carter 1941, Aust. Zool 6, 346 [hy] Q.

Winlaira Denguel 1956, Proc Linn. Soe NSW 81, 156

rubriventris Blackburn 1900, Trans. R, Soc. S, Aust. 24,

46 [J WA.

inusitata Canter 1933, Proe. Linn, Soc, N.S.HE 58, 160

eudis Carter 1934, Proe, Linn. Sue. NSA. 59, 256 -T.

rufa Barker 1986, Trens, R, Soc 8S. Aust. 0, 9 (kl

WA,

rufipennis (Kirby) 1808, Trans. Linn, Sac. 12, 456

WA, SA, V. tL. NSW, Q.

crocipennis © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2,21

cracipenis Hope (846, Trans. ent. Sac. Lond. 1846, 292

Winer wueiaie Ohenbemer 1993, Cas dsl Spol ert

Y, 69

rufipes Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Sov. NSW. 1, 23 QO.

Stigmaticollis Gbenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgesch, 1926,

92, 334

rufotimbata Carter 196, Trans. R, Soc 3, Aust, a0, OHS!

NSW, QO.

souitiaria © & G 1837, Mom Bupr. 2, 3 WA.

hopel Saunders. (868, 7rams. KR, ent, Soc, Lond, 1868, 39.

sunuvinolenta © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2, 45 [q] WA,

scalars (Wosduval) 1835, Voyage de MAstrolobe, 89 [q]

Vv, NSW, Q.

evarieollis (Boisdiyal) 1835, Voyage de |'Astralobe, 9]

erucigera © & G (R37, Mun, Bupr 2. 40

viridis C & G W371, Mon. Bupr 2, 46

erycizeru Hope (R38, Col Mun. 2, 162

trupsversepicta Thomson t87Y, Tip, Bupr, App ta, 35,

Wo9he

macleayi Blackbutl) 1892, Trans, fe Soe, 5. Ayest 15, 48

pradens Kerremuns (898, Annls Soe. enl, Belg, 42, 152

suauis Kervemans 902, Genera Insect, 12, 210

erucioiles Obeoherver 1922, Arch. Naturvesch, 1922,

Ris, 118

centers acle Obenberver 1933, Cus tyl. Spal ent, 30,

sewlaris urehiunussa Obenberyer 1933, Cas &s/. Spol.

ent 30, 108

sovmtillara Barker 1983, /rams. R. Sac, S, Aust, 107, 164

semiciivid C& GOIS37, Mon, Bupe 2,19 V, NSW

seniilerd Carter SU. Prac, Linn. Sac. N.S.WE 7, 500

wersuiuraliy Saunders (868, 4 Linn: Sac 9, 448 SA,

NSW, V.

speyose Kerremans [R98, eels Sue ent, Bele, 42, 47

seplemgaliaia Waterhouse 184, frais, ent, Soc. Lona,

174, 540 fi} NSW

44 % BARKER

semensptlota Carter 1913, Prae Lian, Sac NAW 37, S03

sermalipennis Cazter 191, Trans, #. Sav, 8. Ause. 40, 127

WA-

sexcuvita Deuguer 1948, Prov, Linn. Sac. NSW 63, 306

NSW,

seveutata Macleay 1863, Trans. ent, Soc, NSE 1, 29 [0]

NSW,

eurien Obenberger 1922, Arch. Naturgesch. 1923, 88,

123

seveutiata Ayntermuttele Obenberger 1922, Arch,

Nalureeseh, (922, 88, 123

sexnmtata Carer WG, Tras A, Soe, & Aust. 40, 131

WA.

sexplagiata Gory |841, Mon, Bupe supp, 4, 132 [Vv]

SA, V, NSW, ©.

plagiala Gory W841, Mon. Bupr 4, ere add.

crenata © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2, 39

hope’ Boheman 1858. Bugenics Resa Zoologi, I él

similata Bohemian 1858, Eugenics Resa Zoologi, |, 62

krepfti Macleay 1872, 7rans, eal, Soc. NSE 2, 345

variata Kerremans 1902, Gevera Insect, 12, 200

sevuatis Carter $929, Proe, Linn. Soc. NuSW. $4. 69

siebaldi C & G 1837, Mon, Rupr. Z, 38 WA,

signala Kerremans 1902, Geaera Insect. 12, 210 [p|

WA.

sunulaa © & €) 1837, Mon, Bupr. 2. 26 [r] WA, ar

perplexa Hope 1846, Trans. ent. Sov, Lond. 4, ZL Ki

helenae (Hope) 1846, Trans. ent. Sov, Land, 4, 215

lunuginosa (Hope) 1846, Trans, ent, Sac, Lond. 4, 215

fais Thomson 1X79, Typ. Bupr App. la. 93

Phryne Thomson 1R70, tp Bupr App la, 33

J/raterna Kerremans 1890, Aull. Soc. ent. Belg, 1880, 46

distinguenda Thomson 1897, Tha, Bupr App. la, 34

equing Blackburn [892, Trans, R. Soe S. Aust, 15, 48

revilla Obenberger 1922, Arch, Natureesvh, 1922, 88,

aenlangula Ohenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgeseh, 1926,

92, 333

ed ae Obenberger 1928, 4rch. Naturgesch, 1926,

hurchelli dominula Obenberger 1933, Cas sl. Spol,

ent, 30, 76

skuser Blackbur 1892, Tras, R. Sine, S. dvsr 15, 46

NSW, ©.

Spectohilis Kerremans (91K), Annis San, eal, Bele, ty TS

lo] ,

spilota C&O 1837, Man. Bupr 2. 24 ASW.

sepleminocu/ata (Mannerheim) 1837. Bull Soe. ump.

nut, Mosca 8, 98

Aigo Qhenburger (922, Arc Naturgesch. 1922, 8&, 120

spilule polyeaste Obenberger 1933, Cay sl Spot,

ent HW, 2

spinolue Gory 1841, Mon. Bupr 4, supp. 129 V_ NSW,

sfetlata Barker ISRG, Trans. Ry Soo So ust. WO, 10 (k]

WA,

storey) Barker \983, Trans. RR. Soe. S. Aust 107, 152 [|

siraminca Macleay (863, Jrans, ent. San NSM 4, 25 [i]

uidilenda Kevremans (898, Anes Sve. ent. Bele. 42, 149

Johunnae Vhecy Wil, Mem. Soc e ent. Belg. 18, 335

strigala Macleay 1863, trans enn Sow NS ME | 27 fi

subaeuticeps Barker 1979, Thats. kk. Sac S Auer weg

WA,

subbifasciata Saunders L684 Linn, See. 9, 279 WA,

suberaa Blackburn 1800, Trans. R. Soe. S. aust. 26,41 {nj

ris ‘

cumpesirig Kernemans (898, 4annls Sac, ent, Belg, 42,

Way

subnolate Carter 1933, Proc Linn, Sov N.G.HE SB, tr ra

suhpure Blackburn 1903, Trans. R. Sue. S Aust, S 07

NSW,

subrestacea Batker 1983, Trans. R. Sac, & Anh 150)

WA, SA,

subtineta Carter 1933, Proc. Linn. Soc. NSW. 58, 159

if WA, V

swhtrifasciaia C & G i837, Men. Bupr 2, 41 tal WA,

rubracineta Gehin 1855, Bull, Sac. Mist. nat, Meiz. 7, 63

rubrecincta evanthe Obenberner 1933, Cas ev. Spol.

ent, 30, 107

subvielna Barkec 1983. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107, 163 [dj]

sulfurea Deuquet 1938, Proce, Linn, Suc. N.S. Woh 308

supergrata Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sac, S. Aust. 107,

sabnirlenale Barker 1986, Trans. R, Soe, 5S, Aust. 10.

series Kerremans 1890, Hu// Sov, ert Bele, 1890, 45

295 q

tridngulose Kerremans (898, Annis Sac. eni, Bele. 42,

3,14 VY, NSW,

fervaereginae Blackburn 1893, Trans. &, Soc S Ausr 17,

desiacea Saunders (469, /asecn Sauna.

thomsani Sautiders 1808, J Linn. Sec. 9, 477 [a V,

T, NSW.

cordifer Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe, ent. Belz, 1890, 44

nsyn,

dulcis Blackburn. 1900, Trans, R. Sov. S. Aust. 26, 41

coloruta Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc. ent, Belg, 42, 141

sharmerae Barker 1983, Trans R, Soe. 8. Ausf, 107, 144

w WA.

teris Barker L983, Trans. R. Soc. 8, Aus, V7, 143

by] Q.

uacuicauda Carter L916, Trans. R. Sor 8. Aust. 40, 46

WA,

filania Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soc, §. Aust, 40, 134 ©.

ricalor (Kirby) 1818, Trans. Linn. Sec. 12, 435 NSW,

curta Saunders 1868, J. Linn Soe. 9, 467

gpima Kerremans 1902. Genera (NE 12, 207

teifaseiuta © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2 8 Iw] WA,

apicalis © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2

2ebhardti Obenberger 1928, Arch. Nasurgenert 1926,

92, 332

trimuculara Saunders (RAR, J Linn. Soe. %, 482 [I]

Wa,

Iripartita Kerremans 19), denis Soe: ent, Bele, 44, 317 Til

iramose Thomson 1879, Tin Bupr App, lay 32 ri

trispicults Carter 194, Awat, Zool 6, 340 ; 0:

lropica Carter 1922, Prove. finn. Soe NSMOAT, 12

turtilenty Barker 1986, Trans. R. Soe 8. Ause (0, 22 |v]

WA,

turneri Barker 1983, Trans. Ro Sue. 5, Aust. 107, 166 bm]

SA, MSW,

tyra Blackburn 1903, Trans, & Soe. §. Aust 27, ang

wanda Barker 1986, Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust WO, Ud ii

undulaig (Wonovan) 1805, Epitone Natural tinted

Hisewts New Halland pl. 7, fig, 3 , NSW,

TAXONOMY Ob SLJGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3

foporre: Boheman 1858, Eugenies Resa Zoologi, 1, 6b

opacipennis Obenberget 1922, Arek. Narurgeseh, 1922,

88, 116

upton! Barker 1979, Trans. Ro Soc S. Aust. 103. 15

NT.

vallis? Deuquer 1964, Prac, Linn Soe. NSA 89, 128

Varievara Warker 1983, Trams, KR. Soe. S. Aust. 107, 162

Vv. ACT.

vuriopicla Thomsen t&76, Tip Bapr 54 Vv, NSW

vegeta Hope 1847, Nuns, ent Sac. Lend. 4, 283 Ie}

SA,

mneruleWentrix Saunders b869, /avecr Sauna. 3, 20

vegeta Hopearia Unbennerger 1933, Cas és. Spol.

ent, 30, 104

venusia Carter 19l4. Prow Ling. Soe, NSA 39, 84

suaves Carter 1913, Prac Linn, Soe. NSM 97, 507

modesta Obenbereer 1922, lech. Naturgesch 1922, 88,

verdiveps Barker 1979, Truas, &. Sec, S. Aust, 103, 8 [w]

WA.

versivolor C&G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 42

sirandi (Obenberger) (920, Ent, Mitr, 1920, 165

vicina Saunders 1868, Trans. R. ent. Sac. Land. (868, 43

ld] ¥, NSW,

hivineta © & 0 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, lal

wivvoriensis Blackbura 1490, Trams, R. Soe. S. Aus? 13,

152 [k| V, NSW, Q:

WA.

sensiftiva Kerremiuns 1898, danly Sao ent. Belg, 42, 148.

vinden Macleay 1463, 7rons, ern Soe, NSM 1, 23

NSW, G

obliquefusciata Obenherer 1922, Areh, Natirgesch.

1922, 8&, LbS

vireined Erichson 1842, Arch, Nalurgesch, 8, 135 7,

viridiventris Macleay 1863, Trums enn, Sac. NSA L, 27

NT, Q.

Ingutlala Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Soo. NSW 1, 28

subeosiata Kerrernans (900, 4anis Sor, eat. Bele 44,

viridolinea Barker 1986, Trans. RK. Sov, S. Aust 10, 25 Hh

viele Swunders LR6R, LF Linn. Soe 9, 478 SA, Vv

vulgaris Carter 1931, Aus’, Zo0/, 6, 347 WA,

walford! Barker 1974, Trans. Ko Soc §, Ausi, 103, Ul (i)

wartingensis Barker RO. Trams. R. Soc. 5S. Aust. 110,

22 [v] NSW, QO,

wilson’ Saunders (868, 4, Linn. Sav 9, 476 [al VT,

NSW

sipma Kerremans 1890, Ball Soe var Belg, 1890, 43

cnmfinis Kerromans (898, Aants Soc, ert. Bele. 42,151

seplentrionis Obenberuer (922, 4 eh. Nartrgese'h, 1922,

38, 116

yanthopilose Hope (B47, Trans. ent. Sac Land. a, 283

SA, V, NSW.

splendida Gehin (855, Gull Soc. Hest ut, Metz. 7, 64

xonthosmilata subsascigera Obenberger )943, Fas tsi

Spol ett 40, 70

santhuspilole dichropiera Oheatwrwer 19394, Cay esl

Spol, enn 30, 70

vellowdinensis Barker 1983, Trams, & Suc, S. Aust 107,

151 |i) WA.

feck) Deuquer 1959, Proce. Linn. Soe. NISMO B+, 124

{o] ;

Acknowledgments

I -wish to thank the following for assistance: Dr

G. & Gross and Dr E. G, Malthews, Sauth

Australian, Museum; Dr J, Lawrence and Mr T,

Weir, Division of Entomology, C.S.1-R.0.; Dr G, B.

Monteith, Queensland Museum; Dr T, F, Houston,

Western Australian Museu; Dc A. Neboiss and

Mr K, Walker, National Museum of Victoria;

Mr G. Holloway, Australian Museum, Sydney; Miss

A. Green, Tasmanian Museum & Art Gallery,

Hobart; Dr G. F. Bornemissaa, C.S.1.R.0., Hobart:

Miss C, M, H, von Hayek, British Museum of

Natural History, London; Dr P. Dessart and M. J-

Cools, Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de

Belgique, Brussels; M. A. Descarpentries, Museum

National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris; Dr S. Bily,

National Museun) Prague, Czechoslovakia, Dr K.

Wise, Auckland Institute and Museum, Auckland;

Mr kK. T. Richards, Department of Agriculture,

South Perth; Mr R, | Storey and Mr T, Jacobson,

Department of Primary Industry, Mareeba; Dr R.

Chinnock, South Australian Herbarium, Adelaide;

Mr &. E. Adains, Edungalba; Dr J. M. and Mr A.

Barker, Adelaide; Mr and Mrs G, Burns, Morning-

ton; Mr and Mrs K, Carnaby, Wilga; Mr M, Powell,

Attadale; Mr R. P, McMillan, Cottesloe; Mr and

Mrs P McQuillan, Hobart; MrG, Wilhams, Lans-

downe: Mrs J. Harsletc, Amiens; Mr A.. Walford-

Huggins, Mt Molloy; Mr A, Hiller, Mt Glorious;

Mr J. Sedlacek, Brisbane; Mr A. Sundholm, Pen-

rith: Mr R. 1, Westcott, Salem, Oregon; Miss H.

Vanderwoude, Mrs J. Gardner, Me P. Kempster and

Mr BD. J. Williams, Department of Zoology,

University of Adelaide; Ms J. Thurmer, Adelaide,

for illustrations 5H, §J, 7K and Mr D, R, Goodwins,

Adelaide, for the other 43 illustrations; Mr B. K-

Bowen, Lhrector, Fisheries and Wildlife Depart-

ment, Western Australia for a scientific permit to

collect Ruprestids; The Director, National Parks atid

Wildlife Servive, South Australia for permission to

collect in National Parks; The Director, National

Parks Service, NSW. for permission to collect in

the Warrumbuneles National Park; Australian

Researeh Gratis Committee, Australian Biological

Resources Committee, Wildlife Conservation Fund,

National Parks and Wildlife Service of South

Australia, the Mark Mitchell Trust Fund and the

Jan Potter Foundation for grants-in-aid of research,

References

BARKER, S (1979) New Species and 4d catulogue of

Stiwmadéra (Castiurifia) (Coleapters: Muprestidae).

Trans, Ro Soc. 8. Aust. WS, 1-27

(1980) New species and synenynts ol Sriemodera

(Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae) Tid Wa, 1-7,

(1983) New synonyms and new species af

36 S. BARKER

Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae).

Ibid. 107, 139-169.

BLACKBURN, T. (1890) Further notes on Australian

coleoptera, with descriptions of new genera and species.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 13, 121-160.

Carter, H. J. (1916) Revision of the genus Stigmodera,

and descriptions of some new species of Buprestidae

(Order Coleoptera). Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40, 78-144.

(1929) A check list of the Australian Buprestidae.

Aust. Zool. 5, 265-304.

(1930) New Guinea and Australian coleoptera.

Notes and new species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 55,

532-549.

(1931) Notes on the genus Stigmodera (Family

Buprestidae), Together with descriptions of New Species

of an a Retabulation of the Subgenus Castiarina. Aust.

Zool. 6, 337-367.

(1940) XXXIX. Australian Buprestidae and the

Junk catalogue. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, Ser. 11, No. 6,

380-389.

DEUQUET, C. M. (1956) Notes on Australian Buprestidae,

with descriptions of three new species and two

subspecies of the genus Stigmodera, subgenus

Castiarina. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 81, 153-156.

Wart, J. C. (1979) Abbreviations for Entomological

collections. N.Z. Zool. 6, 519-520.

THE ULTRASTRUCTURE OF MALE NUPTIAL PADS IN SOME

AUSTRALOPAPUAN FROGS

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER & KERSTIN LUNGERSHAUSEN

Summary

Amongst Australopapuan hylid and leptodacytylid frogs the male nuptial pad has an elaborate

surface pattern of multicellular elevations bearing intricate structures. The disposition of these

structures in representatives of five genera is documented and examples are figured. The study

constitutes the most extensive undertaken of nuptial pads in the Anura.

THE ULTRASTRUCTURE OF MALE NUPTIAL PADS IN SOME.

AUSTRALOPAPUAN FROGS

by MICHARL J. TYLER & KERSTIN LUNGERSHAUSEN*

Summary

TYLER, M, J..& LUNGERSHALUSEN, RK. (1986) The ultrastructure of male nupnal pads in some Australopapuan

frogs. Trans. R. Sae. S. Aust, 110(1), 37-41, 30 May, 1986,

Amongst Ausiniopapuan hylid and leptodavtytid frogs the inate nuptial pad tas an elaborate surface

pattern of mulucellitar elevations bearing intricate structures. The disposition of these structures: in

representatives ol five senerst is documented and exainples are figured. ‘The study constitutes the most extensive

‘indertaken of nuptial pads in the Anura,

Kev Worps: Anura, ultrastructure, nuptial pad, Australopapuan.

Introduction

Male froys are unique amongst vertebrates in the

nature of their secondary sexual characteristics,

These strictures comprise inflatable vocal sacs

located beneath the floor of the buccal cavity and,

in most species, pigmented nuptial pads on the first

digit of the hand. The structure of vocal sacs and

associated submandibular musculature has been

demonstrated to be of considerable significance in

delermining phylogenetic relatronships (Liu 1935;

Tyler 1971, 1972; Drewes 1984).

Nuptial pads enable the male to obtain a secure

grasp of the female during amplexus. But even at

a macroseopic level itis evident that the shape and

appearance of ihe nuptial pad yaries between

species. Amongst Middle American hylid frogs

possessing nuptial pads Duellman (1970) observed

three major structural forms: |. an enlarged and

“ceneralised” nuptial excrescence; 2, a cluster af

enlarged spines and 3. a single enlarged pre-pollical

spine. Tyler (1968) noted that the shape and surface

area of nuptial pads (that fit Duellman’s 1970

“generalised” category) varied amongst Papuan

Species now referred to Litoria Tschudi.

The male nuptial pad consists of a superficial,

keratinous layer and a deeper layer containing large

mucous cells. Hypertrophy of the mucous cells

during periods preceding the breeding season is

accompanied by an enlargement and elaboration

of the pad (lwasawa & Asai 1959; Prakkal & Ellis

1963). Iniestectomised subadult Rang nigromeacu-

fata i) bas been demonstrated that nuptial pads

developed following the administration of testo-

Slerone 15 pg/e body weight for 30 days (Ilwasawa

& Kobayashi 1985),

‘There appear to be few studies of the ultra-

structure of the surface architecture of nuptial pads.

* Depariment of Zoolpgy, University of Adelaide, Box 498

CPO, Adelaide, S. Aust, SOO.

Jleicheri, LL.

There is. an SEM illustration of the nuptial pad in

the pipid Xenopus laevis (Karabuchi & Inoue L981),

whilst Zweifel (1983) has documented differences

between two Papuan species of the hylid genus

Nyetiniystes.

As a part of a continuing interest in the phylo-

geneli¢ relationships of Australian hylid and lepto-

dactylid frogs we examined a diverse selection of

species to document the surface architecture of

nuptial pads, atid to explore the potential applica-

tion of any variability as a fasonomi¢ character,

Material and Methods

Representatives were examined of adult males

with pigmented nuptial pads of the follawing five

genera and 36 species: Family Hylidae: Cuclorana

australis, C. lorizipes, C. novaehollandiac, C

vagitus, Liloria adelaidensis, L. ongiana, L. bicalor,

lL. booradlengensis, L. caeruleu, L. chloris, L.

coplandi, L. fallax, L. frevcineti, L. gracilenta, L.

inermys, L, (nfrafrenata, L. latopalmata, L, lesueuri,

L. meiriana, £, microbelos, L. nannotis, L. nasuta,

L, nyakalensis, L. pallida, L. peroni, £, rubella, L,

spencerl, L. splendida, L. tarnieri, L.

woljulumensis; Family Leptadactylidae: Lechriodtes

melanopyga, LimnodPnustes

convextusculus, L£. ornatus, L. speneeri,

Neobatrachus pictus.

All of the Specimens used in this study had been

killed in a 3% solution of chloral hydrate, fixed in

4% formalin and stored in 65% alcohol. Following

removal from the thumb the nuptial pads were

transferred (o absolute alcohol for a minimum

period of 12 hr, air dried, mounted and coated with

15 nm carbon and 20 nm gold/palladium (80:20),

and viewed in an ETEC scanning electron

microscope. In all of the specimens selected the

nuptial pad was black.

38 M. J TYLER & K. LLUNGERSHAUSEN

Estimates of the frequency of the components

upon each pad were obtained by counting within

a transparent acetate grid (usually with a surface

area equivalent to 100 ,2), placed in random

positions upon photographs of the pad structure.

Results

In each of the species examined the surface of

the nuptial pad was found to be composed of

numerous, similar, multicellular structures,

Interspecific variation involved the number of cells

incorporated in each elevated structure, the nature

of the surface, and the density of the elevations.

Amongst the species examined we observed the

following seven structural forms:

(1) Large spines (Fig, 1)—very broad spines, each

measuring approximately 200 , across the base;

each terminating in a distinct papilla,

Figs 1-2. Nupuat pad architecture: |, large spines in Lteria

nennolis (seale bar « 100); 2, large thorns in Lechriodis

melanapy ea (scale bars 10 je),

(2) Luree thorns (Fig. 2)—ecurved, thorn-like

structures 50 « in diameter at the base and 75 yy

high, and terminating ina Sharp cone,

(3) Conical elevations (Fig, 3)—conical elevations

25 j. broad at the base and 30 y high, and

bearing sparse, short projections.

(4) Radial processes (Fig, 4)—a series of separate,

projecting processes arranged radially around

a central spine. Some of the processes are

slightly dilated at their extremities. Each process

is approximately 20 « in length.

(5) Alary processes (Fig, 5)—large, curved, wing-

like projections,

(6) Papillae (Fig. 6)—dense papillae borne on short

processes, each of which is 20-30 4 diameter.

(7) Rosettes (Fig. 7)—regularly or irregularly

arranged projections covering the entire surtace

of the elevation.

In addition to each of these symmetrical

structures we also observed in various species

occasional preparations in which the structures were

irregular (Fig, 8), compared with the normal

symmetrical condition (Fig, 9),

Systematic Account

Family: Hylidae

Cyelorana Steindachner

All four species exhibited nuptial elevations in

the fori of rosettes as depicted in Fig. 7, The

density of elevations ranged from 106/mm? in C.

australis to 235/mm- in C. /ongipes.

Litoria Twehudi

Three distinct forms of elevation are exhibited in

this series. Firstly, large spines in L. nannolis

(15/mm2) (Fig. 10) and L. nyakalensis (in which

resolution is inadequate to calculate density). The

second form is that of rosettes in L. buoroo-

longensis (07/mm?), L. coplandi (218/nium*) and

L. lesueuri (167/mm*),

The remaining species of Litoriv examined all

exhibited papillae: 1. udelaidensis (191/mm*), 4,

angiana (120/mm2), L. bicolor (200/mm*), L.

caerulea (92/mm?), L, chlorix (164/mm2), L. fallax

(110/mm?), L. freveineri (188/mm?), L, gracifenta

(225/mm2), L. latepalmata (195/mm?), L-

infrafrenala (68/mm), L. inermis (280/mm?), 1.

microbelos (222/mm*), L. meiriana (278/om*), b

nasuta (104/mm?), 1, pallida (232/mivi’), L. perani

(172/mm2), L. rubella (237/mm2), L, spencer’!

(61/mm2), L. tornieri 153/mm2), Lo woljulumensis

(158/mm?2) (Pig. 11).

'L itaria spéetieceri Dubois (1984) is a replacement name feir

L. burrowst (Spencer) preoccupied,

FROG NUPTIAL PADS i

bigs 3-5. Nuptial pad architeciure: 3, conical elevations

in Leehriodus fletchert (scale bare 10 py 4, radial

processes in Lininadyvnastes spenceri (scale bar» 10 ja);

S, alary processes in Limnodynastes ornatus (scale

bar. 10 yl.

Figs 6-7. Nuptial pad architecture: 6, papillae in Liforia

hooroolangeasis (scale bar=l0 yy 7, rasetees in Ly

nasuta (scale bar 10 y),

Family: Leptodactylidae

Lechriodus Boulenger

The two species examined have different forms

of nuptial elevations: L. fletcher comeal elevations

(96/mm?) (Fig. 12) and L, melunopyea large

thorns (33/mim?) (Fig. 2).

Limnedvnasres Fitzinger

The three species appear to passess distinet types

of nuptial elevations: L. spencer? radial processes

(221/mm?), 1. ornatus alary processes (212/mm?)

(Pig. 13) and, although the resolution is poor, L.

convexiusculus appear to exhibit papillae.

Neobatrachus Peters

The single spectes examined (N, picts) exhibits

nuptial elevations in the form al rosettes

(134/mm*),

40 M. J. TYLER & K. LUNGERSHAUSEN

Figs 8-9, Nuptial pad architecture in Litoria caerulea: 8, symmetrical form (scale bar=10 y; 9, irregular structures

presumed to be associated with degeneration of the nuptial pad (scale bar=10 1).

Figs 10-13. Nuptial pad architecture: 10, Litoria nannotis (scale bar=100 y); ll, L. wotjulumensis (scale bar =10 p);

12, Lechriodus fletcheri. The arrow points to an individual squamous epithelial cell (scale bar=10 »); 13,

Limnodynastes ornatus (scale bar=10 ,).

FROG NUPTIAL PADS 4)

Discussion

We have demonstrated that in the species of

Australopapuan hylid and leptodaetylid frogs

examined the elaboration of the surface of the pad

may be highly complex. We cannot exclude the

possibility that some of the forms of elaboration

that we have observed such as that of Limmno-

dynastes ornatus and L. spenceri, represent

intermediate stages in the development of other

forms, but we suggest that the irregular form of the

elevations upon the pad observed in some prepara-

tions (e.g. Fig. 8 and Zweifel 1983, Figs 7 and 13)

represent regression of the pad prior to sloughing

and not the perfectly formed pads,

Zweitel (1983) was the first contributor to note

interspecific variation in the frequency of the

elevated structures upon nuptial pads, citing counts

of 700/mm? for Nyetinnystes trachydermis and N,

disrupta. Our data range from 15/mm+ for Litoria

nannotis to 278/mm* for L. meiriana. At the

extremes of the range there is litle doubt that the

differences between the figures are significant

between species, but the lower end of the scale is

no more than a quantification of the differences

in Structure obvious to the naked eye.

We experienced great difficulty in obtaining good

quality images and were unable with a dissecting

microscope to eliminate preparations disintegrating

prior to sloughing. We did not find any features

distinguishing hylid trom leptodactylid frogs, and

there seems little likelihood of SEM appearance of

nuptial pads providing a simple tool for studies af

phylogenetic relationships in these families.

Acknowledgment

We are indebted to the staff of the Electron

Optical Unit of the University of Adelaide for

technical advice. Figures ]-7 are the work of Ruth

Evans and the manuscript was (yped by Sandra

Lawson. The work was undertaken with the support

ofan Australian Research Grants Scheme award to

M, J, Tyler and M. Davies.

References

Drewes, R, C. (1984) A phylovenetic analysis of the

Hyperoliidae (Anura): treefrogs of Africa, Madagascar

and the Seychelles Islands, Occ, Pup. Cal. Acad. Sc,

139, 1-70.

Duiiow, A. (984) Miscellanea nomenclatorica batra-

chologica [L.4/vres 3, 83-84.

DuetiMan, W. E. (1970) The hylid frogs of Middle

America. Vol. |. Monogr, Mus. Nat. Flist. Univ, Kansas,

Iwasawa, H. & Asai, O. (1959) Histological observations

on the seasonal change of the tess and the rhumb pad

in the frog, Rana nigramuculuta. 1 Fac. Sci. Niigata

Univ, Ser 2, 2(6), 215-219,

& KOBAYASHI (1985) Testosterone dose for the

development of male sexual charaeters in young Rana

nigromuaculata Trogs, Sei. Rep. Niigatu Univ. Ser. D

(Biology) 22. |-6.

KarABLCHI, 5, & INOUE, S. (1981) Small spiny projections

in the epidermis of the mature Yenopus laevis: Annet

Zool. Jap. 5403), 182-190.

Liu, C. C. (1935) Types of vocal sac in the Salientia.

Proce. Baston Soe. Nat. Hist. 41(3), 19-40.

PARARKKAL, P. PF. & ELiis, R. A. (1963) A eyiochemical

and electron microscopic study of the thumb pad in

Rana pipiens. Exp, Cell Res. 32, 280-288.

Tytler, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the genus

Fiyla, Zool. Verh, 96, 1-203,

(1971) The phylogenetic signilicance of vocal sac

structure in bylid frogs, Univ Kansas Phi, Mus. Nat,

Flist. 19(4), 319-360.

(1972) Superficial mandibular musculature, vocal

sacs and the phylogeny of Australo-Papuan

leptodactylid frogs. Rec. S. Aust. Mis. 19), 1-20,

ZWeltet, R, G. (1983) Two new hylid frogs from Papua

New Guinea and a discussion of the Nyertmystes papua

species group, Ammer Mus, Novir, 2759, 1-18-

COLEOPTERA, SCORPIONIDA AND REPTILIA COLLECTED IN

PITFALL TRAPS IN ENGELBROOK NATIONAL TRUST RESERVE,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY G. H. BAKER

Summary

Engelbrook National Trust Reserve is an open forest of Eucalyptus obliqua and E. baxteri in the Mt

Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Pitfall trapping there over a one year cycle yielded 21 species of

beetles active on the soil surface. Celibe (=Saragus) simplex (Tenebrionidae) was especially

common. Few predatory beetles (Carabidae, Staphylinidae) were trapped. One species of scorpion

(Urodacus manicatus), five species of lizard (Lampropholis guichenoti, Leiolopisma trilineata,

Lerista bougainvillii, Hemiergis decresiensis, Aprasia striolata) and one frog (Pseudophryne) were

also trapped.

COLEOPTERA, SCORPIONIDA AND REPTILIA COLLECTED IN PITFALL TRAPS

IN ENGELBROOK NATIONAL TRUST RESERVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by G. H, BAKER*

Summary

KAKeR, G. A, (1986) Coleoptera, Senrpionida und Reprilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook Nutional

Trust Reserve, South Australia. Pras, Ro Soe. S. Aust, 110(1), 43-48, 30 May, 1986.

Engelbrook National Trost Reserve is an oper forest of Evecalyptey obliqua and BE. baxteri in the Mi

Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Pitfall rapping there over a one year cycle yielded 21 species of beerles

active on the soil surface, Ce/ibe (= Surdgus) simplex (Tenebrionidae) was especially common. Few predatory

heeties (Carabidae, Staphylinidae) were trapped, One species of scorpion (Uradacus municatus), live species

of tigard (Lamprophols sutehenoti, Leivlopisnia trilineata, Lerista boueainvilllt, Hemiergis decresiensts,

‘prasig striotia) and one frog (Pseudophryne bitiront) were also trapped.

C, simplex was most commonly trapped during summer, Cl manicatus (mostly male adults) in lite

spring and early autumn, Z. fri/ineata in spring, and L, euichenort in late spring-early suramer on a North-west

slope aod late summer-early auiumn on a south-west slope. Some beetles (e.g. Licinoma meridiana

(lenebrianidae)), mygalomorph spiders (Araneida) and harvestmen (Phalangida) were trapped mare often

on the south-west slope than on the north-west slope. L. euichenodi also was trapped more often on [hte

south-west slope but the reverse was the ease for L. trilineata. Overall, arancomorph spiders Were mare

commonly trapped than mygalomorphs but the latter predominated during late autunin to mid winter.

Phalangida were mostly trapped in early spring.

Kiy Worns: Coleoptera, Scorpionida, Reptilia, pitfall traps, slope aspeer.

Introduction

Open lorest dominated by messmate stringy-bark

(Eucalyptus obliqua L'Herit.) is common through-

out the Mt Lofty Ranges, South Australia

(Boomsma & Lewis 1979). Such forest occurs in

Engelbrook National Trust Reserve, Bridgewater

where several biological studies have been made in

recent years (Lee & Wood 1968; Wood & Lee 1971;

Lee & Butler 1977; Lee & Correll 1978; Baker 1978a,

b, 19794, b, 1985a, b,c; Theodorou & Bowen 1982:

Hutson & Veitch 1983; Greenslade 1985; Hutson

1985), These studies mainly have concerned nutrient

cycling, Ihe eflects of fire an microbjal populations

and the ecology of some of the arthropods (Acari,

Collembola, lsoptera, Diplopoda, Hymenoptera).

Studies are curremily. being made on the effects of

fire On litter fall, lider kayer mass and the numbers

of soil ane litter invertebrates in general (B, Hutson

& C. Kirkby, pers. comm,.). This paper extends the

biological Knowledge of Engelbrook Reserve by

reporting. the Coleoptera, Scarpionida and small

Reptilia active on the soil surface. Some data for

the Amphibia, Araneida and Phalangida also are

given and the influence of aspect (the direction of

the slope of the ground) on the numbers of some

of these animals is investigated. The paper is a

product of a study of the predators of the intro-

* Division of Entomology, CSIRO, P.O, Box 2. Glen

Osmond, 5, Aust. 5064.

duced millipede Ommetorulus moreleti; (Lucas)

(Diplopoda;: tulidae} (Baker 1985a).

Stady Site and Methods

Engelbrook Reserve comprises 15.4 ha of &.

obliqua-E. baxteri Benth. association on hilly

country at 320-380 m above sea level, 25 km south-

east of Adelaide (grid reference 1774673 Barker

1:250,000 sheet $1 $4-13 Edition | Series R802), The

soils are shallow, stony, acidic mottled soils formed

on Proterozoic argillaceous sandstone of the

Adelaide system and classified as yellow podzols

(Stace ef al. 1968) and as Dy3,81 in Northcote's key

(Northcote 1971), The average annual rainfall is

1050 mm (c.f. 1120 mm recorded during this stucy)

Common understorey shrubs include Aanksia

marginata, Acacia, Hakea, Leptospermum and

Aibbertia spp. (Baker 19788). Much of the Reserve

has been burnt by bushfire in recent years but the

site reported here has fot been burnt tor at least

35 years,

Forty pitfall traps (plastic jars 9 em diameter,

9 om deep) were set Mush with the soil surface in

each of two areas, Both were on sloping ground:

one faced north-west, the other south-west. The

Iraps were set about 10 m apart in transects in

March 1983 and were checked weekly until March

1984. Each trap was. covered by a ceramic tile

(15 © 15 em) set approximately 2 em above the trap

G. H, BAKER

TAnte |. Nunthers of Coloeplera trapped in Engelbrook Reserve:

Slope

North-

West

South-

West

Month

i F MAMI IA 38S ON DP

Curabidae

Promecoderus albaniensiy (Castelnau)

Simedontus sp.

Secal(ophus ausiralis (Hope)

Surticus sp.

—mthe—

Staphylinidae

Dabra sp.

Aleocharinae sp.

—-oS

Scarahacidae

Scitala sp.

Heleronyx sp

Liparetrus sp,

Cryptodus sp.

Elateridac

Agrypnus sp.

Conoderus. sp

Ss re

beatlh bond

Tenebrionicdae

Celibe simplex (Plupe)

Celibeé costatus (Solier)

Sefrotrany parallela Germar

Adelium similatum Germar

Livinama meridiana Carter

Otrintus behri (German)

Metistere sp,

Curculionidae

Spl

Sp.2

Total

102

Nae

a La pee

onl

Whe

—i—

haw

59 64

2 79

“

12) 18

on three nails. These tiles prevented rain and litter

from fouling the traps. Animals longer than 3 mm

were collected. Smaller animals were ignored.

Lizards were released near where they were trapped.

Scorpions were frequently trapped, Each indivi-

dual was sexed and the length of its carapace

measured to an accuracy of 0.1 mm using an eye-

piece micrometer.

Results

Coleaptera

Table | lists the numbers of adults of each species

af Coleoptera trapped on the different slopes,

Seasonal incidence in the traps (both slopes

combined) is also given. The majority of the beetles

(90.6%) Were trapped in the warmer, drier months

of the year (November-March), Beetles were more

commonly trapped on the south-west slope than on

the north-west slope (x7 =15.8, p<0.05) but species

umbers were the same on both slopes (n=17). The

tetiebrionid Celibe {—Saragus) simplex (Hope) was

by far the most commonly trapped beetle, but there

was no significant difference in its total numbers

on the two slopes (x*=3.03, p>0.05). Another

tenebrionid, Licinoma meridiana Carter, and an

unidentified species of Aleocharinae (Staphylinidae)

were very much more commonly trapped on the

south-west slope,

Seorpionida

Only one species of scorpion (Urodacus

manicatus (Thorell)) was trapped. Similar numbers

were trapped on the south-west and north-west

slopes (Table 2) (x2=0.8, p>0.0S). Most were

trapped from late spring to early autumn, with

peaks in November-December arid March (Fig. 1).

The majority had carapace lengths of 6-7 mm

(Fig. 2). Sexes were discernible in scorpions with

carapace length >5,4 mm. Most scorpions were

males (83.3% on the south-west slope; 81.8% on

the north-west slope). Mast females (70.0%) had

a Spermatocleutrum (vaginal plug). This indicates

mating had occurred (Koch 1977). None of the five

females with a carapace length <5.8 mm (see

Fig. 2) had a spermatocleutrum. All the males had

mature paraxial organs and were therefore adult.

Araneida and Phalangida

Araneida and Phalangida were trapped on both

slopes, but these groups have not been identified

to species. More Araneida were collected on the

south-west slope than on the north-west slope

GROUND FAUNA OF ENGELBROOK RESERVE 45

20 (a)

20 -(b)

40r (c)

Numbers trapped / week

oOo

i=]

J FMAM J J

Month

AS OND

Fig. 1, Numbers of Urodacus manicatus (a), Leiolopisma

trilineata (b) and Lampropholis guichenoti (c) trapped

per week on the north-west (shaded) and south-west

(open) slopes in Engelbrook Reserve.

Bo /-

50+

3B 40+

2 20-

iol

(Table 2) (y7=5.4, p<0.05). This difference is

more attributable to variation in the numbers of

Mygalomorphae than Araneomorphae (Table 2).

Overall, more Araneomorphae were trapped on

both slopes than Mygalomorphae (Table 2). The

latter however predominated during late autumn to

mid-winter (April to July) (Fig. 3).

TABLE 2, Numbers of Arachnida, Amphibia and Reptilia

trapped in Engelbrook Reserve.

Slope

North- South-

West West

Arachnida

Scorpionida

Urodacus manicatus (Thorell) 125 111

Phalangida 17 58

Araneida

Mygalomorphae 108 146

Araneomorphae 197 219

Total 305 365

Amphibia

Pseudophryne bibroni Giinther 7 2

Reptilia

Lampropholis guichenou

(Dumeéril & Bibron) 331 499

Leiolopisma trilineata (Gray) 161 78

Lerista bougainvillii (Gray) 21 Il

Hemiergis decresiensis

(Fitzinger) 12 12

Aprasia Sstriolata (Liitken) 1 0

Total 526 597

5 6 7 8

Carapace length (mm)

Fig. 2. Size (carapace length) distribution of all Urodacus manicatus trapped in Engelbrook Reserve, Females (shaded),

males (open), sex not determined (hatched).

46 Gi, HW, BAKER

Phalangida were more commonly collected on the

south-west slope than on che north-west slope

(Table 2) (2 -22.4, p<0.05), They were mostly

trapped in early spring (September) (Fig. 3).

Reprilia and Ariphibia

Five species of lizard were trapped (Yable 2). The

skink Lamprapholis euichenoti (Dumeri! & Bibran)

was by far the most common, I was more often

found en the south-west slope (x- =34.0, p<0,05)

whilst the reverse was the case fur another skink.

Leiplopisme trilineata (Gray) (x2 =31,3, p< 0.05).

Overall, lizards were more commonly trapped on

the south-west slope (x? —4.4, p<.05),

L. guichenoti and L- trilineata were callected in

all months of the year (Tig. 1), but especially from

September to March. &. Irilineata was most

common at the start of this warm, dry penod whilst

1. ekichenafi was most common later, especially

on the south-west slope. The numbers of the other

species rapped were too low to warrarit illustration

of seasonal trends: Lerista bougainvillit (Gray) in

all months from Navember to April, Hemiersis

decresiensis (Pitanger) in all months from October

to April and Aprasia strialata Liitken In October

only, Five other species of repule, Crevrorus robusins

Storr, Tilique seincoides (Shaw), Amphibolurus

harbaius (Cuvier), Phyllodactylus marmaratus

(Gray) and Pseudechis porphyriacus (Shaw) were

seen but nat trapped,

70 - lal

Numbers trapped / weels

1FMAMI J AS ON D

Month

bio. 3, Nurmbers of Mygalomorphae (aj, Araneomarphc

(b) aud Phulangida (eptrapped per week on (he gotthe

west tshaded! snd south-west (upen) slopes in

Ungetbraok Reserve

The toadlel Psevdophryne bibroni Gunther was

collected during June, August lo November and

Janwary,

Discussion

Animals active On the soil surface perform an

important role in nutrient cycling (Wallwork 1976),

They are also useful indicators of environmental

disturbance (Grecnstade & Greenslade 1984),

Despite these benefits, few contumunities of soil and

liller animals have been studied in S. Aust., and

eormparisons with the data in the present paper are

impossible, However, the fauna of jarrah (EZ.

inareineta) woodland and forest in Western

Australia has beeri well studied (MeNamara 1955;

Springett 1976, 1979; Koch & Majer 1980; Majer

1984; Majer & Koch 1982; Abbott 1984). Wherens

predatory beetles (c.g. Carabidae, Staphylinidae)

constituted only a small proportion of the total

numbers of beetles trapped in Engelbrook Reserye

(6.9% on the north-west slope, 26.5% on the south-

west slope), they comprised 73.7; 82,8 and 92.6%

of the catch in three jarrah habitats (Majer & Koch

1982). Qn the other hand, mygalomorph spiders

constituted 35.4 {north-west slope) and 40.0%.

(south-west slope} of the Araneida trapped in

Engelbrook but Koch & Majer (1980) found they

were negligible (< 2%). These apparent differences

in the fauna may reflect real variation from one type

of forest to another. They may also reflect

differences in lrapping procedure: Majer & Koch

included a mixture of alconal and glycerol as a

preservative in their traps which is known ta

influence the numbers of invertebrates |rapped

(Greenslade & Greenslade 1971), There is a need for

uniformity of sampling methods in future studies

which wil then assist faunal comparisons.

Litthe has been published concerning the

intluence Of aspect on the abundance of animals

(Tolbert 1975), although there is much information

which demonstrates its influence on plants (Ayyad

& Dix 1964; Odum 1959; Whittaker 1970). In Lhe

mediterranean chmate of the Mt Lofty Ranges, soil

moistures and temperatures are rast extreme on the

poorly insolated southern slopes of hills in winter

(high moisture, low temperature) and on the

northern slopes in summer which are exposed to

hot, dry winds (low moisture, high tempenalare),

Effects on the purmbers of surlace active aninvals

are therefore to be expected, Differences deman-

strated here for beetles, lizards, spiders and

phalangids as well ag termites (Wood & Lee 1971),

millipedes (Baker 1985b) and ants (Greenslade |985)

illustrate the Importance of dacumenting aspect 1

fufure surveys of fauna and in studies of Lhe

population dynamics of individual species.

GROUND FAUNA OF ENGELBROOK RESERVE 47

Jenebrionids are common in arid habitats

(Britton 1970; Wallwork 1970, 1976}. The

predominance of such beetles, especially G simplex,

in the catch at Engelbrook Reserve and a similar

finding by Majer & Koch 1982) for Svmperes sp.

in jarrah woodland suggests chat tenebrionids can

be imporlant elemerits of the fauna of temperate

forests and woodlands as well,

The seorpian UL manicatus is distributed frosn

south-eastern Queensland, through N.SW., A.C

and Vicloria io Yorke Peninsula and Kangaroo

Island (Koch 1977). The lf municatus al

Engelbrook Reserve are therefore close to the

western limit of the species’ distributian. Koh

(1977) listed the carapace length of adult males as

6,0+038 mm (x4 5.E.) (range 5.7-6.3 mm) and

females 6.7+0,61 (5.8-7.3 mm). However, adull

males up to 7,0 nim und females up to 7.5 nim were

trapped at Engelbrook Reserve.

U. manicarus lives in shallow burrows beneath

stones (Southeott 1955, Koch 1978). Smith (F946)

sainpled U. manicalus beneath stones in Canberra.

He. found that mating occurred during Qetober/

November atid parturition 16 months later in

February/March, Young mainly dispersed from

their mother’s burrow from mid-March 19 May, The

sex Falio of the young was even, but for adults there

were three females for every male, Smith (1966)

areued that immatures and ddult males were more

active than adult females because when marked

beneath rocks they remained there for shorter

periods of time. A predominance of female LU

manicalus tas been observed beneath rocks in

Engelhrook Reserve (Baker unpubl, data), The

trapping reported |jere confirms that acull males

are more active than adult females. Presumably the

sponge peak in numbers af &¢ manicafus jn the (raps.

reflects activity assdciated with the mating season,

The significance of the aulumn peak is not

understood, Very few immature UL marticutes were

trapped (four in Eebruary and one in August,

October and Noyember). There was nu evidence to

suggest an autumn dispersal of young as suggested

by Smith (1966).

Litde is known of the ecoloay or life history of

the skinks “£. guichenoti and L, Irilineata

(Rounsevell 1978; Cogger 1979; Greer 1980).

Therefore an explanation of the higher numbers of

L. guichenati in the traps on the south-west slope

and (he converse for L. tilineara cannot be given-

Iris Worth nating however that L. euichenati was

most often trapped in summer-early autumn and

L. trilineata in spring, Perhaps temperatures on the

north-west slope were higher than optimum for

active £, guichenoli, and temperatures on the south-

west slope were lower than optimum for active Z,

frilineata, Both species teed on a variety al

Coleoptera, Araneida and Dermaptera (Baker

1979h). The possibility that competition for food

influences the relative abundances of L. giuichenoti

and 1, érilineala merils altention.

Acknowledgments

Liltank Margrit Keck for assistance jn) Checking

the pitfall traps. The National Trust of South

Australia kindly granted permission (0 work in

Engelbrook Reserve, Eric Matthews, Barry Moore

and David Lee identified many species

References

Annoy, L. (1984) Changes in the abundance and activity

of certain soil and tiller fauna in the jarrah forest af

Western Australia after a moderate intensity fire Aus.

4, Sail Res, 22, 463-469,

Ayyap, M.A, G. & Dik, R.1- (1964) An analysis of a

vegelation-inieroen\ironmental complex on prairie

dopes in Saskatchewan. feol Menage 34, 42L-d42,

Bakken, Go, (197Ka) The post-embryanie developaren|

and life history of che millinede, Onivearaiudis mareient

(Diptopoday lulidae), introduced i sourh-castorn

Austria. £ Zool, ond, 186, 209-22k.

~ (978b) The population dynamics of ihe millipede

Onmatoiulus moreferi (Diplopada’ lulidae), .. Zeal,

Lond. Vt, 229-242.

(19798) The aetivily patterns of Odiietelnulus

moreloii (Diplopeda: tulidac) in Soar Australia £

Zool, Loe. VB8, (74-183.

(1979b) Eruptions of the introduced millipede,

Onmmatoiulus mtareletii (Diplopoda, [alidae), in

Australia, with gotes on the aalive Aas/raliasemn

castaneui (Diplopoda, Paradoxosomatidae), §. text

Nat. &3, 36a.

QU8Sa) Predators. of Ontiranaiulus rviureletsl

(Licas) (Diplopoda;: Julidae) in Portugal und Australia,

/ Aust eny, Sag, 4, 247-252,

(1983b) Diplopoda of o dry selerophyliods

woodland (Eneulyptir vbliqua-E, buster) in (be Mount

Lofty Ranges, Sonjh Austrailia. HIT Sch. Biol. Bull.

Nu 12; S4-Se.

— — {)983c) The distribution and ahundance of the

Portugese millipede Omertafeiulys mureletii

(Diplopada: Tuhdaey in Australia, Aus J Beal 1,

249-259.

Boosisma, ©, D. & Liwis, SM, B. (L979) “The native forest

dnd woodlind vegetation of Sourh Aucsimlia.” (Woods

afd Forests Departrnent|, South Australia) Mullecin 24

BRITTON, EB (197D) Coleopiera te CSIRO, “Une insects

of Australia,” pp, 495-62) (Melbourne Univ. Press,

Mecthourne},

CmooeR, H. OG. UY83) “Reptiles and aniphibians of

Australia,” Ord ed, (A, H. & AL WL Reed, Sydney).

Cerens) Ane, P & GREENSLADE, Po. M_ (IS 71) The use

of bairs ond preservatives in pitfall traps. J dus, enh

Seu W, 253-260.

CREINS) ADE, Po J, AT. (1985) Sone effects of season and

the geopgraphical aspect on ants (Hymenoptera;

hormicidac) in rhe Mr Lotiy Ranges, Sewih Australia.

Trans. R. Soe. 8. Ausf, 109, 17-23,

& GREENS AGE, FL (1984) Hwertebrates and

cnViotnental assessment, Eavironnertund Planning

a, 13-15,

48 G. H. BAKER

Greer, A. E. (1980) Critical thermal maximum

temperatures in Australian scincid lizards: their

ecological and evolutionary significance. usr. J Zool.

28, 91-102.

Hutson, B. R. (1985) Rates of litterfall and organic

matter turnover at three indigenous South Australian

forests. Aust. J Ecol, 10, 351-359.

& Verten, L. G, (1983) Mean annual population

density of Collembola and Acari in the soil and litter

of three indigenous South Australian forests, Aust. J.

Eeol. %, 113-126.

Kocn, L. E. (1977) The taxonomy, geographic

distribution and evolutionary radiation of Australo-

Papuan scorpions, Rec. West, Aust. Mus. 5, 83-367.

Kocu L. E. (1978) A comparative study of the structure,

function and adaptation to different habilats of burrows

in the scorpion genus Cradacus (Scorpionida,

Scorpionidae). Ree. Mest, Aust, Mus. 6, 119-146,

& Maser, J. D. (1980) A phenological

investigation of various invertebrates in forest and

woodland areas in the south-west of Western Australia.

JR, Soc, West, Aust. 63, 21-28.

Lee. K. BE. & Bute, J, A. A, (1977) Termites, soil

organic matter decomposition and nutrient cycling.

Ecol, Bull. (Stockholm) 25, 544-548,

—— & Corre, R. L. (1978) Litter fall and its

relationship to nutrient cycling in a South Australian

dry sclerophyll forest, Aust, J. Ecol. 3, 243-252.

& Woon, T. G. (1968) Preliminary studies of the

role of Nasuritermes exitiosus (Hill) in the cycling of

organic matter in a yellow podzolic soil under dry

sclerophy!! forest in South Australia, Trans, LX Intern.

Congr. Sail Sei, 2, 1-18,

Maier, J. D. (984) Short-term responses of soil and

litter invertebrates to a cool autumn burn in jarrah

(Eucalyptus marginata) forest in Western Australia.

Pedobjologia 26, 229-247.

—_ & Kocn, L. E. (1982) Seasonal activity of

hexapods in woodland and forest leaf litter in the south-

west of Western Australia, 2 R. Sac, West, Aust. 65,

37-45,

McNamaka, P. J, (1955) A preliminary investigation of

the fauna of humus layers in the jarrah forest of Western

Alistralia. Comm, Aust, For Timber Bur Leafl. No, TI

NortHoore, Ko H, (1971) “A factual key for the

recognition of Australian soils.” 3rd ed (Rellim Press,

Adelaide),

Opum, E. P1959) “Fundamentals of ecology” 2nd ed,

(W. B. Saunders, Philadelphia).

ROUNSEVELL, D. E, (1978) Communal egg-laying in the

iain skink Leto/opisma trilineata, Tusm, Nat. $2,

SmirH, G.. T. (1966) Observations on the life history of

the scorpion Uredacus abrupius Pocock (Scorpioni-

dae), and ar analysis of its home sites, lust. J. Zool.

14, 383-398.

Soutucorr, R. V, (1955) Some observations on the

biology, including mating and other behaviour of the

Australian scorpion Uradacus abruptus Pocock. Trans.

R. Soe. §. Ausi, 78, 145-154.

Sprincert, JA. (1976) The effect of prescribed burning

on the soil fauna and on litter decomposition in Western

Australian forests, Aust. J. Ecol. t, 77-82.

(1979) The effects of a single hot summer fire on

soil fauna and on Jitter decomposition im jarrah

(Eucalyplus mareinaia) forest in Western Australia.

Aust, J Evol. 4, 279-291.

Stace, H,. C, T., Hunsre, G. D,, Brewer, R.,

Norrucore, K. H., SLEEMAN, J. R., Mutcany, M, J.

& Havtsworrn, E. G. (1968) "A handbook of

Australian soils.” (Rellin Press, Adelaide),

THEODoRGU, C & Bowrn, G. D. (1982) Effects of a

bushfire on the nricrobiology of a South Australian low,

open (dry scleraphyll) forest soil, Aust, For Res. 12,

317-328,

ToLrerr, W. W. (1975) The effects of slope exposure on

arthropod distribution patterns, Amer. Midl. Nar. 94,

38-53.

Wariwork, J. A. (1970) “Ecology of soil animals.”

(McGraw-Hill, London).

(1976) “The distribution and diversity of soil

fauna.” (Academic Press, London).

WHITTAKER, R. (1970) “Communities

ecosystems.” (Macmillan, New York).

Woop, T. G, & Let, K. E. (1971) Abundance of mounds

and competition among colonies of some Australian

termite species, Pedobiologia 11, 341-366.

and

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL, 110, PAKT 2

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS OF SMALL

FRESHWATER FISH IN THE RIVER MURRAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY L. N. LLOYD & K. F. WALKER

Summary

Most species of fish native to the lower Murray have declined over the past century, probably as a

result of habitat changes and interactions with exotic species. Here, the range and relative

abundance of the small species (17 native and two introduced) are assessed from collections made

in 1982-84. Four habitat types are defined from 39 field sites. “River-edge” habitats have a more

diverse assemblage (mean 7.6 species) than “backwater” (3.5) or “stream” habitats (2.6). Streams

contain a distinct assemblage, but billabongs and backwaters have a subset species found in river-

edge habitats. Distributions generally are patchy and densities are low, and none of the species can

be considered secure. In the lower Murray four species are regarded as “endangered” and five as

“vulnerable”. Surveys are needed to determine the regional status of other Australian freshwater

fish.

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS OF SMALL FRESHWATER FISH IN

THE RIVER MURRAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by L, N. Lloyp & K. Fo WALKER*

Summary

Lroye, LN. & Warker. Ke F (1986) Distribution and conservation status of small treshwater fish in

the River Murray, South Australia. Trans. R, Soe. 8. Ause, 110(2), 49-57, 30 May, 1986.

Most species of fish native to the lower Murvay have deelined aver the past century, probably as a

result of habilat changes and intentions with exotic species, Here, the range and relative abundance of

the small species (17 native and two introdticed) are assessed from collections made in 1982-84. Four habitat

types are defined from 39 lield sites, “Riveredge” habitats have a more diverse assemblage (mean 7.6 species)

thin “backwater” (5.1), “billabong” (3.5) or *stream” habitats (2.6). Streams contain a distinctive assemblage,

but billabonygs and backwaters have a subset of species found in riveredge habitats. Distributions generally

are palehy and densities are low, and none of the species can be considered secure. In the lower Murray

four species are regarded as “endangered” and five as “vulnerable”. Surveys are needed ro determine the

regional status of orhor Australian. Freshwator Fish.

Key Woes: ish, conservation, billabongs, River Murray, South Australia

Introduction

Several authors recently have discussed the

conservation of native Australian freshwater fish

(¢2 Pollard ef al. 1980; Ride & Wilson [982;

Cadwallader ef w/, 1984), Although i 1s widely

believed that many species have declined (ef.

Cadwallader 1979), most supporting evidence i5

circumstantial and ancedotal. Growing interest in

this problem is shown in concern, notably by

government agencies, about the vulnerability of

certain species, and in the appearance of books

concerned with regional faunas (MeDowall 1980;

Allen 1982; Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983),

Most information available for che fish of the

Murray-Darling Basin is for commercial or

recreational species, and very little is known of the

status of the smallest species, sometimes mis-

leadingly called “forage Sish", Llewellyn (1984) and

Cadwallader & Backhouse (1983) mapped the

ranges ol lish in the New South Wales and Victorian

regions respectively, bul (here is no published

information for the Murray in South Australia,

arguably the most modified part of (he river system

(Walker 198], 1982a, b, 1983, 1985), In this paper

we report the status of the small species of the

Murray below the Darling junction, as part of an

investigation of the relationships between small

species Of native and exotic fish in the lower Murray

(Lloyd unpublished).

Methods

The area Surveyed wis the basin of the lower

River Murray (AWRC Basin 1V-26: Dept National

Development 1974), including the main channel,

anabranches (Chowilla and Slaneys creeks),

tributaries (Angas, Finniss and Marne rivers),

backwaters and billabongs. During 1982-84 samples

were taken from 39 stations (Fig, |, Table 1), Four

habital types were defined, viz. “river-edge’

environinenis (along the banks of the main

channel), “backwaters” (slack waters connected Tu

the main channel), “billabongs” (still waters. isolated

fram the main channel except in floods) and

“streams” (small, moderate- to fast-flowing

tributary creeks). All] had some aquatic vegetation,

including stands of emergent and submerged plants.

Mast sites were sampled once or Lwice, but stations

3-7 and 15-18 were visited at abour monthly

intervals. Standard sampling included 10 hauls of

a 2 m seine nef (2 mm mesh), three hauls of a 45

m seine nec (12 tim mesh), a dip-ner collection over

a 10 m strip and, at most sites, three collections

using (raps baited with meat, left overnight,

Fish were identified using the keys of Scall e/ al,

(1974), McDowall (1980) and Cadwallader &

Backhouse (1983), Philypnodon graridiceps (Kret th)

(bigheaded gudgeon), was distinguished from

an undescribed dwarf convener, Carp-gudgeans

were referred to Aypseleoiris Klunzingeri (Ogilby),

although Hoese ev a/, (L980) suggest there are

undescribed species in this taxon. Supplementary

data were obtained from South Australian Museum

records, the published literature and personal

communications.

* Departinent of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O,

Box 498, Adelaide, S Aust. SD0L-

At) LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K. F.

Fig. |. Sites surveyed, 1982-84. See Table 1 for key.

Results

Our collections included 15 of the 17 known

small native fish species of the lower Murray (Table

2), In addition, the exotic mosquitofish, Gambusia

affinis holbrooki (Girard) (see Lloyd & Tomasov

1985), occurred at all sites except Point Sturt and

three small tributaries to Lake Alexandrina (stations

1, 4-9), and goldfish, Carassius auratus L., occurred

at I8 sites.

Discussion

Distribution

The survey suggested that most species are widely

but patehily distributed; examples are H,

klunzingeri, P. grandiceps, Retropinna semoni

(Weber) (Australian smelt), Craterocephalus

sfercusmuscarum (Giinther) (Mitchellian

hardyhead), Melanotaenia splendida fluviatilis

(Castelnau) (crimson-spotted rainbowfish) and

Nematalosa erebi (Gunther) Guvenile bony bream),

Others are restricted either because the species

themselves are uncommon, or because suitable

habitats are uncommon. In the latter category,

species that frequent estuarine areas, for example

Wentworth

Pseudaphritis urvilli (Valenciennes) (congolli),

Pseudogobius olorum (Sauvage) (blue-spot goby}

and Galaxias maculatus (Jenyns) (common

galaxias), are most common in the region near the

river mouth, Further, G. olidus Gtinther (mountain

galaxias) is typical of mountain streams, ar

environment virtually absent from the lower

Murray, and G. rostratus Klunzinger (flatheaded

galaxias) favours the billabongs and backwaters of

the uppermost reaches of the Murray. Another

group of special interest here occurs in the few sites

where exotic species have not penetrated or where

major habitat changes have not occurred. These

include Mogurnda adspersa (Castelnau) (purple-

spotted gudgeon), Nannoperca australis australis

Gunther (pigmy perch) and Gadopsis marmoratus

Richardson (river blackfish).

H. klunzingeri was widespread and showed no

preference among the four habitat types (x? = 6.0,

3 df, n.s.). However, other species did show an

association with river-edge and backwater habitats;

these were G. a. holbrooki (x? = 10, 3 df,

P < 0.05), R. semoni 2 = 17, 3 df, P < 0,01),

P. grandiceps (x22 = 7.6, 2 df, P < 0.05) and

juvenile N. erehi (x* = 8.3, 2 df, P < 0.05).

SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY

Tasle |. Survey Sites, 1982-1984 (see also Fig. 1)

Site No. Site Name Location Habitat Type

| Point Sturt 35°31 139°02' Backwater

2 Finniss R., Tosolints 35°26 138-351 River edge

3 Finniss R., Reedlands 35°25 138°50' River edge

4 Tookayerta Ck, Two Bridges 35°25 138-48" Stream

5 Tookayerta Ck, Tooperang 35°24" J4R°45' Stream

6 Dawson Ck, Sutherlands 35°15' 13p°50° Stream

7 Dawson Ck, HT Reserve 35° 18' (38°51! Stream

8 Angas R., CC Reserve 35°)5> 13854 Stream

9 Angas R., Airport Bndge 38°17 7° 138957" Stream

10 Angas R., Mouth 35°34" 138959" Backwaler

ll Wellington 35°20' 139°23° River edge

12 Swaliport Billabong 35°08) 199°1N' Billabong

13 Zadows Landing 34°58) 139°18 River edge

14 Mannum 34°55° 139°18" River edge

15 Wongulla 34°43" 199°34° River edye

16 Marne R,, Mouth 34°43) 139933) River edge

\7 Marne R., Wombat Reserve 34°18! 139931) Stream

18 Marne K,, Blackhill Reserve 34°42° (39°28 Stream

19 Blanchetown 44°18" 149937" Billabong

20 McBearis Pound 34°12) 139938 Backwater

2 Morgan 34°02) 139°40' Billabong

22 Overland Corner 34°09' 140°20° Backwater

23 Lock 3 oll 140°21 River edge

24 Chambers Ck 34°12) L40°24° Backwater

25 Spectacle Lakes Ck 34°29) 140023 Backwater

26 Dishers Ck Eyap, Basin 34°15) 140°40' Backwater

27 Murray at Dishers Ck Outlet 34°15 140-40 River edge

28 364 Mile Tree 34-07) 140545 Back water

29 375 Mile Tree 34°03) 140-49" Backwater

30 376 Mile Tree 34-0) Tae so! Billabong

3 Chowilla Ck F400" 140" 52° River edge

32 Lock 6 34°00 140-53" Billabong

33 Buityip Reach 33°5h' 140 SS’ River edge

34 Bunyip Reach Homestead 33°59' 140735! Backwater

35 395 Mile Tree 33-58' 140°56' Billabong

36 Sianeys Ck 33°57) 140°56' River edge

37 Border Cliffs 33°59 140° 58° River edge

38 404 Mile Tree 34°01) 14059" River edge

39 405 Mile Tree 34°02) 140° 59 Backwater

Although there are insufficient data for more

statistical comparisons, a few points deserve

comment, © auratus, M. $s. fluviatilis and

Philypnedon sp. (dwart bigheaded gudgeon) all

occurred in three to four habitat types, G.

muculaius, © stercusmusearum and © eyresit

(Steindachner) (Lake Eyre hardyhead) were found

only in river-edge and backwater habitats (and near

the river mouth in ibe case of G. maculatus). P

olorum and FB wrvilli occurred in river-edge

colleetions; most of these were near the Murray

mouth, although a single specimen af P wrvilli was

collected at the Marne jnflow, 215 river-km

upstream, Populations of NM. a, aus/rulis, G.

marmoratus and G. olidus were found only in

stream habitats, allhough two individual No a.

ausiralis were found in river-edwe hubitars near

stream-living populations of that species. No

habitat preferences can be assiened [0 A, castelnaus

G, rostratus or M. adspersa, as too lew specimens

Were found.

River-edge habitats supported sigmifivantly mare

species (mean 7.6, N = 14) than the three other

habitat types (Table 3; ANOVA, F - 10,6 with 3,35

df; P < 0.01), Backwaters had significantly more

species (mean 5.1, N = 11) than billabongs (3,5, 4)

and streams (2.4, 8) (ANOVA, F = 5,7 with 115

df; P < 0,05), Spearman rank correlanons sugest

that billabong and backwater species may he

regarded as a subset of river-edge species

(rho. ~ 0,62 and 0.82 respectively, borh P< 0.05).

There was no significant difference between the

number of specics in billabongs and streams

(ANOVA, F = 1.2 with 1,12 df; P > 0,05), but the

species involved were different, Spearman rank

correlations show that streams had a distinetive fish

fauna, as there were no sighifieant correlations with

assemblages in other habjlats (river-edge v. strearms:

LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K. F.

ion

a aaa ytty ytSsS =n asa nd an

(%0 )0 0 0 0 0 (neuyja}seD) vsvadspp ppusnsoy ‘uoaspns payods-ajdind 6]

(%¢ ) T 0 0 0 I (AevapoeyA) inpujajspo sissoquipy ‘ysied epueyD gt

(%8 ) € £ 0 0 0 UOSPIeYOIY SsnJoLolsDUE SISdOPDH “YSIJAIR|Q JA LT

pasaduepuq (%S1) 9 t 0 0 z JYIUND sypaysno syosisno vIJadouuny *yd19d Award 9]

(%¢ )Z 0 0 0 Z (adeanes) winsojo snigosopnasg ‘kqo# yods-anjq ¢}

(%8 ) € 0 0 0 € (squuatouaTeA) pain situydppnasg ‘iJOsUod P|

(%0 ) 0 0 0 0 0 JISUIZUNJY SMIDLISOs SDIXD]DD ‘seIxeles papeay-}elj €]

(%O1) P 0 0 ra z (suduar) snyppnomiu soixnjoy ‘serxeyes uOUIWIOD Z]

a[qesaujn, (%E1) S ¢ 0 0 0 JayIUNy snpiyo spixnjoy ‘seixeyes urequnow [[

(%>1) 9 0 0 Z P (sguysepulars) Msasda Snjpydasodajo41D *peaydpsey 31Xq xe] OL

a1ey (%1Z) 8 | 0 € + ‘ds uopouddjiyd ‘uoaspns papeay-siq jIeMp 6

(%1€) ZI 0 0 ba 8 (ayIUND) wnsvIsnuisnosais SnjoYydaro0sa}DID

‘peayApiey UelfeyouW g

(% SE) ST 0 z ¢ 6 (neujaised) siivianyf opipualds piuanjounjayy

‘yslyymoqured payjods-uosutio 7

(% 9%) 81 I € s 6 SNOBUUT] SMIDAND SNISSDIDD *YSIYP[OB, 9

(%9F) 81 0 I 9 Il (4ayIUND) Iqasa DsojDI DIAN “WIRI1Q AUD ¢

(%1S) OZ 0 Z 9 ZI (4jJ94y) Sdaoipuns3 uopouddiyg ‘uoadspns papeay-3iq p

(GPS) IZ I Zz g €l (aga Ay) IMowas duUIdosjay *)\[aWS UeTesISnHYy €

(% LL) OF t ¢ 6 ZI (Aq[t8Q) Masuizunpy stajoajasdapy ‘uoaspns dies Z

uOWLUOS) (%Z8) ZE Z 9 ol tl (prelIg) 1yoosgsoy siulffo pisnquivy ‘ystyounbsow, |

wees suogeyig Jovem yoeg adpq 1oAry

(%}) [BIOL yenqey sad

SMBS quasaid sais

i nn nett

“SHIDIS UONDAJASUOD Pun S]DIqnYy slay) ‘AdsinJy 4amO] AY] {0 YSIf 4a]DMYSadf ]]/DUS AY.

saldads 31]0Xa SAaJOUIG,

“Z amavis

SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY

TABLE 3. Site records (x) of small freshwater fish species in the lower Murray region. Species and sites are

identified by numbers (see Tables 1 and 2, respectively). The bold numbers on the righthand margin indicate

the numbers of species recorded at each site.

Species

| 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 It 12 13 14 #15 16 #17 18 19

Site

1 x x x x x 5

2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 14

3 x x x x x x x x x x x il

4 x x 2

5 * x 2

6 x x x 3

7 x x x 3

8 x 1

9 x 1

10 x x x x x x 6

1 x x x x x x 6

12 x x x 3

13 x x x x x x x 7

14 x x x x x x x x 8

15 x x x x x x x x x 9

16 x x 4 x x x x x x x x x 12

17 x x x x x x 6

18 x x x 3

19 x x x 3

20 x x x 3

21 x x x x x 5

22 x x * x x x 6

23 x x x x 4

24 x x x x x 5

25 x x x x x x x x 8

26 x x x x 4

27 x * x x x x 6

28 x x x x x 5

29 x x x x x 5

30 x x x x x 5

31 x x x x “x x 6

32 x x x 3

33 x x x x x 5

34 x x x 3

35 x x 2

36 x x x x x x 6

37 x x x x 4

38 x x x x x . x x 8

39 x x x x x x 6

Sa LLOYD, L, N, & WALKER, K.

rho = —0.35;backwaters 4. streams) rlio - -0,29)

billabougs vstreams: rho — —0,25; all P > 0,05),

Finally, there way me siguifivanr difference between

the mean numbers of species in sites sampled once

{rocan 4.8) and those sampled monthly (mean 6,5;

Studen's t = Lb66, 3.df P > 00S),

Conservation Status

The conservation status accorded each species in

the lower Murray J5 indicated in Table 2, using a

scheme comparuble to that of the laternational

Union for the Conservation of Nature (of, Goodwin

& Holloway 1972).

Cortnion species are widespread and probably

form an important part of the food chain, For

example, M. &funzinger! oocutred at more than 60%

ol sites alibhough, a5 noted earlier, this taxon may

contain more than one species, Other widespread

species (a) more thar 30% of sites) were R, seertaens,

P erandiceps. juvenile N, crebi, C stercusriuscarumn

and Mf. s. fhiviarilis. All ave recorded as cammon

(e.g. Scott er a/, 1974), None shauld be considered

secure, however, glven their generally low numbers

and the likelihood of continumy changes lo the

Murray environment.

Rure species are regarded as thase |hat occur in

small populations and are elther restricted in range

or svartered over a broad area, Thus © epresi’ and

Philypnoden sp, were found at 15% and 20% of

siles respectively, Usually in low numbers, © evresu

was commonest in Dishers Creek Evaporation

Basin, where salinities were high (o 10 e/'T) due ta

the inflow of saline irfgation water.

Vulnerable species are regarded as (hase |fkely to

beeome endangered if their range and abundance

decline farther, Galaxies spp., Bo wevili and F

alarwn all have restricted distributions and

probably are consiralned by the scarcity of suitable

hubitars They may be considered vulnerable in the

lower Murtay, althouvh each is well-represertes

elsewhere iit Sk Australia, Poervilli, Refer anu

G. maocudums are constrained by their need for

gevess to the limited estuarine environment

associated with barraves near the Murray mouth,

As mentioned, G. olfdns is 1ypical of upland

environments that are rare an the lower Murray,

those that de occur are modified by avriculiwre or

inhabited by (rou! (Sairiospp.), which are predatory

G. rosivaius is commonest ii billabongs and

haekwaters alone Ihe Murray in NSW, and South

Australian Nruseum records sugeest thal it was never

common in che lower Murray.

Endangerca species are here regarded os those

threatened by imminent loval extunccion. in the

lower Murray four species may be sa classifieds

Ambassls Castelraui (Maclesy), ML adspersa, Na.

ausiraty and G, rrernrorams, Each of these specs

appeurs (o have undergone a substantial reduction

i range over the past 100 years or so, for reasons

probably associated with habitat changes and

interactions with exotic species (ef Pig, 2; Reynolds

1976; Cadwallader 1978). Their former ranges

cannot be determined accurately, but from the few

museum records and published reports it appears

likely that all four species were once widespread in

the lower Murray (Gale 1914; McCulloch & Waile

1918; MeCulloch & Ogilhy 1919, Scart L962; Scott

ef al. 1974; Cadwallader 1977, 1979; Cadwallader

& Backhouse 1984; Hoese e/ af 1980; Jackson &

Llewellyn 1980; Pollard er af 1980; Llewellyn

1980a,b, 1984; Humeet a/. 1983; Jackson & Davies

1983; Walker & Hillman 1977),

4, cusielnani was collected only once im the

present survey, although several specimens have

been recorded by the Sourti Australian Museum

over ihe last 20 years, the last being in 1973, This

s\iggests tha’ populations are rare and patehily

disir/buted, and may have declined in recent years.

The species may never fave been regionally:

abundant, bur mow appears threatened with local

extinction, A similar deeline is evident in other parts

of its range (Cadwallader & Backhouse LYR3,

Llewellyn L984).

M. wdspersa was not collected in this survey, but

again isolated specimens from the Murray have been

lodged with the South Australian Museum over the

pasi 20 years, the last being jn 1973, These records

and other observations (J, Pillar 8. Aust, Dept

Fisheries, pers. comm.) suggest that populations

now are Small and patchily distributed, whereas the

species probably was common Iy) backwaters and

river-cdge habitats, two of ibe principal habital

types sampled in this survey. The apparent decline

may he associated with the spread of G aw

holirouki, allhough the supporting evidence is

circumstantial. Similar declines have occurred

elsewhere in SE Australia (McDowall 1980;

Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983).

No a. eusrrafis also was once widespread [i the

lewer Murray but has apparently declined; (he last

S.A, Museum record is 1446, and the only known

regional habitats pow are two Sinall streams Mowing

to Lake Alexandéina. The species prefers shaded,

weedy habitats of the Kind often destroyed by

“stream improvement” pracrices. La addition, its

absence from suitable habitats occupied by CG. a,

kalbrook?, and the absence of this species from the

iwo streums menmliowed above suaggesc Lhal

infteraeticns between these species could have been

responsible A. ew. australis is locally common i ST

S Aust, and Viet, (Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983;

Glover 1983: Llewellyn 1984; Linvd 1984).

G, mermoratus occurred in the Murray in (ite

(930s, according fo SA, Museun fecords, and there

SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY

Adelaice

Murray Bridge

Lake

“> Alexandrina

Fig, 2,

is anecdotal evidence that populations persisted

until the 19505 (R. Mason, Strathalbyn Naturalists

Club, pers. comm,), In this survey only two

populations were disvovered (lower Marne River

and upper Angas River catchment). The species 1s

not easily caught by seining, but is attracted to

baited [raps. At one of the two sites juveniles are

readily collecled using artificial substratum

samplers, bul no juveniles have come {rom similar

samplers used in extensive benthic surveys of the

lower riyer (M. B. Thompson, Univ, Adelaide and

P. J. Suter, Engineering & Water Supply Dept,

Adelaide, pers. comms). G. marmaoratyus formerly

ranged lrom southern Queensland to the lower

Murray and now is most common in Victoria,

although present also in SE South Australia and

the upper Murray and Murrumbidgee drainages

(NSW), The species is vulnerable particularly

because of its unusual mode of reproduction,

whereby the eges are attached to submerged hollow

Jogs and the laryae remain attached until their yolk

sacs are resorbed (Jackson 1978a), Hence, despite

paremial care the egzs and larvae are exposed to

predation for over ope month, Ir is notewarthy that

Sanger (1984) has reported a new species of

1 Swan Reach

Wentworth

Renmark

Gadopsis marmoratus Populations

Nannoperca australis Populations

Nannoperca australis \ndividuals

Ambassis casteinau/ \ndividuals

Survey records of the four species here regarded as endangered in the lower Murray,

Gadopsis from ventral Victoria, and shown that

other isolates may be genetically dissimilar (A.

Sanger, Univ, Melbourne, pers, comm).

Conclusion

The maintenance of genetic diversity within

animal populations is essential Yor effective

conservation (6g. Ahern 1982). Fish, in particular,

are easily isolated in separate drainage basins, or

in habitats within the same basin, and may undergo

genetic divergence as a result. Thus, even for the

small Murray-Darling Fish fauna there ape recent

instances of new species being found in groups.

thought (o be taxonomically well-known (e.g. Hoese

ef al. 1980; Merrick & Schmida 1984; Sanger 1984),

Genetic diversity within species also is important,

especially where populations have developed

ecotypes to Survive in particular habitats. There is

evidence of subspecific variation in the

Murtay-Darling fauna (e.g. Allen 1980; Allen &

Cross 1982; Ivantsoff 1980; Cadwallader &

Backhouse 1983).

In order to conserve genetic diversity, the survival

of a species throughout ils range ts crucial, and

knowledge of the range and the nature of the

54 LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K

habiars within is no less important. Regional

surveys provide this information, and are to be

preterred to national of stale-wide surveys because

they can be designed to correspond to manageable

environmental units rather than arbitrary political

divisions, The drainage basins recognized by the

Australian Water Resources Coumcil (Dept National

Development 1976) are environmental units (and

hence potential regional survey units) as they are

more-or-less discrete river systems and qarural

boundaries to the distributions of lish (and many

other aquatic animals).

At least |hree steps might be taken to prevent the

further decline and possible extinchion of alive

Australian freshwater fish, Firsi, coordinated

regional surveys could be undertaken of the

distributions and abundances of fish throughout

Australia, These would supplement existing

collections, and provide a more comprehensive

database for use in planning fujure conservation

initiatives. Second, more could be done to promote

research on (the biology of (reshwater fish, Many

species are uniquely Australian but unknown to

conservation authorities, and those without

commercial value are often overlooked by (he

fisheries authorities, All have conservation value

nevertheless, and require protectian. Third, a watch

vould be kept over threatened species (endangered,

vulnerable and rare) lo provide far early diagnosis

of problems and, when necessary, rapid

implementation al protective measures.

The fact that probably no native freshwater fish

has become extinct in the past 200 years gives no

assurance that none will became so in furure

indeed, the threat of iniminent losses js 4 real one,

eiven the declines in range and abundance how so

general and apparent.

Acknowledgments

This work is from an MSe project undertaken by

LNL and supervised by KPW (who also cantributed

to writing). We are grateful to Mr G. Lloyd, Mr R.

Mason, Mr M, Young and fellaw RMRU members

for field assisraoee, and Mr John Glover (Curator

of Fishes, South Australian Museum) for

discussions and access to Museum collections. This

work was supporied by the Peter Till Environmental

Laboratory, Albury-Wodonga Development

Corperation, Albury, the Dept Environment &

Planning, Adelaide, and the Dept National

Resources, Canberra.

References

AHERN, LC, BD. (1982) Threatened wildlife in Victoria anal

Deve prior 10 its canservation. fish. Mildl, Pap, Vier

27. 1-44.

Arcem, G. R. (1982) “A Tield Ciuide to land Fishes af

Western Australia”. (Wo Aust, Museum, Perth),

ome KH CROSS, N.S. (1982) “Rainbowlishes of

Australia and New Guinea". (Angus & Robertson,

Syvduey).

CAbWaALLADER, PL. (1977) J. 0. Langury's 1949-5)

Murray River Investigations. Fish, Wildl Pap, Vier. 13,

170,

(1978) Some cuuses of (he decline in range and

abundance of native fish in (he Murray-Darling river

sysiom, Proce; R, Soc. Wiel, 90, 2bl-224,

—— (1979) The distriburjon of native and iniroduced

hsh inthe Seven Creeks River System, Victoria, “usr,

JA. Beol, 4, 361-385.

& Backtouse, G. N. (19835) "A Guide to the

tieshwater Fish af Victoria”, (Gove Printer, Melbourne),

-——_, , Boumer, TP A& Tackson, PDL (19R4)

The conservation stulus of (he native freshwater fish

of Victoria. Mier Ned. LOD, 112-114,

Dirt National Deviwoumen’) (1976) “Water Resources

of Austria, 19737, (Aust, Gove Publ. Serv, Canberra),

CiATE, A. (914) Nores on the breeding tahins of the

purple-spared gudveon, Kre/fiius adspresus, Aust,

Zoal. A, 15-26.

Cruoaven, C. 1. Mi. t6983) Freshwater and marine fisiws.

iM. 4. len tC. R. [Wwidale, JK. Ling & |W. Holmes

(Eats) ‘Naturil History of the South hast’ nye 1874167,

(R, Sov, 5S, Aust, Adelaide)

Crocpwins, by A. & Hor powar,

Book" (LUN, Swilverland),

CW. (1972) “Red Data

HOeSsE, D, B, Larson, H. KR. & LieWweiivn, LC, (L880)

Family Eleotridae—Gudgeons, Jn Ro M, McDowall

(Ed), “Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia".

pp. 169-185. (Reed, Sydney).

Hume, D. J, buircHek, A. R. & Morrison, A. K. (1983)

Carp Program Annual Report 1980-198], Fish. Wildl,

Div. Viet, Carp Prog. Publ. 8, 1-100,

Ivanisort-, W. (1980) Family Atherinidae—Silversides. or

Hardyheads, [rn Ro M. MeDowall (Fd), “Frestiwarer

Fishes of South-Eastern Australia”, pp. 132-137, (Reed,

Sydney),

Jackson, B.D. (1978) Spawning and early development

of ite river blacklish, Gadapsis murmoratus

Richardson (Gadopsiformes: Gadepsidae), in ttre

MeKenzie River, Victoria, Aust, J Man Freshwail. Res

29, 293-298.

a & Davies, JN. (1983) Survey of fish fauna in The

C§ramplans rewion, south-western Vicloria. Prac. BR. Soc

Viet, 05, 39-5]

& LiLbwebiyn, » ©C, (1980) Family

Gadopsidae— River Bloc Fishy tin R. M, McDowall (Bd),

“Freshwater Fistes of South-Eusiern Australia’,

np. 160-4161, (Reed, Sydney),

Liewrirva, b.C. (1980a) Family Ambassidae—Chanda

Perches, Jn R, M, McDowall (6d), “Preshwater Fishes

of South-Eastern Australia’, pp, 140-141, (Reed,

Sydney)

—-- -- (J980b) Pantily Kuliiiidae—Pigmy Perches. Je

kK. M. MeDowall (Ed), "Treshwater Fishes of South

Lastern Australia’, pp, 153.155. (Reed, Sydney).

we (J9R4) The distobatian of fish in New South

Wales. Aust, Soe Limnol, Spec. Publ. 7, W235,

SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY 57

Lioyp, L, N. (1984) Exotic fish—Useful additions or

“animal weeds”? Fishes of Sahul 1, 31-34 & 39-42.

& Tomasov, J. F. (1985) Taxonomic status of the

mosquitofish, Gambusia affinis (Poeciliidae) in

Australia. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res. 36, 447-451.

McCutitocH, A. R. & Oaitpy, J. D. (1919) Some

Australian fishes of the family Gobiidae. Rec. Aust.

Mus. 1, 193-292.

& Waite, E. R. (1918) Some new and little-

known fishes from South Australia. Ree, S. Aust, Mus.

1, 39-78.

McDowatt, R. M, (Ed,) (1980) “Freshwater Fishes of

South-Eastern Australia”, (Reed, Sydney).

Merrick, J. R, & SCHMIDA, G. E. (1984) “Australian

Freshwater Fishes: Biology and Management”, (Griffin

Press, S. Aust.).

PoLtarp, D. A., LLEWeLLyn, L. C, & Tinzey, R. D. J.

(1980) Management of freshwater fish and fisheries. /n

W. D. Williams (Ed), “An Ecological Basis for Water

Resource Management”, pp. 227-270. (Aust. Nat. Univ.

Press, Canberra).

ReyNovps, L. F. (1976) Decline of the native fish species

in the River Murray. SAFIC 8, 19-24.

Ripe, W. D. L. & Witson, G. R, (1982) The conservation

status of Australian animals. Jn G. R. Groves & W. D. L.

Ride (Eds), “Species at Risk—Research in Australia”.

pp. 39 (Springer-Verlag; Berlin).

Sancer, A. (1984) Description of a new species of

Gadopsis from Victoria. Proc, R. Soc. Vict, 92, 93-97,

Scorr, T. D. (1962) “The Marine and Freshwater Fishes

of South Australia”. (Govt Printer, Adelaide).

, GLOVER, C. J. & SoutTHcort, R. V. (1974) “The

Marine and Freshwater Fishes of South Australia”, 2nd

ed. (Govt Printer, Adelaide).

WaLkerR, K. F, (1981) The effects of weirs on the

environment of the lower River Murray. SAFIC 5(6),

26-29.

(1982a) The plight of the Murray crayfish in South

Australia. Redgum 6(1), 2-6.

(1982b) Natural history of freshwater mussels in

the River Murray. Proc. 17th Assembly Aust. Fresh

Water Fishermen, 15-20,

(1983) Impact of Murray-Darling Basin

development on fish and fisheries. HAO Fish. Rep. 288,

139-149,

(1985) A review of the ecological effects of river

regulation in Australia, Hydrobiologia 125, 111-129.

& Hitman, T. J. (1977) ‘Limnological Survey of

the River Murray in Relation to Albury-Wodonga,

1973-76’. (Albury-Wodonga Development Corp., Albury

& Gutteridge, Haskins & Davey, Melbourne).

A NEW SPECIES OF SUEZICHTHYS (PISCES: LABRIDAE) FROM THE

GREAT AUSTRALIAN BIGHT

BY BARRY C. RUSSELL

Summary

A new species of labrid fish, Suezichthys bifurcatus sp. nov., is described from two specimens

collected from the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. It is characterised by having 2/2

transverse scale rows above the lateral line; a low scaly sheath along the base of the dorsal and anal

fins; and a black spot at the upper origin of the pectoral fin. It is distinct from all other species of

Suezichthys in having lateral-line scales with a bifurcate canal tube.

A NEW SPECIES OF SUEZTCHTHYS (PISCES: LABRIDAE)

FROM THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN BIGHT

by Barry C, RUSSELL*

Summary

Russet, B.C. (1986) A new species of SuesicAthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian Bight.

Trans. R, Sow. S. Aust. 1V0(2), 99-61, 30 May, 1986,

A new species of labrid fish, Sveaichtiws bifurcarus sp. nov., is described [rom two specimens collected

trom the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. fi is characterised by having 242 transverse scale

rows above the lateral line; a low sealy sheath along the base of the dorsal and anal fins; and a black spot

al the upper origin of the pectoral fin. 1 is distinct {rom all other species of Suezichdhys in having lateral-

line scales with a bilurcate lateroasensory canal tube.

Key Words: Pisces, Labridae, Suezievthys, new species, Great Australian Bight, Western Australia,

Introduction

Labrid fishes of the genus. Suvezich(hys Smith are

relatively small (maximum standard length about

140 mim), colourful fishes distribuled widely

throughout the tropical and temperate Lndo-

W. Pacific. Most af the species inhabit shallow

coastal reels but several are known only from trawl

collections in offshore warers to depths of 170 m.

Suerichthys is most closely related to Pseudolabrus

Rleeker and Halichoeres Raippell.

In @ recent revision of the genus Russell (1985)

recognised eight species, including six species from

temperate-subltropical Ausiralia. An additional

Australian species has since come to my attention

and is here deseribed as new. The new species is

based on previously unidentified specimens in the

South Australian Museum (SAMA), collected by

the CSIRQ Fisheries Research Vessel “Soela” from

the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia.

Methods

Methods and definitions follow Russell &

Randall (1981) and Russell (1985), Measurements

were made ro the nearest one-tenth millimeter (mm).

Length measurements are standard length (SL). In

the deseription, data foe the paratype where differenr

trom the holotype, are given in parentheses.

Suezichthys bifurcatus sp. nov,

FIGS 1-2

Holotype. SAMA F5037, 69.5 nim SL, Western

Australia, Great Austealian Bight, "Soela” Cr. 03/81,

si 5 (3420'S, 123°42 B-34°21'S, 123'43'B), 80m,

bottom Lrawl, 26yii,198t,

* Northern Teruory Museum, P.O. Box 4646, Darwin,

NG 3794

Paralype; SAMA F5038, 79.L mm SL, Western

Australia, Great Ausiralian Bight, “Socla” Cr 03/81,

stn 23) (33°04'S, 127°12’E-33°04'S, 127°10'B),

92-98 m, bottom trawl, Lvili1981.

Diagnosis; Laterosensory canal tubes bifurcates 242

transyerse scale rows above fateral line; low scaly

Sheath along base of dorsal and anal! tins; black

spot present at upper origin of pectoral fin.

Description; Dorsal-lin rays LX, 11; anal-fin rays

LIL, 10; caudal-fin rays 6 +24 124245; pectoral-fin

rays WW, Il; pelvie-fin rays 1, 5; lateral-line scales

partly missing, 25? in holotype (257 in paratype);

transverse scale rows above lateral line 2!3;

transverse Seale rows below lateral line 7! (scales

missing in paratype); cheek scale rows behind eye

1; cheek scale rows below eye 2? (scales partly

missing in both specimens); vertebrae 9+16;

epipleural ribs extending to V.13; well-developed

haemal arch formed only on V1); gill rakers on first

arch 18 (16),

Body depth 3.7 (3,3) in SL; head length 2.8 (2.7)

in SL; snouth length 4.2 (4.1) in head length;

diameter of orbit 3.6 (3.8) in head length;

interorbital width 6.0 (8,8) in head length; suborbital

depth 7.8 (8.2) in head length; dorsal fin length 1:8;

first dorsal spine 4.5 (4.8) in head leneth; ninth

dorsal spine 1.6 (1.3) times Jength of first; ninth or

tenth dorsal ray longest, 1.0 (1,6) tinies length of

ninth dorsal spine; anal fin length 1.3 (1,2) in SL;

first anal spine 6.3 (7.0) in head length; third anal

spine 1,6 (2) limes length of first; ninth anal ray

longest, 1.3 U2) times length of third anal spine;

pectoral fin length 1.6 (1.5) in head length; pelvic

fin length 1.6 (1.8) in head length.

Upper jaw with pair of enlarged, recurved canines

anteriorly; 12-14 progressively smaller canine teeth

laterally in upper jaw, with inner row of 6-8 small

canines behind anteriormost teeth; elarged canine

Gt) B. C, RUSSELL

ae |

10 mm

Vig. |, Swezichthys bifurcaius, Holotype, SAMA F5037,

preserved in alcohol).

at posterior end of upper jaw; lower jaw with 2 pair

of enlarged anterior canines, second pair shorter

(han first; 12-14 progressively smaller lateral teeth

in lower jaw, with inner row of 3-4 small canines

behind anteriormost teeth.

Laterosensory canal tubes bifurcate; low scaly

sheath at base of dorsal and anal fins; caudal fin

truncate to slightly rounded.

ons OO a a

Fig. 2

69.5 mm SL. (drawing based on damaged specimen

Colour (in alcohol): Holotype (Fig. 1) light

brownish, pale on sides; faint dusky band from tip

of snout to anterior margin of eye, continuing

behind eye as dark brown, broken band running

along midline of body to caudal peduncle; series

of two or three dark brown spots behind eye

immediately above first band, these joining an

indistinct and irregular brownish band running

~~ fe

Suetichrays bifurcatus, Paratype, SAMA FS038, 79.1 iam Sh

NEW SPECIES OF SUEZICHTHYS 61

parallel above first band and terminating near end

of dorsal fin; dark brown spot on nape and

indefinite brown markings (scales missing) on scaly

base of dorsal fin; distinct black spot at base of

last two dorsal-fin rays, and indefinite black spot

dorsally on caudal-fin base. Interspinous membrane

of first two dorsal spines dusky, and indications of

dusky submarginal band along fin; small black spot

on upper pectoral-fin base.

Paratype (Fig. 2) with faint dusky band from

snout Lo eye, but otherwise lacking any bands along

body; four to five brownish irregular spots along

sealy base of soft dorsal fin, posteriormost spot

slightly darker and extending onto base of last three

dorsal-fin rays; blackish mark dorsally on caudal-

fin base; first dorsal spine dusky; black spot on

upper pectoral-fin base.

Etymology: The name bifurcatus refers to the

bifurcate laterosensory canal tube of this species.

Comparisons: Suezichthys bifurcatus appears most

closely related to S arguatus Russell and S.

cyanolaemus Russell. These two species share the

following combination of characters with S.

bifurcatus: 24 transverse scale rows above the

lateral line, a low scaly sheath at the base of the

dorsal and anal fins, and a well-developed haemal

arch associated only with the anterior caudal

vertebra (V.10). S. bifurcatus is distinct from all of

its congeners, however, in having lateral-line scales

with a bifurcate laterosensory canal tube (versus

simple, unbranched canal tube in other

Suezichthys).

Remarks: Known only from two specimens, both

in poor condition, trawled in moderately deep water

(80-98 m) from the Great Australian Bight, off

Western Australia.

Acknowledgements

I thank Rudi H. Kuiter for drawing my attention

to the presence of unidentified Suwezichthys

specimens in the South Australian Museum, and

John Glover, South Australian Museum, who made

available the specimens for study. Martin F.

Gomon, Museum of Victoria, kindly provided X-

radiographs of S. bifurcatus. John R, Paxton and

John E. Randall critically reviewed the manuscript.

References

RusseLi, B. C. (1985) Revision of the Indo-Pacific labrid

fish genus Swezichthys, with descriptions of four new

species. Indo-Pacific Fishes No, 2, 1-21.

, & RANDALL, J. E. (1981) The labrid fish genus

Pseudolabrus trom islands of the southeastern Pacitie,

with description of a new species from Rapa. Pac. Sci.

(1980) 34, 433-440,

A NEW STREAM-DWELLING SPECIES OF LITORIA (ANURA: HYLIDAE)

FROM NEW GUINEA

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER, MARGARET DAVIES & KEN APLIN

Summary

Litoria exophthalmia sp. nov. is described from localities at elevations of 730-850 m on the

southern face of the cordillera of mainland New Guinea. The species is of moderate size (34-39

mm), and characterised by protruding eyes, basally webbed fingers and by the lack of a vocal sac in

the male. The species is morphologically so distinctive that it is regarded the unique representative

of a separate species group.

A NEW STREAM-DWELLING SPECIES OF L/TORIA (ANURA; HYLIDAE)

FROM NEW GUINEA

by MICHAEL J, TYLER*, MARGARET DAVIES* & KEN APLIN}

Summary

Tyier. M,, Davies. M. & Aptis, K, (1986) A new stream-dwelling species of Citar (Anura: Hylidae)

from New Guinea. Trans, KR, Soc, 5, Aus, 110(2), 63-67, 30 May, L986,

Litera exophthaliia sf. nov. \s deseribed {fom lovalities af elevations af 730-850 m an the southern

face of the cordillera of mainland New Guinea. The species is of moderate size (males 34-39 mm), and

characterised by protruding eyes, basally webbed fingers and by the lack of a vocal sac in the male, The

species is Morpholowcally su distinctive (hati (Ss regarded lle UN ue represenlutive Of @ Sepanale species vy roup.

Key Worps: hylid, frog, morphology, osteology, Literia, new species.

Introduction

Herpetologists Working on New Guinea hytids are

aware of the existence of a large number of

undescribed species, Delay in resolving the bio-

logical and morphological characters distinguishing

closely related undescribed taxa (e.g, in the Liloria

bicolor species-zroup where al least six ew species

awail definition; Menzies & Tyler, unpubl) is a

major contributing factor. However, the reeent

deseription of a new species of Lifaria from Irian

Jaya (Tyler & Davies, 1983) brought the total

described species of Liforia known from New

Guinea to 53.

Here we describe a species which is so distinctive

morphologically that it can be distinguished readily

from all congeners and can be assigned to a separate

species-group (sensu Tyler & Davies, 1978).

Materials and Methods

The specimens reported here are housed in the:

Australian Museum (AM), National Museum and

Art Gallery, Papua New Guinea (NMA) and South

Australian Museum (SAM).

Methods of measurement follow Tyler (1968),

Measuretiients taken (in mm) Were: snout-lo-verit

lenuth (S-V)y tibia length (TL); head length (HL);

head width (P{W); cye-lo-naris distunce (E-N),

internarial span (IN); eye diameter (E). ‘The format

of the osteological deseriprion follows Lrueb (1979),

Cleared und stained specimens were prepared using

the techniques of Davis & Gore (1947) ane

Dingerkus & Uhler (1977).

Litoria evophthatitia sp, voy.

FIGS 1-7

Haloivpe: AM R114751, an adult male obtained by

K. Aplin on l4i.l984 at Haia village (6°42°S,

* Dept of Zoology, Universiny of Advlaide, G.P.0 Bax 448,

Adelaide, 5. Aust. S001.

{ School of Zoolowy, University of NSW. G.PO. Baw 1

Kensington, NSW. 2033.

145°00'B), South Simbu Province, Pupusa New

Guinga,

Definition; A moaderale-sized species (males

34.4-39.0 min), with basal webbing of the fingers,

extensively webbed toes and protruding eyes. The

male lacks a yocal sac.

Description of holoivpe: Head slightly broader than

long (HL/HW (1.97). Head length 0.37 snout-vent

length. Snout prominent, slightly rounded when

viewed from above, and truncated in profile (Fig. 1).

Nostrils almost entirely lateral. Eye-to-naris distance

grealer than internattal span (E-N/1N 1.17). Nostals

much nearer to end of snout than eve, Canthus

rostralis slightly curved and well defined. Eye large

and protruberant (Figs |, 2), its diameter greater

than distance separating it from nostril. Tympanum

Prominent! and with narrow annulus, tympanum

diameter 2/5 length of eve. Vomerine teeth on two

large elevations between posterior margins of

choanac. Tongue moderate and broadly oval.

Vingers short, with moderate lateral [rinwes;

finger lengths 3>4>2>1; terminal dises large

(Mig. 3A). Web confined to base between (hird and

fourrh fingers. reaching midway up the

antepenultimate phalanx on fourth finger. Other

fingers unwebbed, Hindlegs maderately long (tibia

length/S-V 0.54); toe lengths 4>3>5>2>1.

Web reaches midway on penultimate phalanges of

thircl arid tytth toes, and the base of (he penultimate

phalana of lourth Loe, continuing to each dise via

narrow (rifwes (Fig. 3B). A small oval inner and no

detectable outer metatarsal juberele.

Skin of dorsum and lateral surtaces simooth. 4

narrow supratympame fold extending inferiorly

beyond superior margin of tympanic annulus. No

dermal folds on posterior margin of linibs. Distiner

small tubergle on heel) paired, larwer tubercles

beneath vent, Posterior surface of thighs smoarh

In preservative dorsum yery pale brown wilh

diffuse darker markings, Ventral surface creamish

brown.

64 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & K. APLIN

Fig. I. A, lateral and B, dorsal views of the head of Litoria exophthalmia (Holotype).

livanlinial

Fig. 2. Holotype of Litoria exophthalmia sp. nov.

Scale = | cm .

Vocal sac absent. Large single nuptial pad on first

digit.

Dimensions (in mm): Snout-to-vent length 35.5;

tibia length 19.5; head length 13.2; head width 13.7;

tympanum diameter 2.2; eye width 5.5; eye-naris

distance 3.8; internarial span 3.3.

Variation: There are 14 paratypes: AM R114729,

114732, 114748 (cleared and stained), 114749,

114752-56; NMA UP7078; SAM R27831 (cleared

and stained), 27832, taken at the type locality; AM

R114758, Haia bush camp, 880 m, 6°40'S, 145°01'E,

obtained on 19.iv.1985.

All of the paratypes are adult males bearing

pigmented nuptial pads. Snout-vent length ranges

Fig. 3. A, palmar view of hand and B, plantar view of

foot of Litoria exophthalmia (Holotype).

34.4-39.0 mm. Morphometric data obtained from

the series are: TL/S-V 0.55-0.61, HL/HW 0.96-1.01,

HL/S-V 0.34-0.39, E-N/IN 1.13-1.39.

The only noteworthy feature in which there is

variation involves the coloration. Several specimens

exhibit darker markings upon the pale ground

colour. In AM R114749 there is an hourglass-shaped

patch on the head extending along the middle of

the back. It commences across the centre of the

head and upper eyelids and reaches posteriorly to

the vicinity of the sacrum. This patch is composed

of an area of sparse black stippling bounded by a

continuous row of small, black spots. In this

specimen, and others with less clearly defined dark

markings, the tibiae bear broad bands of dark

brown upon a paler background.

The skin of the ventral surface is partly trans-

parent and internal organs can be seen through the

skin and body wall.

NEW LITORLA FROM NEW GUINEA

Fig, 4, A, dorsal and B, ventral view of skull of Literta exophuhalmio (AM RL14733). Svale bar=5 nm.

Osteology: Skull well ossified. Sphenethmoid well

ossified extending between vomers ventrally and

between nasals dorsomedially almost to level of

medial exiremities of nasals; curved laterally to

accommodate posterior edges of nasals with slight

overlap of Jateral sphenethmoid (Fig. 4A). Prootic

and exoccipitals compietely fused, Exoccipitals

joined vertromedially by calcified plate, Crista

parotica long, very slender, overlapped laterally by

expanded otic ramus of squamosal. Frontoparietal

fontanelle extensive; posterior extremities defined

by medial calcified plate formed between poorly

assified (rontoparietal elements (Fig. 4A). Anterior

margin of [rontopariezal fontanelle formed by

sphenethmoid at level of anterior extremity af

anterior ramus of pterygoid; posterior margin

slightly anterior to level of anterior extremities of

epiohe eminences,

Nasals very broad, displaced laterally such that

medial edges orient anteriorly (Fig. 4A), Maxillary

process long and slender, in bany contact with

posterior extremity of exiremely deep pars facialis

of maxillary. Palatines moderately long, expanded

laterally, ridged and tapering acutely medially to

overlie sphenethmoid posteriorly to vomerine (eeth

(Fig. 4B). Cultriform process of parasphenoid very

robust, slender and digitiform anteriorly; broad

medially. Alae long, slender, very slightly angled

posterolajerally; overlapped laterally by medial rami

of prerygoids,

Plerygoid robust. Medial ramus long,

unexpanded, acuminate: amterior ramus long,

slender anteriorly, in lane contact sath poorly

developed pterygoid process of palatal shelf of

maxillary; low truncate process dorsally-on medial

ramus at proximal extremivy (Fig. $A). Quadrato-

jugal slender, in long contact with maxillary.

Squamosal moderately robust, Zygomatic rans

moderately long and slender. Otic ramus broadly

expanded distally. Culcilied projection forming an

anteroproximal edge of shaft reaching dorsal

proximal process on medial ramus of pteryeoid

(Fig. 5A), Maxillary and premasillary inclined

slightly laterally; perpendicular to pars dentalis.

Palatine processes of premanillaries yery short

(Fig. 4B). Vomers entire; dentigerous processes

short, horizontal to palate; right provess missing

in this specimen, Bony columella present. Processus

coronoideus of mandible not hooked,

Hyoid plate very short, Alary processes pedun-

culate. Posteromedial processes ossified with

proximal endochondral ossification encroaching

upon the hyoic plitte such thal anteromedial

exiremices of provesses confluent (Fig. 5B). Cricoid

ring complete.

Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosernum

and Niphisternum present: clavieles moderately

Slender, curved; coracoids moderately robust.

Bicapilate scapula greater in length than elavicles.

Suprascapula about |/3 ossified.

Eight proeoelous, non-imbrigate, presacral

vertebrae, Relative widths of transverse processes

lil>sacrum>IV>Il>V-VI-VII-VIIL Sacral

diapophyses poorly expanded. Urostyle bicondylar

wilh dorsal crest extending aboul 2/3 iis length,

Pubis caleified, Ital crest absent (Fig. 6A), Dorsal

prominence lateral, well developed (Fig. 6B). Dersal

protuberance slightly anrerolateral on prominence.

66 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & kK. APLIN

Fig. 5. A, anterior view of left posterolateral portion of

Skull of Literta exaparhalmia (AM R114733); B, Hyoid

apparalus of Litoria exophihalmia (AM R14733),

ventral view,

Fig. 4. A, lateral and B, dorsal view of pelvis of Lireria

exophihalmia (AM RI[473),

Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Terminal

phalanges clawed, intercalated structures cartila-

einous, Well developed prepollex. Radiale, ulnare,

os centrale postaxiale and os centrale preaxiale

present (Fig. 7A), Phalangeal formula of foot

2,2,3,4,3; small bony prehalluy, Os distale rarsale

1, 2 and 3 present (Fig. 7B).

Variation: Comparison of AM R114733 with a

second cleared. and stained specimen (SAM R27831)

reveals minimal variation, Variation observed

involved slightly less overlap of the Crista parotica

region by the otic ramus, and greater calcification

(possibly ossification) of the yenteromedial process

of the squamosal shaft.

The endochondral encroachment of the postero-

medial processes an the hyoid plate was slightly less

extensive so that the [Wo bones are not confluent

medially in SAM R2783),

Habitar’ The two localities at Which the species was

obtained are 3.5 km apart, on the eastern side of

Fin. 7. Dorsal views of bones of A, hand and B, foot of

Litoria exophthalmiu (AM R11473).

the Nimi River. Most of the specimens were

collected at night in low vegetation overhanging

streams, and it wasin fact the most common species

encountered there, The (oor of the streams were

of sand, mud or exposed rock, and in some areas

the streams were choked with leaf litter. The area

was heavily forested, with an understory of

numerous small saplings and oecasional palms,

Fivmology: The specific name is derived from the

Greek exophrhalmes meaning “with bulging or

protruding eyes”, In the local Pawaian language as

spoken al Haia, the species is called “Nonoli”.

Comparison with other species: The combination

of short, basally webbed fingers, protruding eyes,

lack of a vocal sac in males and form of squaniosal

and pterygoid processes are a suite of features not

shared by any congener, and render the species so

distinctive that we consider it the sole representative

of a separate species-group (Tyler & Davies, 1978),

Lack of a vocal sac is shared amongst Papuan

Litoria by 1. eucnemis and L. genimaculata bowh

of which can be distinguished by the less prominent

eyes, their possession of crenulated dermal ridges

on the posterior edges of the limbs and, commonly,

more extensive finger webbing. Litoria

exophthalmia also exhibits proliferation of

ossification upon the posterior margin of the hyoid

plate, a feature associated with vocal sae loss in

hylid frogs (Tyler, 1972),

Parasites: A series of parasites was obtained trom

the body cavity of the type series and have been

NEW LITORIA FROM NEW GUINEA 47

examined by Dr D. Spratt. They include a number

of nematodes identified as a species of Wartonella

(Filariodea), probably undescribed, and some

encapsulated pentastomids probably representing

Porocephalus, and also considered likely to be

undescribed.

Acknowledgments

The fieldwork leading to the discovery of Litoria

exophthalmia was funded in part by National

Geographic Society Grant No. 2699-83 to Dr M.

Archer of the University of New South Wales. K,A.

was also in receipt of a Joyce Vickery Award from

the Linnaean Society of New South Wales.

Laboratory studies in Adelaide were funded by the

University of Adelaide.

We are grateful to Dr David Spratt of the CSIRO

Division of Wildlife and Rangelands Research for

prompt examination and comments on the

parasites.

For assistance and hospitality at Haia, K.A.

wishes to thank Jack and Isa Douglas of the New

Tribes Mission and the Yasa people in residence

during his stay.

We thank Lorna Lucas for typing the manuscript.

References

Davis, D, D. & Gore, Y. R. (1947) Clearing and staining

skeletons of small vertebrates. Fieldiana; Techniques (4),

1-16.

DINGERKUS, G. & Unirer, L. D, (1977) Enzyme clearing

of alcian blue stained whole small vertebrates for

demonstration of cartilage. Stain Technol. 52, 229-231.

Truce, L. (1979) Leptodactylid frogs of the genus

Telmatobius in Ecuador with the description of a new

species. Copeia 1979, 714-733.

Tyier, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the genus

Hyla, Zool. Verhand. 96, 1-203.

(1972) Endochondral ossification of the hyoid

plate in Australo-Papuan hylid frogs. Zool, Anz. 189,

331-336.

& Davies, M. (1978) Species groups within the

Australopapuan hylid frog genus Litoria Tschudi. Aust.

J. Zool. Suppl. Ser. 63, 1-47.

& (1983) A new species of Litorte (Anura:

Hylidae) from Irian Jaya, New Guinea. Copeia 1983(3),

803-808.

REEF FISH POPULATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATOR GROUP, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA: A COMPARISON OF TWO CENSUS METHODS

BY K. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD

Summary

Fish populations were censused at five islands or reefs in the Investigator Group mainly in 1982 and

1983. The distribution of abundance of species was examined by visual census along belt transect

lines and by recording the log abundances of fishes observed for a fixed time period in a variety of

habitats.

REEF FISH POPULATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATOR GROUP, SOUTH AUSTRALIA:

A COMPARISON OF TWO CENSUS METHODS

by K, L, BRANDEN*, G, J. EDGART & S. A. SHEPHERD*

Summary

Brasprn, K. L., Epcar, G. J. & SHEPHERD, S. A, (1986) Reef fish populations of the Investigator Group,

South Australia: a comparison of two census methods. Trans, R, Sov, 8, Aust. 1L0(2), 69-76, 30 May, 1986,

Fish populations were censused at five islands or reefs in the Investigator Group mainly in 1982 and

1983. The distribution of abundance of species was examined by visual census along belt transect lines

and by recording (he log abundances of fishes observed for a fixed time period in a variety of habitats.

The belt transect method gives consistent and hence repeatable results although it does not completely

sample the fish community. Log abundance counts yield more species per site because the diver covers

a larger area and presumably samples more habitats. The later method therefore seems most suitable for

preliminary survey work.

Key Worpbs: Reef fishes, census methods, Great Australian Bight.

Introduction

The composition and structure of reef fish

communities are an important aspect of reef

ecology, but have been largely neglected in southern

Australian temperate waters. Most reefs are subject

to spearfishing to varying extents (Johnson

1985a, b) so that there are few places where

unexploited fish assemblages occur. Cruises to the

... Hotspot

fc MI 23

‘© Ward Is S21

Flinders |.

Pearson Is.

Veteran Is. «

Q Dorothea I.

Investigator Group of islands in the eastern Great

Australian Bight from 1982 to 1985 gave the oppor-

tunity to census reef fishes at places which are rarely

fished (Fig. 1), Baseline information on these fish

assemblages will be useful both in providing a

general picture of the abundance of reef fishes in

this poorly known region and as a comparison with

mainland sites which are exploited by man. This

Watchers

° Cp West Coast

Waldegrave Is. (Mainland)

Waterloo Bay

eT opgailant Is.

Fig. J. Islands of the Investigator Group with location of censuses

* Department of Fisheries, 135 Pirie St, Adelaide, S. Aust.

S000.

+ CSIRO P.O. Box 20, North Beach, W.A, 6020

70 K. L. BRANDEN, G, J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD

study supplements that of Kuiter (1983) who

recorded 90 species of fish from this group of

islands, Elsewhere, fish species’ lists have been given

by Last (1979) and Kuiter (1981) for the Kent Group

in Bass Strait, and Edgar (1984) for other

Tasmanian locations.

In this paper we use two visual census methods

to provide data on the abundance of fishes at

numerous islands in the Group and compare the

relative effectiveness of each.

Materials and Methods

Two methods were used to census fish.

1. Log-Abundance Counts

The diver swam at a constant speed along a

predetermined depth contour ‘sampling’ a variety

of habitats, and recorded on a slate the numbers

of fish of each species seen during a 30 minute

swim. Numbers were recorded on a log; abundance

scale, i.e.

Scale Numbers Scale Numbers

1 1 5 10-27

2 2-3 6 28-81

3 4-9 7 >243

4 10-27

The method is described in greater detail by Edgar

(1981).

2. Belt transect

A 50 m surveyor’s tape was placed on the sea bed

perpendicular to the depth contours of the reef. The

diver swam along one side of the tape and returned

along the other, recording on a slate the identity

and size of each fish within an estimated band

width of 5 m bordered by the tape. The method is

described by Quast (1968) and can be carried out

much more rapidly than the original double line

transect of Brock (1954). It has been used by a

number of authors, including Russell (1977) and

Willan er a/, (1979) in New Zealand, and gives an

estimate of the numbers of fish in an area of

500 m* covered by the census. Sale & Douglas

(1981) considered the method gave reasonably

precise and repeatable results, although its precision

in terms of species or numbers does not exceed

about 80%.

In order to compare replicate censuses at one site

and censuses in different years at the same site the

percent similarity (PS) index was calculated as

follows: PS=_2” where A is the sum of the

A+B ‘ P .

measures for all species in one sample, B is the

similar sum for all measures in the second sample,

and W is the sum of the lesser measures for each

species occurring in both samples. The measure

used is log transformed (n+1) numbers. This

transformation reduces the effect of a few very

abundant species which would otherwise swamp an

analysis (Field & McFarlane 1968). The measure has

been used for visual census data by Sale & Douglas

(1981).

To determine if an optimal number of censuses

existed, the increase in PS values and in number of

species by stepwise pooling of censuses were

computed for the data at Topgallant I. PS values

for all possible combinations of censuses were

calculated and the means and standard errors

obtained. PS comparisons were between pooled

censuses (from 1-5) and all censuses combined,

Site Descriptions

Topgallant I.

The lee of this island drops sharply to a depth

of about 30 m where broken rock and sand occur.

At the site studied large, irregular limestone

boulders lie scattered down the slope, and bear algal

assemblages dominated by Ecklonia_ radiata,

Acrocarpia paniculata, Cystophora spp or

Sargassum spp as described for Pearson I. by

Shepherd & Womersley (1971).

Hotspot

This is an extensive submerged reef, with several

peaks awash at low water. Site I is on creviced

granite bottom with high relief (to 5 m) of blocks

and boulders. Sites 2-4 are of moderate relief

(1-2 m) with numerous blocks and boulders. All

sites are exposed to considerable wave energy from

swell. Algal assemblages are as described for

Topgallant I.

Ward I.

Site 1 is on sloping granite bottom of low relief.

Site 2 is partly rubble or boulder bottom, partly of

high relief (to 3 m) platforms, heavily undercut to

form caves and overhangs. Site 3 is similar to Site 2

but with a greater proportion of low boulders. Site 1

is exposed to strong swell and Sites 2 and 3 to

moderate swell. Algal assemblages are as described

above.

Pearson 1.

All sites have sloping granite bottom. Site | has

many blocks and boulders I-3 m high, Site 2 has

many blocks up to 2 m high and Sites 3-6 have

generally low relief with occasional boulders up to

1 m high, Wave energy from swell decreases from

Site 1 (high) to 6 (low), Algal assemblages are as

described above.

REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS

rar tl ct 9 9 8 8 8

118 tI 6 RL St st OL Ot

! t

1 ot

t i t

tr Eats so oF |

t 1 ¢

t £

ra £

E Ff tT Tt se:

$ cog gS SS 6

roS bt oF ror t ra

[

ae —e |

Zz of [ br OF zt f¢

££ Loe Pf st bE &

£ (

ror pos t

T I

rd t 7 tot

| \

s 49 9 Ss 9

‘ | t T Tc Ff

YY 9 9 Y

| £ ¢

Sof Et gs

t I

| ro rl

££ Qos % -S

i of

Sof l

& I ae | i |

ONS ants ONS aus

ch/t/pl cay P/E ER/ PY TT es /r/ol

1LOdSLOH “TL OuvM | SHSQNITA

g 8 B 8B

Qt Of 4% €F

Ci&.0 £

t+ & F

PAN oS

Tr. J

ef I

t zc tet

§ AMET ws

5 oo YG

roe rf Pf

T AGEL FOS

! bt of

tr t+ fr FP

fr &) £

of fh

¢ FF £ €

{ ¢ ft

E t FP

zt ot Tt

So ee

EES §

{

9 5 § 9

boreitl

fp ¢€ f£

EOE fF

£ AOR] as

tod

e Ek

SP £

spe s

g s

9 § £ TF

aus

ERSP/R

L NOSHVad

VETOUULVUOVOUUUULULT

moa

SvoLveevc=ze

y2us

veaua

adfj

Bulpaas

ysysuq

Jayjnd panods anyy

YS MOD sanys

ysyxog yoeqduiny

jayaRriiaylRayy sading ay saris

TayoRLVY EIT AOys-assopYy

joyorayiws 7] pauy-anig

Taydeliay Pay Paul|-MolaA

jayseluayiRay Yysnig yoo]

laypehayieay ysnoy

jyehayesyT] paymy Aujds

FUIIY AY PII pasou-duRYyS

TUTIY AL PAM ASOU-ptgy

Ys waguley

ayr_y Rutwsapy

assy soy

ASSEL yy PAIPOINI-2NiA

YSLpsOIBUAS

assPIM panlods yaryg

Ayoq Ana

PASEL MA ORLY

Jadoiy ang

Ul Appag

ULpPMy | WOMIOD

yinoy Awwoy

Yalaq adBopy

soddeug usangy

USIBUOLIS

ysydiay

AYO 4a ayty

YsjjEIO >

JOYANUOOY

daams popurg

daamg Bag

JWG

Ysyriqa?y

dary Bag

SUNIY AY AMOaNy Fury

USUEINH BaunpGON

aad enyg

(paag aaqueg

Yuad Rag popury

Ysijtnog paimous-du0 7

WIM PIO

ATTRAALL

D¥lq Pauly Fuoy

YSIPRUIPAN Laynog

yayeor

ada-s]]Ng UOUIIOD

UORRIC] RAS

saddrugs pay

Jaddeus |IP1-MoyRag

ABy apaeq

AWEU HOWLUOD

“DAN yUEI =

SUOALLIPD OY UAG= > AtOMUMIO-—C ALOAIQIAY = H ‘Salis SMatiba [Pp aauNpuNngY say fo sijnsaa yrim

(u1) yidacy

sajaads jo laquinyy

(Jayiuansy) nyninds sdaz0ayo05

(SUIIINE, FW APB) S/OJoUNdOUNAD DIOYdOsauC)

(MEYS) Mino puPIDIY

(UOSPLEY NY) xaynoanuay so2o;dou Pp

SUIYDINY DySMueA “fy

(purer 2p Aongy) srdawveddiy py

(Alig A) 170% “yy

SUNINF, Olpawyorns, pruayosnapy

(Neuapses) sat Psdlaiad

(MEYS) SHOpNMa SAY TYAIH YON

(uOspaey oy) saMasy seuedig

(19S) syuyund “4

(UOUYOL) laWoppag snynUaouoydis

(uosparyary) sayndeson -¢

UOSpPUPYaY snyatoUnd? xOPC

UOSPABYatY Sninonyisd

UOsPURIANY snoujay Snaynjopnasy

(MOSPsRyay) Sayama) sMsqi ne

(APA}IEIN) SHO) MODWE SHIQnposIsn ES

(NRUAPSD) NtaMUAIND Snsquiniag

NAUUAIIUA[RA W LIAN sMnpoany) sidajauryida

(UOSpIeYy oly) HpEyNagy Snposaoyay

(aayinant) aanojod Dutdng

(Aqiicy W Kesey) sdeaneris myjason

SSULAINUIIP A WD ASIAN SHuPIAOas sida

HOSPURYOIY Sadan SnpApaopojTay>

(Fa) ty AA) (SaUMaoUaDA Sn} ODPDUEaN

(UOSPJPYOIY) SeMaae PLOYdoR20E7

JOA sMuMAGad smiuauntYy >)

(NevaT St >) SNMOMMOgiatY byANbADe

(ay) SHDOW sdaNowjayy

UOspiRyory wininiasn[ xvas MATA

SBUUAINUATE A WW DANS SNUPIaOeR “§

uospipyary sruudinban sidings

(ay uanny) smundauprs snsoyday

(UOSPIEY ry) Ovga> npjasy

(uospseysty) syapiain snsunsopcj20q

(SauUaIUAyE A W IRIAND) smpjaund sapowranyrys

AAOYD andunjsnow sdourysniy

(suaad) Sanaa sdotsajdDsng

(uospieyory) Jasnd pavadoisany

(SAULATDUAIEA W IAIAND) MimMQnsossu saposjoajdodayy

(UOSPIBYAY) STPNOsAINIas SISMOIAID J Udef

(ANY AA) Stimisn snsajdoug

SauUaUayE A Xasvap XUPINIOpNAyy

(WJ) IMay saisayourg

(4auIZUNTY) Osvadsuos miyuaout 4

SAUUDIUALHA W Jaan weuUOA SAYIYaNad|

JASUIZUNTY SIMIAN Staayduadey

(apadaoe]) smsayoiwant KAsaidoyaye

(aaywany) Ipioiwed “5

(SaUMAIIMALEA ZW LIAND) Smyoauy xtaaqgosiuad

AmAPEPY SDUISND supQO Cy

SEU dy NUaINS

WANS IY TUNE Paasayya sarrads ysl fO IST] “TAN,

Flinders I.

The sites investigated by loz abundance count

here were close together. The bottom is relatlyely

level with patches of sand and a lew large (3-4 m),

overlapping blocks forming caves. Wave exposure

is low relative to the other sites, The algal

assemblages are dominated by Cystephora spp and

Sargassum spp,

Results.

A species list, with common names, of fish

observed on the various censuses is given in Table 1,

together with che results of the log abundance

counts for various sites, One species nol seen by

Kuicer (1983) Le. Deetylosurgus aretidens

(Richardson) was recorded at Pearson 1, The

grealesl number of species sighted during half hour

periods were recorded at Pearson [. and the fish

faunas at the Hotspot were found to be the least

diverse, Whether changes in diversity are a function

of topographic complexity, walter movement, algal

standing crop, or a combination of these and other

factors is impossible to determine without

additional censuses.

The belt transeet counts of the lish species, anc

their mean estimated lengths, are given in ‘Tables

kK. L. BRANDEN, G, J, BDGAR & 8, A, SHEPHERD

2-6 for Topgallant [,, Hotspot, Ward |,, and

Person J, respectively, Replicate censuses of the

abundances and size structures of fish species

observed along a single belt transect line show close

correspondence, regardless of whether they were

carried out by different divers or the same diver

(PS =0,72 for census on 10.iv,1983 al Topgallant 1,

(Table 2), and PS=0.74 at Site 2 and 0.77 at Site 3.

Ward 1. (Table 4); PS=0,7) at Site 1 and 0,65 at

Site 4, Hotspot (Table 3)), Even PS values at the

same site between years were quite high (mean

PS 0,66, 5.¢.=0.06 for all between year comparisons

of censuses at Topgallant [,),

The increase in cumulative number of species and

in PS values by stepwise pooling of censuses (Fig, 2)

shows in Gach case even curves without breakpoints.

After the first 2 or 3 censuses species accumulate

more or less evenly by the addition of chance

sightings of mostly individual wandering species.

Further sampling would presumably lead to level-

ling, out of these curves.

The numbers of fish species sighted during the

belt transects were significantly correlated with the

depth range, and hence gradient, of the transects

(Fig. 3, r=0.56; P < 0,05). In this analysis,

whenever a transect was duplicated the mean

Tanie 2. Resulis of belt (runseci censuses al Topgaltant I, a» number of fish sighted; X=estimated mean length.

Date Surveyed 1/4/82 29/4/82 10/4/83 10/4/83 21/4/85 21/4/85

Depth Range 5-17 m s-17m 6-17 in 6-17 6-17 6-17 m

Diver KB KB GE. KBE kB KB

nH oMem) on Xen) of xfem) of tem) on (em) no oxen)

Centroberyvs gerrurdi 2 25 4 2 2 Ww «28 2 045

Pempheris multiradiatus 1 8 l 10 14s 3 12 (93 2

PL klungingerd tt Ww | 15

Upeneichihys vlamingit 2 8

Dinolestes lewini | 15

Caexioperca lepidaptera 1 VW 6 15 5° OW 34 7) OB 12 #2 065

Paraplesinps meleagris } 25

Trachinops nourlunvae 9 Kk &3 10» =tSS & 241 x YU 7 150 6

Girella zebra 9 26 8 21 2 25 4 s 16 23 it 23

Ayphosus. sydnevyanus 1 2S

Seurpis qequipinnes 0 26 (0 1s 6 19 Hw li lh 28 12) 18

Vinculum sexfasciatunt 1 25 3 25 I 23 3 20

Chelmanoeps truncatus 2 20 ae. | 3°48

Dactylophera nigricans I 30) a” 38

Nemadacrylus valenciennest 3 47 i ab 3 Ww

Cheiladactvlus nigripes 2 40) | 25 2 Ws 4 27 5 35 4 27

Parma victoriae 2 18 i \3 3.7 5 49 9 8 9 1b

Athoerodus youtledii { 3| 3 al 1 WwW 4+ 654 2 43 1 50

Detalahrus auraniaens ! 15

Austrolabrus maculatus 2 45

Pictilabrus laticlavius 2 is I 2 a TI 2 AS i 10 2 2

Pyeudotubrus letricus 8 7 16 " 20 19 Ma 24 [2 24 lo = 38

Odax cranomelas t aw 7 Bit) f, 21

QO veroptilus I 5

Siphanaenuthus beddanrwei 4 15

S_ cuninus a 8

Meuschenia Jlavalineate 2 WwW ! 3M) 4 Gl 4 9)

M. hippocrepis 2 2k 1 A) 1 30 2 4

NUMBER OF SPECIES 20 20) \4 i2 15 if

REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS

TABLE 3. Results of belt transect censuses at Hotspot, n=number of fish sighted; x=estimated-mean length.

Site Number 1 ]

Date Surveyed 1/4/82 13/4/83

Depth Range 13-14 m 13-14 m

Diver KB GE

n x(em) n x(cm)

Pempheris multiradiatus l 15

Upeneichythys vlamingii ! 15 10 13

Caesioperca rasor 5 18 1 15

Girella zebra 1 25

Scorpis aequipinnis 5 26

Vineulum sexfasciatum 2 25

Parequula melbournensis 3 13

Dactvlophora nigricans | 7)

Cheilodactylus nigripes ] 25 2 4]

Parma victoriae 2 20

Achoeredus gouldii 3 68 2 61

Ophthalmolepis linealatus 1 30

Pictilabrus laticlavius 4 18 2 23

Pseudolabrus tetricus 5 22 11 28

Odax cyanomelas 2 28

O. acroptilus 2 15

Siphonognathus beddomei

Meuschenia venusta I 18

M, hippocrepis 1 25

Aracana aurila

NUMBER OF SPECIES 11 13

1 4 4

13/4/83 14/4/83 14/4/83

12-14 m 11-15 m 1-15 m

GE GE GE

=x(cm) n x(cm) nm x(cm)

5 20 1 15

| 10 1 10

] 30

1 25

6 1S ! 15

4 34

1 25 i] 25

I 61

I 30)

6 24 é 2) 4 20

15 28 4 32 6 31

10 12 2 15

1 18

1 30

1 20

13 6 5

TABLE 4. Results of belt transect censuses at Ward J. n=number of fish sighted; x=estimated mean length,

Site Number 4 2 2 3 3

Date Surveyed 31/3/82 12/4/83 12/4/83 12/4/83 12/4/83

Depth Range 20-27 m 4-12 m 4-12 m 9-12 m 9-12 m

Diver KB KB GE KB GE

n x({cm) mn x(¢m) mn = -x(erm) n= x(em) n x(cm)

Myliobatis australis 1 230 I 150 | 230

Pempheris multiradiatus 60 8 25 13 15 13 24 13

Upeneicthys vlamingii | 15 2 13 2 1S 2 19

Caestoperca rasor | 20 2 18 1 20 ! 15

Paraplesiops meleagris | 20

Trachinops noarlungue 1 8 9 5

Girella zebra 1 25

Scorpis aequipinnis 40) 20 I 15 7 17 | 15

Vinculum sexfasciatum 2 6

Parequula melbournensis 3 10 2 9 8 a 13 9 13 13

Cheilodactylus nigripes § 22 4 34 2 25 3 29

Parma victoriae 5 15 3 21 2 15 | 2

Achverodus gouldii 2 44 7 37 3 44 5 42 3 42

Pictilabrus laticlavius 1 20 10 ia 12 20 in| 21 9 22

Pseudolabrus tetrieus 14 21 3 25 21 19 {2 25

Odax cyanomelas 3 27 z 28 2 28 2 33

Siphonognathus beddamei 1 Ww

Bigener brownii 2 25 | 30

Penicipelta vittiger i 25

Meuschenia hippocrepis 2 24 | 30

NUMBER OF SPECIES 5 15 15 15 at

number of fish was used to avoid pseudoreplication

(see Hurlburt, 1984), The steeper transects showed

grealer species richness, presumably because they

incorporated overhanging rocks, and hence cave

dwelling fish species (e.g. Pempheris multiradiatus,

Pempheris klunzingeri,. Centroberyx gerrardi), and

because habitats change relatively rapidly with

depth. However, an unusually low fish species

richness was found along a moderately steep

transect at Site 1, Ward |. (see Table 4 and Fig. 3).

74 kK. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD

100 20

PERCENT SMMLARITY (Pa)

: 4

MUMGER OF CENBUBES

Fig. 2. Percentage similarity and mean number of species

between pooled censuses (from 1-5) and all censuses

combined for belt transect data at Topgallant [. Vertical

bars are standard errors.

This transect was the only one carried out in water

depths greater than 20 m, suggesting that deeper

environments may be more homogeneous than

those in shallow water.

Unlike the log abundance counts, there are only

minor differences in the fish species richness of the

bell transects between different localities in the

Investigator Group (Table 6).

Discussion

The abundance of large fishes, such as the blue

groper (Achoerodus gouldii) which was recorded in

20 ec

Y=3.39+ 0.63%

Ri=0.56 P«0.06

16 x

g me

rT we x

a 42 ee

5 . .

re)

= 4

4 2 4 6 a jo. 12

DEPTH(m)

Fig. 3. Plot of number of species against depth range of

the belt transect for all sites.

15 out of 18 belt transects, shows that these reefs

are rarely visited by spear-fishermen. These data are

therefore a record of fish abundances in virtually

unexploited conditions.

The two census methods produce quite different

information about reef fish assemblages. The log

abundance count provides a quick estimate of the

relative abundances of the major fish species in an

TABLE 5. Results of belt transect censuses at Pearson I, n=number of Jish sighted; x= estimated mean length.

2 4

Site Number

Date Surveyed 27/3/82 27/3/82 27/3/82 27/3/82

Depth Range 10-20 m 10-20 m 5-ll m 7-10 m

Diver KB KB KB

n= x(cm) nm x(cm) nh x(em) n x(erm)

Pempheris multiradiatus 30 15 3 15

Upeneichthys vlamineli 3 14 2 25

Pseudocaranx dentex 20 30

Caesioperca rasor 28 15 38 18 10 4 12 13

Trachinops noarlungae 170 8

Girella zebra 14 30 2 25 43 12

K\phosus sydneyanus 40 25

Scorpis aequipinnis 52 20 8 26 in] 30

Vinculum sexfascialum 1m 25 1 25 ] 30

Parequula melbournensis 25 13

Dactylophora nigricans | 38

Nemadactylus valenciennesi 4 38 1 30

Cheilodactvlus nigripes 5 30

Arripis georgianus 100 18

Parma victoriae I 20 1 20 | 13

Achoerodus gauldii a 64 2 56 2 20

Pictilabrus laticlavius 10 20 2 18

Pseudolabrus tetricus 8 20 6 24 9 26 5 24

P. psittaculus 1 8

Oduax evanomelas 3 6

O. acroptilus 1 20

Penicipelta vittiver I 20

Meuschenia flavolineata 5 23 3 20 8 28 2 25,

M. fhippocrepis 3 25 ay 20

NSUMBER OF SPECIES 16 10 10 12

REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS 75

TAR A. Capipanson af niedn neriber (with slundard

deviations) a” fish species at different sites by iwo

methads. d= dara.

Log abundance

caunt (30) tins)

Bell Transeet

Topgallant

Islands 16.5 (4.1) ned.

Hatspot 9.6 (3.8) 13.3 (4.2)

Ward Islands 12.2 (44) 21.5 (4,9)

Pearson Islands 12.0 (2,8) 27.0 (2.9)

Winders Island n.d, 15.7 (0.6)

area, and js thus useful for camparing the fish

communities at different localities.

Log abundance counts give larger species lists

because the diver covers a larger area and can

sample more habitals. The area searched by a diver

(assuming a bund width of 5 m is searched) was

found by Shepherd (1985) to be 103 po* min |,

2iVing a mean coverage of 3090 m* in 30 minutes,

compared with 500 m? by a belt transect which

takes more than |wie that time

Although the belt transect method shows signifi-

cant differences in fish species richness between sites

with different bottom gradients, it tells little about

overall diversity differences between sites, Belt

Iranserts are useful nevertheless because they

provide quantitative information abour fish

abundanves and size structures which can be used

for estimating the fish standing srock (see Willan

ef al, 79). Such estimates, hawever, are

approximate because the diver relies on visual

estimates of fish length and transect width,

Moreover, some fish are attracted to the diver while

others are repelled, and the abundances af active

fish may be over-estimated because divers on

adjacent transects could each record a fish passing

perpendicular to the transect in front of them.

Subject to these inaccuracies, the belt transect

method is often the only practical method for

determining fish standing stock (Quast 1968). The

close correspondence between rhe size and

abundance estimates of two divers in this survey

(Table 4) indicates that the method is reasonably

uccurate,

Two or three replicate belt teansects will generally

be needed because of the patchy distribution ol reef

fish and the limitations inherent in the method. Like

Sale & Douglas (1981), we found that a single census

was inadequate, with only a gradual impravement

with replicate censusing. There is no obvious

“breakpoint” which might be used to argue for an

optimal number of replicate censuses.

The choice between (he two census methods is

therefore one of purpose. A log abundance count

will provide more information about the fish

diversity in much less time and is therefore more

suited to preliminary surveys, particularly when

carried out at a number of different depths. Wf an

accurate census of fish ina given babitat is required

for standing stock information, or if.a single site

is to be censused over a period of time to determine

seasonal ar annual variation, then the bell transect

method is indicated.

Acknowledgments

We are grateful to the skipper Mr M.. Leech and

crew of the Cape Adieu for their thoughtful

attention {o divers, and (0 the Fishing lndusery

Research Trust Account for partial funding, Mr R.

Kuler ave advice on some Species’ determinations,

References

Brock, VE. (1954).A preliminary reper! on a method

of estimacing reer lish populanons. J Werledll

Munuvement 1%, 297-308.

Eotar. ©, J, (198l) Adm initial survey bf potential marine

reserves in. Tasmania. Nat. Parks Wildl Serwice Ove.

Pup. 4. 1-87

(84) General features of the ecology and

biogeography of Tasmanian subtidal rocky shore

Comumanitics, Pup Proo. R. See. Kayne 118, 17-0R6

Fito, 3G. & McFastant, G. (1968) Numerical

mMcthods Wh Marine cooloey L A quaniuiative simukiaty

analysis of rock shore samples in False Bay, South

Altiva, Zuuf Afr 3, i8-)37.

Hugi sori, S. A. (1984) Pseudorepliculion and the design

of Eealagicn! field experiments. Rev! manoun $4,

187-

Joyins mae Jb (85a) Spearlishing compennonsy im

South Australia (1983/4) 1. Shere niet toes events. Fish,

Res, Pap. Rep. Fish, tS. Aust. No. 12. 1) pp

(198Sh) Spearfistung competitions in Sourh

Australia (1983/4) HE. Aus malian skindiving convention

Kish. Bes. Pap. Dep Fish. (8. Aust. No. ld. 15 pp:

Ruling, Keo, (1981) The inshore fishes of the Kear

Group i Bass Strait. Mret Net. OB L&4—7.

(1983) An annotated fist of fishes of the

Investigator Group, South Australia Fish. Aes. Page

Dep. kish. ¢S. Aust.) No, 7 '2 pp.

Last, P. (1879) Birst records of the Que Spot Puller

(Chromis Aypsilepisy and the Spotred Sringuice

(Uiralophus gigas) rom Tasmanian watery with ar

annotated list of fishes recorded fran Kent tslunds, Bass

Strait. Tas. Nat. 59, 5-12,

Oblast, J.C, (1968) Estimates of ihe populayiens and the

standing won Witney Calif’ Dept. Fish Game, Fist,

Bull 199, 57

Russtin, By c. reen Population and standing crop

estimates for rocky reef tishes of north easter) New

eealand, NZ Moe hae Res. VW, 230-

SAIN. & Dotcias, W, A, (981) Precisian and

bai i, Vistfal census fechas for fish assemblages

on corel puteh reets. Env. Biol Fish, 0, 343-439.

SHNPHERD, S. AL (1985) Power aod efficiency of a

research divel with a deseripriog of a rapid underwater

NMeasvriie ealiwes Cher vse in measuring recruitment

K. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD

and density of an abalone population. In C. T. Mitchell | WILLAN, R. C., DoLLimoreE, J. M. & NICHOLSON, J.

(Ed.) “Diving for Science ... 85” pp. 263-272. (1979) A survey of fish populations at Karikari

(American Academy of Underwater Science, La Jolla). Peninsula, Northland, by SCUBA diving. N.Z. J. Mar.

& Womers_Ley, H. B. S. (1971) Pearson Island Freshw. Res. 13, 447-458.

Expedition 1969-7. The sub-tidal ecology of benthic

algae. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 95, 155-167.

REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA (LEIDY, 1886) NEMATODA:

HABRONEMATOIDEA

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Tetrameres certa is redescribed from Diomeda cauta from Tasmania. It is a large worm with body

spines and left spicule 2300-3300 mm long. T. diomedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942a is

considered a synonym of T. certa. The placing of T. certa as a synonym of T. paradoxa Diesing,

1935 by Walton 1927 is considered unfounded; the new specimens differ from T. paradoxa chiefly

in the shape of the tail and the presence of body spines in the male.

REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA (LEIDY, 1886)

NEMATODA: HABRONEMATOIDEA

by PATRICIA M, MAWSON*

Summary

Mawson, P: M. (J986) Redescription of Terwmeres certa (Leidy, 1X86) Nematoda: Habronematoidea Trans.

R, See, S Aust. 110(2). 77-79, 30 May, 1986.

fetrarheres verta is redescribed [rom Diemedea cautu tram Tasmania, 10 is a laree worm with body

spines and with left spieule 2300-3300 mm long, 7) diomedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942a is considered

asynooym of T ceria. The plaving of 7 certa as a synonym of T. paraduxe Diesing, 1935 by Walton 1927

iy considered unfounded; the new specimens differ from TZ paradoxa chiefly in the shape of the Wil and

tle presence of body spines in ihe male

Key Worbs: Telrumeres certa, To diomedeag, T. paradoxa, albarrosses, morpholowy.

introduction

The gift of a number of tetramerid worms from

ali albatross in Tasmania, by David Obendorf, lias

made it possible to redeseribe Jetrameres verta

(Leidy, 1886), atid to.assess its position in the genus.

Leidy (1856, p. 55) listed this species as ? Filaria

dubia accompanied in sacs in the gastric mucous

membrane by “enigmatic” globular brawn bodies.

Later he dissected these bodies and redeseribed

them, and (he “filarial’ worms with them, as

Tropidocerca verta, Filaria dubia being pre-

occupied, Walton (1927) reexamined Leidy’s

material; he found that it had been relabelled

(presumably by Leidy) as 7) paradaxa (Diesing).

Mollhagen (1976!) in his comprehensive thesis

on the genus Yetrameres found that Leidy’s

specimens had disappeared from the Philadelphia

Academy of Science, and that specimens of 7

paradoxa which had been redeseribed by Travassos

(1914), were also unobtainable,

Comparisons of these species is theretore only

possible fram characters noted in the earher

descriptions. From these, and Front the hosts noted,

it seems that 7. certa (Leidy) from albatrosses is

distinc from 7 paradoxes (Diesing) from American

birds of prey.

Terranieres verte (Leidy, 1886)

? Filaria dubia Leidy, 1856 (not Creplin, 1846), trom

Diomedea exulans, southern Atlantic Ocean.

Trapidocérca céria Leiay, (S86, from Dioriedea eculuns,

southern Atanric Occan

Ftrameres paradloxe (Diesinw, 1835) sensu Walton, (927,

'Mollhagen, [. Ro (97a) A study of the prarasine

nematode genus Telrameres |Habronematoidea!

Terraineridae). Dissertafin in Zoology, Graduate hacully

oF Texas Tech, University, 846 pp, unpublished,

* South Australiana Museuut, Noh Terrace, S. Aust, 5000,

Tetrameres diamedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942, from

Diamedea chlororhynchus Pt Adelaide, 8. Aust.

Host and locality; Diomedeu cauiu, Albatross 1.,

Tasmania, Coll. Dr David Obendorf, 64.1984, 20

on, WOE G_

Description: A large species, males. 1] mm long,

max, diam. 400 ym, females from 3 nim » 1.5mm

to 8-9 tim »* 7-8 mm, larger individuals more

numerous,

Males: Body curved, widest in posterior half, tail

at an angle to remainder of body. Somatic spines

small and sparse, in four rows starting just behind

cervical papilla, and continulmg, though not salient,

almost to cloaca, Lips prominent, dorsal and ventral

labia depressed in midline (Fig. 1), each bearing two

large laleral cephalic papillae; lateral pseudolabia

longer than labia, indented anteriorly (Fig. 2),

trilobed in en tace view, each lobe with ane tooth;

broad lateral alae arising from pseudolabia, with

strong intracubeular thickening (Figs 2, 3) and

extending about 100-150 wm from anterior end, then

narrowing gradually to about mid-body length.

Buccal capsule thick-walled, 23-34 wm long, with

circular groove externally at about mid-length,

diameter 25-30 yim, base 40-45 pm from anterior

end of lips,

Cervical papillae, sometimes asymmetrical, ar

about jevel oF nerve ring; nerve ring 359-440 pm,

excretory pore 450-660 um, from anterior end of

bady.

Tail bent dorsad at cloaca, in most specimens also

twisted on Jang axis through about 45% (Fig. 4).

Four pairs of pre-eloacal, one pair of adanal, and

six pair§ of caudal papillae. Caudal papillae lie in

and project from caudal alae (or ala-like told of

cuticle), and in addition preanal cuticle somewhat

irregularly swollen or inflated, §o exact form of alae

not certain, Left spicule 2300-3300 pam long with

cyclindrical 160-210 pm Jone hilt (Pig. 3) and

pointed tip: right spicule 300-400 um long, with

78 P. M. MAWSON

Figs 1-8: Tetrameres certa. 1 and 2. Head of male, median and lateral views. 3. Anterior end of male, ventral view.

4. Posterior end of male, lateral view. 5. Proximal end of left spicule. 6. Head of female. 7. Anterior end of female.

8. Posterior end of female.

slightly swollen, rounded tip. No gubernaculum but

some irregular sclerotisation of cloacal lining.

Female (Figs 6, 7, 8): Anterior extension from

swollen part of body 200 um in smaller specimens

to 600 pm in larger, posterior extension much

shorter (100 um in smaller specimens and 500 nm

in larger); overhung by the four body lobes in the

larger. Bodies of all females present swollen in

characteristic shape but no fertilized eggs present.

In two specimens dissected, reproductive tubes

contained many unfertilised eggs (without thick

shells), about 25-30 »m diameter.

In a female 6.2 mm long with body 4 mm

diameter, anterior extension 2000 ym _ long,

oesophagus 2000 nm long, its muscular part 500

pm, cervical papillae, nerve ring and excretory pore

respectively 190, 220, and 300 um from anterior end.

Buccal capsule 20 hm x 20 pm, its walls thickest

at midlength. Tail length 200 um, vulva 250 um in

front of anus.

Discussion

Only one species of this genus has all the

characters: four rows of body spines, lateral alae

arising from pseudolabia, and left spicule longer

than 1000 pm. This is 7) australis Johnston &

Mawson, 1942b from the Black Swan. This species

REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA 19

differs from T. certa in being shorter, bearing

terminal spines on male tail, and in the larger body

spines. The only species recorded from albatrosses

are 7, certa Leidy, and T. diomedea Johnston &

Mawson, 1942a; the latter was described from a

single female, since lost, and was distinguished from

D. certa because of its smaller size. In view of the

variation in size among the females described above,

this does not now seem a valid difference, and 7°

diomedeae is placed as a synonym of D. certa.

Leidy’s specimens, now apparently lost (see

Mollhagen, 1976!) were examined by Walton (1927)

who noted that Leidy had restudied his specimens

of 7 certa, and relabelled them 7. paradoxa

(Diesing, 1835) which was described from a South

American vulture. However, there are distinct

differences in the males of 7: paradoxa as

redescribed by Travassos (1946) (and by later

authors), and Leidy’s material as described by

himself and redescribed by Walton, not only in the

measurements given, but in the number of postanal

papillae (up to nine pairs in 7) paradoxa, always

six in 7. cerfa), and in the presence of caudal alae

(figured by Walton and not described or figured by

Travassos). Neither Walton nor Travassos mentioned

the twisting and recurving of the tail, which is

described by Leidy, and present in the males from

Tasmania examined here. In view of these

differences and of the difference in hosts, it seems

likely that 7. certa is a separate species from 7:

paradoxa, the new material agrees with the

descriptions of Leidy and of Walton, and is

certainly not 7. paradoxa, for which body spines

have never been described.

References

Diesina, K. M. (1835) Tropisurus und Thvsanosoma, wei

neue Gattungen von Binnen Wiirmern (Entozoen) aus

Se Med. Jabrb. K. K. Ostern, Staates. 16, NF V7(1),

-116.

JOHNSTON, T. H, & Mawson, P. M. (1942a) Nematodes

from Australian albatrosses and petrels. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust, 66, 66-70,

& (1942b) Some avian nematodes from

Tailem Bend, South Australia. [hid. 66, 71-73.

Leipy, J. (1856) Synopsis of Entozoa and some of their

Ecto-congeners observed by the author. Proc. Acad. nat.

Sei, Philadel, 8, 42-58.

(1886) Notices of nematoid worms. /did, 38,

308-312.

Travassos, L. (1946) Sobre a especie lipo do genevo

“Tetrameres” Creplin, 1846 (Nematoda: Spuroidea).

Rev. Brasil. Biol, 503-504.

Watton, A. C. (1927) A revision of the nematodes of the

Leidy collections. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 79,

49-163.

THE 1984 FILLING OF LAKE EYRE SOUTH

BY ROBERT J. ALLAN, JOHN A. T. BYE & PAUL HUTTON

Summary

The meteorology and hydrology of the 1984 fillling of Lake Eyre South and flooding of Lake Eyre

North has been investigated using rainfall and evaporation data, and a water budget analysis. It is

estimated that the total inflow, including rainfall over the lake, was 11.4T1 (about 30 % that of the

great filling of Lake Eyre in 1974). The special feature of the 1984 flooding was the violent flow

through Goyder Channel from Lake Eyre South into Lake Eyre North in which it appears 0.6 Tl of

water was transferred in a period of about 5 weeks. This unique historical event lowered the sill

level in Goyder Channel by about 0.5 m, and returned about 40% of the salts introduced into Lake

Eyre South in 1974 back into Lake Eyre North.

THE 1984 FILLING OF LAKE EYRE SOUTH

by RoperT J. ALLAN* JOHN A. T, BYE & PAUL HUTTON]

Summary

Attias, R,ob, BYE, fA. T & Hylrtos, P. (£986) The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South. Trams, R, Sac,

S, dust, 112), 81-87, 30 May, 1986,

The meterology and hydrology of the 1984 filling af Lake Eyre South and fooding a! Lake Eyre North

has been investigated using neinfall and evaporation data, and a walter budyet analysis. I is estimated that

the tau inflow, inchiding rainfall over the lake, was 11.4 TI (about 30% that of the great filling of Lake

Evrein 1974), The special feature of the 1984 loading was the vjolent Now (hraugh Goyder Channel froin

Lake Eyre South into Lake Eyre North in which it appears 0.6 Tl of water was transferred in a period

of about § weeks, This umque historical event lowered the sill level in Goyder Channel by about 0.5 m,

and returned about 40% of the salts introduced into Lake Eyre South in 1974, back into Lake Eyre Norttr.

Introduction

The 1984 flooding of Lake Eyre was notable for

the major flow through Goyder Channel from Lake

Eyre Sourh to Lake Eyre North, bc is clear that the

much smaller storage of Lake Eyre South compared

with that of Lake Eyre North causes an asymmetry

of conditions in Goyder Channel. The flow jnto

Lake Eyre South during the great filling! of Lake

Eyre in 1974 occurred over an extended period with

relatively small water Velocities, The 1984 filling of

Lake Eyre South on the other hand was accom-

panied by a short period of very rapid flow into

Lake Eyre North in which Goyder Channel acted

essentially as another nver mouth for Lake Eyre

North.

We attempt here a reconstruciion af the 1984

flooding. We have been unable to obtain ary good

eyewitness accounts of the peak flood in Goyder

Channel, but our valculations and circumstantial

evidence indicate that it must have been an awesome

phenomenon, A series oF satellite images (Landsat

PS 23/85 for 20 Decenyber 1983, 21 January 1984

and 22 February 1984) however show the evolution

of the flood including the breakihrough of fMouad-

water in Goyder Channel which occurred at ubout

the Lime of the second image.

Metcorology

Laree-Seale Circulation and Synapric Condirians

Meteorological conditions required to penerace

the rainfall necessary to produce Nooding in the

* Flinders Institute for Armaspheric und Marine Sciences,

The Flinders University ef South Australia, Bedttrd

Park, S.Ausr, S042,

t Enginecring and Water Supply Depariment, Water

Resourees Branch, Thebarton, S.Ausl.

"The use of the rerm filling’ is cunsistertt with the

terinindlogy adopted by the Lake Eyre Committee of

Royal Geographical Soiety of Australasia, South

Australian Braach

Lake Eyre Basin are primarily of trapical origin,

and range from transient disturbances through to

major monsoonal incursions (Allan 1983, 1984,*

1985), Transient systems, in particular rain depres-

sions and tropical cyclone remnants, can produce

a variety of floadiny scenarios bat it appears to

require the type of precipitation intensities and

distributions that result from monsoonal incursions

for the Lake Eyre salt pan to be completely filled

(Lake Eyre North and South) (Allan 1984, 1985).

In such situations the greatest volume of flood

waters is usually in the northeastern portion of the

basin in the major Queensland “Channel Country"

rivers, the Diamantina, Coopers Creek, the

Georgina and their tributaries, In 1984, (he flooding

resulted from a transient cisturbanee and rainfall

was more localized, In a swath from northwest to

southeast on the immediate western margin ol Lake

Eyre,

Monsoonal Incursions and the [984 Flooding

Aparl from the 10 years of observations by

Bonythion (1960, 1963), most documentation of

flooding in the Lake Eyre Basin has foeised on

periods when the lake was either substantially

flooded or filled (Bonython 1951, 1959; Bonython

& Mason 1953; Mason 1955; Douglas & Hobhs

1974; Vickery 1974; Serventy 1975; Dudhunry 1984),

However, a detailed study of the nature of the

meteorological conditions responsible for such

extremes bas only recently been atrempred (Allan

1985). This researeh bas aflirined that the four mosr

documented foodings ‘fillings ol the lake in

1949.50, 1955, 1974 and 1976 all resulred from

large-scale mansoGnal incursions of varying

intensity Which are part of a pear-global flueruation

“Allan, R. J. (1984) Variations in low latittide circulauion

and raintall over Australasia during the soulherd

hemisphere summer monsoon fewiic. PHD thesis, Dept

of Geography, Latverity of Adelaide Linnpubl

B2 R. J, ALLAN, J. A. T. BYE AND P. HUTTON

in the oceat-atmiosphere system over the Indo-

Pacific region (the El Nino Southern Oscillation

phenomenon)

In 1984, however, the flooding cannot be put

down to the type of large-scale circulation changes

indicative of pronounced monsoonal incursions,

This can be seen in Fig, 1, which shows 850 hPa

atmospheric circulation (streamlunction), and the

location of the Southern Hemisphere near-

equatorial trough over Australia for January 1974

and 1984. The 1974 filling of Lake Eyre (North and

South) occurred in the presence of a major

monsoonal incursion, while in 1984 the situation

was one of weak monsoonal conditions, Such major

differences are alsa observed in terms of the indices

of the El Nino Sourhern Oscillation (ENSO)

fluctuaton-

The January 1984 Transient! Disturbance

The January 1984 transient disturbance

influenced the west-northwestern portion of the

catchment of Lake Eyre, in particular, Lake Eyre

South. This disturbance formed around 7-8

Fig |. 850 bP streamline patterns over Ausrinia afd

south-east Asia for (a hanuary 1974 god tb) January

1984. Contours in 10" ays

January near the Kimberley Coast of Western

Australia and progressed to the southeast across

inland Australia until it dissipated around (he 14-15

January (Bur, Met. 1984),

Transient systems are not an unusual influence

onthe Lake Eyre Basin (Allan 1985), however the

development of a persistent rain depression on this

Occasion, accompanied by heavy rainfalls (of the

order of 200- 350 mm) in the immediate vicinity

of the lake, was an exceptional event.

Rainfall and Runoff

Jn South Australia, the highest raintall caugings

(Fig, 2), with the exception of Arkarovla in the

Flinders Ranges, were recorded in the area west of

Lake Eyre to the Stuart Highway, Rainfalls of up

to 350 mm produced high flows In the western

(nibutaries of both Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre

North, In particular, the major western tributaries

of Lake Eyre South (Warriner and Margaret Creek)

attained record historical heights. Al the same time,

the caichments of the western tributaries of Lake

Eyre North received high rainfalls, The Macumba,

Peake and Neales Rivers produced high inflows.

High flows were also recorded jn the Frome Creek,

which drains the north-western Flinders Ranges and

also flows into Lake Eyre North,

The major rainfalls occurred in the period 8-15

January bul the distribution within this period was

erratic (Hutton 1984) vonsistent with mesoscale

convective activity, By 17 January, aerial

photography indicated thal most tribularies were

flowing strongly, The Moods were, however, of short

duration as by 28 February, inflow into Lake Eyre

South was negligible, This can be confidently stated

as the Warriner and Margaret Crecks were crossed

by vehicle in the vicinity of Lake Eyre South on that

date.

Water Budge

Mater levels

Water level measurements during the Flooding

wete reercttably eather infrequent There were four

main sources of data.

Firstly, on 27 and 28 February, water levels were

recorded on Engineering and Water Supply Depart-

ment (South Australia) gauge boards which had

been erected and surveyed jn 1974 in Lake Eyre

South, Goyder Channel and Lake Eyre North

(Hulton 1984), These observalions gave [he waler

level al the time of the measurement, and also by

survey of the level of Mood debris, estimates of the

maximum flood levels.

Secondly, two land expedinans by The Flinders

Institute for Atmospheric and Marine Science in

Mareh 1984 (Bye 1984) gave water level observations

1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING 33

y = y

300 \. | 200

% \ Sp Bay ’ b Sy a

. Xe 300, \wacumaice

ha : ps A

ooo yuo 200 ar EALES R a

| 6, . pte WS Nk oaee

oe gs as y=,

~ a emny Oe a

. ~ e&.

Manes

4 3 ie RRINE cK san RP caotic rR

—~as- Sp < ~

aha eae rrr ce _ PER cman

tT ere ae SS 7 ~ es (400!

™ AA (ON ery

~ TSA\z-. eas

ae “hy \

. . 3 * *

SS Mey THO

ois 2 ' ~ ah

Soe fon { 25 ce —j32ts

id ° - Jo ep

, / ih a

‘ /? Ry . +

, . Ew) ct:

130°E i4o*e

Fig. 2, Rainfall (R) in the Lake Eyre catchment in January 1984, --— contours in mm. « Denotes a rainfall station.

on the level post in Level Post Bay in Lake Eyre

North, and aerial expeditions in March, May and

August 1984 and in May 1985 gave further estimates

of the water level throughout Lake Eyre by reference

to the lake bathymetry (Bye e/ al, 1978).

Thirdly, measurements of water depth by Mr Bob

Mossel (private communication) in various

locations in Lake Eyre North during 1984 enabled

the water level to be determined also by reference

to the lake bathymetry,

Fourthly, in Lake Eyre South during the period

March-September 1985, the water level was inferred

from the variation in total dissolved salts (oS) in

which @ is the water density and § is salinity, under

the assumption that there was a constant mass of

salt in solution such that,

eS Ve =const (1)

where V< is the water volume (storage) of Lake

Eyre South,

eS was obtained by interpolating a series of

approximately monthly data from Curdimurka,

kindly made available by Professor W. D. Williams

ol the University of Adelaide. The constant in Eq.

(1) was determined by calculating Ve at the end of

March from the water level ohservations.

The relation between the volume, surface area

and water level in both Lake Eyre South and Lake

Eyre North is obtained throughout from Bye er al.

(1978).

Fig, 3 shows the water level variation in Lake Eyre

South and Lake Eyre North derived from these

various sources,

It is clear that the water level in Lake Eyre South

attained a maximum value about 1.6 m greater than

that in Lake Eyre North, and that there was no

period during, which the water levels in the two

portions of Lake Eyre were similar. The rise in Lake

Eyre South was very rapid, and after the original

sill level in Goyder Channel (. 10.6 m A.H.BD.) was

attained, the water level continued to rise by 0.5 m

to a peak of -10.1 m A.H.D.

This peak in Lake Eyre South was related to rhe

height of the causeway across Goyder Channel,

installed and used by Muloorina Station. The exact

level of the top of the causeway prior to the flooding

is not known, but is thought to be approximately

10.0 m A.H.D, Once the water level exceeded rhis

level on about 2) January 1984, the causeway was

overtopped and washed away, allowing water to

flow from Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North,

It is thought that afer the causeway was washed

away, this flow was largely governed by “The Neck”

84 R. J. ALLAN, J. A. T, BYE AND P, HUTTON

—

|| x

D J F M A M

1983

LAKE

cl EYRE SOUTH

Om 5 m

LAKE EYRE NORTH

eee

—~o

1984

Fig. 3. Water level in Lake Eyre South (hg) and Lake Eyre North (hy) for the period January-September 1984. x

estimates from water level measurements, o estimates from total dissolved salts (eS) observations using Eq, (1).

in Goyder Channel, cf. Water velocity in Goyder

Channel. The onrush of water gave rise to a local

peak level in Level Post Bay of -11.7 m A.H.D.,

which was not representative of conditions

elsewhere in Lake Eyre North. Subsequently a

maximum water level of -12.3 m A.H.D. was

attained throughout Lake Eyre North in March

1984,

It was observed (P.H.) that water was still flowing

from Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North on 28

February 1984. In early March, however, the flow

had ceased, and hence the two parts of the lake were

connected for a period of about five weeks. The new

sill depth was estimated to be —11.0 m A.H.D.

During the period March-September 1984 the

water level in Lake Eyre North fell by 1.2 m, and

in Lake Eyre South by 0.9 m, and by May 1985 Lake

Eyre South was dry, and the water level in Lake Eyre

North was - 15.1 m A.H.D.

Water balance

We apply the water balance method (Tetzlaff &

Bye 1978; Bye & Will in press) separately to both

Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North. Thus, we

have,

AVs = Rs = Eg 4 Ie -T (2)

AVy =Ry -En +Iy +T (3)

in which AV is the change in volume of water, R

is the precipitation on the lake, E is the water loss

by evaporation, and | is the net inflow including

surface and groundwater exchanges,

The subscripts S and N refer respectively to Lake

Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, and T is the

transfer (positive towards Lake Eyre North) through

Goyder Channel. Eqs. (2) and (3) were applied to

deduce Is, Iy and T. The evaporation (E) was

estimated as the average of the measured pan

evaporation rates at Oodnadatta, Woomera and

Moomba multiplied by a factor of 0.67 (Tetzlaff &

Bye 1978), and the rainfall (R) was estimated by

interpolating over Lake Eyre from neighbouring

stations, cf. Fig. 2.

The monthly increments (AV) were obtained from

the water levels of Fig. 3 (except for the period

1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING &S

Taw) |. Bvaporarion (Ej, rainfall (Rj and change in storage (AV) and water levels (Ah) for Lake Eyre South and

Lake Eyre North, and total dissolved salis (05) in Lake Eyre South for the period Januury-Seplember 1984,

a Ne ean NA en ca A Ae a ST, SU RS dl eit et Mates ih Leia etek ae

E Rs Ry AVs AVS Ah, Ahiy os

mm mm Tl mm g/l

January 170* 300 250 1.33 7.98 ~ -

February 280 0 0 0.46 ~ 0,82 410 — 150 28

Murch 222 0 0 O17 ~O,55 — 220 ~ 100 43

April 14k 8 3 0.10 ~ 1,86 150 — 400 4b

May 105 2 2 ~ 0.06 0.88 110 ~ 200 44

June 69 5 5 0.08 0.83 ~ 90 250 60

Juty 64 8 8 ~ 0.04 ~ 0,33 - 60 100 63

August [2 0 0 0.06 -(7 ~ 120 - it 69

Septentber 143 § 8 ~ 0.09 ).31 - 140 ~ 100 86

“ For the past-rain period Jan. 10-31. { Tl-10? m?,

April-September 1984 in Lake Eyre South during

which AV¢ is given by Eq. (1).

Table ] shows the monthly average values,

TaslLe 2. Welter budget of Lake Eyre South and Lake

Evre North for the period January—September 1984.

. nal 7 Lake Eyre Lake Eyre

There are two distinct periods in the water South North

balance, The first period (January-March)

vay . TI TI

encompasses all the main inflow into the lake, Rainfall (R)* 0.4 34

whereas in the second period (March-September) — Inflow (1) 1.6 6.7

inflow is negligible. Transfer (T) _ 0.6

In the second period, the change in water level 2.0 a4

is caused only by evaporation as can be verified for Evaporation (E)* 1.f 7.2

Lake Eyre South by the agreement between (— dhs) = Transfer (1) 0.6 oe

and £ (Table 1), In Lake Eyre North however Balance 13 55

(—Ahy) is greater than E, on average by a factor

of 1,35, We attribute this enhanced evaporation ta

the movement of water over the bottom of rhe

unfilled lake by wind. This process, which has

important geovhemical consequences, is discussed

in Torgersen (1984),

In the first period, inflows oceur into both Lake

Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, and there is also

a transfer through Goyder Channel. This occurs in

the (approximately five week) period between the

attainment of the maximum water level (-10.) m

A.W.D,) and the withdrawal to the new sill level

(-{L0m A.H,D). The change in starage (0,95 TI)

between (hese two water levels, minus the loss by

evaporation (0.35 Tl) during the period is equal to

the transfer, TV0.6 TL. Using this estiraate and with

reference to Table 1, Eqs. (2) and (3) vield the water

budget (Table 2). The (ofal inflow and rainfall into

Lake Eyre during the 1984 flooding was 11.4 T1, or

30% of the great flooding (39.0 Tl) of 1974 (Bye

& Will in press).

‘The inflow was approximately four times (Lake

Eyre South 4.0, Lake Eyre North 3.5) the rainfall

over the lake. By reference 10 Fig. 2, itis clear that

this inflow indicates a remarkably high catchment

efficreney.

Salt balance

One of the intriguing features of the [984

Nooding is the transfer of salt which accompanied

the llow trom Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North.

* Raintall and evaporation were assumed to have ocewred

over all the Jake surface in Janwary,

In the 1974 flooding, salt wansfer ocourred in ihe

Opposite direction, and led to the formation of a

salt crust in Lake Eyre South which was pweviousty

absent (Dulhunty 1978), Remarkably, ten years later

the 1984 floading returned a Significant faction of

This salt to Lake Eyre North. The magnitudes of

the transfers can be estimated as follows,

In May 1975, the average total dissotved salts (pS)

in Lake Eyre was 46,5 g/l, and the volume ot Lake

Eyre South (Vs) was 1,1 T] (Bye & Will in press),

and hence 5] Mt of salts resided in Lake Eyre South.

In May 1984, (0S) and Vs were respectively

$4 g/land 0.57 T! (Table 1), from which we obtain

a salt mass of 31 Mr. Thus, 20 My (abour 40% of

the total dissolved salt) Was returned to Lake Eyre

North. This result implies thal in the transfer (T)

the average value of (oS) was 33 g/l which is in

approximate agreement with observation (Table 1).

Dulhunty (1978) observed that the cotal mass of

the salt crust in Lake Eyre South was 30 Mt (about

60% of the total dissolved salt). This suggests that

the post 1984 salt crust in Lake Eyre South should

have amass of about 18 Mt.

The proportionality between the masses vf the

toial dissolved salts and the subsequent salt erust

86 R. J. ALLAN, J. A. TL BYE AND P. HUTTON

appears similar to that found in Lake Eyre North

(Bye & Will, in press).

Water velocity in Goyder Channel

It is interesting to estimate the flow velocity (u)

in Goyder Channel which would account for the

transfer (T), On assuming that T occurred during

a penod of § weeks and considering “The Neck”

at the northern. end of the channel, which has an

approximate mean cross-sectional area of 100 m2

(width 100 m, depth (H) 1 m) we find that v2 m

This velocily was driven by a pressure head of

avout 1.5 m (Pig. 3), which on assuming the water

level change to have occurred in 3 km implies a

surface slope (a) of 510-4. This inference leads to

an independent estimate of u. A simple balance

between bolfom [fiction and pressure gradient

forees (appropriate co the flood conditions) yielus

the expression,

(4)

where g is the acceleration of gravily and K is the

bottom drag coefficient, which over the silty

channel hed would have a value of about 1072

(Bye 977), and hence on using Eq. (4), we find that

uvzms!

These eslimates are necessarily of only order of

magnitude accuracy, however they suggest the

ferocity of the flow in Goyder Channel during this

exceptional event.

Diseussion

1ei8 clear that the 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South

has caused important changes in Lake Eyre.

Firsely, the sill in Goyder Channel has been

eroded by the two successive floodings (1974 and

1984), The sill level has been reduced trom -10.1 m

A.H.D, (Bonython 1961), through —- 10.6 m

A.H.D. (Bye et a/, 1978), fo - 11,0 m A.H.D.

Secondly, aénal observations over (he western end

of Lake Eyre South in August 1984 strongly

suggested that a shallaw groove had been formed

by the entry of the floodwaters from the Margaret

and Warriner Creeks, This feature has yet ta be

confirmed by bathymetric survey.

Thirdly, the distribution of salts within the lake

has been partially restored to the pre-1974. state,

suggesting thal surface hydroloyy is che major

factor in the salt balance,

It Was also interesting thal the juxtaposition of

silly water and the dissolving salt crust in western

Lake Eyre South led to the formation of myriad

sharply defined and beautiful mixing patterns, as

observed in an aerial reconnaissance in March 1984

(Bye er al. 1986). These observations draw attention

fo the fine balance that exists in Lake Eyre with

respect not only to the quantity of rainfall in iis

catchment, but also to the distribution amongst the

various inflows.

It Would be iftefesting to extend the valuable

study of Kolwicki (1986) on the statistics of

historical floodings of Lake Eyre to an examination

of the details of inflaw variability under differing

climatic regimes,

References

Atiam, Rf (1983) Monsoon and teleconnection

yariahiliry over Australia diving the sourhern

Pens oage summers OF 1973.77, Man. Wea, Rev. IVE,

{(3-142.

(1985) The Australasian summer monsoon,

teleconnectiyns and Mooding in the Lake Eyre Basin

South Australian Geographical Papers, Monograph

No 2, Royal Geagraphieal Society of Australasia,

South Australian Branch, 47 pp.

Bont tHom, C. W.fL951) The evaporating waters ot Lake

Eyre. Weather 6, 310-314.

(1959) The Lake Lyre depression. Proc. Roy, Gengr.

Soc, Aust. S Aust Branch 60, 1-16,

01960) A decade of watching for water in Lake

Eyre, (bid. &1, 1-8.

———~ (1961) The accurate determination of the level of

Lake Eyre. Jf, #2, 57-63,

(1963) further light on river floods reaching Lake

Lyre, Ibid, 64, 9-22,

& Masos, B (1953) ‘The fillinu and drying of

Lake Eyre Geogr 2 Lt9, 321-230.

Ben Met (1984) Mouthly weather review Seuth

Australia, January (984 Bur. Met. 14 pp.

Bye, |, A. T. 1977) The Flow: series of rhallasso-models

Sel. Top. Atmos. Mar Seif, The Flinders Institute for

Atmospheric aod Marine Sciences, 60 pp.

(1984) A teconnajssatice of Lake byre i Lake Lyne

Newslewer 3, 4-7, The Flinders Instinae for Armosphene

and Marine Sciences,

, Dittos, PJ, VANDENAeRG, C.1L & Wire. G. BD

(1978) Barhymetry of Lake Eyre. Trans. R. Soc. 5. Aust.

102, 85-89.

& WILL D. (in press) The hydrofogy of tre

“ floading. tn the great fillinw of Lake Eyre in 1974,

Royal Geovraphica! Socety of Australasia, South

Australian Branch.

, ByRon-Scarr, R. A, DB, MAAWORTHY, TA

Nunes, R. A. (1986) Natural flow visualisation in Lake

Eyre, South Australia. FOS mer Geop. Un, 67, 58-59.

Dororas, f & Hows, J, EG. (1974) Deluge in Australia

Geographical Magazine 40, 465-471.

Duinonty, A, (1978) Sati mransters berween Nurth and

Soulls Lake Eyre, Trans. Ro Saw S Aust, WR 7-12

Oulsunty, R. (1984) When che dead heart beats Lake

Byre lies. 2nd Ed. (J. A. & R. Dulbunty, Seaforth,

NSW

1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING 87

Hutton, P. (1984) Field report Flooding in the Lake Eyre

Division, January 1984. (Eng. Wat. Supp. Dept. S.

Aust.), 14 pp.

Kotwickl, V. (1986) Floods of Lake Eyre. (Engineering

and Water Supply Dept., S. Aust.)

Mason, B. (1955) Rainfall in the Lake Eyre catchment,

pp. 11-26. Jn Lake Eyre, South Australia—The Great

Flooding of 1949-50. (Royal Geographical Soc. of

Australasia, South Australian Branch.)

SERVENTY, V. (1975) The Lake that is that wasn’t.

Hemisphere, 19, 2-6.

TETZLAFF, G. & Bye, J. A. T. (1978) Water balance of

Lake Eyre for the flooded period January 1974-June

1976. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 102, 91-96.

TORGERSEN, T. (1984) Wind effects of water and salt loss

in playa lakes. J. Hydrol. 74, 137-150.

VickERY, J. (1974) The greater flooding of the Lake Eyre

Basin—1974. Proc. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Aust. S. Aust.

Branch, 75, 23-36.

THE OCCURRENCE OF HEMIERGIS INITIALIS (WERNER, 1910)

(LACERTILIA: SCINCIDAE) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY GLENN M. SHEA AND BRIAN MILLER

Summary

Four species of the genus Hemiergis are currently recognised: H. initialis (Werner), H. decresiensis

(Fitzinger), and H. millewae Coventry. The latter three species are widely distributed and abundant

in southern South Australia. However H. initialis has been reported only once from S. Aust., a

single specimen (Western Australian Museum R24577), from 8 km W of Ceduna.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

THE OCCURRENCE OF HEMTERGIS INITLALIS (WERNER, 191)

(LACERTILIA: SCINCIDAE) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Tour species of the genus Hemiergis are currently

recon mised! > AL fritiufis (Werner), HW. decresivnsis

(Fitvinger), H. peromi (Fiteinger), and A. millewae

Caveutev. The fatter three species are widely distributed

and abundant io southern South Ausiralia.s-+ However,

Hi. initiulis has been reported only once [rom -S. Aust.

a single specimen (Western Australian Museum R24577),

from 8 km W of Ceduna

Storr? recognised two subspecies of HM, inifialisy

H. i. thitialis and Tf. i. broekeri. The nominate subspecies,

ty which Storr assigned the S. Aust. specimen is otherwise

restricted to rhe south-west of W.A,, and ciffers from

H, i. broakeri of south eastern WA. in possessing

prefrontals (fused to Uie frontonasel in H. & brookeri),

fewer muchals (mostly 0-1 vs 2-3), larger size (snoul-vent

length 20-47 mm ys 21-38 mm) and stronger dark

dorsolateral stripe?) ‘There is, however, some variation

in the prefrontal condition in H. 1. braokeri. We have

examined two specimens (Australian Museum (AM)

R1O026), Evicla, and RIOZ91S, 50.4 kin east of Madura

Roadhouse) with both prelrontals distinct, and a further

two specimens AM R10)272, Eucla, and R1IOS9I4, 50.4 km

east Of Madura Roadhouse) with the right prefrontal only,

distinct.

Of 26,1,1982, a specimen of A. © tnitialis AM RI05526)

was collected 31.9 km air distance cast-north-ecast of

Kimba, 8S Aust. (23°04'S 136°45'F) by G. Shea and R.

Wells, It was Found beneath a dead mat of Triedia in

malice woodland over Triedla on red sand. On 284.1982

&. Miller collected a single spetimen of H. &. brookeri

(South Australian Museum [SAM] R23069) trom benearh

a woodpile | km east of the 8, Aust/W. Aust. border via

the Eyre Highway al 31°38’S 129°0) E.

A further five specimens of Ff. &. initialis have been

lodged with the Sourh Australians Museum trom S. Aust:

SAM R280, “West Coast. S. Aust.”, Survey Camp; Deeres

Bay; R2004}, 60 km south-west of Whyalla (33°25'5

137°02'B), and R21172-74, Laurd Bay Conservation Park

(32-455 13349 FE). The latter four specimens had been

oisidentified as HW, milfewae. An additignal specimen

lrom near Ceduna has been lodged since in the Westeri

Austrahan Musewn collection (R7045)).

This additional material of AL fb inifialis allows the

following deseriprion of the S. Aust. population.

Nusals separated: prefronrals present and separated:

suprauculucs 4+; anterior fwo in contact with [rontal;

frontopartelals paired (25%, m=8), partially fused (62.5%)

or completely fused ()2.5%0), (he suture curving 10 the tight

anteriorly so that the right frontoparietal is smaller than

the let; parietals in contact behind interparietal; 2

temporals bordering each parietal; nuchals absent (S0%,

n=), a Single parr (12.5%) or a single nuchal on one side

(37.5%); loreals 2; supracitiaries 7 (we include tn our vount

Fig. |,

in. Aust. Dots = MH. millewae; Squares

initialis,; Open Circle — H. inittalis brookeri.

Localities for Hemiersis mitialis and H, millewae

H. initialis

(he Vertically enlarged seale Interposed between the fourth

supraocular and postocular series; Storr does nat include

this scale), firs) and lost largest, remainder subequal,

posteriormost supraciliary divided into an upper and

lower scale? Subocular series complete; a single primary

and an upper and lower secondary temporal; 2 scales

bordering free edge of lower secondary temporal;

supralabials 7, fifth subocular; infralabjals 6, postmental

in contact with anterior two; three pairs of enlarged chin

shields contacting infralabials, anterior-most pair in

contact medially; external car a scaled over depression.

Midbody scales in 20-22 longitudinal rows (% =20.6,

n=), paravertebral scates (from first scale behind panetals

ta level of groin) 6)-73 (X =69.6, n=8); lamellae below

fourth Loe 8-10 (¥ =8.4, n=8) granules on plantar surfaces

enlarged.

Presacral vertebrae 36-40 (¥ = 38.3, n» 4); postsaeral

vertebrae 39-43 (n- 2); phalangeal formula of manus and

pes 2,3,4,4,9 and 2,3,4,4,3,

Snout-vent tength 28,0-46.0 mim (% -38.2, n=8); tail

length LIO1-115.9% of SVL (ne2)k forelimb length

9.8-12.7% of SVL (X=114%, n=8); hindlimb length

14.1-19,6% of SVL (X=16.9%, n=8).

Head dark grey. Dorsum brown with or without an olive

tinge, and with two or four longitudinal sows of

moderately conspicuous dark spots. A faint to moderate

dark dorsolateral stripe. Lateral scales grey with darker

spots. Venter orange (translucent While i) alcohol) with

dark edges to the scales, espevially on the throat.

AM R105543 is a gravid female containing 2 near full-

term embryos.

The single 5. Aust. specimen of /7, i broekert has nasals

separated, pretrontals fused lo frontonasal; completely

fused frontoparietals; 2 pairs of nuchals; 7 supraciliaries;

7 supralabials; 6 infralabials; 20 midboady scales; 68

paravertebral scales and 8 lamellae below the fourth toe,

SVE, 38 mm, tail length 107,9% ot SVL, forelimb length

10.5% of SVL, hindlimb length 11.8% of SVI.. Head dark

grey. Dorsum reddish-brown With an olive tinge and two

longitudinal rows of faint darkspots, Dark dorsolateral

stripe present, Ventral seales unspotted, dark-edwed

anteriorly.

H. initialis may be dilferentiated from AY mrillewae, the

only other pentadactyle Memiergis, by its complete

subocular row,S shorter toes with fewer subdigital

lamellae (7-11 vs 12-14)? shorter hindlimbs (14.1-19.6%

of SVL vs 21.0-29.9% of SVL)" dark head, the

colouration obscuring the sutures between the head

shields, and dark edged ventrals on the throat.®

Our field experience with W.A. H. /aitid/is populations

Suygesis That some degree of habitat separation exists

between the subspecies (itialis and brookeri. W.A. initialis

collected at three localities by G. Shea and R, Wells in

Jan. 1982 were taken from undulating dense mallee

heathland (Ravensthorpe), dense eucalypt/Casuarina

heath on white sand (Albany) and dry sclerophyl! forest

(Mundaring), In contrast, specimens of 1. 7, broakeri were

'Copland, S. J. (1946) Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S, 70, 62-92.

*Storr, G. M. (1975) Rec. W. Aust. Mus, 3, 251-260,

ICoventry, A. J. (1976) Mem. Natl. Mus. Viet, 37, 23-26,

ICogger, H. G. (1983) Reptiles and Amphibians af

Australia, (A. H. & A. W. Reed, Sydney).

‘Storr, G. M., Smith, L. A. & Johnstone, R. E. (1981)

Lizards of Wester Australia. [, Skinks. (LIniversity af

WA, Press & W.A. Muse im, Perth).

found at seven localities, all in Meirewna/A triples heaths

and steppes with varying densities (usually sparse) of

cucalypts and acacias on reddish or greyish soils. Storr

eral’, recorded this subspecies from eucalypt woodlands

on loamy soils and Banksia shrubland on greyish-white

sawic,

Our record of 5. Aust. A. initialis from Triodia is

apparently quite atypical of the western populations and

approaches the habitat preference of the castern H,

tnillewae}

AIDS. Aust, records of A. jni/tlalis are from the Central

Mallee Plains and Dunes Environmenial Region,’ and the

population may prove to be restricted (o this region.

The peculiar distribution of HM. i Ininalis, with two

isolated populations in S, Aust. and W.A. separated by

Hf. brookeri is, similar to that reported in Lerista

microtis,? L, microtis trom (wo S, Aust. offshore islands

agree With ZL. mm. wrenivola in sealation, but with 2. m,

snicroris in colouration, the nearest populations of L. m.

microtis occurring in southavest W.A. Both H. initialis

and L. micfotis ae fossorial,

We would like to thank Drs T. D, Schwaner (South

Australian Museum), H. G. Cogger (Australian Museum),

A. E, Greer (Australian Museum) and G. M. Stor

(Western Australian Museurn) for loan of specimens and

use of facilities. Drs Cogger, Ginter anid Schwaner also

provided useful comments on the manuscript. Field work

of G. M, Shea was funded by a grant from the Peter

Rankin Fund for Herpetology, R. Wells is acknowledged

pratefully for field assistance, L. Schwaner and D. Brunker

typed the manuscript.

"Shea, G. M., unpublished data,

7Storr, G. M., Hanton, ‘tf, M.S, & Harold, G, (1981) Rec

W. Aust. Mus. 9, 23-29.

‘Laut, P., Keig, G., Lazarides, M., Loffler, E,, Margules,

C,, Seott, R. M. & Sullivan, M. E. (1977). Environments

of 8. Aust. Province 4 Eyre & Yorke Peninsulas. (CSIRO

Divn. Land Use Res, Canberra),

°Schwaner, T. D. & Miller, B. (1984) Trans. R- Soc. §

Aust. 108, 215-216.

GLENN M. SHEA, Department of Veterinary Anutamy, University of Sydney, NSW. 2006 and BRIAN MILLER,

Lot 53, Hospiml Road, Mr Pleasant, S. Aust. 5$238-

ON THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION AND TYPE LOCALITY OF THE FROG

PACHYBATRACHUS PETERSII KEFERSTEIN, REPORTED FROM

AUSTRALIA

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

The frog genus Pachybatrachus Keferstein (1868) was erected for a single specimen of the new

species P. petersii. The type locality was reported to be “Neu-Siid-Wales”’, and the collector

Keferstein’s brother-in-law Dr R. Schuette. Keferstein referred the genus to the Engystomatidae

(now a synonym of the Microhylidae), a family that in Australia is confined to northern Queensland

and the northern extremity of the Northern Territory.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

ON THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION AND TYPE LOCALITY OF THE FROG

PACH YBATRACHUS PETERSIT KEFERSTEIN, REPORTED FROM AUSTRALIA

The frog genus Pachvbarravhus Kelerstein (1868) was

efected for a single specimen of ihe new species #

petersii.' The type locality was reported to be "Neu-Siid-

Wales", and the collector Kelorstein's brother-in-law

Dr R. Schuette.? Keferstein referred che genus to che

Engystomatidae (now a synonym of ihe Microhytidae),

a fatnily that in Australia is continéd (Oo northern

Queensland and the northern extremity of the Northern

Terrilory,

In a review of the Micrahylidae Parker? dic not

examine the holotype, but nevertheless referred 2 petersii

to the synonymy of Uperadon systoma (Schneider) of

Indi and Sri Lanka, clearly disbelieving the accuracy of

the type locality, and supporting {he opinion of other

contributors.’ This view was fallawed by Manre.® More

recenily Cogger ev al.’ jnetuded P petersi’ as a species

inquirendd in Uneic annotated fist of the Australian

herpetofauna, listed at Under “Microhylidae?”, and

elaborated by stalin that the family allocation of the

species is uncertain.

Bohme & Bischatl do not question the family

dispasiion but, confirming that the colleeror visired New

Sout Wales ji7 1467, anc.also that Parker did not examine

the holotype, allach more eredence co the reported type

locality than to Parker's opinion. They therefore regard

FP. perersiia member of the Australian fauna. Zweitel® figs

erilicised [hal action, None of rhese contributors appear

ta have exaniined the holotype.

&’ £ "4

Kw. 1 Holotype of Parktbatrachus perersit Kelersteig

(7.E.M.K, 28358). Phota: B. Rermipster. Seale in em,

'Kelerstein, W. (1868), Arch. Naturgesch., Berlin 34, 27%

“Bohne, Wo & Bischoff, Wo (1484) Bonner rit

Monogr. (9), USE 213.

"Parker, 1h Wi (93a). Crags of the barnily Microliytlidae.

(British Museum Trustees, London).

Through the courtesy of Dr W. Bohme of the

Zoologisches Forschungsinstitut und Museun) Alexander

Koenig, Bonu, | have been permitted to examine the

Specimen involved (ZPMK 28388), with the objective of

clarifving the systernane position of PA pelersii, and

determining whether it should be regarded a respresen-

tative of the Australian fauna,

The tolotype (Pig. 1) is a gravid female with a snout

ro vent length of 57 mm, [nits gross habitus it resembles

fossorial species referted (o the leplodactylid genera

Notaden, Neabutrachus and. particularly Jeleiaporus,

The specimen is in a good state of preservation but

portions have been dissected extensively. Almost the entire

pectoral musculatiire is missing, but the bones of the girdle

appear complete. IL is firmisternal with massive coracaids

and @ vast xiphisternum; there is o0 trace of procoracoids,

clayicles or omosternum, and its appearance is therelore

in accord with the figure accompanying the original

desuription. The reduged and firmisternal nature of the

pectoral girdle demanstrate that this species cannot be

associated’ wilh Australian leprodactylids which are

arciferal

The massive reducuon in the number of clemerts cf

the pectoral girdle, combined with the presence of a broad,

fimbriated, pre-pharyriyeal ridge, preceded by @ shorter

curved one (also illustrated by Keterstein) are consistent

with the association of Pachvbarrachus with Uperodon.

In ils site and external morpholopy P petersit conforms

in every respect lo the redescription of Li sysrema and

| hive oo hesitation in supporting Parker's? view of

considering These species synonymous.

The argument of Bohme & Bischotf* that (he holotype

came from New South Wales hinges entirely upun the

substantiation that Schuetie collected there. This issue is

not in dispute, but confusion af a rype locality oecurs

elsewhere in Kelerstein's paper: he described Ayla

sehuetieli from Sydney, whereas Copland” demonstrated

iL lo be synonymous with Liftoria adeluidensis (Gray)

Which is confined to the southwest of Western

Australia, |”

Knowledge of the Australian flerpetolauna, and its

continental relavionships, is sufficiently well developed to

fettite the possibility of u large microhylid frog occurring

in both phe Indian and Australian continents, How a

specimen trom India or Sri Lanka came to be included

in the reporr of a collection from Australia remains

Wiknown. Nevertheless, L can find no justification tor

believing that the holotype of F petersit came from

Australia or that (here remains sufficient doubt tu even

mere its lishing a5 a speies inquirencdd.

*Boulenyer, G. A, (1842), Catalogue of ‘The Batrachia

Salientia 5. Ecaudata in the eollectian of the British

Museum, 2nd Edition. (Boosh Museum, London).

“Nieden, B (1926). Das Tierreich 49, |-110,

Moar J. A. (1961). Bull. Amer. Mus. mat. Mist, 121(3),

149-486,

7Cogger, H. G., Cameron, E. E. & Cogger, H. M. (1983). °Copland, S. J. (1957). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.SW. 82, 9-108.

Zoological Catalogue of Australia. 1. Amphibia and !°Tyler, M. J., Smith, L. A. & Johnstone, R. E. (1984).

Reptilia. (Bureau of Flora and Fauna, Canberra.) Frogs of Western Australia (Western Australian Museum,

8Zweifel, R. G. (1985). Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. Perth).

182(3), 265-388.

MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O., Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001.

VOL. 110,

PARTS 3 & 4

28 NOVEMBER, 1986

Contents

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Koste, W. & Shiel, R. J. New rotifera (Aschelminthes) from Tasmania - - -

Davies, M. & Littlejohn, M. J. Frogs of the genus Upero/eia Gray (Anura: Rapid actyittiae)

in south-eastern Australia- - = _ a 5 é x

Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. Earthquakes in South Australia- - -

Burton, T, C. & Stocks, R. A new species of terrestrial microhylid frog from Papua New

Guinea - - - 2 ~ <4 C 2 = . _

Thomas, I. M., Ainslie, R. C., Johnston, D. A., Offler, E. W. & Zed, P. A. The effects

of cooling water discharge on the intertidal fauna in the Port River

Estuary, South Australia- - - - - - - - -

Brief Communications:

Lange, R. T. A systematic effect of stocking intensity upon the specific defoliation rate

of saltbush by sheep - - - ~ = 2 a = ki

Guerin, B. New records of spiders (Arachnida: Araneae) from South Australia- - -

Guerin, B. Celaenia atkinsoni (Arachnida, Araneae): new record for South Australia with

a description of the male- - - > = = = z =

Jago, J. B. An alleged Archaeocyath from Cape Denison, Antarctica- - - -

Barlow, B., Denham, D., Jones, T., McCue, K., Gibson, G. a Grecubalgh$ S. The Musgrave

Ranges earthquake of eines 30, 1986 - - - -

Shepherd, S. A. & Gray, J. D. Food of the anemone Anthothoe albocincta at West Island,

South Australia = - - S a ms a = 5 2 =

Tyler, M. J. & Watson, G. F. On the nomenclature of a hylid tree frog from Queensland-

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

111

145

155

159

173

177

181

183

187

191

193

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 110, PART 3

NEW ROTIFERA (ASCHELMINTHES) FROM TASMANIA

BY WALTER KOSTE & RUSSELL J. SHIEL

Summary

One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in Spring 1985. Of 130 species

identified, 63 were first records for Tasmania, 17 new to Australia and four (Brachionus lyratus

tasmaniensis ssp. nov., Lepadella tana sp. nov., Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov., and Testudinella

mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov.) new to science, bringing to approximately 200 the rotifers known

from the island. New taxa are described and figured; several of the first records for Australia are

also figured, and ecological and zoogeographical peculiarities of the Tasmanian Rotifera are

discussed.

NEW ROTIFERA (ASCHELMINTHES) FROM TASMANIA

by WALTER KOSTE* & RUSSELL J. SHIELT

Summary

Koster, W. & Stet, R. J. (1986) New Rotifera (Aschelminthes) from ‘lasmania. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust.

110(3), 93-109, 28 November, 1986.

One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in Spring 1985. Of 130 species

identified, 63 were first records for Tasmania, 17 new to Australia and four (Brachionus lyratus tasmaniensis

ssp. nov., Lepadella tana sp. nov., Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov., and Testudinella mucronata tasmaniensis

ssp. nov.) new to science, bringing to approximately 200 the rotifers known from the island. New taxa are

described and figured; several of the first records for Australia also are figured, and ecological and

zoogeographical peculiarities of the Tasmanian Rotifera are discussed.

Kry Worps: Rotifera, new species, new records, Tasmania, zoogeography.

Introduction

Until recently rotifers were considered

cosmopolitan, but it is becoming increasingly

evident that there are distinct zoogeographic

associations (Dumont 1983). Some 600 species of

more than 2000 rotifer taxa known worldwide are

recorded from Australian inland waters, and there

is increasing evidence for the radiation of some

groups in southern Australia [e.g. >30% endemicity

in the brachionids (Shiel 1983)]. Tasmanian records

were necessary to define the zoogeographical trends

apparent across the south-east and south-west of

the continent; however, the literature on the

Tasmanian rotifer fauna is notably sparse (Sudzuki

1967, 1985; De Deckker & Williams 1982). The

abundance of permanent standing waters on the

island and high rainfalls relative to the mainland

suggested a rich fauna should occur.

The first surveys of Tasmanian waters specifically

for rotifers established that a diverse planktonic and

littoral rotifer association was present: 131 taxa in

34 genera were identified by Koste & Shiel (1986a).

Only 3% of these appeared to be restricted to

Tasmania, and a radiation of brachionids

comparable to,that of the mainland was not evident.

Notable, however, were the “tropical” affinities; in

sample series from April 1980 and May 1984,

rotifers previously considered pantropical in

distribution were widely distributed, possibly

reflecting Tasmania’s moderate maritime climate.

To investigate further these unexpected rotifer

associations, and to add information on seasonal

variations in species composition and diversity, a

further survey of >100 fresh-saline habitats was

made in Nov.-Dec. 1985. This paper reports on the

results, and in particular the Rotifera new to

*Ludwig-Brill-Strasse 5, Quakenbriick, D-4570 Federal

Republic of Germany

{Botany Department, University of Adelaide, Box 498

GPO Adelaide, 5001, 5. Aust.

Tasmania and Australia, We summarise ecological

observations in the context of this survey; full details

of ranges of water quality for each species are

included in a continuing revision of the Australian

Rotifera (Koste & Shiel 1986b, 1987). Other

components of the survey, particularly Protozoa

and microcrustacea, will be treated later (Shiel &

Tan in prep.).

Materials and Methods

Sites sampled are shown in Fig. 1. Most sites

sampled in the two earlier autumn surveys were

visited again. However, unusually high rainfall and

flooding in early December prevented collections

in some of the midland localities. Habitats sampled

in 1985 ranged from ephemeral flooded roadside

ditches (15), permanent marshes (5), stock dams

(46), streams (4), rivers (5) and their impoundments

(18), large natural lakes (10), a marine-associated

basin (1) and the Hobart Botanical Gardens duck

pond.

All sampling was from margins in small habitats,

from wader-depth in larger habitats, and where

possible from the retaining wall over deep water in

impoundments. More stock dams were accessible

by road than other habitats, hence the greater

sampling frequency.

Physical parameters measured in the field were:

temperature (hand held 50°C alcohol thermometer),

conductivity (TPS LC81 Conductivity meter) and

pH (Radiometer 29 portable pH meter). Plankton

samples were collected using a 37 »m-mesh cone

net (3 x 6m tows), littoral taxa by a 50 wm-mesh

cone net fitted with a 30 cm-aperture stainless steel

Birge cone, and small lentic habitats were sampled

using a 10 / bucket and pouring 2-3 volumes

through a 37 «um stainless steel mesh fitted to a

specimen vial. All samples were concentrated to

100-120 ml and preserved with 4% formalin in

“Whirl-Pak” plastic bags for transport.

94 W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

145 146 a id

. BASS STRAIT ae

( x?)

25,

oa Burnie 2

= 54, aes

22: Y 52.53 57; St fiplens

21 in ? 58

ces Ls, 50

Launceston '50 a,

19,

or®

; a 49

30 29 ‘4 Great Lake ‘i 0

% 3, 48, 61,

ap Fed) gy(

337", , ;

Queenstown. 3! Lake sion !.95% 40 99 1 s on :

13012 69

y, XQ

100, A

HOBART

86.

4 —43

s\,

SOUTHERN OCEAN <1 80-84

. =

TASMAN SEA

' 1 ! |

Fig. 1. Sampling sites from 1984-85 surveys.

Results

Ranges of water quality recorded were as follows:

Water temperature 12.0-29.0°C; conductivity (Kjg)

14,6-34 800 nS cm~!; pH 3.1-8.9. Most localities

sampled had dark, tea-coloured humic waters, 81%

below pH 7.0, and were low in electrolytes (52%

<100, 40% 100-1000, 8% >1000 »S cm!). The few

higher salinity localities either were influenced by

proximity to the sea (e.g. Diana’s Basin and stock

dams near St Helens) or were subject to increasing

salinization from human activities (eg. Lake

Dulverton, Oatlands).

Predictably, rotifer communities of most

Tasmanian waters were dominated by acidophils.

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA "4

One hundred and (hirly rotifer species were

identified from the 1985 sample series; 63 of (hese

are Tiyst peeords (Table 1), bringing to approximately

200 (he known Tasmatian taxa, and |7 are new ta

Australia (total now 620), including four new taxa

desorbed here,

Systematics

Brachiomes Iyratus fasmaniensis ssp. noy,

FIG, 2a-c

Material: 244 females in formalin, sample No.

1477, 36 @ D sample 1478.

Holotwpe: Fenrvale Jorica on microshde, sample 1477,

Coll, 7.977,1985, R J. Shiel. South Australian

Museum, SAM V4018.

Paratypes; Bates and place of collection as for

haloyrpe, two slides in the South Australian

Museum, SAM V4026, SAM V4027.

Type locality: Turbid stock dam 200 m east of

Karanju (Pig. 1:94,.42°45'S, 146°30 B], east side of

Strathvardon road. Also present in a second dam

about 45 m west. Neither dum had emergent

vegetation, 19,5-22.0°C, pH 4,0-6,2, 228-242 1S

cin |.

Dig. 2. Brachionus Wratus rasmaniensis ssp..noy, a. lorica,

dorsal, b. loricva ventral, e-d. lovica, lateral,

sublranvous egg, Seale bar 100 yim.

Deseripiion: Lorica shape resembles Bo lyralus

Shephard, 1911, but.at anterior dorsal margin of

head opening onty short inwardly curving median

spines present; intermediate spines absent. Laleral

spines relatively long, blunt, curved towards ventral

plate (Figs 2a-c pr). Dorsal surface facetted, with

caudal median projection overlapping fool-opening.

Club-shaped posterior projections curve oulwards

as in type, but covered with minute papillae. Ventral

plate ornamentation resembles & pinneenaus Koste

& Shiel, 1983, but caudally a long ventral facet is

lncking. Lorica granulated, more strongly on the

dorsal plate,

Measurements: Lorica length 100-152 pm; width

75-120 ym; foot-opening dorsal 27 36 jum

subitaneous cey (Fig. 2e) 50 =» 75 pm,

Diseussion: The new taxon belongs to the endemie

and morphologically distinet Brachionus group

comprising B lyratus Shephard, 1911, B Keikoa

Koste, 1979 and B pinreenaus Koste & Shiel, 1983,

These taxa can readily be separaied from the

Brachionus angulatis evoup atter Ahlstrom (1940).

Another distinct morph has been found recently in

material from N.SW. (T. J. Hillman, pers, comm,),

Until this population is described (Koste & Shiel

in prep.), and the extent of variation in the above

Australian endemics is Cully detailed, the Tasmanian

muterial is regarded as a subspecies. The need for

vontinued use of trinomials in rotifer systematics,

which still is founded mostly on morphological and

anatomical characteristics, is discussed by Koste &

Shiel 1987.

Literature: Shephard (1911), Koste (1979), Koste e/

al. (1983),

Cephalodella lindamaya 5p. nov,

FIGS 3a-f, 4

Material Four more or less contracted females in

formalin, sample No. 1432.

Holotype: Fernale with contracted head in lateral

position on slide, sample No. 1432. Coll, L.xii.1985

R. J_ Shiel. SAM V4019. Icanotype microphoto-

graph Fig.4.

Paratype: Date and plage of collection as for

holotype. SAM V4028.

Tepe locality: Stock dam 1 km south of Copping

(Fig, (:73, 42°49'S, 47°48'B), west side Hwy 7;

black, humic water, peripheral reeds; 21.7°C, pH

<4, 80 pS em.

Descripiion: Body stiort, stout; head shert, very

broad, slightly dellexed, oblique anteriorly; meek

well-marked, Larica weak, plates not readily visible.

Foot normal, toes relatively long, somewhat swollen

basally (Fig. 3c), medially slender, terminating in

slightly curved claws with acute points. Pour small,

avute spinules inside rhis well-marked terminal part,

96 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

Fig. 3. Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov. a. female, lateral

(slightly contracted), b. completely contracted, ventral,

c. toe enlarged with claw and spinules, d. trophi, e.

manubrium, apical, f. uncus, Scale bars a, b 100 um,

c 10 pm, d-f 10 pm,

Mastax large (Fig. 3d); rami spherical, with

denticulate inner margin behind points; fulcrum

long, slender; uncus with one tooth, lamellar

projection attached at its base; manubria unusual,

terminally crutched and leaf-shaped, enlarged and

distorted (Fig. 3d). This can be observed only in

lateral view, cf. apical view (Fig. 3e), Foot-glands

large and club-shaped (Fig. 3a).

Measurements: Total length of slightly contracted

individual 245 wm (Fig. 3a); toes 68 wm (spinules

4-6 «m); trophi 43 wm (manubrium 38 pm, fulcrum

24 wm, unci 17 wm, rami 14m).

Discussion: Only one individual was. slightly

extended; the others were contracted, however a

valid species can be defined on the basis of hitherto

unknown characteristics of trophi structure and toes

with claws. Only Cephalodella panarista and C.

Sorficula s.l. have spines or spinules at the edge of

their toes (cf. Koste 1978 Pl 129:2d, 6b, e), but these

are inserted dorsally. The construction and

dimensions of the trophi, with distinctive manubria,

differ from other taxa in the genus.

Etymology; named after Dr Linda May, Institute

of Terrestrial Ecology, Edinburgh, in recognition of

her work on Rotifera.

Fig. 4. C. lindamaya, iconotype micrograph of contracted

animal.

Cephalodella mucronata Myers, 1924

FIG. 5h

This pantropical and subtropical species is known

from isolated occurrences on the mainland

(Mungindi R., northern N.SW., Magela Ck, N.T.

and ephemeral water of south-west W.A.). Three

contracted individuals were recorded from separate

localities in Tasmania: No’s 1456 (Lake Pedder,

4.xii.1985), 1460 (roadside pool 4.xii.1985), 1506

(pool, buttongrass plain near Tullah, 11.xii.1985).

All were contracted, with diatoms in the digestive

tracts.

Measurements: Body to 173ym, toes to 137 um.

Ecology: 17.5-29.0°C, pH 3.4-5.5, 34.1-59.3 pS

cm r

Lit: Koste (1978), Koste & Shiel (1980).

Proales cf. fallaciosa Wulfert, 1937

FIGS 5a-e

In samples 1458 and 1460, both roadside pools

near the Strathgordon road (4.xii.1985), and 1475,

Lake Fenton, Mt Field National Park (7.xii.1985),

were more or less contracted illoricate vermiform

rotifers (n=6, 4 and 2 respectively) which had a

short papilla between the bases of the toes, as in

Proales fallaciosa (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 92:5a). Trophi

analysis revealed a relatively long fulcrum and unci

with only four teeth, in contrast to the asymmetrical

trophi with 5-6/7 teeth of P fallaciosa. See also

the extraordinary toes with well-marked claws

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 97

‘

apes

4a,

*.. wt

Fig. 5. a. Proales cf. fallaciosa Wulfert, 1937, contracted female, ventral, b. trophi, c. trophi compressed, d. manubrium,

lateral, e. foot and toes, lateral. f. Encentrum cf. diglandula (Zawandowski, 1926), trophi, g. fulcrum. h. Cephalodella

mucronata Myers, 1924. Female with contracted head. Scale bars a, h 100 wm, others 10 pm.

os W.KOSTE & R J}. SHIEL

(Fig, Se). This probably is a distant species, however

an exact identification was not possible from the

material. PF fallaciosa is known from the Magela

Creek, N.T, (Koste 1981),

Measurements: Toral length (Fig, 4:1a) 160 am, toes

18 wnt, trophi 21 pm, manubria 17 wm, fuleruin 12

prt, longest tooth of uncus 8.5 pm.

Encentrum cf. diglandula (Zawadowski), 1926

FIGS Sf, 2

In sample 1460 (roadside pool, Strathgordon

road, 4.xii.1985) were two contracted illorivate

rotifers which (on digestion in hypochlorite) had

irophi almost identical to those of E. diglanilula,

known till new only from Europe.

Meaywrements; Trophi length 25 ym (unei Spr,

intramallei 3 um, fulerum Spm, manubna 18.5 wm).

cf. Koste 1978497,

Collotheca campanulata longicaudata (Hudson),

[883

FIGS Gad

In} samples 1381 (stock dum, Si Mary's road,

29.81 1985), 1457, 1459, 1462 (Lake Pedder,

A.xii.1985) were populations of individuals attached

io filamentous algae. Sudzuki (1985) recorded C.

campanilata campanulaia from Tasmania; it

appears to be widely distributed in Australia, Fig.

6 shows individuals from sample 1462 (Scatt’s Peak

Dam arm, Lake Pedder) in which we found §2

specimens of the ssp. Cc. fongicaudata, mostly

with contracted coronae and feet (Pig. 6d), but a

few were well-extended (Figs. @a-b), They had the

sume trophi as the type (Fig. 6c), but the peduncle

was never drawn together and of a previously

undescribed length (cf. Koste 1972, 1978). For

development of the peduncle see Summerfield-

Wright (1959), We regard this population as a new

form,

Measurements: Toial length 300-800 fm, corona

width 100-150 jam, peduncle 300-426 jum (in lit, only

fo 200. um),

Lit! Shiel & Koste 1979,

Collatheca edentata edentata (Collins}, 1872

FIGS 7, 8

syn: Ploseularia edentata Collins, 1872.

Not previously recorded from Australia, this

species was represented by a single female in sample

1485 (roadside pool, Queenstown road | kim cast

of walking track to Frenchman's Cap, 8.xii.1985),

Mastax and stomach (Fig. 8) were filled with four

large Euastrum, many phtyto- and zoollagellates and

nearly LOO Bacillariophyceae. The species has been

recorded from Europe, N. & S. America and B.

Asia, and apparently is cosmopolitan (Kurikava

1970; Koste & Jose de Pawgi 1982). For biology see

Penard (1914) and Koste (1978).

Measurements: Total length 490 put, corona with

100 jam, body width 173 ym, foot incl, peduncle 158

xm, peduricle 18 pm, peduncle plate 20 pm.

Ecoloyy: 18°C. pH 4.6, 36.4 pS cm |.

Lit, Collins 1872, Koste 1986,

Lecane (su) pumila (Rousselet), 1906

FIGS 9a-b

L, pumila also ts new for the Australian region.

This species belongs to the few taxa in the genus

which do not have separate dorsal and ventral lorica

plates, but a soft undivided integument. Hauer

(1936), ina monograph on L. pumila, poinied out

that rather than a notammiatid, as intially described

by Rousselet, this taxon is a Lecane which lives in

ilgae and mosses of running waters. The localities

int which this minwe snimal are found are widely

separated: N. Germany, Scotland, Sweden, Java and

Sumatra Kutikova (1970) includes Czechoslovakia,

Roumania and Canada, but locality details are nat

given,

A single animal was present in sample 1482 (Lake

St Clair, 7.xi), 1985, near kiosk). 17°C, pH 7.3, 20,1

bS cm |,

Measurements. Lorica length 72 jan, toes [2 ray)

incl. claw, claw 4 pm.

Litr Rousselet 1906, Voigt 1957,

Levune nana (Murray), 1913

FIG, 10

A population of L. nana occurred in a stock dam

5 km south of Tunbridge (1471, 5.xii,1985), and is

a first record for Tasmania, The specimens did wot

correspond to the figure given by Harring & Myers

(1926 Pl, 34:1-2). The lorica was not se subcircular,

but more elongated and the toes not so attenuated.

The Tasmanian forms showed more conformity

with the taxon drawn by Hauer (1925:Fig. 8) (see

also Kaste 1978:205, Pl. 68:10). The toes are very

straight and the terminal claws curve outwards.

Measurements: Dorsal plate 6] ywm, ventral plate

8 um, lorica Width 58 wm, anterior margin 43 pm,

toes incl, claws 28-29 pm.

Exology: 185°C, pH 7.4, 565 nS em~!, L. nara is

distributed in the Palae- and Neoarctic, Neotropics

and Oriental region, and was recorded from

Queensland by Russell (1961).

Lecane (s.sir) ohivensis appendiculata (Levander),

1894

FIG.

Insample [381 (brackish stock dam, St Mary's

road near St Helens, 29.x) 1985) wete 34 specimens

i NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 99

Fiz. 6. Collotheca campanulata longicaudata (Hudson), 1883. Lake Pedder form. a. female, lateral, b. dorsal. c.

irophi, ventral, d. contracted, Secale bar 100 pm.

100 W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

Fig. 7. Collotheca edentata (Collins, 1872. Female, dorsal,

Scale bar 100 um.

belonging to the taxonomically difficult Lecane

ludwigi-ohioensis group. All taxa are distinguishable

by the different appendices of the ventral lorica

plate (see Koste 1978 Pl. 71:1-10). There are,

however, intermediate forms to L. /udwigi and also

to L. ohioensis. The present population is uniform

(Fig. 11). The appendices are all short, slightly

narrowed laterally before the end (marked by a

convex line), Such a taxon was described as

Cathypna appendiculata by Levander in 1894. Koste

(1978) called the brackish water rotifer Lecane

ohioensis f. appendiculata (Levander), 1894. In view

of its specific ecological demands we probably are

justified in changing its rank to that of ssp. (see also

Koste 1978:213; De Ridder 1961).

Fig. 8. C. edentata, micrograph of specimen with gut

distended with algae.

Figs 9, 10, 9, Lecane (s. str.) pumila (Rousselet), 1906.

a. dorsal, b. toe, lateral. 10. Lecane (s. str.) nana

(Murray), 1913. Ventral. Scale bar 20 pm.

Measurements: Total lorica length 132 ym, dorsal

plate length 87 ym, dorsal plate width 86 »m, ventral

plate width 72 um, anterior margin 52 um, toes 39

pm,

Ecology: 19.0°C, pH 7.8, 6120 nS cm-!.

Cosmopolitan in oligo-mesohaline waters. Recorded

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 101

Fig. 11. Lecane (s. str.) ohioensis appendiculata

(Levander), 1894. Ventral. Scale bar 20 pm.

from Queensland (Colledge 1914) and Tasmania

(Koste & Shiel 1986a).

Lepadella acuminata (Ehrenberg), 1834

FIG. 12

First record for Tasmania, commonly in stock

dams, acid waters. Probably pancontinental,

recorded from Qld (Colledge 1911), Vic. (Green

1981), N.T. (Koste 1981) and W.A. (Koste ef a/ 1983).

Measurements: Lorica length 90 um, lorica width

60 pm, toes 22 wm.

Ecology: 16.0-23.5°C, pH 54.4-7.8, 42-1020 uS

cm~'.

Lepadella ovalis (Miller), 1786 (?f. nov.)

FIG. 13

A minute form, possibly an ecotype, occurred in

sample 1469 (Lake Dulverton near Oatlands,

5.x1i.1985).

Measurements: Lorica length 87 »m, lorica width

83 wm, toes 25 um (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 60:1).

Ecology: 18.0°C, pH 7.7, 3330 pS cm—!.

Lepadella patella (Miller), 1786

FIG. 15

Another extremely small form co-occurring

with L. ovalis in sample 1469, and also found in

two acid stock dams at Huonville (1435/37,

1.xii.85).

Measurements: Lorica length 79 um, lorica width

54 wm, toes 18 um (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 59:2).

Ecology: 18.0-24.5°C, pH 3.4-7.7, 45.5-3330 uS

cm~".

Lepadella patella biloba Hauer, 1958

FIG. 14

In sample 1502 (stock dam 36 km south of

Burnie, 11.xii.1985) was a population resembling this

subspecies, which was first described from Australia

in Yarnup Swamp, W.A. (Koste ef a/ 1983). There

is considerable variation in the described lorica

forms of L. patella, particularly the foot opening.

In the absence of a detailed study of morphological

variation, we retain the subspecific ranking for this

Figs 12-15. 12. Lepadella acuminata (Ehrenberg), 1834.

Ventral. 13. Lepadella ovalis (Miller), 1786. L.

Dulverton form, ventral. 14. Lepadella patella biloba

(Haver), 1958, ventral. 15. Lepadella patella (Miller),

1986. L. Dulverton form, ventral. Scale bar 100 pm.

102 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIELD,

form given by previous reVisers (ez. Kutikova 1970;

Koste 1978), It is likely that a species complex is

involved.

Measurements: Lorica length 109 ym, lorica width

65 pm, toe$ 22 pm.

Ecology: 16.5°C, pH 4.7, 42 pS cm |.

Lepadella rhomboides haueri (Wulfert), 1956

FIG. 16

The type probably is pancontinental in Australia,

Four individuals of this subspecies co-occurred with

the above Lepudella,

Measurements: Lorica length 110 pm, lorica width

70 pm, toes 36 pm,

Lepudella tripiera triptera Ehrenberg, 1830

FIGS 17, 18

An unusually small variant co-occurred with L.

ovalis and L. patella in Lake Dulverton, Oatlands

(sample 1469, Pig. 17), while the typical form

occurred in Lake Augusta (1497, Fig, 18), This also

may be an ecotype.

Measurements (Fig. 15): Lorica length @1 jam, lorica

width 54 am, toes 18 ym. (Fig. 16): length 76 am,

width 61 am, toes 20 am.

Lepadella tana sp. nov.

FIG 19

Materials; Four loricate females, samples 1457 (3),

1458 (1).

Halotype: Loricate female, sample 1457, collected

4.xi1.85 by L. W, Tan. SAM V4020.

Paratype’ Date and place of collection as for

holotype, SAM V4026-7.

Type localiiy: Lake Pedder, deep bay south side of

Strathgordon road 10 km east of Strathvordon

(1 km east of boathouse). Dark, humic water, >2

m deep, no emergent vevetation, 16.5°C, pH 5.3,

46.2 «Ss como.

Description: Lorica broadly ovoid, ventral flat,

dorsal medially convex in median cross section;

amterior margin of head opening nearly straight,

ventral margin with a weak v-shaped aperture,

Behind the middle of the body a fold, on cither side

of which is a pointed, slightly curved spine, both

directed apically. Foot-opening broad. Foot as usual

with four segments; toes relatively long, straight and

sharply pointed.

Measurements, Lorica length 79 pm; lorica width

(medially) 61 um; anterior width of lorica 29 um;

foot opening 18 « 18 ym; Jength of toes 29 pun;

Jength of lateral spines 18 pm.

Discussion: This species is distinctive in the genus

(see Koste 1978); the only other taxon resembling

it is Léepadella neboissi, an apparently endemic

Figs 16-19, 16, Lepadella rhontboides haueri (Wullert),

1956. Dorsal, 17. Lepudella triptera Ehrenberg, 1830.

Ventral. 18. Lepadella triptera. Dorsal..19, Lepadelle

tend sp. voy. Ventral. Seale bar 100 pin.

Victorian species described by Berzins (1961). The

latter has lateral folds, but no spines, and its toes

are curved.

Etymotogy; Named after the collector, Ms Lor Waj

‘lan, Department of Agricultural Biochemistry,

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of

Adelaide.

Proales similis similis De Beauchamp, 1908

FIGS 20a-d

Sample 1380 (Diana’s Basin, near St Helens,

saline) contained sixteen females resembling FP

similis exoculis Berzins, 1953, which was recorded

from Western Australia. There is Some doubt on the

validity of this ssp. (Koste 1978) and we have

referred the material to the lypical form, although

we could not detect a median red eye as described

tor P similis type. In our experience the colour of

rotifer eyes disappears in minute Species if they are

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 103

Fig. 20. Proales similis De Beauchamp, 1908. a, Female,

ventral, slightly contracted, b. female, ventral (coll. Dr

C. K. Brain, Transvaal Museum, S. Africa), c. trophi,

d. toes with foot glands. Scale bar 100 um.

retained in formalin-preserved collections. The type

is known from saltwaters in Europe, Africa, N.

America, S. America.

Measurements: Total length of stretched but

preserved females 133-150 ym; toes 13 wm; trophi

15-20 pm.

Ecology: 19.0°C, pH 8.9, 34 800 pS cm~!.

Ptygura barbata Edmondson, 1939

FIG, 2la

Sample 1421, a stock dam 9 km north of

Triabunna, contained 4 9 9 of P barbata, which

resembles P longicornis (Davis) (recorded from the

mainland by Whitelegge 1889 and Anderson &

Shephard 1892). The best morphological

characteristic of P barbata is the dorsal projection

between the lateral antennae, which is formed as

a bun-shaped process. A peduncle was not visible.

Measurements: Tube length — 400 um, contracted

animal — 200 pm.

Ecology: 16.5°C, pH 5.2, 216 pS cm~!.

Lit: Edmondson 1939:463, Figs 21-24; Koste

1974336, Figs. 23a-c.

Ptygura ct. brachiata (Hudson), 1886 (?f. nov.)

FIGS 21b-c

Sample 1447, a roadside pool, Hartz Mountains

National Park, containded 309 9 in brownish

tubes with a more yellow transparent top.

Contracted animals with long lateral antennae and

a double pointed blunt hook above the head closure.

A very long peduncle unknown in this species

resembles P /inguata Edmondson, 1939, but other

Met Seat Bee EI

Fig. 21. a. Ptygura barbata Edmondson, 1939. Female

contracted in tube. b-c. Prygura c.f. brachiata ?n.f,

Females contracted in tubes. Scale bar 100 pm,

104 W. KOSTE & RK, J, SHIEL

morphological characteristics are like those of P

brachiata (Hudson), 1886 (see Koste 1970, Pl. 4a-e),

Determination of the status of this taxon awaits

further (uncontracted) material.

Meusuremenis: Tubes 792-798 pm; contracted

animals 340-420 pm; lateral antennae 35-40 am:

peduncle 170-216 um; subilaneous egy 36 «= 78 wm.

Ecology: 16.6°C, pH 3.8, 63.6 pS em !.

Lit. Edmondson (1939, 1940), Koste (1978),

Plygura tacita Edmondson, 1940

FIG, 22

Sample 1435 (stock dam, Huonville road south

of Hobart) and. 1446 (roadside pool 12 km trom

Hartz Mt National Park, west of Geeveston)

coniained 6 and 12 females respectively in broad

hyaline tubes, the inner lumen with a characteristic

narrowing at the bottom.

Measurements: Tubes 450-800 pm; peduncle

200-270 pm; subitaneous egg 25 «= 82 ym. For other

measurements see Koste 1978:546.

Ecology: 16,5-24.5°C, pH 3.9-5.7, 45.5-65.0 pS

emt,

Lil: Edmondson 1939, 1940.

Prygura melicerta socialis (Weber), 1888:

FIG 23

In sample 1490 (Botanical Gardens Pond,

Hobart) some contracted and also extended Prvgura

were found in cyanophyte colonies, Fig. 23 shows

a free-living female. A circular corona and very long

foot were present. A tube was not visible; nor were

two minute hooks in the neck under the dorsal

corona, an important characteristic of P meficerta

meélicerta (Bhrenberg, 1832). Whilelegge (1889)

recorded a P mrelicerta trom N.SW., however the

deseription is incomplete; the morphologically

distinctive presence or absence of hooks in the neck

is not mentioned, The animal resembles P meticerta

socialis (cf. Weber 1888 p. 647 Fig. 28:1-4). The

N.SW. record also muy be this taxon. See Koste

(1978:550-S551, Pl. 205:2a, b).

Testudinella. mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov.

FIGS 24a, b, 25

Material: Ten loricate females were present in

samples 142] (stock dam, Triabunna) and 1457

(Lake Pedder).

Holotype: Lorieate female. sample 1421, on

preserved slide. Coli. R- J. Shiel 29.x7,1985. SAM

V4021,

Paratypes: Dave and place of collection as for

holotype, two slides, SAM V4029,

TBipe locality: Siock dam 9 km north of Triabunna

(1 km north of Ashgrove Creek) (42°26'S,

147°55'E), 165°C, pH §.2, 216 wS em-!,

wee” AD AT)

vee ae yer

Fig. 22. Prvgura racita Edmondson, 1940. Female

contracted i tube, Seale bar 100 pm.

Description: Shape resembles Tesrudinella

mucronata (Gosse), 1886 (cf Koste 1978 Pl.

195:5a-c). Head-aperture normal but directed

ventrally, with a collar, Dorsal posterior lorica with

symmetrical folds, tte median with a Short rounded

top. The type has a soft lorica surface and na folds,

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 105

Fig. 23. Ptygura melicerta socialis (Weber), 1888.

Freeliving female, ventral, Scalar 100 ~m.

Fig, 24. Testudinella mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov.

a, b. loricas of different females. Scalar 100 pm.

Foot-opening median at beginning of second third

of ventral plate.

Measurements: Lorica length 200-210 pm; lorica

width 176-198 pm; foot-opening 28 x 29 wm; head

aperture 70-75 pm wide, 35-39 wm deep.

Discussion: T. mucronata (Gosse), 1886 has not

been recorded from Australia. It is smaller than the

Tasmanian material (lorica length to 170 wm, width

to 140 wm). Larger size, head-opening projection

and presence of a collar distinguished the

Tasmanian specimens from the type, however the

morphological variation in the 7, patina-ohlet-

mucronata group suggests that specific ranking for

the new taxon is not, on present evidence,

warranted.

106 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

Fig. 25. T. mucronata tasmaniensis, micrograph of

loricate female.

In a collection from the south-east of S. Australia

(W. D. Williams, 10,ix.1982) we found ten specimens

with all characteristics of 7: mucronata

tasmaniensis; the rotifer may be more widely

distributed across southern Australia.

Discussion

Community composition

There were marked differences in rotifer

communities between habitat types. Using the

Shannon-Weaver index (H’') as a convenient measure

of species richness, the habitats sampled can be

ranked in order of decreasing rotifer community

diversity: natural lakes (x H'’ =2.44) > rivers

flowing from them (H' = 2.40) > marshes (H’ =

1.80) > streams (H' = 1.77) > impoundments

(H' = 1.66) > roadside ditches (H' = 1,44). This

apparent reduction in community complexity in

part reflects increasing habitat ephemerality,

although there were extremes within each category

resulting from site-specific factors. Stock dams, for

example, ranged from saline to fresh, and from

turbid with no emergent vegetation to clear waters

with marginal emergent reeds. Rotifer diversity

correspondingly showed a wide range, from a H’

of 0.31 (#76 Fig. 1; 3 spp.., 99% Keratella australis)

to 3.31 (#86 Fig. 1, 11 taxa relatively evenly

distributed). In some habitats the presence of

predatory cyclopoids and small corixids may have

depressed rotifer community diversity.

Because the H' index takes into account

apportionment of the taxa, sites with the greatest

number of species did not have the highest

community diversity. For example, Lake Dulverton

(#42 Fig. 1, H'’ = 3.21) and Lake Pedder (#88,

H’ = 1.74) each had 17 rotifer species on the

sampling date, but whereas the Lake Pedder

community was dominated by Keratella cochlearis

(70%), at least six taxa made up of 70% of the Lake

Dulverton community. The greatest number of

species in the 1984 sample series was 25 rotifer taxa

from a dam (site #22, Fig. 1) near Ulverstone in the

northwest. The highest in 1985 was 18 from a stock

dam (#85) at Huonville.

In comparison, rotifer communities on the

mainland appear to be more diverse. Collections

from Goulburn R. billabongs in Victoria two days

after the last of the Tasmanian series in Dec. 1985

produced up to 32 rotifer taxa (H' = 4.24) in a

single habitat. H'>5 has been recorded for rotifer

communities on the floodplain of the Magela CK,

N.T. (> 80 species present) (Shiel & Koste 1983). Few

Tasmanian localities sampled had comparable

emergent vegetation to effectively partition the

habitat and provide microniches as is seen in

mainland billabongs. Acid waters are not seen as

an inhibitor of community diversity in this study;

the most common Tasmanian species are

acidophiles or eurytopic (Koste 1978), and the

highest community diversities in the Magela Ck

study were from waters more acid than those

sampled in Tasmania.

The noted disparity in species diversity between

habitats included marked differences in species

composition within each category of habitat; even

adjacent stock dams usually had different species

dominants, and the number of shared taxa

decreased with increasing geographical distance,

Stock dams (#80-84) near Southport, for example,

within 200 m of each other, contained 21 rotifer

taxa. Only two occurred in all four dams, and

another two occurred in three of the four, This

restricted distribution of most rotifers is reflected

in Table 1, where 81% of the new records for

Tasmania were found in only one or two habitats,

and is in accord with observations from the

mainland, where >50% of taxa are known from

only single localities.

Seasonality

Seasonal changes in community structure were

reflected in the disparity of species recorded in

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 107

Taplb J, Systematic list of Rotifera recorded from Tasmania for the first time, An asterisk (*) indicates a new record

for Australia. Occurrence js shown by + = rare (one or two localities), ++ = limited distribution (<20% of localities,

+44 = more widespread (> 20% localities). Habitat type is given by § = stack dam, P ~ pond or small roadside

pool, L. = Jake or large impoundment, R = river or siream (flowing).

wu pe

u Ss o

5 £6 as 5

oa os 2 io]

xz = <=

Bdelloidea

1. Dissatrocha macrossyla 32, .N. teipus Ehrbg |

tibercuilata (Gosse)* + P 33. Pleurotrocha petromyzon Ehrbg te

2. Habrotrocha Bryce sp. + P 34, Cephalodella gibba microdactyla

3. Rofaria macrura (Bhrbp) * Ob Koch-Althaus* + fF

4. R. ratateria (Pallas) t+ §/P 35. C. intuta Myers + “5

5. R. rardigrada (Ehrog) + P 36, C. mucronata Myers t+ P/L

37. C. lindamaya sp. novt + 3

Ploimida 38. Trichocerva rattus carinara (Ehrbg) + -L

6. Epiphanes macrourus (Barrois 39, T. insignis (Herrick) + Sf

& Daday) # OL 40. T. cf. insulana Hauer o- VE

7, Brachionus ureeolaris Miller) + 3S 41. Gastropus hyptopus (Ehrbg) r §

8. Wratus tasmaniensis ssp: nov? + 6§ 42. G. stiviifer Imhot yoL

9, Euchlanis incisa Carlin eS 43, Ascomorpha ovalis (Bergendahl) t+ SAL

10. EL cf. orepha Gosse r § 44, Polyarthra cf. dongiremis Carlin +

U1. Colurella obtusa (Gosse) ++ $/P 4§. Dicranophorus forciparus (Muller) > #F

12. Squatinella mutica (Erbe) + S$ 46. Aspelia aper Harring +b

13, Lepadella acuminata (Ehrbg} + -§/P 47. Encentrum cf. diglandula

14. L. ovalis Miller) ft OL (Zawandowski)* + #F

15. L. patella (Miller) ++4+S/L/R 48. Tesfudinella patina (Hetmann) ia ER

16. .L. patella biloba (Hauer) ' § 49. T, mucronaia tusmaniensis ssp. nov* * OL

17. L. rhomboides hauveri Bartos rho oS 50. Beauchampia crucigera (Dutrochet) 4 8

18. L. triprera (Ehrbg) oe SL 51. Floseularia janus (Hudson) + §

19, L. dona sp. nov + P/L 52, Plygura barbata Edmondson* + §

20. Leewne (M.) acus Harring* i mA 53, PB. brachiata (Hudson) + P

21. L. (Mt) hornemanni (Ehrbe) i+ S/L, 54, P erystallinu (Ehrbg) + oP

220 OL. (ML) nana (Murray) + S/L 55, P melicerta socialis (Weber)* fF &

23, L. (M.) ef. sinvata Hauer* 4 S/L 56, P tacita Edmondson ++ 8

24. 1. (8, stv.) pumila Rousseler* r oL 57, Sinantherina cf. socialis (Linnaeus) K <8.

25. L. (s. str) sienifero (Jennings) + FP 58. Hexarthra fennica (Levander) + S/L

26, Proales falleciasa Wultert + o- 59. Collotheca cl. ambigua (Hudson) = P

27. Proates et. similis De Beauchamp* ‘OL 60. C. campanulata longicaudata

28. Lindia truncata (Jenning) + Rk (Hucson)* ++ S/L

29. Irura aurita (Ehrbe) + $/L 61, C. edentuta Collins)* 4 oP

40. Resticula melandacus (Gosse) + iP 62, C. libera (Zacharias)* yr «i

31, Notermmata pachyura (Gasse) tL 63. C. arnata natans Tschugunott* > OL

successive sample series, The autumn series in 1984

produced 118 taxa, 75% of which were first records.

The spring 1985 series from the same localities

produced 133 taxa, 47% of which were lirst records.

Further collecting from these localities probably will

add a decreasing proportion of new records,

however only about 100 localities have been

sampled. The profusion of standing waters in

‘Tasmania would suggest (hat the total rotifer fauna

is considerably greater, possibly exceeding that of

the mainland (at present 600 + taxa).

Most abundant species in the 1984 series,

occurring in >20% of localities, were Keralella

slacki > K. cochlearis > Trichocerca similis > RB.

ausiralis > Polyarthra dolichoptera > Filinia

longiseta > P. vulgaris > K. procurya/F. pejleri

> Lecane lunaris, Fewer taxa occurred in > 20%

of the 1985 samples: (K. s/acki) (35%), T. similis

(32%), L. lunaris (29%), K. cochlearis (26%), P.

vulgaris (25%) L. hamata (24%) and X. australis

(22%). Only K. australis and K. slacki are endemics

(pancontinental on the mainland). The remainder

are widely tolerant cosmopolitan taxa.

Zoogeography

To date, the following rotifers are known only

from Tasmania: Brachionus lyratus tasmaniensis,

Lepadella tana, L. tvleri, Lecane tasmaniensis,

Cephalodelia lindamava, Aspelta tilba, Testu-

108 W. KOSTE & R. J. SEUEL

dinella husseyi, To mucronata tasminiensis and T

unicornulo. This represents abour 4% endemicily,

cf, approximarely 12% on the mainland (Dumonor

1983). Undoubtedly the degree of cndemicity will

prove higher with more intensive collecting.

The anomaloys distributions of warm-

stenothermal “cosmotropical” rotifers at 42-43°S

Was noted in our first Tasmanian survey report

(Roste & Shiel 19864). The spring 1985 collections

provided further evidence: 14 of the taxa listed in

Table | aré Kviown only from Qld or the N.T,

Several others are koown from single localities in

northern N.S.W. or the southwest of W.A, These

distributions probably reflect real spatial patterns

rather (han patchy collecting; more than 1000

collections from southern Victoria 16 southern Qld

1976-81 over all seasons and all habitat types did

hot contain them.

The nature of the habitats provides part

esplanation’ acid waters are abundant in

Tasmanian and tropical nother Australia. The

waters of our other major collecting areas 1o date

(the Murray-Darling basin and south-west W.A,)

are predominantly alkaline. The rotifers preferring

alkaline waters, particularly species of Brachionus,

have diversified in these habitats (Shiel 1983), bur

notably are absent from tropical Australia and

Tasmania. The few Brachionys recorded trom these

areds are tolerant of extreme biotopes (Koste 1981)

or are new, and presumably acidophiles.

It is Mteresting ta speculate that these disjunct

distributions may represent a relict rotifer fauna

in Tasmania waters persisting from a period when

the clunate was tropical. Fossil studies (e.g. Hill

& MacPhail 1983) have demonstrated that parts

of Tusmania (and south-eastern Australia) had

temperate raifforest in the Oligovene.

Environmental stresses (principally Miocene

cooling) led to reduction in floristic diversity and

ultimately jhe modern Tasmanian vegetation. An

aquatic group such as the rotifers would be

buflered against environmental stresses,

particularly when these events were less severe than

the glaciation in the northern hemisphere. The

persistance of a faunule in the more stable

conditions of lakes is perhaps more plausible than

invoking large-scale dispersal trom northern

Australia by wind or on the feet af birds. Fossil

evidence would answer the question, but small size

and poor preservation provide few rotifers in the

fossil record. They were present during the tropical

period in southern Australia; Southcow & Lange

(197) )identilied a ?Keraredla from the Miocene o!

South Australia, but there aré no Tasmanian

records.

Ackaowledements

This study was.supparted by a grant to RIS frorn

the Australian Biological Resources Study, Field

water chemistry measurements were taken by

L. W. Tan, Waite Agricultural Research Institute,

University of Adelaide, whose perseverence and

assistance in collecting while extremely damp are

much appreciated. Thanks also to Drs R. L.

Croome and P. A. Tyler, Department of Botany,

University of Tasmania for access to facilities and

equipment, and ta Dr D, Duckhouse, Department

of Zoology, University of Adelaide, and an

anonymous teteree, for helpful comments on a

draft MS,

References.

AHLStROM, FE. H, (1940) A revision oF the rararorian

gener Brachionus ant Ple/vies wih deseniprions of

One Hew species Lud (we new varictics. Bull, An, Mins.

Nat. Fist. 17, 143-184.

Aspensas, H. Ho & SHEMARD, J, (1892) Nores on

Viclurian Rotifers, Proc, Rk, Sov, Vict. 4, 9-80,

Bekyins, Bo (0953) Zur Kenntnis der Rertoren. aus

West-Ausiralien, Lavads Univ, Arnvkr, Nob 249, 1-12.

(1961) New Rotaloria (Konfera) trom Victoria,

Austvatia, Proc, R, See. Viet, 74, 82-86,

CoO Lebur, W. R. (1911) Notes on the rotifers or wheel-

animucwlae of Brisbane. Proc, R. Soe. Ql. 23, 87-91

—— — (1914) Addinons to the Rotifera of Queensland,

Wed 27, 70-75.

Comins, FL (1872) New species of Rotator. Science

Gassip London &, Y11,

De Decker, PL & WILLIAMS, W, D, (1982) Chemical

and biological features of Tasnisajan salt lakes, dase,

J. Mar. Freshwar. Res. 34, A89.494,

Dr Rinook, M. (L961) Brude atin rnd ef conloawique

des Rorifires de la Camargue, Biol, Jb Dodane 2,

IGO241-

Domost, Hot, (1983) Biogeography of rorilers

Nydrobiologia Wa, V0.

Lonionpsen, W. T. (1999) New species of Retatoria,

Wilh noles on heteroganio erowih- Tras. ln. Mierase.

Sac, 58, 458472, .

~~ - (1940) The sessile Rotatoria of Wisconsin, Trans,

Am, Microsc. Soe. 59, 434.559,

Gren, J, (1981) Assoviaiions of rotifers ia Avistealian

crater lakes. J) Zanl. Lond. 193. 46%4k0.

FarkieG, H, Ry & Mynes, FJ. (1926) The roller fauna

of Wisconsin. IU. A revision Of the genera Lecane aod

Morastyvla. Trans. Wise. Acad. Sei, Arty Log, 22,

3) 5423.

PPyuek, J. (1925) Rotatorien aus den Salgvewissern von

Oldesioe (Holst.). Att. Geogr. Ges. Nat. Mist, Mus,

diuheek W Ser. 4, 452-195-

(1936) 4ur Kotatorienlauna Deinsehlands (¥),

foal, Anz. WS, 154-157.

Hilt, B.S. Macpiaiy, M.K. (1983) Reconstruction

of the Cilpocene vegetalion at Pioneer, rortheast

Tasmania, Aeheringe 7, 28-299,

NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 109

Koste, W. (1972) Collotheca campanulata longicaudata.

Mikrokosmos 61, 79-99.

- (1978) Rotatoria. Die Radertiere Mitteleuropas.

Uberordnung Monogononta. 2 Vol. Revision of M.

Voigt. (Borntraeger, Stuttgart).

(1979) New Rotifera from the River Murray,

southeastern Australia, with a review of the Australian

species of Brachionus and Keratella. Aust. J. Mar.

Freshwat. Res. 30, 237-253.

— (1981) Zur Morphologie, Systematik und

Okologie von neuen monogononten Rdadertieren

(Rotatoria) aus dem tiberschwemmungsgebiet des

Magela Ck in der Alligator River Region, Australiens,

NT. Teil 1. Osnabriicker naturwiss. Mitt. 8, 97-12.

(1986) Collotheca edentata, ein sessiles Radertier

“ohne Zahne”? Mikrokosmos 75 (in press).

— & JosE E Paaai, S. (1982) Rotifera of the

Superorder Monogononta recorded from Neotropis.

Gewass. Abwass. 68, 71-102.

& SHiet, R. J. (1980) New Rotifera from

Australia. Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 103, 133-144.

& (1986a) Tasmanian Rotifera: Affinities

with the Australian fauna. Hydrobiolgia (in press).

& (1986b) Rotifera from Australian inland

waters. I. Bdelloidea. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res. (in

press).

& (1987) Rotifera from Australian inland

waters. II. Monogononta: Ephiphanidea and

Brachionidae. [bid.

& Brock, M. A. (1983) Rotifera from

Western Australian wetlands, with descriptions of two

new species. Hydrobiologia 104, 9-17.

Kutikova, L. A. (1970) [Rotifer fauna of the U.S.S.R.

Fauna of the U.S.S.R. 104, 1-744. Acad. Sci.,

Leningrad]. (in Russian).

PENARD, E. (1914) A propos de Rotiféres. Rev. Suisse

de Zool. 22, 1-25.

ROUuSSELET, C. P. (1906) in Murray, J. The Rotifera of

the Scottish Lochs. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 45, 183.

RusseLt, C. R. (1961) The Rotatoria of Queensland,

Australia. R. Soc. N.Z. Trans. 1, 235-239.

SHEPHARD, J. (1911) A list of Victorian rotifers, with

descriptions of two new species and the males of two

species. Proc. R. Soc, Vict. 24, 46-58.

SHIEL, R. J, (1983) The genus Brachionus (Rotifera:

Brachionidae) in Australia, with a description of a new

species. [bid 9, 533-37.

& Koste, W. (1979) Rotifera recorded from

Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 103, 57-68.

& (1983) Rotifer communities of

billabongs in northern and south-eastern Australia.

Hydrobiologia 104, 41-47.

SouTtHcorTt, R. V. & LANGE, R. T. (1971) Acarine and

other microfossils from the Maslin Eocene, South

Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 16, 17-19.

Supzuki, M. (1967) Rotifers from South Australia. 1.

A taxonomical note on Keratella quadrata from

Tasmania. Proc. Jap. Soc. Syst. Zool. 3, 17-19.

(1985) Tasmanian rotifers in mid-August (winter).

Zool. Sci. 2, 1005.

SUMMERFIELDWRIGHT, H. G. (1959) Development of the

peduncle in a sessile rotifer. J. Queck. Micro. Cl. Ser.

45, 231-234.

Voict M. (1957) Rotatoria. Die Réadertiere

Mitteleuropas. 2 Vols. (Borntraeger, Berlin).

WEBER, F. (1888) Note sur quelques Rotateurs des

environs de Genéve. Arch. Biol. Liege 8, 647-722.

WHITELEGGE, T. (1889) Marine and freshwater

invertebrate fauna of Port Jackson and neighbourhood.

Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W. 23, 163-323.

FROGS OF THE GENUS UPEROLEIA GRAY (ANURA:

LEPTODACTYLIDAE) IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA

BY MARGARET DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Summary

A review of the species Uperoleia of south-eastern Australia has resulted in the clarification of the

status of several taxa and the description of two new species. Recent redescriptions of Uperoleia

laevigata and U. rugosa are expanded to incorporate data on morphology, osteology and structure of

advertisement call from across their extensive geographic ranges. Variation in these features is

examined and, in many cases, the limits of variability for certain characters are established. U.

fimbrianus (Parker) is placed in the synonymy of U. rugosa (Andersson). Two new species, U.

tyleri sp. nov. and U. martini sp. nov. are described from south-eastern coastal N.S.W. and eastern

Victoria.

FROGS OF THE GENUS UPEROLEIA GRAY (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE)

IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA

by MARGARET Davigs* & M, J, Lith esOHNT

Summary

Davins, M. & Lirrnesoun, M. J, (1986) Frogs of the genus Uperoleia Gray (Aura: Leptodactylidac) in

south-vastern Australia. Trams, R. Soc, S. Aust, 1V0(3),, 111-143, 28 November, 1986,

A review of the species of Uperoleia of south-eastern Australia has resulted in the clarification of

rhe status of several taxa and the description of wo new species. Recent redescriptions of Uperoleia laevigata

and Of rugose are expanded to incorporate data on morphology, osteology and structure of advertisement

call from across their extensive geographic ranges. Variation in these features is examined and, in many

causes, the limits of variability for certain characters ure established. Lt fibrianus (Parker) is placed in

the synonymy of U. ragesa (Andersson). Two new species, U. veri sp. nov, and U! martini sp. noy. are

described [rom south-eastern coastal N.SW. and eastern Victoria.

The dominant frequencies in advertisement ¢alls of all species discussed are similar and within the

rate, 1927-2432 Hz, deprhs of amplitude modulation generally exceed 90% for all taxa. Most differentiation

between species is evident in call duration, in the number of pulses in the call, or in the dependent character,

pulse rate,

Key Worps: Uperoleia, Anura, new species, morphology, osteology, advertisement calls.

Introduction

The Australian leprodactylid genus Uperoleia

Gray comprises a group of small, myobatrachine

frogs exhibiting limited morphological diversity.

Tyler, Davies & Martin (198la, b,c) revised the genus

and expanded the known species from three to 18.

More recently, an additional species has been

described by Davies er af. (1985) from the Pilbara

region in Western Australia.

All of the above contributors investigated species

principally from the north and west of Australia,

leaving the faufa of the eastern stares largely

unknown. Tyler ef wh (198la) and subsequent

authors (Cogger 1983; Cogger ef al. 1983)

recognised three species in eastern Australia’ the

edentate U. rugosa (Andersson) and Uf fimbrianus

(Parker), and the dentate U /aevigaia Keferstein,

‘These species were tedescribed from information

obtained trom the type specimens, in the former

two cases, and from the rype series, in the last (Tyler

ef al. 198la)s the presence of a number of

undescribed species in eastern Australia was

indicated by these authors.

Davies & McDonald (1985) stipplemented the

redescriplion of Gf rugosa with data on ostealogy

and advertisernent call of males, derived from

topotypic material, thus facilitating the identifi-

cation of specimens in various museum collections.

* Department of Zootoxy, University of Adelaide,

G.PO. Box 498, Adelaide, 5. Ausf S001.

) Department of Zoology, University of Melbaurne,

Parkville, Vietorta 3052.

On the basis of the advertiserment call, Littlejohn

(1967) recoxnised three species from south-eastern

Australia; a large dentate species which he identified

as U. marmorata Gray, and two other species whose

identities were undetermined, so designated “U.

rugosa (form A)" and “U. rugosa (form B)".

Tyler ef al. (198la) showed that U) marmorata was

restricted to the northwest of Western Australia,

thus leaving the identity of the large, dentate species

undetermined, Here we identify and amplify the

undetermined species of Littlejohn (1967), and

provide further information on the named species

of eastern Australia.

Materials and Methods

Specimens examined sre deposited in the

Australian Muscum, Sydney (AM), British Museum

(Natural History), London (BMNH), CSIRO

Division of Wildlite Research Collection, Canberra

(ANWC), University of Kansas Museum of Natural

History, Lawrence (KU), Museum of Victoria,

Melbourne (NMV), Queensland Museum, Brisbane

(QM), Sotith Australian Museum, Adelaide (SAM),

Museum of Natural History, Stockholm (NRAM),

and the University of Adelaide osteological

collecrion (UAZ),

Morphological measurements (in mm), obtained

by the methods of Tyler (1968), are: snoul-lo-vent

leneth (S-V), tibia length (TL), eye diameter (E), eye-

to-naris distanee (E-N), internarial span (IN).

Becatise of the large parotoid glands covering the

112 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

side of the head and the obscured rympana,

customary measurements. of head width and head

length could not be taken, Results are expressed as

mean + standard deviation with ranges in

purentheses.

The presence or absence of teeth were determined

externally by using the following procedures: when

dentate species are yiewed from the ventral surface,

ihe upper jaw 1s notched to receive (he superiorly

protruding symphysis of the mentomeckelian bones;

the snout is rounded in ventral view and the ventral

curvature of the upper jaw is slight. Conversely in

edentate species, the upper jaw is not prominently

notched anteriorly, although the mentomeckelian

symphysis is prominent, and the ventral curvature

of the upper jaw is deep. These features are shown

in Fiz, J. In doubtful cases, fine forceps or a

mounted needle were used to check for the presence

of serrations.

Osteological data Were obtained Irons cleared and

stained specimens, prepared afer the metlrods af

Davis & Gore (1947) for bone and Dinyerkus &

Uhler (1977) for bone and cartilage. Osteological

descriptions follow Trueb (1979), Material that has

been cleared and stained is indicated by (A)

following the museum abbreviation and registration

number or by specific designation.

Advertisement calls were recorded in the field,

and the appropriate (effective) temperature (water,

wet-bulb air) measured at the calling sire. One of

a selection of tape recorders (EMI 12B, FI-CORD

202, NAGRA IIIBH, NAGRA 4.2, VHER Report

4000L) and one of the following microphones

(AKG 19B, BEYER M69, BEYER M88,

ELECTRO-VOICE 644, GRAMPIAN D119,

RESLO DPH) were used. All recordings were

analysed on a NORLAND 3001/BDMX processing

digital oscilloscope, with playback on a REVON

B77 tape recorder, An ALISON 2AB variable filter,

set-ata low pass of 4800 Hz, was inserted between

the output of the tape revorder and the oscilloscope

in order to prevent alfasing al the minimum

sampling interval of IDO us (i.e. at a frequency of

10 000 Hz}, Overall temporal variations during

recording and analysis are estimated to be less than

+ 15%, and lrequency responses of all items of

equipment are more than adequate for the narrow

range involved (1900-2500 Hz).

One clear call, usually the last in the recorded

sequence, Was analysed, and values for each of the

following five attributes determined: number of

pulses (direct count), duration (ms), average pulse

rate (pulses '; from the peak of the first clear

pulse to the peak of the last clear pulse), dominant

frequency (Hz; power spectrum analysis—froim

whole call if short, or {rom middle quadrant if

long), and depth of amplitude modulation of pulses

("0+ near the middle of the call). Hard copies of

the displays on the monitor sereen of the processing

digital oscilloscope were prepared on a LINSEIS

LY 1800 X-¥ recorder.

Line drawings were obtained with the aid oF a

Wild M8 dissecting microscope with an attached

0.4% reducing lens and 4 camera lucida.

Results

Taxonomic decisions

Lynch (1971) illustrated the skull of a specimen

of UL. rugosa tram St George, Qld (KU 109861.

Comparison of the illustration,and of the specimen

examined by him, with the data obtained from

lopatypic specimens of LU! rugesa (Davies &

McDonald 1985) indicates that all of the specinens

are conspecific. St George is the type locality of U4

Jimbrianus (Parker 1926), a species separable from

big, T, Ventral views of the lead of A, dentate species of Uperoleiy and B, un edentate species of Upereleta:

UPEROLEIA (NS SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA a

Bay

fe aes engeating

he 1 dy pure

4 »

a 2

vlad’

\ Yeu}

sa %

Tay ony ©

Bn &

Fig, 2. A, Lateral. and B, dorsal views of the head; C, palmar view of hand and D, plantar view of fool of Uperaleia

rugosa (NMY 1925090) from Savernake, N.S.W.

U. pugosa only by size (Davies & McDonald 1985),

Examination of call data from edentate specimens

assigned to U. rugosa (form A of Littlejohn 1967),

and the examination of external morphology and

osteology of material deposited in many Australian

museums, conlirms [he identification of LL rugosa

(form A) as UL. rugosa and provides no support ta

the recognition of U. fimbrianus. Accordingly, we

uansfer U, fintbrianus (Parker) to the synonymy of

U. rugosa (Andersson).

U, rugosa (form B of Littlejohn 1967) is a dentate

species (Davies unpubl.). The only other dentate

species described from eastern Australia is U-

laevigata Keferstein 1867. Our examination of

preserved material deposited in Australian

musejums, and our data on call structure, indicate

thal U. rugosa (form B) is U. laevigata Keferstein.

Our data on the type series include only external

morphology, but we remain confident in this

identification.

On the basis of our studies of morphology and

vocalizations, it is clear that “U. marimorata’\sensu

Littlejohn 1967) comprises two undescribed dentate

species, which are now described and named.

Uperoleia rugosa (Andersson)

FIGS 2-8

Hyperoleia murmorata: Fletcher, 1890, p. 672 (part.).

Pseudophryne fugosa Andersson, 1916, K, Svenska

Vetenskapsakad. Handl, 52,9, p. 13.

Pseudaphryne fimbriunus Parker, 1926, p, 669; Wilkins,

192k, p. 278.

Upernleta rugosa: Parker, 1940, p. 70 (parts Erspamer,

il4 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 3. Uperoleia rugosa (in life) from Anakie, Qld.

de Caro & Endean, 1966, p. 738 (part.); Lynch, 1971, p.

99; Erspamer, Negri, Erspamer & Endean, 1975, p. 41

(part.); Roseghini, Erspamer & Endean, 1976, p. 35 (part.);

Erspamer, Erspamer & Linnari, 1977, p. 68 (part.); Barker

& Grigg, 1977, p. 188 (part.); Archer, 1978, p. 112; Tyler,

Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 17; Cogger, 1983, p. 86; Cogger,

Cameron & Cogger, 1983, p. 34 (part.); Davies &

McDonald, 1985, p. 37; Tyler, 1985, p. 408; Mahony &

Robinson, 1986, p. 120,

Uperoleia rugosa (form A): Littlejohn, 1967, p. 153, Blake,

1972, p. 122.

Uperoleia marmorata: Moore, 1961, p. 219 (part.); Brooker

& Caughley, 1965, p. 239.

Uperoleia sp. Davies, 1984, p. 790 (part.).

Uperoleia fimbrianus; Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 18:

Cogger, 1983, p. 83; Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1983,

p. 32; Tyler, 1985, p. 407.

Definition: A small to moderately-large species

(oo 18-32 mm S-V, 99 18-30 mm S-V),

characterised by short to moderately-long hind

limbs (TL/S-V 0,29-0.41); fringed toes with usually

a trace of basal webbing; prominent subarticular

and palmar tubercles; frontoparietal fontanelle not

exposed; carpus of five elements; anteromedial

processes of anterior hyale of hyoid slender; ilial

crest absent; advertisement call a short pulsed note

of 3-5 pulses with a pulse repetition rate of about

31 pulses sec~!,

Material examined: Qld: NRAM 1630 (Holotype

Pseudophryne rugosa), SAM R27052-3, R27054(A)-5(A),

Mt Colosseum; BMNH 1947.2.18.70 (holotype Pseudo-

phryne fimbrianus) St George district: QM J25078(A)

48 km E St George, SAM R3688, R3737, St George; KU

109861(A), St George; NMV D25105-6(A) 3.2 km E

Gracemere; D25107, 6.4 km E Gracemere; QM J12673

Burpengary; J14385, Gilruth Plans via Cunnamulla;

J17754, Alton; J18819, 318824, J18840(A)-41(A) E of

Withcott; J18818(A), J18821, J18826, J18829, J18835-6(A),

J18842, Waratah Station via Cunnamulla; J18830, E of

Laidley on Granchester Rd; J28239(A), J28240-43,

J28244(A), J29067-9, 24 km W Moonie; J42543-4, J42546,

J42550(A), Moonie; J42538, Roma; J31961-2(A), Bollon;

J38654(A)-5(A), Hornet Bank, Injune Rd; J12354(A),

J12366, 312371, Wilkie Ck, SW Dalby; J12722-3(A),

J12725-6, AM R5822-3, Eidsvold; QM J18827, J18846,

South of Gayndah; J18828, Rocklea, Brisbane; AM

R16910, Brisbane; QM J19538, Warrawee; J19539-41

Flinders Peak Rd, turnoff from Boonah Rd; J19928,

4.6 km § Ferndale; J19950, Ban Ban; J19954, 3.2 km W

Beenleigh; 125922, J40429, Texas Caves Area; J28510(A),

J28515-6, Gin Gin; J29014-6(A), Waterford Rd, 6 km E

Beaudesert Rd; J35436-7, Old Dump, Inglewood;

J42539(A), J42551, J42553, Causeway on Beaudesert Rd

between Jimboomba and Cedar Grove Rd (27°51,

153°01'); J42540, J42542, Crossing Beaudesert Rd,

Tamborine Rd (27°48', 153°02'); 342541, Beaudesert;

342545, J42547-9, 342552, Mt Lindsay Highway, S of

Beaudesert (25°00', 152°59'); J37704(A), 3J37705-6,

J37707(A), between Anakie and Sapphire; J37708-9,

J37710(A), J37711-16(A), Mowbray; J37717-18(A),

J37719-20(A), Tomahawk; J37721, Anakie; SAM

R29672(A)-3(A), QM J45975, Springsure; QM J45977,

Anakie; SAM R29674(A), R29675, 1.7 km from Cabbage

UPEROLEIA. IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 115

}

ss,

Fig. 4, A, Dorsal and B, palmar view of bones of carpus of Uperoleia rugosa, UL, ulnare; RA, radiale, POC, ©.

centrale postaxiale; PRC, O, centrale preaxiale; C(2+3), fused carpal elements of ©. distale carpale 2 and 3; PS,

palmar sesamoid; PO,, basal prepolligal element.

Tree Creek, Nathan Gorge Rd; QM 145973-74, Cabbage

Tree Creek; QM J45976, Glenleigh Station beside road

to Glenhaughton Stadion; QM J45980-86, J45987(A),

SAM RILS@48-50, R29676-78(A), R29679(A),

R296R0-1(A), R29682-4(A), R29GRS(A), R29686

R215958-61(A), UAZ Al012(A), Al013(A), Dynevor Downs;

QM J45978-9, SAM R29687, Boorara Station; AM

RI15652, 17.6 km N Moura; R115306, R113367-69, Cecil

Plains Rubbish Tip; AM R5822-3, Eidsvold; SAM

R29688-90, DPI Swamp, Charleville. N.S: AM

R46862-4, 19.2 km W Tenterfield; R37052(A),

R37053-4(A), R37055-6, 22.4 km SE Bonshaw on Bruxnor

Highway; R37096, 56 km W Tentertield, Mole River;

R90659-6], Blacklands Gap Rd, 6 km NW Maids Valley

(29°05', 151°35"); AM R66557-60, R66562, 22.4 km

downstream [rom Dungog on Williams River; R93727-31,

5 km N Whiporie an Casino-Gralton Rd; AM R784, R984,

Yandembah, 32 km W Hillston; R12806, Welby, Nyngan:

R28O4(A), R28005-6, R24475-6(A), R24477-78, R244K0,

R24482-3(A), R24484, R24486-91(A), R24492, Nyngan;

R28635-8, between Nyngan and Nevertire; R15315-7,

50 km W Byrock; R16040, 51 km W Byrock; RIS800-4,

R15803, Byrock; RIG098 Brewarriria; R28357-8, R28624-5,

Lake Caregelligo; NMV D55117-21(A), QM _ 339239,

739242-6, West Wyalong; J28450-2(A), Condoblin; SAM

RI4187 Moulamein; NMY D9199(A), D9200-1,

D9WMWHA)-A2(A), 19263, D9264(A)-5(A), D9266-7(A),

Tocumwal: DIS%56-6)(A), DIB862-84(A), DIRB85-900,

4.8%km S Cowra; B25077-79(A), D25080, 6.4 km SW

Cowra; D25001-3, D25005(A)-9, D25011(A)-14, Savernake;

D25086-91(A), D25092(A)-25101(A), D25102-4, Lignum

Swamp, Savernake; D25004, 20.8 km N Mulwalay

D25015-6 9.6 km N Mutwala; D25082, 4 km

N Tomingley; ANWC A936-84, Lake Cowal; A1070-72,

4kmn N Warren; ANWC A1140-2, Sandy Camp Macquarie

Marsh area; AM R115632-44, R115646, 5 km E Eulo;

R92159, Buckingbong S.F., S of Narrandera, RIS647,

Glenelg; R45105, 32 km § Condoblin, RISS88-28,

R11S648-50, Caragabal; R112299 Bom Bom 8.F, (29°44),

152°58'); RIiSS84, Nettle Creek, 19.2 km trom

Copmanhurst 6n Tabulum Rd; R5590-1, Cumborah, NW

Walvett; R50493-500, 11.2 km W Glen Innes on Inverell

Rd (29°43, 151958’); RINS575-6, RW5579, RIUSSHL-2, nr

Bulgandramine; R102886, Thurloo Downs Hst, SAM

eee UAZ A816, UAZ B8I4, Severn River (29°28),

51°29"),

Variation in External Morphology

There is a considerable range in the size of

specimens of U. rugosa (males |8.4-32.0 mm S-V,

fernales 17.7-30.4 mm), Specimens from southern

coastal arcas of Queensland and northern N.S.W.

are smaller than those from more arid inland areas,

with the exception of a series from Tocuniwal,

NSM, (co cf 18.4-26.2 mm S-V, 9 9 20.2-25.3 mm

SV from coastal areas, compared with ranges ol

116 M. DAVIES & M. J, LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 5. A, Dorsal and B, plantar views of tarsus of Uperoleia rugosa, PH, O, centrale prehallucis; T,, lateral tarsal

clement; T3, second tarsal element; T3, medial tarsal clement.

20-32 mm S-V for males and 22-30 mm lor females

in inland areas). Geographic variation in size is

reflected also in relative lengths of the hind limbs

in these populations (TL/S-V 0.34 4 0,02 [0.29-0,39]

coastally, and 0,36 4 0.02 [0,32-0.41] inland), For

the species over its entire range, TL/S-V js

0,36 + 0.03 [0,29-0.41}.

The head is usually small in relation to the bady,

and is separated from the axilla by the well-

developed parotoid glands. The shape of the snout

in dorsal view is either truticated (Fig, 2A), or

slightly rounded (see Davies & McDonald 1985).

Each condition occurs in about equal proportions

in the material examined. The snouts of some

specimens may have been incorrectly recorded us

blunt because poorly preserved specimens (as

indicated by dehydrated fingers and toes) always

have truncated snouts. Most well-preserved

specimens from Savernake, N.SW., at the southern

extremity of the species’ range have truncate snouts

(Fig. 2B).

The eye-to-naris distance is always greater than

the internarial span, and is subject to little

geographic variation (B-N/IN 1,61 40.28

[1.12-2.3]), The nostrils are located more laterally

than dorsally (Fig 2B),

The hands are broad, and with short fingers

(occasionally slender) béaring poor or moderate

fringing in the approximate ratio of 1:2. There is

no webbing between the fingers. Subarticular and

palmar tubercles are prominent (Fig. 2C) in about

*4 of the specimens.

There is no webbing between the toes in '/, of

the specimens examined, and minimally basal in the

remainder, Fringing on the toes varies: about ye

have reduced fringing, about 's moderate, and the

remainder have well-fringed toes (Fig. 2(D).

Subarticular tubercles on the toes are usually

conical. The inner metatarsal tubercle is angled

along the axis of the first toe and the outer is angled

to the long axis of the foot; occasionally, the inner

metatarsal tubercle is not angled, but perpendicular

to the long axis of the foot.

Rugosity of dorsal skin varies; poorly, moderately

und very rugose specimens occur in equal

Proportions, Dermal glands are well developed

(Fig. 3), but occasionally poor development of the

parotoid glands is recorded. Development of

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA uy

Fig. 6, Hyoid of Uperaleia rugosa, Cross hathing

inclicates cartilage (UAZ BR14)

inguinal and coecygeal glands are similar (i:h:4,

poor:moderate:well developed),

Submandibular gland is discrete or disrupted in

approximately equal proportions, Scapular plicae

are TOL apparent, and coloration of the dermal

glands is poorly developed. Hence lateral golden

or cream stripes, as found in U. lithomoda (Tyler

etal. |98la), are not apparent. Dorsal colour pattern

varies. Strong patlerning is rare in specimens with

very rugose dorsa, but is common in other matenal

(Big. 3).

Cloacal flaps occur on all specimens, with long

finger-like fimbriations on most female specimens

(as noted by Parker 1940), Some males possess short

fimbriations on the cloacal flap bui most show

scalloped or slightly indented cloacal flaps.

Anterior eye (laps are poorly developed or absent.

A granular ventral surface oeccurs.in about $4 of

the specimens, The granularily usually is poorly to

moderately developed, except in material from the

southern extremity of the range.

Ventral pigmentation ix absent in about '/, of

the specimens, and only a faint dusting of pigment

is detectable in 44; islands of pigment (as described

in topotypie material by Davies & McDonald 1985)

are found in the remaining 4 of the material,

Osteology

Davies & McDonald (1985) described the

osieology of Lopolypic specimens of C, rugosa; and

Lynch (1971) iUlustrated and deseribed certain

features of U. rugosa from St George, Qld. We have

examined a further 58 specimens from across the

species range for osteological varianon.

Davies & McDonald (1985) omitted deseriptions

of the carpal and tarsal bones and hyoid in their

osteological description of U. rugosa, We have

ieluded these.

Carpus: The carpal type consists of five elements.

Linte torsion occurs. Both the ©. ulnare (UL) and

hig. 7A, Dorsal and B, ventral views ol (he skull of Uperoleia rugosa (NMYV 125104) from Savernake, NSW, Seale

har-3 oi.

18 M. DAVIES & M., J, LITTLEJONUN

Fig. 8. Sonagrams of the advertisement calls of A, Uperoleia rugosa, Savernake, N,SW. (RIEL #1 NMV D25085),

27.vii. 1969, AW=14.3°C; B, OF laevigata, Oakdale, N.SW. (R304 48), 30.ix.1975, AW 12.7°C; CL UL teleri, Jervis

Bay, A,C.T. (R135 #5), 174.1963, AW=15.5°C; UL martini, 4.8 km SW Nowa Nowa, Vic. (RIS3 #2), 7-411.1963,

AW=15.0°C. Time marker: 100 ms intervals between peaks.

the ©. radiale (RA) are present. The O. radiale is

the larger. These elements articulate with the O.

radioulna proximally, and with each other at their

proximomedial border, Distally both elements

articulate with the large transversely elongated O.

centrale postaxiale (POC). The ©. radiale articulates

laterally with the O, centrale preaxiale (PRC),

The ©, centrale postaxiale articulates distally with

the bases of ©, metacarpi Il, ['V and V. From the

lateropraximal corner, a small flange extends

proximally onto the lateral surface of the O, ulnare.

Ventromedially is a depression on which a palmar

sesamoid (PS) is situated.

The O. centrale preaxiale articulates laterally with

the © radiale, distally with the O. centrale

postaxiale and with the fused carpal elements of

the O, distale carpale 2 and 3 (C2+3) and laterally

with the basal prepollical element (POT) (Pig. 4).

This description coincides most closely with

Andersen's type 2, found in leptodactylids, and not

with his myobatrachid pattern (Andersen 1978!).

Tursus; The ©. tibiale and O. fibulare are

elongated elements fused at either end. The O.

tibiale extends as far as the distal end of the O.

fibulare. Three distal tarsal elements are present,

The lateral element (T3) is the largest and lies at

the base of O, metatarsus IIL, and extends laterally

to articulate with the medioproximal side of the

base of O. metatarsus 1V and medially to the base

of O. metatarsus Il. The second element (T2) lies

al the base, slightly laterally to O. metatarsus LL.

The medial element (T)) lies at the base of O,

metatarsus I and also articulates with the O. centrale

prehallucis (PH) (Pig. 5). This description

corresponds to tarsal type I (Anderson 1978!).

Hyoid: The hyoid plate is slightly broader than

Jong. The hyale are slender with well-developed

slender anteromedial processes. Alary processes are

broad, and not pedunculate. Posterolateral

processes are moderately long, and slightly

expanded, The pasteromedial processes are ossilied

(Fig. 6).

Anderson, M. L, (1978) The comparative myology and

osteology of the carpus and tarsus of selected anurans,

Ph.D. dissertation, Dept of Systematics and Ecology,

University of Kansas. Unpublished.

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA ah)

rane pe

—

~ “J

ra f

—

Fig, 9 Distribution of Uperoleia rugosa. The arrow

indicates (he (ype lovality,

Variation

Skull: All but two of the adult specimens examined

show 4 consistent overlap of the sphenethmoid by

the posterior extremities of the nasals. Nasal contact

with the anterior extremities of the frontopantetals

is variable; bur, where no contact occurs, separation

of these elements is slight, Medial extension of the

nasals. varies, With approximately equal proportions

of no extension, moderale extension and extreme

exlension (a5 illustrated by Dayies & McDonald

1985), Variation also oecurs in the crescentic shape

ol the anterior edges of the nasals, ranging from

the curved condition illustrated by Davies &

MeDonald (1985) and by Lynch (1971) to almost

straight,

The anterior extremities of the frontoparietals

usually are crenale, and, occasionally, are extended

anjerolaterally. The more usual condition is one af

truncated untenior extremities (Fig. 7).

All adule specimens have minimal exposures of

the frontoparietal fontanelle, ranging from that

shown in Fig. 7 to slightly greater. The medial

margins of the frontoparietals usually are crenate,

but occasionally are almost smooth,

Variation occurs in the form of the carotid canal

groove on the posterolateral frantoparietals. In most

specimens, the grooves are deep (Pig. 7); oecasion-

ally they are partially roofed, and very occasionally

they are extremely shallow, or not detectable.

The palatine processes of the premaxillaries range

from almost abutting to moderately-widely

separated (Fiz. 7). The pars facialis of the maxillary

is moderately-deep in all specimens, but in some

itis foreshortened and shallow anteriorly. Ina tew

specimens, the dorsal surface 1s mot straight, but

is irregularly produced,

The palatines are expanded medially in same

specimens, particularly those from central

Queensland. Vomerine remnants vary consider-

ably—from completely absent (Fig. 7), through

present on only one side medial to the palatines,

io small fragments at the edges of the choanae.

Carpus and tarsus: No wtraspeeifie varialion 15

apparent in tarsal bones, Some variation is apparent

in the fusion of carpal elements 2 and 3. These

bones ure not fused in five adult specimens, NMV

D9199, D9264, D9259 and OM JL8841, JIBSIR. In

NMY 199267, (he bones are fused on one hand and

unfused on the other. In two specimens (AM

R24483, SAM R29681), the bones are fused but

suture lines aré apparent, In one subadult specimen

(UAZ AI012), the carpal bones are not fused: but

in two other subadult specimens fusion has

occurred (NMV 025101, UAZ Al013). Other

Specimens (OM J18840, JI8&836, NMV 1D9260-1,

19265) from the same localities a§ those in which

fusion of carpalia 2+3 has not occurred, exhibit

fusion

Advertisement call

Davies & MeDonald (1985) reported that the call

of U. rugesa consisted of four pulses, with a pulse

repetilion rate of about 34 pulses sec | and a

dominant frequence of about 2583 Hz. Values for

calls of five individuals from a population at

Savernake, N.SW,, near the southern limit of

distribution, are given in Table 1. An oscillogram

of the call of one of these individuals is presented

in Fig. &.

Comparison with other species

Uperoleia rugosa is an edentate species with an

unexposed [rontopanetal fontanelle; these features

are shared with U. minima, UL aspera, atid same U-

M. DAVIES &

120

*S[aAa] PUNOISYxIVQ YSIY JO asnvraq paulwaiap ION

MESA MMR Oe Mp abs Soll a

(0° 66-156) (8S17-1S07) (0°96 -L°L8 ) (9p-Zr) (3°7@S-ZE9p) (V-LI-S"S1) O86 LIE]

£°L6 8° £607 S16 aad Dest SOL 5 “OLA “WIRLIEA JO ANN Wy 9

SROLXU9Z

“OLA ‘DY eal] aaeqqey

(0°66-£ 86) (891Z-OL07) (L'L9 -o'8s ) (tP-ZE) (Z°91L-9' L9P) (8 -7L ) -urluOy adey uo

8°86 LUZ ora) LE 6 S6S we £ Pa sUIe]g ‘OLIRWY § WY 67]

(Pp 86-L°L6) (€8€7-LOZ) (PLL -8°TL ) (So-Lp) (p9FL-0° £09) (S'P1-@'FD) SRO XU PZ

186 S677 Vs ols Lrlg Srl z “ASN “BQueqeuueyy

(1°66-8'88) (1S07-Z661) (E48 -@°ZL ) (Z9-€) (O°ESL-7'LIS) (S'9[- st) C9GTUX'L

£96 8° £107 8°08 8 6F TOI9 g°S1 g “SIA “EMON BMON MAS UY 8'P iio Diajosady

(86-6 'P6) (€9€7-8FI7) (VZ1I-9' SoD) (9¢-7z) (0° T#Z-0°707) (9°LI-F'9T) [R61 ELT

O16 CCSZT £801 £7 9°S7Z OL £ “OTA ‘OLEIN JO ANF wy L

(L°66-8°S6) (QETZ-Z107) (6°56 -1'78 ) ($z-61) (ZES7-9' TIT) (QFI-LE1) S61 XPT

1°86 Q'LOTZ rar) SIZ ZT OET rl t "M'S'N “Biqeqviey

E96LVLT

(6'L6-F' 76) (0607-1 £07) (6°S8 -l'es ) (97-81) (0° TT£-0° 807) = ‘Lorw ‘Aeg siaer i

756 £090 SPs red 86ST ost Zz asayfOD [EARN aRaU Maja] Diajosady)

(9°66-0°68) (ZEPZ-SLITZ) (0°S6 -L°69 ) (9S-Tt) (9° €TL-0'66r) (S'1I-9°01) S961 EX'S 1

9'L6 SS0ET ROR 8°8r L°€09 Vil 8 “AV'S'N ‘SERA M WY Bp

(ZOPT-LZ61) (O'8L -F'69 ) (pP-Ze) (Z°809-0' SOF) = PIBUXET

* Q PPT EL 9'6E S'1es ool ¢ DTA “BATE AY MN WY p°9

(S'96-£°16) (ELET-6017) (O'€8 -O'LL ) (Ss-8r) (0°089-9°ZLS) (“TI-L 1) SLOVXVOE

€°F6 ZPPEZ L'08 ozs 8 LE9 OT! ts “ASN “2]BPALO nins}aany viajosad/)

6961 HA LZ

“ASN ‘OYBUIIARS

(8°66-£°86) (LOZZ-EP61) (‘OF -8°7Z ) (p -€) (8°ZOI-#'Ig8 ) (ErI-97D “UOURIG SYEUIBARS

1°66 9 PSOT Ve PE PPG fel s dweag wnuary psoans nlajosadyy

(ZH)

Oy Aauanbaay (,-s"d) (u) sul (9s) (a1eq)

‘pow ‘duy JuRuIWog a1B1 aging sasind uoneing ainjesedwia y. N uoles07 satdeds

_L___ Este Rh aimiy ai Geeoh God MOT LAE lity Glo enn Cn pen nails nn SS es

‘sasaysuaind Ul Sasuns YIM Suda asD SanjnA “Blajosad—) Jo Saivads anof fo sanstajavapya jJo9 Juawiasileapy *| AAV,

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA

Fig. 10. A, Dorsal and B, lateral views of the head; C, palmar view of hand and D, plantar view of the foot of Uperoleia

laevigata (NMV D25110) from Langley Flats, Qld.

lithomoda (Tyler et al. \98la, b; Davies ef a/. in

press).

U. rugosa is distinguished from U. minima by the

pulsed call). From U. aspera, U. rugosa is distin-

guished by its unwebbed toes (basal webbing in U.

aspera) by its ventral pigmentation (absent in U

presence of fringed fingers and toes, and by well- aspera) and by its call—a short, pulsed click, pulsed

developed inguinal and coccygeal glands (the call at about 170 pulses see! in U. aspera (Tyler et al.

of U. minima is a very short unpulsed click (Tyler 1981b).

et al. \98la), whereas that of U. rugosa is a longer, U, rugosa is distinguished from U, lithomoda by

122 M. DAVIES & M, J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 11. Uperoleia laevigata in life from Severn River, N.SW, (UAZ A815).

the presence of ventral pigmentation (absent in U,

lithomoda), by the absence of a preorbital process

on the pars facialis of the maxillary (present in U.

lithomoda), and by advertisement call. The call of

U. rugosa is clearly pulsed, whereas that of U.

lithomoda is a short, unpulsed click (Tyler et al.

198la, c).

Distribution

Uperoleia rugosa has a wide ranging distribution

in south-eastern Australia (Fig. 9). It occurs to the

west of the Great Dividing Range at the southern

extremity of its range, but is found coastally as well

as centrally from as far north as about Armidale

in N.SW. The northernmost locality from which

material has been collected is Tomahawk in Central

Queensland.

Uperoleia laevigata Keferstein

FIGS 8, 10-16

Uperoleia marmorata var. laevigata Keferstein 1867.

Nachr. Ges. Wis, Gottingen 18, p. 349,

Uperoleia marmorata: Keferstein 1868, p. 270 (part.);

Moore, 1961, p. 219 (part.); Erspamer, Negri, Erspamer

& Endean, 1975, p. 41 (part.); Roseghini, Erspamer &

Endean, 1975, p. 35 (part.); Barker & Grigg, 1977, p. 186

(part.); Erspamer, Erspamer & Linnari, 1977, p. 68 (part.).

Uperoleia rugosa (form B): Littlejohn, 1967, p. 153;

Littlejohn, 1969, p. 111; Martin & Littlejohn, 1969, p. 170.

Uperoleia rugosa; Brook, 1975, p. 83; Cogger, 1975, p. 83

(part.); Barker & Grigg, 1977, p. 188 (part.); Humphries,

1979, p. 15*; Robertson, 1981, p. 4; 1982, p. 6; 1984a,

p. 283; 1984b, p, 56; 1986a, p. 773; 1986b, p. 763;

Erspamer, Negri & Endean, 1975, p. 41 (part.); Cogger,

Cameron & Cogger, 1985, p. 34 (part.).

Uperoleia laevigata; Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 11;

Cogger, 1983, p. 84; Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1983,

p. 33; Tyler, 1985, p. 407; Mahony & Robinson, 1986, p.

120.

Uperoleia sp.: Davies, 1984, p. 790 (part.).

Definition: A moderately-large species (oo 20-

28mm, 9 9 22-32 mm) with maxillary teeth;

fingers fringed; toes usually fringed, unwebbed;

large light triangular patch on the anterodorsal

surface of the head; ventral surface never fully

pigmented; frontoparietal fontanelle unexposed;

carpus of six elements; anteromedial processes of

anterior hyale of hyoid in form of medial dilation;

ilial crest absent; a long, pulsed advertisement call

of 32-56 pulses with a pulse repetition rate of about

79 pulses sec ~!,

Material examined: Vic. NMV D18776-8, D18779,

D18780-1, 6 km W Walwa; D25083, Talgarno; D25017-20,

D25021(A), D25022-4, 2.4 km E Burroweye; D25038(A),

D25039, 8 km NW Walwa; D25034-7, 6.4 km W Walwa.

N.S.W.: NMV D18763-66, D18767(A), D18768-9, 3.2 km

E Rosedale; D25025-8, D25029(A), D25030-3, Braidwood;

> Humphries, R. B. (1979) Dynamics of a breeding frog

community. Ph.D. thesis, Australian National University,

Dept of Population Biology. Unpublished.

Robertson, J. G. M. (1982) Territoriality and sexual

selection in Uperoleia rugosa (Anura: Leptodactylidae).

Ph.D. thesis, Dept of Zoology, Australian National

University. Unpublished.

UPEROLEIA (IN SOUTH-BASTERN AUSTRALLA 3

Fi, 12. A, Dorsa] and B, ventral views of the skull of Uperoleia laevigata (NMV D2siil).

——_ “\

Fig, 13. A, Lateral view of the ilium and B, ventral view

of the hyoid uf Uperoleia laevigata (UAZ BR17).

Hatched uréas are cartilage. Some calcification is

indieated by superimposed regular stipple.

1924039, B kr NW Walwa; 225034-7, 6.4 kin W Walwa.

NUSW: NMV. DI8763-66, DI8767(A), DIBT68-9, 1.2 km

& Roseutale; D25025-8, D25029(A), D25030-3, Braidwood;

25043, 3.6 kim W Yagobie; D25058-70, D25071A),

125072-6, 4.8 km W Delegate; D25040-2(A), 3.6 km W

Coonbarabran, D59508-9, 16 km S Brocklesby;, D59507,

1k km NNW. Nimitibels QM J19949, 1.6 kin SW

Singleton, Putty Ra; J1995], 319962, Wilberforce ar

Windsor; 119948, 16 ku N Windsor, Putty Rd; J26940-41,

AM R68451, km E Vittoria; OM J34227-8, Heathcote,

AM RIB731, RI87S2,. Picton Lakes; R20391, R20393-4,

Bundeena; NMV D25952(A), Couer Dam (ACT); AM

R25803-4, R25K66, RI753I7, R27S8I-R4, Baulkham Hills;

RI7520, Londonderry via Richmond ; R30267-8, R30271,

Tarana: R44024-4, R350R4-7, LL km NW Marengo Station

via Hernani) R341S7.8, Greenhill Rd, 11.2 km from

Goyra/Bbor Intersection, R36432, R36434, RS1092-5,

R78956, Llangothlin Lagoon nr Guyra; R36484-6, §km

NW Ebor on Guyra Rd; 836046, Oban River, Eof Guyray

R36545, Mitchell River on Wards Mistake Rd, R36713-5,

R36717-20, Oakey Creek; R36785-7, 6.4 kin N Aberfoyle;

R36838-9, 19.2 km W Tenterficld; R45125, 64 km S

Tenterfield; R50148, 9.6 km E Keera; R50347-8, Oakey

River Dam, Armidale-Kempysey Rd; R50382, Racecourse

Lagoon, Uralla; R50462-3, 6.4 kim SE Uralla; R350549-50,

9.6 km S Armidale on Dangersleigh Rd; R50905, 3.5 km

W Uralla; RS0907, 35.6 km NW Guyra; R50909, 1.6 kro

SSW Barruba, R50779, 1.6 km N Wallan: RS0603, 12.8

km ENE Guyra; R50915, 8 km 5 Guyra on Armidale Rd;

R50936-7, Paddys Land, 56 km E Guyra; RS0979, & km

SE Tenterfield; R51174-6, 52.8 kim W Armidale on

Bundarra Rd; R64284-7, 65 km SW Inverell on Bundarra

Rd: R654), R66595-6, 22 km doWnstream from Dungox

on William River; R75017-20, Mi David nr Oberon

R78957-60, 4.6 km S Guyra, New England Highway;

R8Od71-81, 17 km S Cooma; RK7488, R8&7490, 14.2 km

SW Cassitis on Ulam Rd; R9OIS2-3, 32 km from Canberra

along Cooma Rd; R9VISS-7, Rose Lagoon nr Collector;

R9N662-3, Blacklands Gap Rd, 6 km NW Maids Valley;

R92820-31, R92833-40, 75 km N Tarana; R92872-6,

R939]3, R92K7], 10 km W Taruna; R96256, R96269-70,

Bogyy Plain 24 km E Coon; R99423, R99429,

R103/52-4, Horsley Park; R1049d4-51, R104954-5 ,

RI04957-8, RIO4AIGI-S, RIW4970, R104972, R1O4978,

R104980, R1IG49H2-5, Ri04989, R10d994, R1O4995,

R107122, RIO7I24, RIO7127-8, RIO7I31-5, Maroota S.F.

33772-5, R33777, Gwydir River, 4.6 km E Bundarra;

R33761-2, R34222, Littl Lagoon, Arding; R34057,

Rockvale Rd, 32.4 km from Armidale; R33797, Rockvale

Rd, 0.8 km E Thalgarrah; R19472-3, Tamworth; R34211,

Armidale; R35650, 49.6-km NE Guyra, Mitchell River at

Kookabookra; R35691-2, R35785, Uralla Lagoon; R35713,

Cherry Tree Hill, 6.4 km SE Graman: R36747-72, 70.8 km

E Armidale; R37024, 32 km NW Emmaville; R36100,

42 km S Bendemeer, R45727-8, The Lake, 32 km 5

Walcha: R42964, R42966, R42968-70, west of Armidale,

R43193, |.6km N Nowendoe lunction, 40 km $ Witlehia;

124 M, DAVIES & M, J. LITTLEJOHN

Vig. 14. A, Dorsal and B, plantar view of the carpal elements of Uperoleia laevigata (NMV_ 025038),

R49988, Serpentine River Pt Lookout; R49998,

Emmaville/Glen Innes Rd; R50308, 28.8 km NE Guyra;

R50323-4, 10.4 km W Ebor on Guyra Rd; R50482-3, Tia

nr Walcha; R50548, 30.4 km SSE Hillgrove on Narrow

Neck Rd; R50570, 8 km NNE Glen Innes on Emmaville

Rd; RSO886, 25.6 km W Bendemeer; R51189, Loch Abbon;

R51008, 20.8 km S Uralla on Walcha Rd; R51200, Bullock

Creek; R51734, 12.8 km S Uralla on New England

Highway; R52645, 22.9 km SW Bundarra on Barraba Rd;

R51799-803, R51805-6, 3.8 km SW Bundarra on Barraba

Rd; R54474, 2.5 km N Marengo S.F. Forestry Hut;

R56978, Gate to Blue Knobby; R57151, Putty Rd: R57268,

Loch Abbra, 32 km NNE Armidale; R68458, 5 km N

Kandos; R70199, 12.8 km along road to Wiseman’s Ferry

UPEROLEIA \N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA \2

Fig. 15, A, Dorsal and B, plantar view of the tarsus of Uperoleta laevigata (NMV D25038),

from Kariong; R71805, Bagot Rd Lagoon yia Llangothlin;

R93563, Bungongo S.F.; R115538, 1 km S National Park

level crossing; R115539-43, R115544-53, Colo; R115562-4,

11.2 km S Putty on Windsor Rd; R115555, Bundanoon;

R115556-8, 0.8 km N Tallong; R115565-71, nr Putty;

R115572, Lapstone slopes above Great Western Highway;

R115573-4, RI15577-8, RII5S580, RI1S582, nor

Buleandramine; R115586-7, R115653-4, Tooloom Falls;

R115585, Nettle Creek, 19.2 km from Copmanburst on

Tabulum Rd; RIO8914-5 Mandurama; R110432, Parsons

Gully, Merriwa; R115645, 4.8 km E Eulo; A483, A612, 6 km

N Mogo Hstd (Shoalhaven River); Al118, Half Moon,

Mongarlowe River; A1283-4, Menangle; A1610-12, 3 km

N Sutton. SAM R12309-12, Stanwell Park; R13004,

38.5 km E Cooma; SAM R28781-3, R28784(A),

R28785(A), UAZ A60I(A), B8I7(A), Oakdale estate N of

Sutton; UAZ B815(A), Severn River (29°28), 151°29'). Qld:

NMV 1D25108-9, 35.2 km N Eidsvold; AM R5818-21, QM

J12724, J12727, Eidsvold; NMV D25110-I1(A), 8 km E

Langley Flats; SAM R29665, QM J45968-70, J42558,

Giraween N.P.; QM J45971, Blackdown Tableland in

Forestry Camp; QM 134242, J39314, Mimosa Creek,

Blackdown Tableland; J28504(A), Blackdown Tableland;

J18820, S of Gayndah; J18831, J18R34(A), BE of Witheort;

J18830, East of Laidley on Granchester Rd; 318833,

319924, J19940, Lancewood Hstd on Ripley/ Brooklands

Rd; JI8838, J18843, J18845(A), 1.6 km N Helidon on

Toowoomba Rd; 119923, 1.6 km W Stanthorpe; J19931-3,

1.6 km S Rathdownay on Mt Lindsay Highway; 319926,

319948, 16 km N Beaudesert; J27749, Gallangowan;

J28177, J30941-2, Eukey; J34815-6, Tom Plants Hut via

Amiens; J35535, Mt Taramba; J42554-7, just W Kalbar

turnoff, Cunningham Highway; J40485, Dalby;

J42559-60, about 1.6 km W = Beaudesert along

Beaudesert/Boonah Rd; J42562, Moonie; J29015,

Waterford Rd, 6 km E Beaudesert; SAM R29666(A)-7,

QM J45966-7, Glenleizh Station beside road to

Glenhaughton Station; QM J45972, 1.7 km trom Cabbage

Tree Creek on Nathan Gorge Rd; SAM R29668-71, QM

J46003, Pony Hills S.F. (149°03', 25°49'),

External morphology

Tyler et a/. (198la) redescribed the species from

nine syntypes. We have examined the external

morphology of a further 459 specimens.

126 M. DAVIES & M. J, LITTLEJOHN

| t

\ “

r s

H at

| ol

1 “I

‘\

izes a

! “s

} °

| Pie ee ee | ae

i ‘e

' s ute

I “2

L y

. I. y% o/

NP a

zy | \q

on, i a é Z

ae | te ne s

1 Ore

Fig. 16. Distribution of Uperoleta laevigata. Vhe arrow

indicates the type locality.

Uperoleia /aevigata is a moderately large species

(oo 20-28 mm S-V, 9 9 22-32 mm 5-¥V) with

relatively long hindlimbs (TL/S-V 0.37 4.0.02

[0.30-0,43]), The snout is moderately long, usually

evenly rounded when viewed [ram above (Fig. 10},

but occasionally truneated. In profile, the snout is

usually evenly rounded (Fig. 10), but sometimes

slopes gently posteriorly, The nares customarily are

subterminal and dorsolateral but terminal in

specimens. With truncated snouts.

The canthus rostralis usually is distinct and

straight, bat sometimes is not clearly defined,

Typically, fhe loreal region is gently Mlaring giving

width and curvature to the dorsal view of the snout;

occasionally it is straight (Fig, 10). The eye-to-naris

distance Usually is much greater than the internarial

span (E-N/EN 1,38 + 0.19 [.1-1.72)).

The fingers are long and slender, unwebbed and

usually well fringed. Palmar and subarticular

tubercles are prominent (Fig. 10), Toes usually are

moderately fringed, but occasionally fringing is

lacking (as in the syntypes). Basal webbing between

toes 2 and 3 was observed in only one specimen.

The inner metatarsal tubercle is angled along the

long axis of toe 1; and the outer is small, rounded

and acutely angled to the long axis of the foot

(Pig. 10).

Texture of the dorsum yaries from smooth ta

moderately rugose, Parotoid glands are usually very

prominent and, in some specimens, appear hyper-

trophied, Occasionally inguinal glands are

prominent, and coceygeal glands rarely are

conspicuous. Submandibular glands vary from

scarcely detectable to discrete and elongate. Nuptial

pads are present at the base of the first finger and

ure unpigmented and glandular (Fig. 10).

No scapular plicae. Cloacal laps are prominent

and fimbriated in most, but nor all, females. Eye

flaps are anterior to the eye and vary in development

from scareely detectable to moderately developed.

Most specimens have a smooth ventral surlace, the

remainder have a moderately granular belly.

The prominent pale triangular patch on the

anterodorsal surface of the head, described by

Keferstein (1867), 18 found in almost all specimens

(Fig. 11). Dorsal markings are not conspicuous and

are usually in the form of islands of dark pizmen|

on a lighter-grey or brown background.

Ventral pigmentation varies considerably,

Pigment is absent in many specimens; and when

present consists of a fine suffusion of pigment

uranules on all or part of the ventral surface, except

the ventromedial portion of the thighs, or as islands

of pigment either pale grey or darker brown, on part

or much of the ventral surface. The ventral surface

is never entirely pigmented. Pigmentation on the

ventral surface of rhe hands, if present, usually is

slight.

Inguinal and thigh markings vary from scarcely

detectable to prominent, aod in colour from grey

to cream. Axillary colour patebes on the forearms

are absent.

Some of the specimens examined had been

infected by batrachomyid cipterous parasites. The

parasites usually were lodged behind and beneath

the parotoid glands. on one side, but occasionally

on both sides. Similar parasites were observed in

the type series (Referstein 1868, Tyler er.a/, 1981a).

During this study, batrachomyid parasites. were

observed only in specimens assigned to Of leevigara.

UPEROLEIA \N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 127

Fig. 17, A, Dorsal and B, lateral views of the head; C, palmar view of the hand and D, plantar view of the foot

of Uperoleia martini sp. nov. (Holotype).

Fig. 18. Uperoleia martini sp, nov, in life. From nr Yarram, Vic, (NMV D59497),

128 M, DAVIES & M. .. LITTLEJOHN

Fix. (9 A, Dorsal and J, ventral yiew of rhe skull of Uperoleta martini sp. nev. (NMYV 123636). Scale bar~ 5 unt

Osteology (based on NMY D25111)

Skull well ossified, sloping anleroventrally (Fig.

12), Sphenethmoid not confluent medially and

poorly ossilied, not extending anteriorly to

extremities of frontoparietals in dorsal view and

ventrally extending posteriorly for about 4 of

length of orbit, Prootic not fused with exoceipital,,

either dorsally or ventrally. Exoceipital not ossitied

dorso- or ventromedially, Crista parotica short and

stocky and well developed, not articulating with alice

ramus of squamosal. Carotid canal nor exposed on

posterolateral surfaces of frontoparietals. Epiotic

eminenves moderately developed, and not roofed

posteriorly, Frontoparietal fontanelle barely exposed

between almost confluent frontoparictal bones.

Extensive lrontoparietals angled posterolaterally on

orbit, Faint trace of carotid canal groove present

posteralalerally on lponloparietals,

Nasals moderately well Ossified and closely

applied anteromedially, moderately separated

posteromedially; maxillary processes shorr and not

in bony contact with well-developed preorbital

processes of shallow pars tacialis of maxillary.

Palatines moderately Jong, unridged, reduced

laterally to just underly preorbital processes of pars

facialis of maxillary, Medially they overly spheneth-

moid at leyel of anterior extremity of culrriforin

process of parasphenoid. Parasphenoid robust,

cullriform process Lruncate and moderately broad,

alary processes moderately broad and Slightly

angled posterolaterally, just reaching distal

extremities Of medial rami of pterygoids (Fig. 12).

Pterywoid robust, atedial ramus short and in contact

with prowtic. Posterior tamus short and moderately

broad. Anterior ramus in short contact with

moderately well-developed pleryzoid process of

palatal shelf of sphenethmoid, Cartilaginous

quadrate present between base of squamosul and

qguadratojugal. Quadratojugal robust, in firm

contact with maxillary, Squamosal sroeky with

short, knobbed zygomatic ramus and long

unexpanded olic ramus.

Maxillary and premaxillary dentate; Palatal shell’

deep with well-developed palatine processes, closely

applied medially, Alary processes of premaxillaries

very broad, bifurcate, perpendicular to pars dentalis.

Vomers absent. Bony columella present, Hyoid plate

slightly longer (han broad, Alary processes large,

not pedunculate, Anteroproximal portions of

anterior cornua dilated, anteromedial processes of

hyale absent, Posterolateral processes moderately

long, broad, Posteromedial provesses ossified, Some

calcification apparent on plate (Pig. 13).

Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust, Omoslernum

and xiphisternum present, Sternum cartilaginous,

Clavicles slender, curved, moderately separated

medially, Coracoids robust, moderately separated

medially. Bicapitate scapula, about equal in length

to clavicle. Suprascapula about 34 ossified,

Humerus with well-developed anteroproximal crest.

Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3.

Six curpal elements present. Consideratile torsion

apparent, Prominent flange extends proximally

from. lareroproximal corner of ©. centrale

postaxiale, Carpal elements of ©. distale earpale 2

and 3 oot fused (Fig. 14). Palmar sesamoid present,

Eight nonimbricate presacral vertebrae Sacral

diupophyses poorly expanded, Relative widths of

UPEROLETA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA my

transverse processes 11] > 1V¥ >sacrum > ll > V=VI-

Vil-VIll.

Dorsomedial ossification incomplete on

verlebrae, {, 1, and UWI, Ilia extend ameriorly to

sacral expansion, Well-developed crest on

bicondylar urostyle extending, along !’2 dorsomedial

length, Pubis cartilaginous. Ilial erest absent, dorsil

prominence, very small; dorsal protuberance small,

more lateral (han superior (Fig. 13).

Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3, Bony

prepollex.

Three distal tursal clements present, Lateral

element (T3) is largest (Pig, 15),

Variation

The sphenethmoid is never confluent medially,

The carotid canal groove is barely observable,

deeply grooved or ogcasionally partly roofed, The

epiotie eminences usually are prominent. The

(rontopatietal fontanelle is always as in the

described specimen.

The palatines are long, slighily reduced laterally

and usually acuminate laterally. The cullriform

process of the parasphenoid is of varying lengths

and is usually more slender ariteriorly; the alae are

either horizontal or inclined posterolaterally. They

are usually broad.

The medial ramus of the pterygoid is usually

acuminate; (he anterior ramus is usually short and

sometimes in slightly longer contact with the

pterygoid process of the palatal shelf of the

manillary than is described,

The zygomatic ramus of the squamosal 1s not

always knobbed, occasionally it is elongated, The

otic radius is always long and unexpanied, ‘lhe

alary processes of the premaxillaries are always very.

broad, curved at the base, bifurcate and sometimes

inclined slightly medially or slightly posteriorly.

The pars facialis of the maxillary 1s moderately

deep; somelimes it is reduced anteroventrally and

sametimes stepped down to be shallow, The

preorbital process is always prominent! andl 1s

usually, bur mor always, discrete.

Vomerive fragments are rarely present and

confined lo small, asymmetrical siructires, usually

medial to the palatines.

Advertisement call

Robertson (1982, 1984, 1986a, b) described Lhe

wl of this species ina populadian near Sulton.

NSW, We have recorded cally rom U. vevigate at

a nimber of localities in its range and Table |

provides data to supplement Robertson's mlarmea-

tion. An oscillogram of the call is presented in

Fig. &.

Comparison with dither species

Uperoleia laevigaia is a toothed species with a

tooled frontoparietal fornanelle, features shared

only with UO, marmorata.

From Li marmorata, U. laevigata is distinguished

by (ringing on the invers and toes, and by size

(males 20-28 mm in & /vevigata, UL marmorata

mule 30.) min).

From the sympatric Uo teri, UL laevigata is

distinguished by the absence of heavy ventral

pigmentation and by the presence of a roofed

{rontoparietal fontanelle. L. /aevigata differs from

the sympatric species U. eegose by the presence of

maxillary teeth,

Distribution

Uperoleia laevigaia occurs throughout the central

und south-eastert coastal regions of SM, Australia

and also occurs on the Great Dividing Range as far

north as the Blackdown Tableland (Fig, 16),

Comment

Uperaleia laevigata is sympairie with an

undeseribed tuuthed species (Davies, MeDonald &

Corben in press) found coastally trout about

Kempsey in N.S.W. tO Eungella in central

Quvenstand and can be distinguished from this

species by inconplere ventral pigmentation,

Uperoleia natin’ sp. toy.

PIGS 8, 17-22

Uperoleia marmorata: Lintteyolin 1969) po TWO (pet);

Cogser 1975, p. TRI (yrart.)

Holotype: NMYV 123635, an adult male collected

by M. J. and 2... Littlejohn, 4.8 kot SW of Nowa

Nowa, Victoria (37°44) 148°06') on 7.x11.1963,

Definition A large species (or 30-33 mm SV)

characterized by the presenee of maxillary teeth;

hypertrophied paratoid glands; heavy ventral

pumentation, mottled dorsum; very pourly-exposed

fronloparietal fontanelle; no webbing between the

Togs; vornering [ragmenrs present; carpus of six

clemenis; anteromedial processes of anterior hyale

of hyoid in the form of medial dilation; tial ¢rest

absent advertisement calla single long pulsed nore

J30 M. DAVIES & M, J}. LIT TLESOLIN

Fig. 20. A, Laterial! view of the ilium and B, ventral view

of the hyoid of Upernler martini sp. nov, (SAM

R29652).

Of 32-62 pulses with a pulse repetition rate af about

78 pulses sec

Description af holotype: Maxillary teeth present,

yomerine teeth absent, Snout short, slightly

rounded when viewed [rom above, rounded in

profile (Pig. 17). Internarial span just less than eye

lo naris distance (E-N/TN 1.10), Canthus rostrahs

inconspicuous and straight. Tympanum not visible

externally. Fingers short, slightly fringed, unwebbed.

In order of length 3>2=4>1, Prominent

subarticular and palmar tubereles (Fig. 17). Hind

limbs moderately long (TL/S-V 0,39). Toes long,

unfringed unwebbed. In order of length 4>3>5

>2>1 (Fig. 17), Metatarsal tubercles large and

prominent, Subarticular tubercles conical and

prominent,

Dorsal sartace rugose, Parotoid glands hyper-

trophied (Fig, 18), Inguinal and coceygeal glands

poorly developed. Submandibular gland indeter-

minate. Well-developed supractoacal flap. Ventral

surface soTooth.

Male with unilobular submandibular voeal sae.

Dorsum mottled yellow and chocolate on grey

background in preservative, Cream patches yentro-

medially on thighs and in groin. Paroloid glands

mottled as on dorsum. Small white palch on dorsal

surface oF furmerus in axilla region, Ventral surface

chocolate stippled with white. Throat dark grey.

Dimensions (in mim); Snout-vent length 30.0; tibia

length 11.4; eve diameter 3.4; eye-naris distance 2.8;

infernarial span 1.10.

Etymology: This species is named for Angus A,

Martin in recognition of his contribution to the

studies of Uperoleia.

Variation

There are seven paratypes, all adult oot. NMV

D23634, D23636 collected with the holotype; SAM

R29650, NMV D59496-7, 6 km NNE Yarram, Vic

M. J. and T. G. Littlejohn, ixii1980; SAM

R29648-49, 6 km NNE Yarram, Vic, G. F Watson

and M. J. Littlejohn, ix1976.

The paratypes vary little from the holotype,

although back patrerning is pot as strongly

developed in all specimens collected trom sites. other

than the type locahty, Adult males range

26.7-31.8 mim S-V. The hind limbs are uniformly

long (TL/S-V 0.37 * 0.02 [0.34-0.39]), Eye-to-naris

distance approximates internarial span (B-N/IN

1.07 +014 [0,92-1.30]). The slight fringing which

is Apparent On the toes of one paratype may be an

arlilact of preservation. The parotoid glands are

uniformly hypertrophied and the dorsum is smooth

Io only moderately rugose.

Osteology (based on NMV 123636)

Skull moderately-well ossified sloping antero-

ventrally. Ossified portion of sphenethmoid not

confluent medially and extending slightly anteriorly

to anterior extremities of [rontoparietals and

posteriorly about 44 of length of orbit in ventral

view. Posteromedial processes present dorsally

projecting into anterior portion of frontoparielal

fontanelle (Fig. 19). Proplic and exoceipiral not

fused, large areas. of prooti¢ calcified postero-

laterally, Exoecipitals nor fused dorso- or

ventromedially, Crista parotica short and stocky,

slightly overlapped by oti¢ ramus of squamosal but

not in bony contact with it, Carotid canal a shallow

channel in posterolateral frontoparietal bones.

Fronloparietal fontanelle exposed only as two small

triangular partions (Fig. 19). Nasals moderately

ossified, tnangular, poorly separated medially,

gently sculpted medially and posteriorly. Maxillary

process of nasal moderately developed, mucronate,

nol articulating with well-developed preorbital

process Of pars facialis of maxillary,

Palatines moderately broad, reduced very slightly

laterally; medially in long contact with spheneth-

moid al angle of about 45° (Fig, 19). Parasphenoid

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 13

L ¢

Fig. 21. A, Dorsal and B, ventral view of the carpus; C, ventral view of the tarsus of Uperoleia martini sp. nov. (NMV

123636).

robust with terminally bifid cultriform process

reduced anterolaterally, Alae short, moderately

broad, at right angles to cultriform process.

Anterior ramus of pterygoid in long contact with

well-developed pterygoid process of palatal shelf of

maxillary; medial ramus short, slightly rounded

terminally, not in bony contact with prootic;

posterior ramus moderately broad and stocky.

Cartilaginous quadrate present between base of

squamosal and quadratojugal. Quadratojugal

robust, in firm contact with maxillary, Squamosal

stocky with knobbed zygomatic ramus and long

unexpanded otic ramus.

Maxillaries and premaxillaries dentate. Palatal

shelf deep. Palatal processes of premaxillaries long,

almost confluent medially. Alary processes of

premaxillaries moderately broad, perpendicular to

dentigerous processes. Pterygoid process of palatal

shelf of maxillary well developed.

Vomers present as tiny remnants one on medial

edge of choana and second on anteromedial

extremity of sphenethmoid, but on left hand side

only.

Bony columella present.

Hyoid plate slightly broader than long. Antero-

medial processes not elongate, in form of medial

dilation of anterior hyale (Fig. 20). Posterolateral

processes of hyoid plate moderately broad.

Posterior cornua ossified.

Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosternum

and xiphisternum present. Sternum cartilaginous.

Clavicles slender, curved, coracoids robust. Scapula

bicapitate, suprascapula about '4 ossified. Well-

developed anteroproximal crest on humerus.

Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3.

Carpus of six elements. Moderate torsion occurs.

Both O. ulnare and larger O, radiale present. Both

articulate with O. radioulna proximally, with each

other on medial border and distally with large

transversely-clongated O. centrale postaniale

(Fig. 21), ©. radiale articulates laterally with

O. centrale preaxiale.

132 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 22, Distribution of Lf martini sp. hoy. Open circles

are call records. The arrow jndicates (he type locality.

O. centrale postaniale articulates distally with

bases of O. metacarpi V, LV and Ul, From

lateroproximal corner, small flange extends

proximally onto lateral surface to ©. ulnare, Palmar

sesamoid ventromedially (Pig, 2}),

O, centrale preaxiale articulates laterally with O:

radiale, distally with O. centrale postaxiale and with

carpal elements of O, distale carpale 2 and 3,

laterally with basal prepollical element.

Right non-imbricate, presacral vertebrae,

Incomplete mediodorsal ossification on vertebrae

1-V, Vertebral column abnormal in sacral region with

fusion of one sacral blade with vertebrae VII|.

Relative widths of transverse processes cannot be

ascertained,

Urostyle bicondylar, well-developed crest

extending about !\ length,

No ilial crest; prominence small, gently monticu-

line, dorsal protuberance posterolateral. Pubis

calcified (Fig. 2D).

Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3. Three distal

tarsal elements present. Lateral element largesr,

lying at base of ©. metatarsus HL, extending laterally

to articulate with medioproximal side of base of Q.

metatarsus 1V and medially to base of O. metatarsus

1), Medial clement at base of O, metatiarsus t,

articulates with ©. centrale prehallacis. Distal

prehallical element small and narrow (Fig. 21).

Variation

Two other paratypes were cleared and stained,

one for bone and one for bone and cartilage (SAM

R29648, R29650), Frontoparietal fontanelle

exposure is greater than that shown in Fig, 19 and

similar to that of the sibling spevies UL ryleré.

Ossification of the nasals is slightly less than that

of the described specimen. The carotid canal eroove

is present, but not deep. The epiotic eminences are

Incomplete but ossification is greater than that

shown ln Uf veri, Vomerine lragments are present

inedial to the palatines and at the edges of the

cloanae, but these are variable in development.

There is no variation detectable in other skull

elements,

Advertisement call

The call of this species is very similar to rhat of

the allopatric species U. /aevivata (Table 1, Fig. 8),

Distribution

Uperoleia martini is known lrom coastal regions

of eastern Victoria and N.SW. (Pig, 22),

Comparison with other species

U martiniisa large species wilhin Lhe size range

of U rvleri, UL crassa, Ue marmorata, U. orientalis,

U. russelli, U, (alpa, U. borealis and U. aspera. The

species is toothed, a feature shared only with UW

tyleri and U marmorata. From U, marmurata, U-

martini is distinguished by the hypertrophicd

paroloid glands and a chocolate ventral surface.

From U. tvlert, UL martini is distinguished by the

presence ol a rugase dorsum With yellow motllings,

and by gall,

Lperoleia tyleri sp. poy.

FIGS 8, 23-30

Uperaleia marmoreta: Relerstcin, 1867, p. 349, 1468, p.

220 (part.); H. W. Parker, 1940, p. 69 (party Moore, L961,

p. 219 (part); Liulejohn, Martin & Rawlinson, 1963, p,

225; Littlejohn, 1967, p, 153; Lildejoln, 1969, p. 110;

Martin & Littlejohn, 1969, p, 171; Litrlejahn, 1971, p. 9:

Watson & Marlin, 1973, p. 42; Cogger, 1975, p, 83 (part.):

Brook, 1975, p. 119: Grigg & Barker, 1977, p. 186 (park.

/yperalius (Uperoleia) marmoratus: W. K. Parker, 1881,

rm 1,

Uperoleia pugesa; H, W. Parker, 1940, pr 68 (part).

Uperoleia sp: Davies, 1984, p, 790 (part.).

Holotype: NMV D23633, an adult male collected

al Jervis Bay, A.C.T. (35°03, 150°44') by Mu I.

Littleiohn, A. A. Martin and P, A, Rawlinson on

17.1.1963.

Definition: A large species (oo 22-33 mm, 9 e

26-34 mim S$-V) characterized by the presence of

maxillary teeth; hypertrophied parotoid glands;

heavy ventral pigmentation; poorly-exposed

frontoparietal fontanelle; no webbing between the

toes; presence of vomerine remnants in lwo

lragments; carpus of six elenients; anteromedial

processes of anterior Hyale af hyoid in the form of

medial dilations; ilisl cres! absent, Matiny eall a

UPEROLEIA {N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 133

Fig. 23. A, Dorsal and B, lateral view of head; C. palmar and D, plantar views of the foot of Uperoleia wleri sp.

nov. Holotype.

single short pulsed note of 18-26 pulses with a pulse

repetition rate of about 100 pulses sec

Description of holotype: Maxillary teeth present,

vomerine teeth absent, Snout short, slightly

rounded when viewed from above, rounded in

profile (Fig. 23). Internarial span less than eve-to-

natis distance (E-N/IN 1.65). Canthus rostralis

inconspicuous and straight. Tympanum not visible

externally (Fig. 24). Fingers short, slightly fringed,

unwebbed. In order of length 3>2-4>1.

Prominent subarticular and palmar tubercles

(Fig. 23). Hind limbs long (TL/S-V 0.38). Toes long,

poorly fringed and unwebbed. In order of length

4>3>5>2>1 (Fig. 23). Metatarsal tubercles large

and prominent; inner elongate, slightly truncated

dorsally extending onto axis of toe 1; outer small,

rounded, moderately acutely angled to horizontal

axis of foot, Subarticular tubercles conical.

Dorsal surface faintly rugose. Parotoid glands

hypertrophied (Fig. 23). Inguinal and coccygeal

glands poorly developed. Submandibular gland

indeterminate. Well-developed supracloacal flap.

Ventral surface smooth.

Male with unilobular submandibular vocal sac.

Dorsum dark slate in preservative. White patch

ventromedially on backs of thighs and in groin.

. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 24. Uperoleia tyleri sp, nov, in life (SAM R29652) from 7 km ENE Marlo, Victoria.

Parotoid glands slightly lighter than dorsum. Small

white patch on dorsal surface of humerus in axilla.

Ventral surface chocolate stippled with white.

Throat dark grey.

Colour in lifes Dorsum dark brown-black with

orange-yellow spotting over glands. Ventral surface

blue-black with white spots. Inguinal and femoral

patches yellow.

Dimensions (in mm): Snout-vent length 29.8; tibia

length 11.4; eye diameter 3.4; eye-naris distance 2.8;

internarial span 1.7.

Etymology: This species is named for Michael J.

Tyler in recognition of his contribution to studies

of the genus Uperoleia.

Variation

There are 61 paratypes 46 oo and 15 9 9.

A.CT:: NMV_ D23632 collected with the holotype;

D23620-2 Jervis Bay, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A.

Rawlinson, 26.1.1964; D23644, Jervis Bay, M. J. Littlejohn,

A, A. Martin, G. F. Watson, 21.x.1969, N.S.W: D23631,

Batemans Bay, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A.

Rawlinson, 2.xi.1964; D23640, 3.2 km N. Batemans Bay,

P. A. Rawlinson, 13.1.1966; D23628, 28.8 km S. Bombala,

M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson,

24 viii.1963; D23641, 23.2 km S Bombala, M. J. Littlejohn,

A. A. Martin, 6.xii.1965; D23638-9, Boyd Town, J. A.

Owen, AM R4754-9, R4761-2, Tamworth, A. H. S. Lucas,

4.iv.1910; R15683-5 Burrawang, A. Holmes; R421I,

Maroubra, D. B. Fry, Ross, 5.x.1908; R5286, R78655,

Maroubra Bay, D. B. Fry, Ross, 20.iii.1911; R6930,

Kensington, W. W. Thorpe; ANWC A1174, Beecroft

Peninsula, 8.ii.1978; NMV D59495, SAM R29653-58,

Narrabarba, M. J. Littlejohn, G. F. Watson, 24.1x.1985.

Vic. NMV D42741-5, Malacoota Inlet, 12.i.1972;

D23623-7, 23629-30, 3.2 km N Cann River, M. J.

Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson, 24.viii.1963;

D33598-601, Mouth of Cann River, Tamboon, A. J. Reid,

23.v.1973; D23643, 22.4 km W Cann River, P. A.

Rawlinson, 20.viii.1968; D48595-7, 30 km W Genoa,

A. J. Coventry, K. C. Norris, 1.xii.1976; D47319-20, 12 km

E Currajong, A. M. Gilmore, 28.ix.1975; D51238-9, 2 km

WNW Golden Beach, K. C. Norris, 26.ix.1978; D51216-7,

2 km NE Craigs Swamp, Holey Plains State Park, C.

Belcher, 20.xi.1978; SAM R29659, Cape Conran, M. J.

Littlejohn, G. F. Watson, 26.ix.1985; SAM R29652, 7 km

ENE Marlo, H. C. Gerhardt, 27.xi.1981.

Size range of the males is 22.0-32.4 mm, and of

the females 28.0-34.1 mm. Hind limbs are long

(TL/S-V 0,39+0,03 [0,35-0.44]), and paratypes

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 134

Pig, 25. A, Dorsal and B, ventral views of the skull of Uperalera tyleri sp, nov, (NMV 1923639),

have variable snoul proportions (E-N/IN 118 + 0,19

[0.87-1.65]). All paratypes have hypertrophied

parotoid glands. Variation occurs in the presence

and extent of a white patch on the dorsal surface

of the arm, Some specimens are dark slate cather

than chovolate ventrally, and others are not as

evenly pigmented as in the holotype, but all are

heavily pigmented, The dorsa of some specimens

are rugose with small tubercles. Lightish coloration

occurs on the parotoids, and a very faint

midvertebral stripe occurs in some specimens. Some

specimens exhibit fringes on the toes.

Ostevlogy (based on NMV D23634)

Skull moderately-well ossified sloping sharply

anteroventrally (Fig. 25). Ossified portion of

sphenethmoid not confluent medially and extending

slighty anteriorly ro anterior extremities of fronta-

parietals and posteriorly about 44 of length of orbit

in ventral view. Prooti¢c and exoccipital nor fused.

large areas of prootic calcified posterolaterally

Exoceipitals dot fused dorso- or ventromedially.

Crista parolica shor and stocky, not in bony

contact with otic ramus of squamosal, Carotid

canal a deep exposed channel in posterolateral

frontoparictal bones. Frontoparietal fontanelle

narrowly and irregularly cxposed medially, exposure

greatest about 24 posteriorly along length of

frontoparictals, Frontoparieta! elements broad,

angled sligltly posterolaterally along orbital edges

Neither anterior nor posterior extremitics of

frontoparietal fontanelle can be defined because of

lack of medial ossification of sphenethmoid and

exoceipital respectively.

Nasals moderately ossified and triangular,

moderately separated medially. Maxillary process

of nasal moderately developed and mucronate, not

articulating with well-developed preorbital process

of shallow pars facialis of mavillary.

Palatines moderately broad reduced laterally to

level of preorbilal processes of manillaties, niedially

in Jong contact with sphenethmoid at angle of about

45° (Fig. 25). Parasphenoid robust with moderately

slender, long, truncate cultriform process extending

anteriorly to level of articulation of anterior arm

of pterygoid with palatal shell of manillary. Alae

short, moderately broad and at right angles to

cultriform process.

Anterior ramus of pterygoid in long contact with

well-developed pierygoid process of palatal shelf of

maxillanes; medial ramus short and acuminate, nor

in Contact with prootic; posterior ramus moderately

broad and stocky, Cartilaginous quadrate present

beiween base of squamosal and quadratojugal.

Quadratojugal robust and in firm contact with

maxillary. Squamosal stocky with ony blunt

zygomatit ramus and moderately long unexpanded

otic ramus.

Maxillaries and premaxillaries dentate, Palatal

shelf deep. Palatal processes of premaxillaries long.

almost confluent medially. Alary processes of

premanillaries long, narrow, perpendicular to

dentigerous processes. Prerygoid process of palatal

shelf of maxillary well developed.

Vomiers present bul reduced to two small

remnants of bone, one on medial edge of chouna

and second on anteromedial extremity of

sphenethmoid. Dentigzerous processes absent.

Bony columella present.

Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosternum

136 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 26. A, Palmar and B, dorsal views of the carpus of Uperoleia tyleri sp. nov. (NMV D23623).

and xiphisternum present. Sternum cartilaginous.

Clavicles slender, curved, moderately separated

medially. Coracoids robust, moderately separated

medially. Scapula bicapitate, slightly longer than

clavicles. Suprascapula about %_ ossified.

Moderately-developed anteroproximal humeral

crest. Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Bony

prepollex and palmar sesamoid present.

Six carpal elements present. Considerable torsion

apparent. Prominent flange extending proximally

from lateroproximal corner of O. centrale post

axiale, Carpal elements of O. distale carpale 2 and

3 not fused (Fig. 26).

Eight non-imbricate presacral vertebrae. Sacral

diapophyses poorly expanded. Ilia extend anteriorly

to sacral expansion, Relative widths of transverse

processes: [Il >sacrum>IV>II1>V=VI-VIl-

VIL.

Incomplete mediodorsal ossification on vertebrae

I-Y. Short transverse processes present an urostyle.

These are probably anomalous structures often

occurring in single specimens of Uperoleia, Urostyle

UPEROLETA 1N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA \a7

“ae:

Fig 27 A, Laterial view of the ilium of Uperalela iylert

sp.nov (NMV 123623}. B, Hyoid of Uperaleta tylerisp.

now (NMY 103360)),

bicondylar, well-developed crest extending

dorsomedially about 2 length of urostyle.

No ilial crest. Dorsal prominence monticuline;

dorsal protuberance posterolaterally placed on

prominence (Fig. 27). Pubis cartilaginous,

Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3. Bony

prehallux.

Three distal tarsal elements present. [Lateral

element (T) larzest (Fig. 28).

Hyoid plate about as broad as long. Alary

processes large, not pedunculate. Anteroproximal

portions of anterior cornua dilated, anterior

processes of hyale in che form of thickenings.

Posterolateral processes moderately long. Postero-

medial processes ossitied (Pig. 27).

Variation

A further nine paralypes were cleared and stained

(NMY 1)23622-3, D42743, D42745, D48597,

133601, AM R4755, SAM R296358, SAM R29652).

Phe osteological features of this species are

remarkably constant. Some differences sit

ossification and calcification in the crista parotica

region are evident, but the deseribed condition is

that of minimal ossification.

The vomerine vestiges ure absent [rom one side

in one paralype and absent trom the edges of the

choanae in a second, Other specimens, have the

zyzomatic ramus of (he squamosal developed more

extensively and kaobbed,

Advertisement call

Characteristics of the advertisement call of U

iyleri ave shown in Table I, Fig. 8:

Life history

Watson and Martin (1973) deseribed the larval

morphology and life history of this species (as U

muarmoratd).

Distribution

Uperoleia ryleri is & coastal species extending as

far north as Tamworth in N,SW. and just

penetrating south-easterm Vicloria (Fig, 29).

Comparison with other species

Uperoleia tylert is a large species (29

23-33 mm, 2 9 26-34 mm) with manillary teeth

and with a moderately-exposed frontoparictal

fortanelle. These features are not shared by

congeners. From the toothed species, U. martini,

U. marmorata, U, laevigata, U. miobergi and

micromeles (vestigial teeth), the species can be

separated by a number of features’ From U, martini,

U, tyleri is separated by a relarively-smooth dorsum,

the reduced mottling on the dorsum and by call.

From U, marmorata, U. tvleri is distinguished by

its moderately-eaposed frontoparietal fontanelle,

hypertrophied parotaid glands, and densely-

plemented ventral surface. From OU. /agevizala, U.

iylertys separated by exposure of the lrontaparictal

fontanelle and heavy ventral pigmentation.

mjoberei is a small species (males 19-25 mm,

females 21-23 mm ‘S-V) with a characteristic lyrale

pattern on the dorsum and a prominent heel papillit

lacking in congeners. U, micromeles has a very

narrow head (E/N/IN ().83-0,90, 0.87-1.65 in U.

twleri) and is not fully toothed,

Other material examined; An aberrant population

from Treachery Head, Seal Rocks, N.SW. (AM

R27656-7, R27662-5) was examined, All are small,

bur adult (evidenced by calling) males with a size

range 18-22 mm. The ventral pigmentation is no!

as exlensive ag that of the type series, but is dappled

138 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN

Fig. 28. A, Dorsal and B, plantar views of the tarsus of Uperoleia tyleri sp. noy. (NMV D42743).

and approaches the pigmentation of material from

Tamworth. The parotoid glands are not hyper-

trophied as in the type series. Osteologically

(Fig. 30), and in external features such as finger and

toe webbing and subarticular, palmar and

metatarsal tubercles, the series conforms to U. tyleri

(Fig. 25).

Other material assigned to this species but

excluded from the type series, is as follows (much

of this material is badly faded): N.S.MWi: NMV

D6987, Sydney; AM R4213, Maroubra; AM R5285,

R5287, Maroubra Bay; AM R78649-53, Maroubra;

AM RS5435, Randwick; AM R18696, Picton Lakes;

AM R115560, 8 km N The Oaks on Wallacia Rd.

Habitat and calling site in south-eastern Uperoleia

In general, breeding habitats are similar for all

species, Males usually call from the borders of

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 139

g &

rf 4

| i

}

~ i } \

‘a

| Ve

1 5}

! oe

\ 4

| %

‘

{ St

—_ Y

| a

= e-+---+-5-= ay ane

| }

! 7

! BE

| F

Kn Pf. of

ag OH ee Ki, ’

\ balla

oI 2

Baden we Aw,

Fig. 29. Distribution of Uperaleia tylert in eastern

‘Australia, The arrow indicates the type locality,

shallow, temporary ponds, or from small islands of

soil or vegetation in such ponds. Robertson (1984,

1986a, b) has provided a full description of the

calling behaviour of CL laevigata (as UL rugosa).

Discussion

The limited morphological diversity, and marked

intraspecific variation within characters, in species

of Uperoleia impose constraints on their

identification,

The value of osteology and call in the identili-

vation of species of Uperalete was demonstrated by

Tler er al. (198la, b, ¢); but early workers (to whom

call data were not available) recognised the

importance Of some osteological features such as

the exposure of the frontoparietal fontanelle, This

latter character (together with the degree of toe

webbing) was used to define (he genera Uperoleia

Gray and Glauertia Loveridge (Loveridge, 1933),

Subsequently, Tyler ef a/, (198la) showed that the

states of exposure of the frontoparietal fontanelle

and of toe webbing exhibited by these genera

represent extremes in continua, and, in consequence,

they suppressed Glavertia.

intraspecific variation in osteological characters,

both within and between populations, has been

investigated in U, dithomoada (Davies, McDonald &

Corben in press), and in the species in this study,

Many osteological features vary to such am extent

that they are not useful in diagnoses at the specific

level. However,.a number of characters are valuable,

and particular combinations of characters can be

effective diagnostic tools. The presence or absence

of maxillary and premaxillary teeth was recogmsed

by Parker (1940) as being of paramount importance

in species recognition but Moore (1961) considered

the presence or absence of teeth to refleet no more

than geographic variation; Whilst Straughan

(1966)* considered the presence of teeth to be

variable within species and even between the sides

of the maxillae in the one specimen. We have never

encountered bilateral asymmetry in tooth

development in any of the specimens of Uperolela

examined, and thus find the presence or absence

of teeth on the upper jaw (o be a most useful

specific diagnostic feature.

Extent of exposure of the frontoparietal lonta-

nelle is an effective character in species recognition.

This feature is under ontogenetic influence (Davies

unpubl.) and account must be taken of the relative

age of the specimen (as indicated by ossification

of key features such as the prootic and exoccipitals

and the epiotic eminences, the sphenethmoid and

the carpal bones) (Davies unpubl.).

However, because most of the material was in

breeding condition when collected, adult features

formally are apparent; and hence the usual

condition of the frontoparietal fontanelle is present.

It seems that the frontoparietal elements continue

to grow, although probably slowly, and in ‘aged’

individuals (as instanéed by calcification of various

skeletal and cartilaginous elements and by minor

exostosis of cranial bones), expasure of the

4 Straughan, I. R. 1966. An analysis of species recogni:

tion and species isolation in certain Queensland frogs.

Ph.D. thesis, University of Queensland. Unpublished

140 M, DAVIES & MJ LITTLE IOHN

Fig. 30. A, Dorsal and &, yentral view of skull of Uperalev ivleri from Treachery Head, Seal Rocks (AM R27656).

Seale bar = 5 mm.

lronteparieral fortanelle is less than in ‘mature!

specimens.

The shape and degree of ossification of the nasal

bones rarely vary within a species, and the

relationships of these bones with the sphenethmoid

and with the anterior extremities of the

frontoparietal elements are constant, The shape of

the pars facialis of the maxillary, and the presence

or absence of a preorbital process on his shell, are

characteristic of Uperaleia.

The length of the otic ramus of the squamosal,

and ils relationship to the erista parotica, are useful

diagnostic tools for Lhe species with relatively-

restricted ranges,

The shape of the alary processes al the premaxil-

laries can be useful, as cay (he shape of rhe palatine

processes of the premaxillaries, The relative lengths

and inclinations of the palatines fo the spenethmoid

are consistent, bul some features of shape, parti-

cularly medially, tend to vary within a species.

Iniraspecifie variation is apparent in the

inclinations of the alae of the parasphenoid, and

also in the shape of the cultriform process. The

shape of the distal end of the medial ramus of the

pterygoid is not diagnostic but the shape of the

posterior ramus is.

Post cranially, the most useful diagnostic features

are the carpal elements, in particular the condition

of the carpale 2 and 3, and in the ilium (see Tyler

1976; Davies ead. in press).

The dominant frequencies in advertisement calls

of all species discussed here are similar and within

ihe range, 1927-2432 Hz (Table 1); likewise depths

of amplitude modulation generally execed 90% for

all taxa (Table 1). Most differentiation between

species is evident in call duration, in the number

Of pulses in the call, or in the dependent character,

pulse rate (Table 1, Fig, 8), Accordingly, these

attributes may be used for effective diagnosis of the

syipalric species.

Identification of specimens of Uperoleia from

south-eastern Australia has been uncertain due to

the instability of nomenclature within the genus

prior to the revision of Tyler e/ af, (198ta), and to

the lack of knowledge of extent of morphological

variation in eastern Australian species. As (he

stuchies of early workers were restricted to external

morphology and lo some osteological features and

because information on fugitive characters, such as

colour in life and call were not available, few species

wele recognised.

Subsequently, Parker (1940) on the basis of a

limited morphological analysis, synonymised U/

rugosa and UL fimbrianus, He also commented that

exalnples of 'U. marmarata' trom the coastal region

of N.S.W, are very dark and may represent a distinet

race,

Moore (1961) recognised only one species of

Uperoleia in eastern Australia—U marmorata, and

cousidered that the differences in anorphology he

observed shoulcl be interpreted as intraspecific

geographic variation, Tyler er al. (198la) showed thal

UPEROLE(A IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 14]

Uo marmorala was testrieted bo north-westert

Western Australia, and they resurrmeted

Jinbrianas from the synonymy al LL rugesa on the

basis of their experience with restricted distributions

of species of Uperoleia in the north of Australia

and because of its larger size. Wher & Davies (1984)

ialcr Showed that Uf /itfomouda has a wide ranging

disiribulion across the north of the continent.

Ceopraphival differences in size also are apparent

within Lf lithomoda (Tyler & Davies 1984, Dayies

et al. in press) and. the staius of Cf finbrianus

remained jenuaus.

Uperoleia Wwlert sp. nov. and U. martini sp. nay.

are yery dark coastal species, and uo further

undescribed species trom the sorthern coastal

region af N.S, and the south-west of Qld awaits

recognition (Davies eral in press), Our data do not

support recogninion of U, fiebrianus and this the

species if again synonymized with U. rages

Uperaleid ldevigata js a wide ranging Species in

soulh-easiern Austraha (see Fig 16), Both

Huophries (1979) and Robertsan (1I98L, 19823,

1984a, b, }986u, 6) have mude detailed studies of

populations of this spacies (as UL rugosa).

Some reproductive data were collecied al

Mosman, NSW, by Harrison (1922), bur it is nat

possible fo determine whether the specimens which

he had observed were of U. laevieara or oF L ryleri,

bow of which occur iv the Sydney area. Pleieher

(1890) reported on specimens of Uperoleia trom

several localities in N.S, Burrawang, the neigh-

hourhood of Sydney, near Cullenbone, near

Mudgee, Narrabri and Dandalog. Three of the

species discussed in this paper could be represented

aiMiongst this material He also sradied material

(ram two other localities in NSW. Kiueatoa

Station, ear Condoblin (probably {4 rugosa) and

Fmv Plains, Urana (probably 0. rugosa) (Pletcher

1891), Material fron: Lucknow, N.SW. (near

Grange}, Pumpana, Qld (south of Brisbane), and

Waroo, Inglewood, Qld probably represents U.

rugese and OU. laevigata or an undescribed species

(Davies ec at in prods) (Fletcher 1892).

Fletcher (1893) also identified material from

Jervis Bay, ASUT (U. trlers), Inverell, 64 kim west

ol Glen Jones, NSW. nd Bungendare, NSW. CU.

loevisaia) and lamwarth, NSW (Ul. ty/eri or

lueviguta). Unloriunately oo records of the

specimens examined are available, so that the

lenlatiye ideniificalions cannet be confirmed

(t is probable that many of the specimens

examined by Slevin (1955), and referred to Lt

ruuesa, are identified correctly, However, we have

nut examined tas matedigl and henee cannot

comment further.

The skins of Uperoleia spevies have heen a rich

source of polypeptides with pharmacological

activily. Erspamer ef af. (1966), Erspamer et al.

(1975), Roseghini e¢ af, (1966) and Erspamer ef al,

(1977) obtained a non-mammalian tachykinin which

they named Uperolein fram thousands of skins of

(rozs from Queenstand and NSW. and identified

as U. rugosa and U mermorata, Oyher

pharmocologically active peptides also were

obtained by these authors. However, [he activiry

ratio among the various peptides varied not only

for the different preparations but also within a

single preparalion (Erspamer ef a/, 1975). The

batches of skin obtained clearly represented more

vhan one Species, From N.SMW. we bave demon-

strated (he presence of four species (and a fifth is

known to occur there, Davies ef a/, in press).

Clearly the resolution af species of Uperalei in

eastern Australia is essential for this type of

pharmacological work to be maximally effective.

Acknowledgments

For loa of material in (heir care and for permis-

sion to clear and stain material for osteologival

examination we would like co thank the following

instiiulions and their curators: British Museum

(Natural History) (A. G. C. Grandison), C.S.1,R.0,

Wildlife Collection (J. Wombey), Naturhistoriska

Tijksmuscel Stockholm (CG. Astrom), Museum of

Victoria (J. Coventry), Australian Museum (A

Greer), Queensland Museum (G. Ingram), South

Australian Museum (M. J. Tyler), University of

Kansas, Museum of Natural History (W. E.

Duellman), Queensland National Parks and

Wildlife Service (R. Ro MeDonald). We also thank

M. Mahony, A. Wells, DB Carter and R, B.

Humphries for prowisiva of addinenal marerial. We

thank Graeme Watson, Angus Marlin and Peter

Harrison for assistance with call data and Michael

J, Tyler for support, enthusiasm, endless discussion

and for critically reading the manuseript. Lorna

Lucas, Heather Kimber and Sandra Lawson (yped

the manuscript, This work Was supported by [he

Department af Zoology, University of Adelaide

(M,D,), an Australian Research Grants Seheme

Granctto M.J.L. and G. P, Watson, and the Nuffield

Foundation.

References

Apentie M. (L978) Moder Taina ane flora of the Tesas

Caves ared, siutheasicen Queensland Menn Gad Mus.

VO), HU

Barkhe, fo ak Cree, Cy OPT, A lel voile ie

Awotratioe tops {Righy, Adelaide

92 M, DAVIES & ML LITTLEJOHN

Brake, A. J. D. (1972) Taxonomy and relationships of

myobatrachine frogs (Lepltoducylidae): a munmerival

approach, Awst 2 Zeal, 21, 119-149,

Broo, A. J, (1975) The distribution of anural

amphibians in Victoria. Me. Pield Nat, 92(6), 10a 120,

Brooker, M. G. & Cauca ty, Ci, (1965) The veriehrare

fauna of Giruih Plains, south west Oucensland Prov,

Linn, Sav, N.S.MA2 90(2), 238-241,

Coocer, H. G, (1975) ‘Repiiles and amphibians of

Australia,’ (Reed, Sydney.)

(1983) ‘Reptiles and amphibians of Austeatia,’ dru

Edition. (Reed, Sydney.)

~—, CAMeRon, B, EB, & Cocicinh, Hy My (1983)

‘Zoological Catalogue of Australia, Volume) Amphibia

and Reptilia,” (Aust. Govt Publishing Service, Canherta,)

Davits. ML (1984) Osteolopy of the myobarraehine fron

Arenophryne ratinda Tyler (Anura: Leptodactylidae

and comparisons With other myobatrachine penera,

Aust, J. 200,32, 789-802,

» Manowy, M. & Ropeets, J. DB: 1985) A new

species of Uperolen (Anura: Leptoductylidae) fron the

Pilbura Region, Western Australia. Trans R&R, Sue, §.

Ause 109, 103-108.

— & McOdnatp, K. R. (1985) Redefinitian ot

Uperoleia rugosa = (Anderssen) (Anura:

Leptndactylidac). Jhid WY, 37-42.

\ & Coreen, C.J. (in press) he genus

Upereleia Gray (Anura: Leptodactylidae) jn

Queensland, Australia, Brac R, Saw, Vive,

Davis, DD & Gorn, VR, (1947) Clearing and staining

small vertebrates. Fleddiana Techniques 4, 16.

Dincckkus, BG. & Uncer, L. D. (1977) Enzyme

clearing of alcian blue stained whole small vertebrates

for demonstration of cartiiave, Stain Teefral. $2,

229-231.

ERseamen, Y., bt Cara, G, & Expr as, R. 11966) Occur-

rence of physalaenin-like polypeptide (Uperolein) anc

otlet wetive polypeptides in the skin of Uperateia

rugase. Expereiua 22, 738.

, PRSPAMER, 4, EF & Linn, G, (1977) Geou-

renee of Luchy kinins (Physalacmin or substance Pike

peplides) in the ampinibian skin, and (heir actions on

smoot muscle preparations. d7 US. von Euler and

B. Petnow (Eds) ‘Substance PY (Raven Press, New

York,)

. Neort, Li, Erspamen, & & Betiban, R, (1975)

Uperalein and other active peptides i) Wie skin of Ihe

Australian leptodactylid) trags Cperoleja and

Taudaciylus, Arch. Pharmacal, 89, 41-54

FLetchita, J. 0, (1890) Conrriburions to 9 more exact

kKnowledme of the geographical distribution of

Australian Batrachia. No | Proc. Linn Seo, NSE Sep

2. 5, 667-476,

(1891) Conmibutions to @ more exact knowledse

of {he geographical distribution of Austratiin Batrachia.

No, 2. Jbhid. &, 263-274.

(1892) Contributions to d more exact knowledge

of ihe geographical distribution of Australian Batractia

No.3 bid, 7, 7-19.

- (1893) Contributions to a mone exact Knowledge

of the geographical distribition of Australian Batrachia,

No. 4. Mbit & 524-533,

Harrison, L. (1922) On the breeding habils of same

Atistivlian frows. Ausé Fook, 17-34,

REFERS) EIN, W. (1868) Ueber die Barrachier Mest talions.

elreh. Nanirgesch. 34, 253-290.

LEnit tain, M. 1. (1967) Patterns af zoageopraphy and

speciation in south-castern Australian aniphibia pp,

150-174, fa ALT. Weatherly GEd.) “Australian titan

Waters and their fauna.’ (AN, Press, Canberra.)

(1969) Amphibia of Past Ciyppstand. Proc, R, Soc.

Met, BIC), 15-11%

rey (1971) Aimiphibia of Victoria. Viet, Year Book 8&.

» Magriss A. AL & Rawrinso, FAL (1964) New

records of frogs in east Goppstand, Piel Nui. 8t,

225-226.

Lovexibuik, A. (1933) A new genus and three new species

of crinine frogs from Australia, Ovcus. Pap. Boston Soc.

Nat Hist, 8, 89-94,

Lywen, J.D (1971) Evolutionary relationships, osteolopy

and zooweography of leptodactyloid frogs. Mise. Publ

Mus. Nat. His, Univ, Kans. 53, 1-238.

Manony, M, J. & Romssow, E. S. (1986) Nuclewlar

Organiser region (NOR) location in karyotypes of

Australian grounds frogs (Family Mvobarrachiclac),

Genetica 68, 119-|27.

Martin, A, A, & Liptihaionn, M. J. (1969) The

amphibian fauna of Victoria, two vew records and a

checklist, Fen Nat. 86, 170-172.

Moore, fA. (96D The frogs of caster New South

Wales, Bull, Aan Mus, Near Hist (24, 195-385.

Pakkek, H, W. (140) ‘The Australasian fros of the

family Leptodietylidue, News. Zool 42, 1-106,

Parker, WK. (SRT) On Ute structure and developorent

ofthe skillof the Batravhiu. PAIL Trois. R. Soe. Lone.

172, 1-266,

Rowreisom, FG. M. (19K1) Sexal selection and spacing

i) Uperoleta rugosa (Red-proined toadler) (Anura:

Leplodactytidae), dC, B, Banks & A.A. Martin (Eds).

Proceedings of the Melbourne Herpetological

Symposium, (Zoological Board of Victoria, Melbourne}

(984a) Acoustic spacing by breeding ales of

Uperaleia tygosa (Anura: Leptodactylidac), &

Tierpsvchol. 4, 283-297.

~—— (1984) A tech pique for individually marking frogs

for behavioural studies, Herp. Rev. 15(2), 56-37.

—— (1986a) Fernale chvice, male strategies and the role

of vovalizations inthe Ausiralian frog Upercleia ragosa.

elnint. Behav, 34, 773-784.

(19866) Male territoriality, fehting and assessment

of fighting ability in the Australian Iroe Uperoleia

rugosa. Ibid. 34, 763-772.

ROSEGTIINI, ML, Erspamer, Vo & Enbeas, R. (1976)

Indole-imidazole and phenyl alkylamioes iv the skin

of one hundred amphibian species from Australia and

Papua New Guinea. Comp. Biochem. Physiol 54, 3143,

Stpvin, J, BR, (955) Notes on the Austeatian ainphibians.

Proce. Califarnia Acad, Sc}, 28, 455-392,

TRUER, L. (1979) Prous of the genus Je/wutebre in

Ecuador with description of a new species, Copel

1979(4), 744-733.

Tyipk, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the venus

i ball Zval, verhandl. Rijksmus. Nat. Hist Leiden 96,

(1976) Comparanyve ostealogy af the pelvic girdle

of Australian frogs and a ceseription of a new fossil

genus. Trans. R. Save. 5. Anse WO), 3-l4.

(1985) Myohatrachidae. Jr Frost, DD. Ro (bd.}

‘Amphibian species of the world. A 1axonornie and

geographical reference.’ (Mien Press Ind & Asso Syst,

Coll, Lawrence)

& Davies, M, (L984) Uperolefa (Gray) (Anura:

Leptocacrylidae) in New Guinewt. Trans. Soe. Susy.

M8{2), }23-125,

—-,- & Maniiny AL AL G9Sla) Auseratiaa

frogs of ihe lemodperylid genus Upercleta Gray, less,

4. Zool. Suppl, Sen 79, 1-64

UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 143

& (1981b) New and rediscovered Watson, G. F. & Martin, A. A. (1973) Life history,

species of frogs from the Derby-Broome area of Western larval morphology and relationships of Australian

Australia. Rec. West. Aust. Mus. 9(2), 147-172. leptodactylid frogs. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 97, 33-45.

& (198lc) Frog fauna of the WILKINS, G. H. (1928) Undiscovered Australia. Being an

Northern Territory: new distributional records and the account of an expedition to tropical Australia to collect

description of a new species. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. specimens of the rarer native fauna for the British

105, 149-154. Museum 1923-1925. (Bern, London.)

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 110, PART 4

EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM

Summary

Since the turn of the century eight earthquakes of Richter magnitude 5 or greater have been

experienced in South Australia, the most recent in 1986. The 1954 (My, 544) Adelaide earthquake

was the most damaging shock to have occurred in Australia since European settlement, with a

damage bill of $50 million on present monetary standards.

EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

hy S.A. GRERNHALGH®, Ro SINGH? & RO" PARHAM)

Summary

Girerwiiaron, 3. A. SINGH, Re & Param, R. T, (1986) Earthquakes in South Australia. Tras, R. Sae

S. Aust 1004), 145-154, 28 November, 1986.

Since (he turn of rhe cenrury eight earthquakes of Righter magnirude 5 or grealer haye been experienced

in South Australia, the most reeent in 1986, Vhe 1954 (M, §%4) Adelaide earthquake was the most dumaping

shock to haveovcourred in Australia since Huropean senlement, With «damage bill of $50 million on present

monelary standards.

be hquake acrivity is monitored with a statewide network of twelve setsmograph stations. Approsimarcly

700 eanthquakes are Ineated cach year. The greatest conventranon of carrhquakes occurs in the Flinders

Kanges adiucent lo the northern (ip of Spencer Gulf and Lake Torrens. The other major zones are Eyre

Pommsula (pacicilarly the eastern sidey und the South-Fast camer of the State,

The focal depths. for most Sourh Australian earthquakes are quite shallow, being confined to ihe upper

enust. The toml energy release is essentially constant with fneal depth, which is consistent will an increase

in rock strength with dept) i the crust,

Recurrence relations have been established for che various seismic zones: For (he Whole of the State,

the date imply an average rerun period of 142 years for ap earthquake of magnirade M, greater than 6,

Focal mechanisms of six curthquakes oceurring in the central Geosyneline Zone have been deduved

from analysis of P wave first motions, The fault planes are all steeply dipping and the motion is essenially

srike-slip, in response to horizontal compression of the Australian plate,

Key Woros: Earthquakes, South Australia. Seismic zones, Adelaide, focal depth.

Introduction

South Australia contains some of the most active

carthquake vones in Australia (Burke-Gattrey 1952;

Doyle et al. 1968; Denham 1979), Seismic activity

is only minor ina global context, but occasionally

damaging earthquakes do occur. In the last 100

yeurs, Soutl) Australia has experienced seventeen

caurthquakes of Richter magnitude 442 or greater

(Table 1). OF these only six events were of magnitude

larzer than 5}4, the most recent being in LY86. The

largest earthquake to have occurred jn the State's

history was (he Beachport-Kingston earthquake of

1897 (M; — 644).

Earthquake monitoring is carried out by the

University of Adelaide using a state-wide network

of 12 seismograph stations (Mig. 1), Information

derived from the network has enabled a detailed risk

map of Sowh Australia to be drawn (MeCue

1973!; Denham (979; Stewart 1984), The

populuiion cenire of Adelaide bas the highest

earthquake risk of any capital cily in Australia. The

1954 (M, ~ 5!) Adelaide earthquake invalved

* School of Karth Seiences, Vlinders University of South

Australia, Bedford Park, S.Ausr, 5042.

* Deparment af Mineral Resources, Suyat, Fil.

| Department of Physics, South Austrahan College of

Advatived Bdiwation, Salisbury, S.Aust,

Metue, K. (1975) Seismicity and Seismic Risk in South

Australia, University of Adelaide, Dept. of Physics,

Report ADI 137,

30,000 insurance claims totalling £4 million, The

cast today of an equivalent size earthquake has been

estimated as in excess of $50 m. (Fred Pairhead Pers.

comm.)

In this paper we review of the broad pattern of

South Australian seismicity, paying particular

atlention to epicentral distributions, local depth

relations, and earthquake focal mechanisms, Much

of the data used are post-1978, when [te network

underwent significant expansion, The last published

account of South Australian seismicity (Stewart

1984) inclades data only up until 1979.

Historical Seismicity

The earhest reported earthquake in South

Australia occurred in Adelaide on 28 July, 1837,

oly six months after proclamation of the new

colony. Blackett (1907) deseribed the effeets of this

earthquake and the concer) if caused amongst the

new settlers, The Rev. Julian Edmond Wood

reported a further severe shock felt in Adelaide in

June 1856 and one at Lake Bonney in the Sourh-

East during December 1861 (Howehin 1929; Kerr-

Grant 1956),

Barthquake etivity throughour the following

years Was reported in the laval press and noted in

records kept by observers of the Bureau of

Meteorology aiid Tocal lighthouse keepers, Howehin

& Gregory (1917) give a summary of shocks for the

period 1883 ta 1903,

Ayre

re,

bet

‘

CLV oe

Vig. 1. Location map showing stations of the South

Australian network, The adjacent stations. BFD and

STK al the Bureau of Mineral Resources Eastern

Australian network, are also shown,

8. A, GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R, T. PARHLAM

The Government Asironomer, Sir Charles Todd,

volleeted reports from 1887 10 1908 which were

published in the proceedings of the Australasian

Association for the Advancement of Science. A

summary of this early seismic activity was given hy

Mr G. F. Dodwell, Todd's successor (Dodwell 1910),

The greatest concentration of felt reports came from

the vicinity of the Flinders Ranges from such places

as Quorn, Hawker and Blinman, The main area of

acuivily was at Beltana, situated in the hilly country

east of Lake Torrens (Fig, 1), Twenty-six earthquakes

of MM Intensity 1V to Vi Were reported for the

Iwenty-seven year period 1881-1908, Kapunda anc

Budunda, i the Barossa Valley district located 90

km north-east from Adelaide (Fig. 1), reported 22

less severe carthquakes in the same period,

A tabulation of felt South Australian earthquakes

to 1918 is given in a Bureau of Meteorology

publication “Rainfall Records for South Australia

und the Norther Territory”. (t lists eight tremors

for the city of Adelaide,

During this pre-instrumental period some of the

largest ¢arthquakes (o be experienced in Australia

occurred (see Table 1), Most notable were the

Beachport-Kingston (1897) M, = 6! earthquake

mentioned earlier, and {he Warooka (1902) M, =

6 earthquake on Yorke Peninsula. Both shocks

catised considerable damage in the epicentral area

and were strongly felt at distances of hundreds of

kilometres. Bach was accompanied by numerous fell

aftershocks over the following yearn, An exhaustive

description of the macroseismic effects of these

Tater t. South Australian earthyuakes of Magnitude M, = fh,

Origin Tuhe Location

Date (UT) (Lat.)°S)

Twit, RES 13:58:00 Motini Barker 35.1

HOV L897 (5;26200 Beachport 37.30

19.ix.1902 10:30:00 Warooka 75.00

28,8.1937 0934243 Simpson Desert = 26.10

26.1999 OF'5HeF Motpena 31.20

diy. J941 22:07:90.0 Sinpsen Desert 26.30

G.viii L948 | 03729¢23,0 Robe 47 36

24.1954 1 8209:452.0 Adelaide 44.93

2.41.7959 O117:57,.2 Eyre Peninsula 33.36

(6.v-1962 21;41;38,5 Kangaroy Island 335,51

257.165 21:22754.9 Howker 31.928

Dili, W9GS S27 R:53.9 Leigh Creek 30.525

14.10.1965 = 12:47:42.3 Hawker 31.949

2o.vii19T) OF:50:33.0 Blioman F378

Ih.iv. 1972 22:30:39.7 Wilpena BV .578

IO NUAYSFT VF4251.2 Bellini W794

Wii TRH | (82 83:52.4 Musgrave Runges 26.280

Depth Mag.

Long. (FR) (km) = -M,; ~—- References

i38.7 4,5 BG, DES, M

139,75 6.5 D, BG, DES, M, SMB

137.40 4.0 D, BG, DES, M

136.50 — 5? BG, B2

138.00 _ 5.1 BG, BB, SW, DES

136.90 _— 5.1 B2, SW, DES

134.68 138 4.6 BG, SW. DES, M. SMB

13ak 67 4 4.3 KG, Bl, B2, DES, M

{35.98 y 44 SW, DES

137.66 0 46 SW, DES

138,496 0 46 SW, DES

138,222 10 48 SW, DES. M

138,569 ) 47 SW, DES

134.756 19 4.8 SSS

138.619 2 33M

138.405 2) 435 Ov

(32.898 if fil

Relerenees:

BI, Bolt (1957); B2, Bolt (1959); BB, Bullen & Bolt (1956); BG, Burke-Ciallney (1952); D, Dadwell (L910);

DES, Doyle, Everingham & Sutron (1968); KG, Kerr-Grant (1956); GD, Greenhalgh & Denham (986) My MeCue

(1975), SMB, Sutton, MeCue & Bugeja (197

7); SSS, Stewart, Slade & Sutton (L973) SW, Sutton & White (19648),

EARTHQUAKES IN SOULH AUSTRALIA 147

varihyiakes is given by Dyster (1979)% The

references ited in Fable 1 should also be consulted

for further details.

Karly insinimental Period (1909-1962)

Prior to [962 Only one seismic Station wus

opening i South Australia at the Adelaide

Astronontical Observalary (Doyle & Underwood,

1965). The instruments, a Milne N-S horizarital

pendulum and i Milne-Shaw EW horizontal

semouraph, were of low sensitiviry ind long period

and nol well suved ro the study of loeal

earthquakes. The nearest stations to Adelaide were

at Melbourne (600 kin) to the south-east, Sydney

(1100 kin) ta the east, Perth (2000 km) to the west,

und Brisbane (500 kin} and Rabaul (3800 km) to

the north-east. There were few earthquakes large

enough to be recorded at these distances to enable

locations to be made, For those that were recorded,

cpicentral localions was not precise (no better than

100 km) due to the small number and unfavourable

distribytian of seismie stations.

A brief discussion of Australian seismicity for the

first half of ihe 20th Century Was piven by

Cutenberg, & Richter (1954). They lisied onty 10

earthquakes of magnitude M ercater than 3.3 for

the whole continent. This was followed by a more

detailed study conducied by Burke-Galfney (1952)

and the redeterminacion of same epicentres by

Bullen & Bolt (1954) and Holt (1957, 1959). The

epicentral map produced by Burke-Gaffney (1952)

identified the South Australian reeion from Spencer

Gull to Lake Eyre as the most active seismic area

of Australia.

Table 1 lists some of the larger events which took

place during this early insirumental period. The

19594 Adelaide carnthquake was the niost damaging

carhquake to have occurred since European

seUlement of Australia, Detailed sewmological

descriptions of this important eariliquake ale given

by Kerr Grant (1956) and MeCue (1975)! Other

notable damaging earthquakes in this period were

the Matpena (1939) My = 3,4 and the Robe (1948)

M, — 4.6 carthquakes. MeCug (1975)! discusses

these and other earthquakes elt jn South Australia

prior ro establishment of the ML Bonython seismic

station un 1959.

Insirumental Date

Aceitate, instrumental Jocations of South

Australian earthquakes buve only been possible

“pystern T. (1979) Strong shock of Earthquake: The

stery QF ihe four severest Of varthquakes a South

Australia’s history. Dopubbshed report. department of

Physics, University ol Aceltide,

since the establishment by the fate Dr D. Sutton of

the first ipartite seismig network in 1963. With

the gradual expansion of the network over the

follawnne Iwo decades, the location capability

increased considerably as did the umber of

locatable events. At the present time approximately

300 earthquakes per year are sufficiently well-

recorded to enable a location to be made.

The geographical distribution of earthquake

epicentres may be strongly biased by the density and

location of seismograpl stations. (For historteal

data, there is a corresponding bias in terns of

population), Only those events recorded by at least

three stations will be reported. Fuhermore,

lovation errors may be large for events ovcurring

ourside the network. The present location limits tor

the 14 Station network (including two adjacent

stations of the BMR’s Eastern Australian tetwork)

have been determined by Cireerihalgh, Parham &

Singh (1986). During the 1960'S when there were

fewer than Seven operational stations, small

magnitude earthquakes would have been completely

missed, From 1969 onwards nearly all events of My

prealer tin 2 in the known seismic regions of South

Australia should have been located. fhe main

limitations i (he present coverage are in the far

north and west of the State.

Seismieiy studies for the South Australian region

have been reported at regular intervals since 1968

by Sutton and colleagues ar the University of

Adelaide (Sucron & White 1968; Stewart, Slade &

‘Sutton 1973; Sutton, McCue & Bugeja 1977; Stewart

198d), ‘Tectonic interpretations Of the seismicity have

also been undertaken (Dovie, Everingham & Sutton

1968; Stewart 1976; Stewart & Mount 1972; MeCue

& Sutton 1979; Singh 19853).

Results

Epicentral distrifuition

Fig. 21s an epicentral plot forthe region oF South

Australia below tattude 26°S. Ir contains all

earthquakes in the archives from 1897 to 1984 which

have magnitude (M,) 3.0 or greater, The plot

repeats the earlier established seisnticity patreru

(Stewart er @l, 1973) with most of the acivity

occurring ait the Adelaide Geosyneling Zone from

Leigh Creek inthe north to Kangaroo Island in the

south, The preatest conceniranon occurs uv the

Flinders Ranges adjacent to the northera end of

Spencer Gulf and Lake Torrens. The other two

zones of seismic activity are also clearly identified;

namely Eyre Peniosula (particularly the eastern

* Sinvh, R. (M85) The semmiciry aod erustil structure

of South Austratit. MySey Chesine Winders Universily

of South Australia (Unpubl)

148 S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM

138

SIMSON DESERT,

Wisc sim

AUSTRALIA

A ray

LEIGH CREEK, 1965 4 8M,

BELTANA,1983@

OMA, 4 a

MOTPENA,)939 95 1M

na ages

BLINMAN, 197]

WILPENAD 45M

1972 5.3M,

awker,& As ra

eo EN A

HAWKER, 1965,

ry vayay

vay

EYRE PENINSULA

MAMBLIN.I959MH52M, AV

a 4

ADELAIDE, 1954

m5 em

MT. BARKER,

KILOMETERS

100 200

ROBE, 1946

SCALE

As<emM<4

O4<m.<5

omM>5

MAGNITUDE KEY

Fig. 2. Epicentral map for South Australia 1897-1983, The plot includes events of Richter magnitude 3 or greater.

The major seismic zones, in order of decreasing activity, are Adelaide Geosyncline, Eyre Peninsula and South-East

Region.

EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA lay

side) andl Lhe South-East comer af the State (around

Mr Gambier).

Nig, 3 shows the earthquake epieentres in the

magnitude range My 1.9 jo 4.4 for the relatively

recent seven year period Jaiuary }978 to Decenrber

1984. The standard errors in the epicentral co-

ordinates have been greatly reduced in the post-1978

period, and are approximately + 2 km. The

diagram also depicts the main geologic provinces.

Again che major earthquake zanes are clearly

seen, It is obvious that the Geosvncline Zone

beiweeit Quorn and Leigh Creek exhibiiy the

yrealest number of evenis. The epicentres appear

to be assuciated with a narth-south chain of about

40 diapirs, which have been interpreted by Leeson

(1970) as intrusive features which occur ar che

intersection. of deep faults and shears in the

basement systems, They are zones of structural

weakness which may promote ctusral stress release.

Many of the seismic events of Fig. 3 are below

sediments of the Geosyncline where basement struc-

ture may bear lirtle resemblance to surface geologic

features, The epicentral pattern is rather diffuse bat

shows @ predominant orth-west and north-cast

lineation, These trends correspond with the general

structure fabne of the area,

Several new features are evident.in Big. 3 which

were not clearly defined in previous. studies. A

possible branching of the Flinders Ranges zone

ovcurs near Jamestown (lat. 33 ¥2"°S, long, 139"E),

where the epicentres may trend sorth-cast and join

up with (he group of events centred on Broken Hill.

The Anabana and Redan Faults are almost co-

incident with ¢his projected tine of activity. Stewart

(1971) reported on tWo carthquake sequences in 1969

which were centred east of te Geasyncline on the

Willyama Blowk.

Another neighbouring area of setsmicity is the

small eroup of epicentres in New South Wales at

latitude 30°S and longitude 41.5 EF, The

seismouraph coverage in this area is poor but |t is

evident thal (his zone may be geologically associated

with the Frome Embayment (Fig. 6).

North of Leigh Creek the major earthquake zone

swings round to the west of Lake Eyre and

(erininates tear Oodnadatta (to the north of the

urea Shown i Fig. 3—see Figs | & 2), resumes

an the western edve of (he Great Artesian Basin and

extends northwards into the Simpson Desert. Most

of the activity is an the Northern Territory side of

ihe State border. Several moderately large

earthquakes have oecurred there, but the network

Uoes not provide adequate montoring of rhe north-

central zone for events of magnitude less than My

2.5.

Eyre Peninsula is much less active than the

Geosyneline bul some large earthqyakes have

occurred there (Table 1), The magnitude My; ~ 4.9

earthquake of 2 November 1959 triggered 3 events

in the magnitude rarige 4 to 449. Several other felt

swarms have been observed in this zone. Epicentres

along the eastern side of Eyre Peninsula appear to

be associated with the Lincoln Fault Zone. This

fault marks the Western boundary of sediments

within the Spencer Gulf Graben, There is a gapr in

the seismicity north of Cleve berween Eyre

Peninsula and the Geosvncline Zone.

West of Eyre Pemisula there are few data con-

vecning earthquake activity. Events occurring in

the Eucla and Offiver Basins would have to be of

magnitude greater than 2 to be locatable by the

seismic network. The population density of this

revion is also low bat reports of Tell earthquakes

are occasionally received from towns on the Great

Australian Bight.

The South-East seismicity zoue has been the site

of two of South Australia’s largest earLhquakes—

Beachport-Kingston, 1897 and Robe, 1948,

(mentioned earlier). Until the recent expansion of

the network in this area small earthquakes off the

east coasl went ummoticed. Seismicity is relaled to

the western (offshore) margin of the Giway Basin

and an onshore volcanic belt. The data for this grea

are sparse. A review has been given by Sutton,

MeCue & Bugeja (1977).

Foval-Depth patierns

The foval deprh distribution of focal earthquakes

in South Australia is summarised jn histogram forin

in Fig, 4. The two diagrams correspond to the

Adelaide Geosyneline and Eyre Peninsula setsmic

zones, The data are for the period 1978 ro 1983,

when all 12 stations of the network were operating.

The standard errors in focal depth determination

are approxiniately 2 kn for earthquakes within the

Geasyneline and 2 to 5 km lor events outside ir

The number of earthquakes. and the perind of

observations are sufficient to attach significance ta

the result. Furthermore, the data set has mot been

contaminated by any large earthquakes or

altershock/foreshock Sequences.

The two-laver crustal models los each cone

(Shackleford & Sutton 1981) are shown to the right

of the foval depth diagrams. For the Geosyncline,

abour 80% of the earthquakes takes place within

the upper crus(-ar depths of less than 20 km. On

Eyre Peninsula, the Conrad discominuity Geeurs at

shallower depih (& to 12 km), with 70" of

earthquake activity concentrated ja the upper crust.

At wbese depths (conlining pressiires) stress is

relieved by brittle fracrare rather than duccle low

(Mar 1967).

150 S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM

STUART

SHELF

GAWLER

PLATFORM

_s4{(8) Ceduna -1s"ADELAIDE |

‘

+—_. LINCOLN FAUz, ss, "GEOSYNCLINE

= :

AUSTRALIAN

BIGHT

| \_/-

/fSlavevaive

MURRAY

BASIN

* EPICENTRE M, > 19)

KILOMETERS

100 200

SCALE

Fig. 3. South Australian earthquake epicentres for the period 1978 to 1984, in relation to the major geological zones.

Dots denote magnitudes in the range M; = 1.9 to 4.4.

EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 15]

Number of events per Skm depth interval

a 100 200

depth {km}

Focal

km )

depth |

Focal

(no)

(bh)

CRUSTAL STRUCTURE MODEL

(Shackleford and Sutton, 1981)

300

¥ E SURFACE

Vp = §-94 km/s

? CONRAD

= 6.42 km/s

MOKO

Vp = 7.97 km/s

SURFACE

Vp = 5.95 km/s

? CONRAD

Vp = 5-42 km/s

MOHO

Vp= 7-97 km/s

Fig. 4. Focal depth distributions for earthquakes if) (a) Adelaide Geosyncline, and (b) Eyre Peninsula Seismic Zones.

To the right of the diagrams are the local crustal velocity functions, established by Shackleford & Sutton (1981).

Most foci are confined to the upper crust.

The total energy release per 3 km depth interval

is obtained by summing the seismic energy E or

individual events (Richter 1958):

logioE = 9.9 » 19M, ~ 0,024 M,?

The result is given in Table 2. The energy

distribution in the upper crust is essentially

constant, implying a balance between the size

(ability fo accumulate stress) and the number of

earthquakes. This implies that faulting/fracturing

must extend to considerable depth in the South

Australian crust.

TAuih 2. Semmie Energy Release per 5 kim Depth Interval

for South Australian Earthquakes (1978-1983).

Depth Interval Total Energy

(km) (loules » 10!"

Q-5 4.6

5-10 3.2

1-15 2.f

15-20 6.5

W-25 0.9

Recurrence relations

A recurrence (frequency-magnitude) relation of

the form

logygNe =a-b M,

is commonly used in statistical studies of seismicity,

where N,. is the cumulative number of earthquakes

per year for magnitude greater than or equal to My.

(Evernden 1970; Bath 1981). The coefficient a is a

measure of the relative seismic activity of a region

and b is the ratio of the number of small to large

earthquakes. The value of b generally lies in the

range 0.5 to 1.5. The value of a is dependent on the

geographic region and the time scale used.

We have computed the recurrence relationships

for the entire state as well as for the Geosyncline

and Eyre Peninsula seismic zones. There are

statistically too few earthquakes in the South-East

tegion for a reliable recurrence to be determined.

Only data since 1969 were used in the study. The

analysis commenced at M; = 1.8 in magnitude

intervals of 0.3. The total number of earthquakes

was 1094, Data for the whole of the State are

strongly biased towards the Geosyncline Zone.

EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

152

141°

139°

[ 435° 137°

“ts

‘x FROME 308

EMBAYMENT |

GAWLER CRATON

< '

t :

I Mt 32"

31 , ot

Bihics Ur ~ =

PORTA 7 = wy

vt =

: n 2

. Hi o

oe) / a

\ vA F s |=

ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE .- ¢ uw

of 1 “ 4 z

es ' a ¢ |

a oe /

-- , |

‘ Y |

‘

ry ot |

q °

‘ on! 34

‘ | Sea, ;

7 RENMARK v

PORT rT |

LINCOLN |

i ‘

Z |

by PINNAROO

7 °|

MURRAY BASIN

KANGAROO |

ISLAND

| jae"

| a

| Lo

MOUNT GAMBIER

it] 50 100 (km)

L__

Fig. 6. Focal mechanisims for six South Australian earthquakes in relation to major tectonic features. All earthquakes

belong to the Geosynclinal Zone. The predominant direction of principal stress (shown by the arrows) is northeast-

southwest horizontal compression. The sense of motion is predominantly strike slip on steeply dipping faults.

§. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & RK. LE. PARHAM 15

Approximately 73% of cl earthquakes occurred

within this Zone. The results of least-squares. fitong

of the data are summarized in Table 3. A plot of

the recurrence relationship for (he entire State 1s

piven in Fig. 5, The regression fit of the 1969-19841

iat is:

logy. - 3,89 (+ 0.18) - 0,99 (+ 0,05) M,

Linear extrapolation of this relation implies an

average return period of 112 years for a magnitude

M, = 6 of greater earthquake. In view of the large

radits of perceptibility of an earthquake of this size

it may be safely assumed that a magnitude M) =

6 earthquake occurring anywhere in the State would

have been fell alter 1840. The historical record

reveals only three earthquakes of this size—

Beachport-Kingston (1897), Warooka (1902), and

Musgrave Ranges (1986),

SOUTH AUSTRALLA

SEISMIC ZONE

* 1969 —1984 Y

;

= + Historical date

~-- Extropalated

ea)

tod ‘a

fy.

“+

oo —— ee...

3 4 5 6

Magnitude M (SA)

Pi 3. Earthquake peeurrence relation for South Ausimiian

carthanakes, 9691984 bo. The solid line t5 the regression

In of the post-1959 dara, When extrapolated it yields

renin periods consisiene with the histerical data for

the larger magnitude events, which are also shown.

ces

Fuult planes solutions

Focal mechanisms of six earthquakes occurring

in the Adelaide Geosyneline seismic area have been

determined from the distribution of P wave first

motions (McCue & Sutton 1979; Singh 19853).

Fig, 6 shows the fault plane solutions (plotted in

lower hemisphere, equal area stereographic

projections) in relation lo the muin tectonic features,

The sense of motion is mainly strike-slip on steeply

dipping faults, The predominant stress appears to

be NE-SW horizontal compression, The actual

principal stress direction vould vary by up to 45"

if pre-existing faults act preferentially as failure

planes, which is quite possible for the strongly

folded Geosyneline,

The present day tectonics of the Australian

continent, in terms of seismicity Irends and plate

motions, have been discussed by Cleary & Simpson

(1971). They sugeested that Australia may be

considered as four adjacent crustal plates divided

by ancient fracture zones, one of which is the

fracture zone associated with the Adelaide

Geosyncline—Gulf Graben system, Stewart Mount

(1972) developed the model further, postulating a

regime of tension throughout the major seismic

zone of South Australia. Whilst tension is possible

Where a kink occurs in a strike-slip fracture zone,

the fault plane solutions show the mechanism to

be essentially compressional . Denham e7 a/. (1979,

1981) have reviewed the fault plane solutions for

Eastern and Western Australian earthquakes and

found horizontal compressive stress to also

dominate throughout the rest of the continent.

Conclusions

The South Australian Seismic Network has grown

steadily from its original three stations in 1963 to

twelve in 1979, The network provides moniloring

down to magnitude M,; ~ 2 for mast of the State.

The seismicity map compiled for post-1978 data

conlinns the thajor zones recognised in eartiet

studies, viz. Adelaide Geosyneline, Eyre Peninsula.

and South-East seismic zones, The greatest

concentralion occurs in the Flinders Ranges

adjacent to the northern end of Spencer Gull,

Revion Constants b Marnitude Range M,

koure State 3.89 + 0.18 0.99 + 0.05 2.4-5.1

Adelaide Geosyneline 3.41 + 0.06 0.92 + 0.02 1.8-3.1

Eyre Peninsula 2.19 + 0.06 0.69 + 0.02 18-42

(54 §. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGIL & R. T. PARELAM

Approximately 80% of earthquakes take place

within the upper crust al depths of less than 20 km.

Fault plane solutions for six earthquakes occurring

in the central portion of the Geosyneline indicate

strike-slip motion on steeply dipping faults. The

principal stress is north-east-south-west horizontal

compression,.

Recurrence relations have been established lor the

various zones. The b-value ranges fron 0.7 to LU,

The average return period for a M, = &

varthquake in South Australia is 112 years, though

three have occurred in the last 90 years.

Acknowledgments

The Australian Research Grants Seheme and the

Bureau of Mineral Resources have provided

financial suppert (owards the cost of establishing

and running the sersmograph nelwork., Messrs,

R. J. Nation and R. McDougall maintain the

stations and perform the tusk of routine earthquake

analysis.

References

Baru, M, (1981) Earthquake magniludesrecent research

und current trends, Barth Set Rev. 17, 315-398,

Biacktrt, Rev. J. (1907) “Barty History of South

Australia”. (Vardon & Sons, Adelaide).

Bort, B. A. (1957) The epicentre of the Adelaide

earthquake of 1954, March 1. 4 Proc. R, Soc. NSW

H), 39-43

(1959) Seismic travel Gimies in Australia, fbid. 91,

64-72.

BuLLen, K, E, & Bory, B A. (1956) The South

Australian earthquake of 1939, March 26. /bid. 90,

19-28,

BURKE GateNey, T. N. (1952) Seismicity of Australia,

Thid, 85, 47-52.

Cheary, JR. & Simpson DoW. (1971) Seismorectonics

of the Australian continent, Nature 2M), 299-24),

Drsiiam, D. (1979) Earthquakes map sheet, Garth

Science Atlas, 1:10 000 000 series (Bureau of Min.

Resources, Canberra),

«, ALEXANDER, L. G. & Wororsiert, G. (1979)

Stresses in the Australian crust; evidence from

earthquakes and in-situ stress measurements, RATR J.

Aust. Geol, Geophys, 4, 289-296,

- Weekes, J. & Kraystien, C, (1981) Earthquake

evidence for compressive siress in the southeass

Australian crust. 4 Geol, Soe. Aust. 28, 323-332.

Doowetr, G. F (1910) South Australian earthquakes,

Report of the Australasian Association for the

Advancement af Science 12, 416-423.

Doyiw, H. AL & UNverwoon R. (1965) Seismological

stations in Australia. duse J Setefice 28. 40-42.

EVERINGHAM, TF. B. & Sutron D. J. (1968)

Seismicity of the Australian continent. 4 Geol See.

Aus! #5, 295-312-

EVERSDEN, J, F. (1970) Studies of regional seismicity and

associaled problems, Bull, Seis. Sac. Am, 6, 393-446,

OREEMMALGH, S. A, & DENHAM D, (1986), The Beltana,

South Australia earthquake of December 29, 1983 and

aftershocks, 4usr, 4. Barth Seiences (in press).

PagHAM, R. T.& Sima. R. (1986). Earthquake

monitoring in South Australia, Avs), J Barth Sei, (in

press),

GuUreNBeRG, Bo& Rictybe, C. B (954) “Seismiely of

the Earth und Associuicd Phenomena” (Princeton

University Press, Princeton).

HowcHin, W. & Greoory, J. W. (1917) “The Geography

of South Australia” (Whitcomb & Tombs Lid.,

Melbourne).

Howenim, W (1929) “The Geology of South Australia’

(Gillingham & Co. Lid., Adelaide),

KoreGuanr, C. (1956) The Adelaide earthquake of Ist

Marel), 954. Trans. Ro Soe. 8S. AWS 59, 177-185,

Lepsos, B, (1970) “Geology of the Bellana 1:63,300 map

area” (South Australian Depariment of Mines,

Adelaide).

McCnre, Kk. &. & Sutton, Do. (1979) South Australian

Barthquakes during 1976and 1977. 2 Geol. Soe. Aust.

26, 231-236,

Mooi, RK, (1967) Earthquakes

Jectonaphysicy $, 93-35,

Richter, C. P. (M958) “Blementury Seismolony”

(Freeman, San Francisco).

Suackeiforn, Po & Supe Do t (L981) A) Pirate

interpretation of erustal structures in the Adelaide

Geosyneting in South Australia using quarry blasts, 7

Geol. Sov Aust. 28, 49)-S00.

Srewart, [. C. F (987i) Seismic aetivity in 6u

associated with the eastern margin of the Adelside

Geosymcline, 7bid. WR, 143-147,

(1984) Earthquake risk in South Australia using

arenes seismic moment. Aust. JZ Barth Sevences 31,

OLS.

& Moon ¢. J. (1972) Bartheuake mechanisms ia

South Australia io relation to plate leetomes. / Geol.

Soc. Aust. 19 41-52.

, Strang, A. & Suirow, D. J. 973) South

Austrahan seismicity 1967-1971. /bie, 19, dat-d52.

sunos, Do & Write R, E. (1968) The seismicity ol

South Australia. hid. 08, 25-32.

Surtox, DJ, Mecug, Kk. b & BliogtA, A, (977)

Seismicily of the Southeast of South Australia. /bid.

25, 357-364,

and fractures,

A NEW SPECIES OF TERRESTRIAL MICROHYLID FROG FROM PAPUA

NEW GUINEA

BY THOMAS C. BURTON & RUPERT STOCKS

Summary

Copiula pipiens sp. nov. occurs in the Wewak area, on the north coast of Papua new Guinea, 500

km north-west of the known range of its congeners. It is characterized by a relatively long snout,

relatively high-pitched call and possession of a ligamentous connexion between the ilium and

sacrum. Analysis of its relationships will follow description of other new species.

A NEW SPECIES OF TERRESTRIAL MICROHYLID PROG

FROM PAPUA NEW GUINEA

by THOMAS C, BURTON® & RUPERT STOCKS|

Summary

Burrow, TC, & Srocks, R. (1986) A new species of lerrestrial mictolylid frog from Papoa New Guinea.

Troms. R. Sue: S. Aust. V4), 155-158, 28 November, 1986.

Copinla piplens sp, nov, occurs in he Wewak trea, on the north coast of Papua New Guinea, 500 kin

north-west of (he kriown range of is congeners. 11 is characterized by a telatively Jone snuur, relatively

hinh-pitehed call ancl possession of a ligamentous conresion benween the ilium and sacrum, Analysis of

its relationships will follow descriplion Of other new speeies:

Kev Worns: frog. micrebylu, Copiuia, new species. morphology,

Introduction

the microhylid fauna of Papua New Guinea is

speciose and diverse, containing over 100 deseribed

species in 14 venera (Zweilel & Tyler 1982; Burton

1986). The taxonomic diversity is related to the

ecological diversity of the family: Menzies (1975)

and Tyler (1976) discuss species which are fossorial,

terrestrial, arboreal and aquatic.

Copiula Mchely was resurrected from the

synonymy of Cophixalus by Menzies & Tyler (1977)

fo accommodate three species: C._fistulans, C.

minor and C. oxyrhina, characterised by a thick

rostral dermal gland which gives a white projecting

lip to the snout; premaxillae which possess alary

processes which are relatively broad at the base; and

Terminal finger-pads which are smaller than the

terminal toe-pads. C. fistulans and C. minor are

described by Menzies & Tyler as lossorial whereas

C. oxprhina is terrestrial, i.e, hiding underground

by day, and moying about on the ground by night

(Menzies 1975).

In March 1983, one of us (R.S.) collected nine

specimens of a new Species of Copiula trom the

floor of a secondary growth forest at Wirui, neat

Wewak, slightly above sea level. The site is more

than 300 km north-west of the Known ranges af

previously described Copiu/a species,

Materials and Methods

The specimens reported here are deposited in

institutions abbreviated in tne text as follows:

Ametiean Museunt of Natural History (AMNH);

British Museum (Natural History) (BMNH); South

Australian Museum (SAM); University of Papua

New Guinea (UPNG).

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, 1.P:O.

Box 498, Adelaide, S- Aust. S001.

| PO, Bos 21, Taraka, Papua New Guinea,

The following Specimens of Cupinla were

examined for comparison with the new species; C.

Jistulans Menzies & Tyler AMNH &]}129, 8TI30;

SAM R5852, RS879, R6382-3, R9443-9448,

R14239-14250, R14497 (holotype); C. miner Menzies

& Tyler AMNH 56908 (juy.), 56939-40, 56958,

$6960, 56971-2, 36986, 56997-8, 57046-7,

57050-5354; SAM R15245 (paratype); C axyvrhing

Boulenger BMNH 1947.2.11.99, 1947.2.12.4

(syntypes); AMNH 59894-59896: UPNG 1371,

2612, 4311, 5204, 3205.

Methods of measurement lollow Tyler & Menzies

(971) except that the measurement of the length

of the hind leg follows Zweite! (1972). Abbre-

vistions: S-V, snout-vent length; HW, head width;

HL, head length; TL, tibia Jength; 6, eye length;

E-N, distance between anterior edge af eye opening

and centre of external naris; IN, internarial distance;

T, diameter of tympanum; SN, snout length-

distance between centre of external naris and tip

of snout. Tape recordings of male calls were made

in the field using a Sony TC-D5 tape reearder with

a Sony BHF 60 cassetle, and analysed subsequently

with a Kay Digital Sona-graph Madel 7800. Field

temperatures were taken with a tnercury total

immersion thermometer. Drawings were made with

the aid of a Wild M5 stereo microscope with a

vamera lucida attachment. The specimen SAM

R29782 was cleared and double-stained for skeletal

examination by the alcian blue-afizarin red

technique of Dingerkus & Ubler (1977),

Copiula pipiens sp, nov.

FIGS 1-3

Holotvpe: SAM R29779, an adult male collected

at Wirui, 1 kim fram Wewak (3°35'S,143° 35°F) by

R. Stocks on 29.11.1983.

Definition: Small terrestrial species (males 23.0-24.7

mm: female 27.8 am S-V) characterized by a high-

piched call (dominant frequency 4-5 kHe),

possession of a ligamentous altachmenr berween

156 CC. BURTON & R, STOCKS

Vig. 1A, dorsal and B, literal views of the head of the holotype of Copiula pipiens ap. noy,

lium and sacrum, and a relatively long, pointed

snout.

Description of holotype: Head almost triangular

because of protruding snout (Fig 1); longer than

broad (HL/HW 1,18); head width less than one-

third snout to vent length (HW/S-V 0.31); snout

long, culminating in rounded white tip from dorsal

aspect; length of snoul much greater than length

of eye (SN/E 1,50); distance between eye and naris

inuch less than internarial distance (E-N/IN 0.67):

nares lateral; eye small; interorbital distance

equivalent to more than twice length of eyelid;

canthus rostralis well defined and strotyly curved

When seen from above; loreal region concave;

tympanum small and indistinet (Pig, 1);

prepharyngeal ridge single and denticulate; tongue

moderately browd, more that '4 free posteriorly,

Vocal sac single, medial entry via gaping holes.

Hind limbs moderately long (TL/S-V 0.45),

Fingers and toes bearing small terminal dises with

marginal grooves (Pig, 2); toe dises larger than

finger discs. Fingers in order of length 3>4>2>1,

toes 4>3>5>2>1 ; subarticular tubercles poorly

or uot developed on digits: inner metatarsal tubercle

small, oval; outer metatarsal tubercle absent; fingers

and toes Unwebbed (Fig. 2).

Dorsal and ventral skin smooth; no supratym-

panic fold,

In preservative dorsal surface mid-brown, darker

medially than laterally, uniformly spotted darker

brown; tip of snout unpigmented; faint raised

midvertebral line from snout to vent; loreal region

dark brown with cream blotches; broad, irregular

dark brown postocular stripe extends from orbit to

beyond scapular region; Tanks light brown mottled

wilh dark brown blotches; anterior and posterior

surfaces of legs dark brown spotted lighter;

undersurface cream, faintly mottled with brown

pigment in submandibular region and thigh,

pigment becoming more intense towards knee.

In lite, ground colour of dorsum pale orange-

pink; ventral surfaces creamy-white with brown

markings; vent region suffused by orange-pink,

Ditnensions of holotype: SN 23.5 mm; HW 7.3 mm:

HL 8.6mm; TL 10.5 mm; E 2.3 mm; B-N 1.6 mm;

IN 2.4 mm; T 1.3 mm; SN 3.4 mm,

Etymology: The specific name refers 1o the high-

pitched call of the males of this species.

QAP I

— f] LZ

O, ]

hip. 2. A, palinar surface of lett hand and B, plantar

surface of left foot of the holotype ot Capiule pipiens

sp. no\

NEW SPECIES OF NEW GUINEA MICROHYLID 157

Variation

There are eight paratypes: AMNH 123698 (adult

ot), SAM R29780-2 (3 adult oo) (SAM R29782

cleared and stained), UPNG 7205-6 (adult oo)

7207 (gravid 9), 7208 (adult o”), All specimens

were collected with the holotype. Much of the skin

of the trunks and limbs of four specimens (UPNG

7205, 7207, SAM R29781-2) had been removed for

chemical analysis elsewhere before the specimens

became available for measurement and close

examination,

The adult males measure 23.0-24.7 mm S-V, and

the single female 27.8 mm S-V. The mean diameter

of 2 unpigmented mature ova in the body cavity

is 2.3 mm. Hind limbs are moderately long,

compared with those of congeners (TL/S-V

0.44-0.49). HL/HW varies from 1.02-1.18 (n=5).

SN/E varies from 1.45-1.62. E-N/IN_ ranges

0.67-0.77.

In the five intact specimens there was variation

in the intensity of mottling of the gular region,

between very little (SAM R29780) and strongly

mottled (SAM R29779). Similarly, the ground

colour of the mid-dorsum varied from mid-brown

(SAM. R29779) to deep purplish-brown (UPNG

7206), and the lateral stripe from dark brown (SAM

R29779) to almost black (SAM R29780).

As the single female had been skinned prior to

examination, no comparison of the external

morphology of the sexes could be made.

6 - pe

Advertisement call

The call is a rapid series of high-pitched cheeps,

uttered at a rate of approximately 10 notes/sec for

a period of up to 20 sec. Most of the acoustic energy

is focussed between 4 and 5 kHz (Fig. 3) at 25°C,

the attack of each pulse is very sharp, and there is

frequency modulation within each pulse. The pulses

are somewhat irregular in interval.

Calling behaviour: Calls were uttered on the surface

of the forest floor, sometimes from under leaves and

other forest debris. Calling animals were as little

as 1 m apart, and were difficult to distinguish,

because when one individual commenced calling,

many (if not all) of the other males in the vicinity

joined in, and they all stopped calling at about the

same time, so that the collector had little time to

locate one individual. There was a gap between

successive such “choruses” of a few to many

minutes.

Habitat and distribution

The type locality at Wirui is open secondary

woodland with large trees and a few shrubs on level

ground. It is traversed by a well-worn path, and

includes a permanent freshwater pond. C. pipiens

was also heard calling, and one was seen, beside

a dirt road between Most and Souri, just off the

main road between Wewak and Passam, six km

south of Wewak (altitude 400 m). This location is

0.2 0.4

0.8

0.6 1.0

sec

Fig. 3. Sonagram of part of call of Copiula pipiens sp. nov. recorded at Wirui, 19.05 hr, 29 March 1983, air temperature

35°C. Traces between 2 and 3 kHz are regarded as artefacts, possibly the result of overload during recording. Filter

300 kHz.

(58 1,0) KRURTON & RB. STOCKS

aguily ona steep hillside jn thick secondary growrh

With heavy ground cover trom fallen branches, ferns

and other plants,

The species is known only from the Wewak

district,

Comparison with other species

(a) Externd! morphology: The smoathiv

streamlined bady shape, the relatively leatureless

palmar and plantar copolagy, the slightly expanded

and grooved dizital discs, broader on the toes than

on the fingers, and the prominent, cranstucent,

White-lipped snaur are typical of Capii/e, and, in

general appearance, € pipiens is diffieul ta

distinguish from its congeners, However, it may be

minimum recorded S-V length foran adwit male C

Jistulans is 284 mm (Menzies & ler, 1977),

compared with the maximum length of male C

pipiens, SV 247 nim, The female @ pipiens, SV

27,8 mam lies below the minimum recorded for

aduli Jemale C fistlans, SV 31 mn,

Copixla minor is comparable (0 C. pipieny in size:

males 5-V [8.5-24.5 (nin (n = 11), fermales 21.8-23:8

minimum TL/S-V 0.44; the snout of G punar is

less elongated (maximum SNvE 1.36, el. & pipiens

minimum SN/E 1.45); and the nares are relatively

pipiens maximum E-N/IN 0,72),

Copiula oxyrhing isa variable species in peed of

revision (Burton. ia prep,), and no external character

in C. exyrhina js sufficiently consistent to allow

confident generalizations. However, che dursa of

specimens designated C. axyrhina are less spoued

than those of C. pipiens, and the postacular stripe

is Usually shorter and narrower,

Uescribed species ji direel hgamenrous ataclment

between the (iui and sacrum, fn the other species

the ilia of the Iwe sides are conuceted by a

supertivial ligament which overlies the dorsal

musculalure, and there js oo direct attachment

belween rhe illum and sa¢rum.,

(ce) Foice: The call of CG pipigas is much highet

pitched than ils congeners. The dominant

are approximately | KHz, and that of C. wxyrhina

is approximately 2 kHz (Menzies & Tyler, 1977). By

comparison, the dominant frequency of C pipiens

al upproxinmately ihe.xame temperature is 4-5 kHz.

Calling behaviour

The pattern of calling jn groups, with anmany

individuals joimng in, and then all calls ceasing

abruptly for some minutes isa form of behaviour

we have observed in other microhylid species:

Barvgeays flavigularis, Barygenys sp. fov.,

type), Copinla fistulaus, Hvlaphorbus rufescens,

Muntophryne lateralis, Oreaphryne hiroi,

Phrynomantis sticlogaster and NXenobarrachus

Suberaceus,

Acknowledgements

We wre grateful to Stephen Manboi and his

friends from Wirui who assisted in the collection

of the type series. Specimens were provided by the

following instilulions: Anveriean Museanm of

Natural History (R. G. Zweilel); British Musetuit

(Natural History) (B, Clark); South Australian

Museum (M, J. Tyler), Universily of Papua New

Gunier Gl Pernetla), Ro G. Zweilel actively

encouraged the project, and provided taps and

additional data to support the specimens he sent.

M.. J. Tyler prepared (he sonawram und critically

read (he manuscript and M. Davies supervised the

preparation of the drawings, M, J. Lirtejotn and

P Harrison assisted in the interpretation of the

sonagram, The referees made useful and

cons(ruchve comments for which we are gratefil,

This Work With underluken whilsc TC.B. was a

Visiting Research Fellow in the Department of

Zoology, Universily of Adelaide.

References

Biikvon VC) (RGF A reassessment of [he Papuan

subfaniily Asterophryinde (Anura: Mienthylidae). ee.

S Aust Was, (i press).

Bisiekus, G. & Wai ek, LD: (1977) Linayme clearing

of weian blue stajned whole small vertebrates fer

demongrration of carfilage, Siain Technology 52,

229,242.

Minvies J. 1, (975) Handbook af Common New

Guinea Frogs, Wau Eeolopy Tnstinute, Handbook No.

1, Wan,

Mensibs J. be de Tai ROM. (1977) The sysrenianies ane

adapmanors Ol soine Papuan microhylid frees which live

underbraiind, .. Aoal. 183, 431-464.

TYirR M.1L 976) Drogs. tCotlins, Sydney, London),

& Mbrntits 1. 7, (971) A new &pevics of

microliyid frag of (ie genus Spferuphrine (rom Mile

Bay, Papua. THiris. Ro Sue: S. Anan 95, 79-83.

AWHFET, R. && (1972) Resulrs ef the Archbold

Eepedinaris 97, A revision of rte (raps of the subfanvily

Astcnophryinae family Mikrohylidae, Aull ne Adis

Natu, tsi taR, 44\-s4a.

~& Tyite, Mo (1082) Ainphibia of New Guineu,

In J. A, Giressint (Add) “Biogeography and Eeology of

New Ouinea" Movauvriphive Brolagicae 42, TSO-80f,

IW. Junk, The Hieue Boston, Lencon),

THE EFFECTS OF COOLING WATER DISCHARGE ON THE

INTERTIDAL FAUNA IN THE PORT RIVER ESTUARY, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY I. M. THOMAS, R. C. AINSLIE, D. A. JOHNSTON, E. W. OFFLER & P. A. ZED

Summary

The fauna of the intertidal mudflats of the Port River estuary has been monitored between 1972 and

1985. As a consequence of the increase in volume and temperature of warm water discharge from

the Torrens Island Power Station, changes have occurred in the intertidal communities. Near the

warm water discharge populations of several bivalve mollusc and worm species have been reduced

or eliminated and previously rare or absent worm species have become abundant.

THE EFFECTS OF COOLING WATER DISCHARGE ON THE INTERTIDAL FAUNA

IN THE PORT RIVER ESTUARY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by L. M. THOMAS*, R. C. AINSLIET, DD A. JOHNSTON}, E, W, OFrLeryt & P. A. ZED]

Sunimary

Thomas, 1 M., Aussiir, RoC), Jorssion, D. A. OFFER, E,W. & Zeb, PA, (1986) Phe effects of cooling

water discharge of the intertidal fauna in the Port River Estuary, South Australia. Trvas. RL Sae. §.

Aust. (10(4), 159-172, 28 November, LOK6.

The fauna of the intertidal mudflats of the Port River estuary has been monitored between 1972 ang

1985, Asa consequence of the increase fy volume and femperarure of warn water discharge from the Jurrens

Island Power Stalion, changes bave ovcurred jn Che intertidal communities. Near the warm Water discharge

populations of several bivalve molluse and Worm species have been reduced or climinated and previously

rdre Or absent Worm species have became abundant.

Changes in numbers and variety of species have been revorded throughout Angas Inlet and (hese changes.

have encroached some way into the adjoining southerp reales oF Barker Inlet and che eastern end of North

Arm.

Introduction

Various interudal and shallow littoral environ-

ments cam be recognised in the South Australian

Gulfs. These are based on coastal topagraphy and

associated variations in energy of the wave action

(Womersley & Thomas 1976), One environment,

typical of (he low wave energy regions of the Gulf

St Vincent, north of Port Adelaide, is the extensive

muddy intertidal flats bucked by mangrove wood-

land and samphire.

Studies have been made on the Subndal fauna of

such coastlines in upper Spencer Gulf (Shepherd

1983; Ward & Young 1982, 1983), however except

for listings of conspicuous species (Womersley &

Edmonds 1958; Butler er a/.') Butler et al. 1977)

no detailed information has been available on the

fauna of the muddy intertidal shores of Gull Src

Vincent.

A number of overseas reviews have documented

the effects of warm water discharges [rom power

stations on sublittoral benthic fauna (Courant &

Talmage 1975, Talmage & Coutant 1980; Craven ef

al. 1983; Langlord 1983). Effects yary from site to

sile as a function of the elimatic, hydrological and

biological features of the sites (Crema & Pagliai

1980). Generally ereatest effects on subtidal fauna

are observed very near the oultalls and particularly

during the hotiest times of the year (Langlord 1983),

* (Deceased) South Ausivalian Museum. North Terrace,

Adelaide, S. Aust, SUOD.

| Elcetrieity Trust of South Australia, PO Bon 6,

Eastwood S. Aust, S063

| Deparinvernt of Education, South Australia.

‘Rotter, AL 4, Depers, A. M., MeKillup, $ Co &

Thonias, D. P (1975) The Conservation of Margrave

Swamps ijn South Austraha. Reporte to the Nafire

Conservation Society of South Australia (Unpublished)

The effects include a significant reduction in

numbers of species within the influence of the warm

water plume (Wariner & Brehmer 1966; Thorhaug

eral. 1978) with, in some cases, the establishment

of dense populations of a few thermally tolerant

species (Bamber & Spencer 1984), There is a lack

of similar information of the influence of warm

water outfalls on intertidal mudflat fauna

(GESAMP 1984).

This paper deseribes a monitoring programme

conducted between 1972 and 1945 to establish long

rerm patterns of faunal distribution of the intertidal

mudflats of the Port River estuary. Ir describes

changes associated with changing water tempera-

tures resulling trom (he incremental development

of the caaling water (CW) system of Torrens Island

Power Stauion.

Materials and Methods

The stud) area

The Port River estuary is aw sheltered waler

complex of mudflars, mangroves and samphire

marshes dissected by narrow channels with only a

small and intermittent inflow of fresh water (Fig. 1).

Torrens [sland Power Station commenced operating

in 1967. If takes in cooling water fram the channel

floor near the Port River, North Arm junction and

discharges warm waler al the surface in western

Angas Inlet.

Average ambient summer (intake) temperature in

the estuary is about 25°C (Roberison 1971;

Neverauskas & Burler 1982). By 1972 Torrens Island

Power Station, A Section, was discharging 1,9 % 10°

m'vday of sea water at €&-7°C above intake

temiperature, Since then there have been increases

in the volume of warm water discharged as a [further

four B Seetion units have became Gperational.

160 I. M. THOMAS ET AL.

138 E

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

AQUATIC RESERVE

TO GULF

ST VINCENT

TO GULF

T VINCENT

SOUTHERN

OCEAN

LeFEVRE TORRENS BARKER

PENINSULA ISLAND INLET

POWER

STATION

=2T - TRANSECT : G) GARDEN

(®) - No. oF sites (3) ISLAND

—t EASTEAN

PASSAGE

Fig. 1. Transect locations in the Port Adelaide estuary.

THERMAL BFRECTS ON INTERRIIDAL FAUNA 16)

Presenily B Section discharges an additional

3.0..108 m/day of warmed warer 10 Angas Lnlet

at 9-10°C above ambient temperature,

Water fenmperalure

A hall hourly reeord of intake temperatures at

the junction of the North Arm and the Port River

was thaintalned and a similar record was niade of

warmed effluent water from the power slation,

From 1979 a record of temperacures at half hourly

intervals was made with a thermistor suspended

from a buy 30¢m below the surface in Angas. Inlet

(Fig. 1). A conhnuous record was also made of

shade air temperatures at Torrens Island. Average

Weekly temperatures were abstracted from these

records,

A senes of temperature surveys was carried out

during hot summer weather in March 1972,

February 1979 and January 1982 to define

distribution of Warimed Water through the estuary

for both dodge (Bye 1976) and spring tides, Each

survey involved from three to five circumnavigations

of ‘Torrens Island with surface temperatures

recorded at 28 stations spaced throughout the

esiuary. By recording several times a day at each

lovation it was possible to graph the results with

time and tide to Obtain a representation of simul-

laneous temperatures throughout the estuary.

On 4.0.1984 a digital image of the distribution

of the warm surface water from the Torrens [stand

Power Station was obtained at 9.00 a.m. on a falling

tide, ‘The image was produced by Hunting scanning

equipment! operated (rom a Lear Jet at an altilude

of 3 km.

Intertidal fauna

Sampling methods were based on those of Zed*,

so that data comparable to this first study of the

intertidal fauna in this region could be obtaitied.

This involved sampling ona series of transects

established on the main branches of the estuary at

varying distances from the warm water discharge

of the power station In 1972 (Zed*) and 1977 five

Lransects Were examined. Subsequently five further

transects were established (Pig. 1). Each transect

extended avross the intertidal ojudflat from 10 m

seaward af the mangrove fringe to the low water

mark (LWM). On each transect stations were

established at 10m intervals numbered trom the

mangrove fringe (e.g. for transect 1, stations 1.1, 1.2,

1.3.,,. ele), Number of stations per transect

depended on the width of the intertidal mud fat at

> Zed. PA, (1972) The Effect of Warn Water from che

‘torens Island Power Station on the Marine Fauna of

Angas lilet. BSv. (Fons) Thesis, Zoology Department.

University of Adelaide, (Unpublished).

low fide, ranging from 4 on transects 3 and 7? ta 9

on transect 8.

At each Station, on each sampling aveasion, four

samples of surface area 0.03 m2, depth 10 em, were

collecied on a line perpendicular to the transect,

These samples were combined. All animals retained

on 1mm mesh sieves were Counted and sorted, Far

all bur the first two surveys (1972 and 1977) all

specimens were preserved, polychaeies in 10%

formalin and orher animals in glyeerolwater:

ethanol (5:35:70) viv),

For each survey, using averaged station data, the

Bray-Curtis measure was used to produce

similarity matrix for the transect faunas, afier root-

rool transformation of the data (Swarty 1978; Meld

et al. 1982).

Sediments

In March 1982 sediment samples were collected

in the same manner as thre intertidal Fauna samples

from a total of 49 stations for all transeuts (Fig. 1)

and passed through a series oF calibrated sieves to

determine weights, expressed as a percentage of total

sample weight of yarious sediment grades, The

sediment grades corresponded te Wentworth size

classes (Folk 1968) with the modification that the

largest grade discriminated was course sand

(including all material coarser than 1.25) and the

finest sediment grade discriminated was sill (3.75)

Graphic Means (Mz, Folk 196%) were dererniined

for the samples. The Bray-Curtis dissimilarity

measure (Swartz 1978; Field e? af 1982) was used

to classify the samples into groups accanling to

similarities based on the perventage contribution

particular sedimen| grades make to the rotal weight

of the various samples (Miedecke & Stephenson

1977).

Results

Temperature

Temperature records for summer seasons for

1972, 1977, 1983 and 1985 are given on Fig. 2.

Allowing for differences in weather belweert years

(aic temperature, Fie. 2) similar ranges af summer

ambient water temperatures have been observed for

the years 1972, 1977-83 and 1985, Torrens Island

B Section discharges waler at a higher temperature

than A Section, therefore peak suouner discharge

temperatures since 1978 are higher than those of

1972 and 1977 when only A Section was discharging

(Fig. 2).

Temperatures recorded at the Angas Inlet buoy

since 1979 tend to follow discharge teniperdtures,

beirig about 2-4°C lower, due to mixing with cooler

tidal waler. Very neac the discharge lo Angas Intel

the maximum temperature increase above ambieurl

water temperature is determined by a juinber of

162 I. M. THOMAS ET AL.

+---*-" DISCHARGE TEMP

ANGAS INLET TEMP

-----CW INTAKE TEMP

AIR TEMP

gg §

DEGRELS ©”

—— os

JANUARY 12 — JANUARY 25

\382

c°

rr)

tu 20)

G15

2 40

cS]

Jan Feb Mar dan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar dan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar

1972 1977 1978 1979 1960 1981 1982 19B3 1985

Fig. 2. Weekly average temperature data for ambient, Angas Inlet, and cooling water (CW) outfalls, for January-March

of 1972, 1977-1983, and 1985. Inset: Typical short term summer extremes (January 1982). Note: 1972 plots show

“A” stauion discharge temperatures, 1977-1985 shows “B” station discharge temperatures.

Date Ambient(Port River)°C Max AirTemp°C Symbol

Av, 19429 - 3-72 21:5 220 aioe

pos

7752-79 24.4 39:3 —

22 -2-79 26-3 39:0

20-14-82 39.0

a4:0

C ABOVE AMBIENT

1 2

Angas Inlet Barker Inlet

Outfall Volume 1972- 19

nyez 3

(million M°/day) 1979+ 29

y-V

Transect¥ — 1982- 3.9

North*Arm >

DISTANCE FROM OUTFALL (Km)

Fig. 3, Gradients of above-ambient temperatures from the CW outfalls to more remote regions of the Port River

“estuary” for selected days in 1972, 1979 and 1982.

factors such as load on the power station units and wider area (Fig. 3), Further, during dodge tides

local meteorological conditions (wind speed and — when there is little tidal dilution of the discharge

direction), With progressive increase in the volume — water, warm water tends to bank up through Angas

of warm water discharged to Angas Inlet, above- Inlet. Temperatures of up to 40°C have been

ambient water temperatures are measured over a recorded in Angas Inlet with the power station

THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA 163

discharging from all units in hot weather on days

of little tidal movement (Fig. 2 inset). The digital

unage of the warm surface water distribunon in

February 1984 (Fig. 4) shows the major influence

of the discharge extending throughout Angas Inlet

to southern Barker Inlet and eastern North Arm,

There ls some recirculation of warmed surface water

around Garden Island to the Port River and also

incursion to Lhe southern region of Barker Inlet (see

also Fig. 3, 1982 spring tide). This influence is not

observed at the deeper power station intakes,

Intertidal fauna

A total of 120 species were recorded. Polychaetes

were the most numerous (40 species), including

several new records for southern Australia, followed

by crustaceans (37), gastropod molluscs (19), bivalve

molluses (13), and 11 species from various other taxa

(Appendix 1).

Fig. § shows (he dendrograms of classification

of transects by faunal homogencity for 1972, 1977

and the summer surveys of 1981, 1982, 1983 and

1985, Species characteristic of the identified groups

Fig. A. Theetial jrnaye al surface water distribution on

a falling cide in the Part River estuary, February 1984

tOWin 24.406, CWoat 33.4°C. Anvas Tiler 286°C).

the pale area in Angas Inlet, ground Garden Islancl,

and railing into North Arm shows the distributlon of

Ihe Warm surice plume,

of faunas are shown in Fig, 5, with their percentage

contribution to the total population sampled on the

transects of the group.

There have been some dilfieulties in proceeding

with the Bray-Curtis analysis, In retrospect the

decision to continue the sampling design adopted

by Zed* caused some problems in analysing the

data, as numbers of stations were not consistent

between transects. However, as the faunal

homogeneity analysis depends on the “percent each

species contributes to the total number of

individuals collected", rather than absolute numbers

(Swartz 1978), we contend that this approach fairly

describes the significun! changes in faunal patterns

in the estuary. Consistent patterns within the long

term data support this contention, For the !972 and

1977 surveys, identifications of some polychaete

species were uncertain and, with the exception of

the cirratulid Cirriformia punctata, and the large

tube dwelling species Chaelopterus variopedatus

and Diopatra dentata, specimens. were listed as

“polychaete sp 1", “polychaete sp 2”, cte. Because

of the taxonomic uncertainties and the absence of

preserved specimens from these two surveys, these

unidentified polychaetes were lumped rogether for

the Bray-Curtis analysis. Reference to the original

data (Zed?) and to subsequent work, suggests

thal lransects most remote from the outfall

{transects 4 and-&) do not share the same unidenti-

fied polychaetes as the transects closer to the outfall

(namely transects 1, 2 and 3). Grouping of transects

on the dezidrograms based on lumped polychaetes

should therefore give a conservative picture of

faunal homogeneity relationships, with differences

between transects under, rather than over-

emphasised.

The 1972 dendrogram showed three main groups

of transects with respect to their faunal homo-

geneity (Fig. 5). The fauna of transeet | directly

opposite the thermal outfall was dominated by C

puaciala which comprised 86% of all organisms

found on this transect (Fig. 5a). A few “other

polychaetes” and low numbers of one species of

bivalve, Tellina deltoidalis were also: tound on this

transect. On transects Further from the outfall (2

and 3) low numbers of CG purtctata were found with

the community dominated by “other polychaetes”,

T. deltoidalis (25%), and the gastropod Nassurius

hurchardi (Fig. Sa). Although transect ! and

transects 2 and 3 share some species (namely C

punctata and T. delloidalis) the difference in relative

contributions which these species make to ihe

communities of each transect results in transect |

clearly separating from transecis 2 and 3 on the

dendrogram. No C purtclata were found io the

communities most remote from the qutfall

(transects 4 and 8, Fig. Ll), Although “other paly

I. M. THOMAS ET AL,

164

1 (a)1972

fs)

E45

Qa Oo

TRANSECT> 1 2 3°44 «8B

vA ve vA

C. punctata 86 11-6

D dentata 2 12 4

= ‘polychaetes 11 58 77

X, inconstans 77

|, Crebrelamellatus 2-2

8 T. deltoidalis 2 25 66

3 L. recta 22

N. burchardi 34

(c)FEBRUARY 1981

in 1

az ‘5

TRANSECT > 1 2

3 4 6 5 8 7 1

% th

C.punctata 17 86

2 Pseudopolydora sp 5

= N. grubei australis 5 44

N. australiensis 1

X. inconstans 51# av

|. crebrelameliatus 21 3

8 T. deltoidalis 2

2K scalarina&K peroni 1

= .

Sfragilis 17-5 41

N. pauperata 29

Sjuvenile

specimens

1 (b)1977

DISSIMILARITY INDEX

a th %

C. punctata 98 13

be D. dentata 3-8 1

‘polychaetes 1-5 103 246

X, inconstans 42

|, Crebrelamellatus 27-8

3 —_—‘T. deltoidalis 69 1

3 B paivae 28

N. burchardi 29

(d)MARCH 1982

° 0

14 3 2 6 5,8 7 0 9

— — —_—————”

% ts vA

C, punctata 83

Pseudopolydora snp 96

at grubei australis 5

oN. australiensis 5:3

S. cylindriter 56

N. vaalii 2:7

X inconstans 15 50

|.crebrelamellatus 6-7 11-2

$ ;

s T. deltoidalis 2 3

o K. i i

= peron 15

N. pauperata 1

S,_ fragilis 1

A albocincta 8-2

THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA

wos (e)MARCH 1983 od (QMARCH 1985

z a

= 2

= E

a ‘5 5

= =

" a

2) wo

a 0 BD oO

TRANSECTe. 1 2 4 3 7 6 5 8B 7 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 § 10

—S—S——_—_ Ss Ls

% % % % h %

C. punctata 75 13 C, punctata 5:5 74:2

Pseudopolydora sp 97 2 Pseudopolydora sn 6 2

N. grubei sustralis 23 a8 2 Ngrubei australis \ 305

o N. australiensis 8 N. australiensis 72

8 S. cylindriter 27 aS evlindriter 1-4 29-2

N. vaalii 3 E N. vaalil 2

B. lepte 3 2 S. gracilis 32

X. inconstans 6:2 6-8 28 C capitata 22

8 |. crebrelameliatus 5:9 9 Terebellinae 14

£ T. deltoidalis 6 X.inconstans 18 3-5 30:4

K. peroni |. crebrelamellatus 74 o4

8 A. albocincta 75 $$ — T, deltoidalis 6-7

a =

z 3 S. fragilis

“ =

a N. trigonella 4

N. burchardi 16

A. albocincta 36

165

lAnemone |

Fig. 5. Dendrograms of transect faunal homogeneity, for surveys ol 1972, 1977 and the summers of 1982-83 and

1985. The figure also lists all species which contribute >1% to total number of individuals sampled on each o}

the subjectively indentified groups of transects for each survey.

chaetes” contributed a small percentage to the

communities of these transects, their faunas were

primarily distinguished by the large numerical

contribution of Xenosirvbus inconstans (77%) and

other bivalve molluses (Fig.. Sa).

In 1977, with an additional 1x10 m4/d of

warmed water discharging to Angas Inlet, faunas

of both transects | and 2 were characterised by the

very large numbers of C. punctata previously found

only on transect 1, These two transects therefore

formed a distinct group on the 1977 dendrogram.

(Fig, 5b), Low numbers of C. punctata were present

on transect 3 (where they had already been recorded

in 1972) but also on transect 4 (where they were not

recorded in 1972). These two transects (3 and 4)

formed the second, intermediate group on the

dendrogram, their faunas also being characterised

by the bivalve 7e//ina deltoidalis and other shared

polychaetes (Fig. 5b). The faunas of transect 8 and

the new Lransect 6 were both distinguished by the

varied bivalve and polychaete species which had

characterised transect 8 in 1972 (Fig. 5b).

The summer of 1980-81 was the first full summer

with the addition of a further unit (0.5 « 10° m3/d)

discharging to Angas Inlet. From 1980 all

polychaetes were identified and numbers of every

species were considered in the Bray-Curtis analysis.

Faunas of transects | and 4 all grouped together

on the dendrogram (Fig. 5c). A major contributor

to the grouping of transects 1 to 4 was, again, C.

166 1, M. THOMAS ET dal.

punctala, comprising 63% of the total number of

polychactes found on this group OF transects. Two

other polychaete species, namely the orbiniid

Naineris grubei australis and the spionid

Pseudopolydora sp. were identified in the taunas

of this group, each contributing about 20% ro the

total number of palychaetes. 11 is possible that these

Iwo species are the unidentified polychaetes found

in association With Jarge C) punciata numbers in

the previous surveys. Unexpectedly, another

voniributor to the grouping of the faunas of

transects | to 4 was the mud mussel Xenus/robus

inconsians which occurred in each of these

transects, comprising $1% of all organisms of this

group, This mussel had been dominant in North

Arm and Barker Inlet, bul had not been common

in Angas Inlet before 1980-81. All specimens were

juvenile and subsequent surveys revealed that the

species did not persist in the Infet. A settlement of

another molluse the gastropod Salinatur Jragilis

alsa contributed to the faunal homogeneity of

transects L to 4, and to the high molluse to

polychaete ratio found for these Angas Inlet

transects Int this Survey compared to all other surveys

reported here In 198) C. punctata was found lor

the first time in large numbers on transect 6, It was

also abundant on the new transect 5 in southern

Barker Inlet (Pig, 1), The faunas of these twa

transects formed the intermediate group on the

dendrogram (Fig. 5¢), alsa characterised by a second

worm species, N, grubed australis, and a bivalve

mollusc, /rus crebrelamellauss.

Faunas of transects 7 ro 10, forming the third

group on the dendrogram, were again characterised

by the varied bivalve molluse populations. On this

group of transects the polychaete to molluse ratio

was low, The most abundant worm, Nepiips

australiensis, comprised only 1% of the total

number of organisms (Fig. Sc). Low numbers of

ather worm species including Seoloples evilndrifar

and Neanthes vaalii were also identifled in the

faunas of this proup af transects.

Following the 1981-82 summer, the first full

summer With all four units of B Section operating

(Fig. 3), a Further change was noted it the faunal

distribution around the esttiary, Again the faunas

of transects 1-4 grouped on the dendrogram

(Fig. 5d). Llowever the previously abundant

C. purctata had virtually disappeared from the

faunas of these transects and the sptonid Pseudo

polydera sp, which had been identilied in low

numbers in the 198] survey, dominated the faunas

of this group of transects, comprising 86% of all

the predominant organism in the faunas of transects

Sand 6, which again formed an intermediate group

on the dendrogram (Fig. Sd). The group of faunas

OF transects 7 to 10 continued to be charactertwed

by the bivalve and worm species previously

identified [rom areas more remote from the oul falls

(Fig, 5d),

Although the volumes and temperatures of the

thermal discharge underwent no further increase

following the 1982 summer, surveys were continued

to determine whether the 1982 dendrogram

represented a stable biological state, The 1983

dendrogram closely resembled that for the previous

survey With continued spionid dominance of the

Angits Inlet transects, and transects 7, 9 and 10

having faunas with large bivalve populations and

numbers of those worms which had previously been

identified as characteristic of regions remote from

the outfall (Fig. Sc), The mast notable change in

the dendrograni was the tendency for the fauna of

transect § to group more closely with those of the

cirratulid dominated faunas of transeets 5 and 6,

rather than with those of transects 7, 9 and 10. This

was due to a combinition of factors including an

increase in numbers of C. punctata on transect 8,

and an increase in numbers of 1. crebreluméelatus

and_¥, jnconstans on transects 5 and 6, Two years

later, in Marclt 1985 the rranseer faunas demon-

strated virtually the same homogencity relationship

(Fig, 51), The dominant species in each of the major

groups of transects remained the same (Fig. Sf)

although on transects in Angas tnlet (1-4) some

worm Species (Capitella capitata, Svllis gracilis and

C, punctata) Were present im greater numbers than

in T9R3,

For the samples trom 198) until 1985, when all

species were identified, it was possible to record total

species number at each iransect. The mean number

of species per square metre for the various groups

ACI

Mac's)

@ 7.ne8Hn

’

Mar, 83

7,410

Mar 'n2

Te,

3048

trangec| group

Fig. 6. Relationship bemween number of species/m* and

transect wtoup for the surveys of 1981 83 and 1985, AU

species were identified ut these surveys

THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA lf?

INDEX

DISSIMILARITY

44°45 12 24 Bd SH

87 13 22 92 & 62 63 23 25 27 45 42 43 44 89 52 55 336

7Ao9S G4 26 82 85 B6 73 93 101 102 4 72 54 10832 34 H 41 MH B83 51 54 BG

SITE

hig, 7. Dendrogram of classification of Port Adelaide “esiuary™ sites by sediment grades.

of transects identified in the 1981-85 surveys is

shown in Fig. 6. While all groups of transects had

occasional or rare species in. addition to the core

of more common species (Fig, Sa-f), the total

number of species in a given group of transects was

consistently higher in groups more remote from the

thermal outfall (Fig. 6).

Sediments

Of 49 sediment samples over half (26) were

niediuii sand (MZ, 1-2 @), 16 were fine sands (MZ,

2-3 ») and seven were coarse sands (MZ 0-1 ¢),

Fig. 7 gives the hierarchical classification of the

sediments from all sites sampled.

Although in a few cases similarities were observed

between samples from the same transect (eg.

samples 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 were all coarse sand, and

samples from 4.1, 4.2 and 4.5 were all fine sand)

overall there was no obvious topographical

coherence in the clusters on Fig. 7, and na

correlation between sediment and type of infauna.

Discussion

Although a number of overseas studies have

documented the effects of thermal discharge on

sublittoral benthic fauna, comparatively little

information is availabl2 on intertidal fauna. Barnet

(1971) investigated the effect of thermal discharge

from Hunterston Power Station, Scotland, on

selected intertidal sand animals, finding only subtle

changes in breeding season and growth rates of a

bivalve, Telling tenuis, and an amphipod Urothoe

brevicornis, Barnett and subsequent authors

(Bamber & Spencer 1984) attibuted the small effects

to the tact that the intertidal animals in cool

temperate regions are adapted to a greater natural

temperature range than thar characteristic of the

thermal effluents in these regions.

Few published Australian studies are available

with which to compare the present results. Powis

& Robinson (1980) examined the subtidal benthic

macrofaunal communities in the Tuggerah Lakes.

The Munmorah Power Station discharges water to

this estuarine lake system at up to 4°C above

ambient, These authors report that the only

apparent influence of the warmed water was. an

increase in numbers of the gastropod mollusc

belacumantus australis, very near the outfall.

Rainer & Fitzhardinge (1981) examined both

intertidal and subtidal benthic communities of Port

Hacking. While species distribution was limited by

fluctuations in dissolved oxygen levels there was

little evidence that natural short term temperature

extremes, over the shallow sand flats, influenced

species distribution.

Saenger er a/ (1980) examined the macrobenthos

of the Calhope River and Auckland Creek,

Queensland, to obtain comprehensive prethermal

baseline data pnor to the establishment of the

Gladstone Power Station. To date published post

thermal information includes a localised study of

the macrobenthos of the discharge canal of this

power station. Saenger e7 a/ (1982) suggest that the

major changes in the benthic fauna in this localised

region can be more closely correlated with changes

in flow rates, and ultimately with resulting sediment

changes, than with temperature effects.

This study documents a pattern of change in the

distribution of intertidal mudflats in response to

changing environmental condiuons. In 1972, near

the Torrens Island Power Station cooling water

Ins 1M, TROMAS ET .ae,

chibcharge to Angas Inlet, the |nrertidal communities

iad a localised predominance of the cirratulid

worm, Cirriformia punciata, and a comparative

paucity of bivalve molluses, Between 1972 and i981

the distribution of Co punctate extended throughout

Angas Inlel to the adjacent reaches of Barker Lilet

and North Arm, while there was also 2 suppression

al hivalve molluse species over the same ranpe,

Since the summer of 1981-82 C. punctara bas

been replaced as the predamitant species in Angas

inlet by Psevdopilvdore sp, a spionid which

previously contributed only a sinall percentage ta

predominance tas been restricted mainly to the

region Ol transects 5 and 6 in Barker Inlet and

North Arm (Fig, tb

The pattern of ehange closely correspands to

changes observed i) studies af estuarine ecosystems

subjected to organic pollution. Gray (1976a) and

Parker (F980) have noled declines in populations af

bivalve molluse species in the fauna of polluted

estuaries, Grassle & Grassle (1974) arid Gray (1976b,

1980) identify Various groups of organisms which,

because of their life history characteristics, respond

rapidly to environmental perturbations ard colonise

disturbed regions, Spionid worms, Which presently

dominate the fauna of Angas Inlet are amongst the

most opportunistic colonising species. Other species

presently found in Angas Inlet, the syllid and

capitellld worms, are alsa considered higtity

opporiunistic (Grassle & Grassle 1974).

recorded at Lizard Island, Qld (P. Hutchings L980,

pers. comm.) Angas Inlet is a bout harbour,

mooring yachts from around Australia. We have

reeorded C. punclote in the fouling fauna of solid

substrates in Angas trilet, as well as in the intertidal

zone. It is (herefore possible that this species was

introduced to the warm waters of Angas Inlet in

the fouling fauna on the hull ofa visiting yachr,

(Note Chut tnother tropical species, the Sycopho-

inedusan Cassropea ndrosia, previously known from

Piji, New Caledonia and North Queensland (Kramp

1961, 1965) has also been fotind In Angas Inlet

(Southeott 1982)), Little is known of the life history

of C punclara, bul George (19644, b) has detailed

the life history of a related species, CG renraculeni,

indicating a wide temperature tolerance in its

breeding season, and vhe capabilicy of rapid,

massive population bursts. These characreristics,

also associated with the recognised opportunistic

species above (Grassle & Grassle 1974), probably

enabled this tropical species ta colonise Angas Inlet

When the natural populations of intertidal fawia

were disturbed by the development of the power

satin. However, 2 punetata has pot persisted as

the dominant species in Angas Inlet since 1882. ft

seems likely that the restriction of €. punciuia te

areas just oulside Angas Inlet where maximum

summer temperatiires are about 30°C (Fig, 3) is due

Simply ta the temperature tolerance of this species,

as it has been recorded adjacent to the outfall in

higher ltemperatires. The sudden and drastic

reduction in numbers of CQ punctalw in the warmest

regions Of Angas Inlet since March 1982 may be

explained rather by the competitive advantage of

the more highly opportunistic Pseudopelydorasp,,

ip, a disturbed enviranment where biological

interactions may be more exayeerated (Grassle &

Sanders 1973),

Conclusion

The progressive increase in thermal discharge

fram Torrens Island Power Station over the period

1972-985 has lead 16 recognisable changes in the

falure, abundance, and distribution of inrertidal

invertebrates in adjavent reaches of Port River

estuary. In particular bivalve molluse and worm

species Characteristic of tindisturbed regions of {he

estuary, bave declined in population in the warmest

regions of Angas Inlet, They have been lareely

replaced by opportunistic worm species, initially the

tropical cirralulid Cirrifarmia purcrata, and more

recently the spionid Psevdopalydori spy. C pliriclare

4ls0 predominates in southern Barker Inlet and

eastern North Arm where significant changes have

occurred in the thermal regime. The pattern of

changes recorded in the estuary closely resemble

changes noted in Overseas studies of disturbed

estuarine regions,

Ackoowledyments

This work was funded and supporied by The

Electricity Trust as part of ily ongoing programme

of environmental research.

We thank Dr Michael Geddes for reviewing the

inanuseript. We are gratetul to those whe ideitified

organisms, especially Dr F. Hutchings (polychaetes}

and Mr W. Zeidler (amphipods). We are alse

prateful to che South Australian Museuni lor access

to their reference collections, and to numerous

students of the Zooloey Departorent, University of

Adelaide who helped with sample collection ovet

the Jast decade, We weknowledge the South

Australian Centre for Remote Seusing for the

produciion and supply of Fig. 4.

THERMAL, EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL PAUNA 169

References

Ramark, R, N. & Spencer, J. (1984) The benthos of

a coastal power station thermal discharge canal. Mar.

Biol, Assoc. UK. 64, 603-623,

Baknerr, P. RO. (1971) Some changes in intertidal sand

communilies due ta thermal pelluuion. Proc. R. Sue,

Lond, R177, 453-364.

Boicek, At, Derers, A, M., Mekirtup, SC. &

Ciiomas, BD. PB, (1977) Distribution and sediments of

Inaurove foresis in South Austialia. Vrans. R. Soe, 3.

Alést, WA), 35-44.

Bye, J, A. T. (1976) Physical Oceanography of Gull St

Vincent and Inyestigator Strail jn C. R. Twidale, MJ

Tyler & B. P. Webb (Eds) “Natural History of the

Adelaide Region’ (Royal Society al South Australia,

Adelaide).

Courant, €. C. & Tatmacte, S. S. (1975) Therma)

effects. Water Poll, Contrat Fed. 47(6), 1657-1711.

Crain, | By Harrecson, M. E. & Tatmace, 5. 5

(1983) Thermal effects. [fid, 55(6), 787-500.

Crema, R.& Pactra, Ay M. B, (1980) The structure of

benthic communities man area of |hermal discharge

ron) a coastal power station. Mur Pollut. Bull VW,

221-224,

Pino, 1G. Chark, KOR, & Warwick, R.M. (1982) 4

prictical suategy for analysing multispecies distriburion

patterns. Mar Ecol Prog, Ser, 8, 37-32.

Trik, R. L. (1968) ‘Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks’

(Heniphill, Tesas).

Giokal, LD. (96da) The life history of the eirrarulial

worn Cirriformia fearaculata on an intertidal mudtiat,

A. Mar. Biol. Assoc, UK. $4, 47-65,

(19646) On some environmental factors affecting

the distribution of Cirrifarmia fentuculara (Polychaeta)

wt Hamble shi 44, 373-388.

GESAMP (1984) IMO/FAQ/UNESCO/ WMOQ/ WHO/

JABAZUN/UNEP Joint Group ol Experts om the

Scientific Aspects of Marine Pollution, Thermal

Discharzes jv the Marine Environment. Rep. Styd.

GESAMP, 24.

Grassy, LB & Sanpers, H. 1. (1973) Lile histories antl

the role of disturbance. Deep-Sea Res. 20, 643-659.

& GRAsste, J. Po (1974) Opporrunistic life

histories ad genetic systems in marine benthic poly-

chacies, J. Mar Res. 32(2), 263-284,

Gray, JS. (1976a) The fauna of the polluted River Tees

Estuary. Estuary Ceasr. Mar Sci, 1, 203-223.

(19766) Are marine baseline surveys worthwhile?

New Scieatist April 1976, 219-221.

(1980) Why do evological monitoring? Mar Pol).

Ail, VA, 62-65.

Kame, PL. (1961) Synopsis of the medusae of the

wold. L Mar Biol Assoc Uk, 40, 1-469.

(165) Sone wedusac (mainly Seyphamedusacy

from Australian coastal waters, Zraws, R, Soe. 5. ats!

89, 257-278.

Tancror, Tb. (983) Electricity Generation and the

Leology of Natural Waters (Liverpool University Press,

Londor),

MiFbeckE, J. G. & Sreeurnsen, W. (1977) Eniviron-

mental impact and baseline studies of the sof bottom

marine environment in the vicinity of ocean sewer

outfalls on the NSW central coast. Third Aust,

Conference on Coastal und Ocean Engineering, 157-162.

(Institution of Engineers Australia, Melbourne).

NEVERAUSKAS, V. PR. & Burien, A, J, (1982) Tolerange of

blue crab, Portynus pelugicus (L) to high teniperarure,

Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 1M6(4), 215-218.

Parker, J. G. (1980) Effects of pollution upon the

benthos of Belfast Lough, Adar. Poll, Bud, 11, 80-83.

Powis, B. JL & Reopinsom, K. 1 M. (1980) Benthic

jMacrofaunal Communities in the Tuggerah Lakes, New

South Wales. Aust < Mar Fresh, Res. 31, 803-815.

SAENGER, P, Srrenensoan, W, & Moyexty, J. (980) The

estuarine macrobenthos of the Calhope River and

Auckland Creek, Queensland. Mem. Old. Mus, 20),

143-161.

: ,& (1982) Macrobenthos of the

cooling water discharge canal of the Gladstone Power

Station Queensland, Aust J Mar. Freshw. Res, 33,

1983-95.

Surenrep, 8 A. (1983) Benthic communities of upper

Spencer Gulf, South Australia Trans. A. Soe, S Aust.

107(2), 69-85,

Rogertson, B, D. (1971) Meteorological Noe No. 49

(Bureau of Meteorology, Adelaide).

SouTHcarr, R. V, (1982) Jellyfishes (Classes Seyphovoa

and Hydrozoa) /n S. A. Shepherd & f. M. Thomas (Eds)

“Murine Invertebrates of Southern Australia, Part 1”

(Government Printer, South Australia).

Swartz, R. C. (1978) Techniques for Sampling and

Analysing the Marine Mactrobenthos. Environmental

Protection Agency, Corvallis Enyironmental Research

Laboratory. Marine and Freshwater Ecology Bragich.

Marine Centre Newport EPA/600/1)2.

Tarmact, SS. & Courant, C, C. (1980) Thermal

effects, Jour, Water Poll. Fed, 52(6), 1575-1615.

THorkava, A. Brake, N. & Sctirorper, P. Be (1978)

The effect of heated effluents fram power plants on

seagrass (Thylessia) communities quantitatively

comparing estuaries in the subjropies to the tropics,

Mar Pollut, Bull. 9, 181-487,

Waeb, J. J. & Youna, P. C. (1982) Elfeers of sediments,

Lrage metals and particle size on community structure

and epibenihic seagrass fauna ear a lead sielrer, South

Australia, Mar, Ecol. Prog. Ser. 9, 137-146.

& ——- — (1983) The depauperation of epilinuna

on Pinne bicolor near a lead smelter, Spencer Gut,

South Australia. Emviron. Poll. (Ser. A) SH), 293-308.

Wasinwes, J. EB. & BREHMER, M, L. (1966) The effects

of thermal effluents on marine organisms, Afr & Har.

Pall, tat. Jd. Wb, 227-284,

WOMEnRSLEY, PL BS. & EoMonns, §&, 1. (1958) A general

avcount! of (he intertidal ecology of South Australian

cousts, Awl, J Mar. Presi, Res. (2), 217-260.

& Titans, b. M. (1976) Intertidal Bcalogy fC.

R. Twidale, M. J, Tyler & B. PL Webb (Eds) "Natural

History of rhe Adelaide Region" (Royil Society of Soutlt

Australia, Adelaide.

170 I, M. THOMAS EFT AL.

APPENDIX 1

SPECIES LIST 1972-1985

+ recorded YEAR:

Species: Pre-

198] 1981 1982 1983 1985

POLYCHAETES

Naineris grubei australis Hartman +

Scoloplos cylindrifer Ehlers +

Leitoscoloplos bifurcatus (Hartman) +

Scolaricia sp.

Nephyts australiensis (Fauchald) +

Cirriformia punctata (Grube) +

Lumbrineris sp. 1 +

Lumbrineris sp. 2

Eunice australis Quatrefages + + + +

Eunice antennata (Savigny) 4

Lysidice sp. +

Marphysa sp. +

Nematonereis sp.

Schistomeringos sp.

Diopatra dentata Kinberg

Neanthes vaalii Kinberg

Neanthes cricognatha (Ehlers)

Nereis cockburnensis Augener

Olganereis edmondsi (Hartman) + + +

Australonereis ehlersi (Augener) + +

Ceratonereis transversa Hutchings + +

Perinereis nuntia (Grube) + + +

Perinereis amblyondonta (Schmarda) +

Nereidae +

Barantolla lepte Hutchings + + + + +

Capitella capitata (Fabricius) +

Pseudopolydora sp. + + 4 +

Boccardia chilensis Blake & Kudenov

Syllis gracilis Grube ‘ + + +

Myrianida sp. +

Harmothoe praeclara (Haswell) + + +

Glycera americana Leidy +

Ophiodromus sp.

Abarenicola affinis clarki Wells +

Ampharetidae

Chaetopterus variopedatus (Reiner) 4 + +

Armandia intermedia Fauvel +

Sabellidae + +

Dorvillea sp. +

Terebellinae 4 q +

NEMERTEA

Nemertean spp. + + ‘ + +

PLATYHELMINTHES

Latocestus sp. +

BIVALVES

Xenostrobus inconstans (Lamarck)

Tellina deltoidalis Lamarck

Trus crebrelamellatus (Tate)

Laternula recta (Reeve)

Katelysia scalarina (Lamarck)

Katelysia peronii Lamarck

Spisula trigonella (Lamarck)

Brachidontes erosus (Lamarck)

Ostrea angasi Sowerby

Anomia trigonopsis Hutton

Sanguinolaria biradiata (Wood) +

Eumarcia fumigata (Sowerby) + +

Pinna bicolor Gmelin 4

GASTROPODS

Niotha pyrrhus (Menke) +

Nassarius burchardi (Philippa) ‘ + 1 + .

Nassarius pauperata (Lamarck) + + + 1 +

+ +

++ tttt4

t+ e+

t++Het

++ +4

++ 44

++ateereet

++ettdge+

+++ettter

t+e++e ttt

+++ tGgeeet

THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA 171

i ea aeEEEyyEE EEE EEE SSE Sn

YEAR:

Species: 1981 1981 1982 1983 1985

Bedeva paivae (Crosse)

Salinator fragilis (Lamarck)

Salinator solidus (von. Martens)

Batillaria estuarina (Tate)

Batillaria diemenensis (Qouy & Gaimard) +

Diala lauta A. Adams +

Diloma sp. 4.

Quibulla tenuissima Sowerby + +

Austroliotia densilineata (Tate) +

Opisthobranchia +

Monodonta constricta Lamarck +

Clanculus sp.

Asteracmea sp.

Natica sp.

Nudibranchiata

CHITONS

Stenochiton longicymba Blainville +

CRUSTACEANS

ISOPODS

Paridotea munda (Hale) +

Dynamenopsis sp.

Cerceis sp. +

Euidotea bakeri (Collinge) +

Cymodoce longicaudata (Baker) +

Zuzara venosa (Stebbing) + +

Exosphaeroma sp. 1 + +

Exosphaeroma sp. 2 +

AMPHIPODS

Ericthonius pugnax (Dana) +

Maera mastersii (Haswell) +

Elasmospus bampo Barnard + + +

Amphipod sp. A +

Cymadusa filosa Barnard +

Cymadusa sp. +

Allorchestes compressa (Dana) + + +

DECAPODS

Crangon socialis (Heller) + + + +

Leander serenus (Heller) +

Processa sp. +

Penaeus latisulcatus (Kishinonye) + +

Philyra laevis (Bell) + + + + +

Pilumnus fissifrons (Stimpson) 4 + + +

Halicarcinus rostratus (Haswell) +

Phlyxia intermedia (Miers) +

+ + + +

+4+e44

+tet

Heteropanope serratifrons (Kinahan)

Naxia aurita (Latreille)

Helograpsus haswellianus (White legge) + +

Petalomera depressa (Baker) +

Nectocarcinus sp.

Ceratoplax punctata (Baker) +

Callianassa ceramica (Fulton & Grant) +

STOMATOPODS

Squilla laevis (Hess) +

TANAIDS

Apseudes australis (Haswell) +

Tanaidae + + 7 + '

MYSIDS

Paranchialana angustata (Sars) +

CIRRIPEDS

Balanus amphitrite Darwin +

Elminius modestus +

COPEPODS

Copepods +

172 I. M. THOMAS ET AL.

-—)) SS SeSeeeeeeeeeeeSSsSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSMSFFFFeeee

YEAR:

Pre-

Species: 1981 1981 1982 1983 1985

CNIDARIANS

Anthothoe albocincta (Stuckey) + + + + +

Epiactis sp. + 7

PISCES

Nesogobius hinsbyi (McCulloch & Ogilby) + +

Ammotretis elongatus McCulloch -

Gobius bifrenatus Kner +

ECHINODERMS

Ophionereis sp. +

Leptosynapta dolabrifera (Stimpson)

Cricophorus nutrix (Stuckey)

Ophiuroidea

eee

t+ tt

A SYSTEMATIC EFFECT OF STOCKING INTENSITY UPON THE

SPECIFIC DEFOLIATION RATE OF SALTBUSH BY SHEEP

BY R. T. LANGE

Summary

This extends earlier studies of sheep grazing saltbush shrubland near Whyalla, South Australia,

where times spent in the different parts of the flock’s range had been shown to be indicated by the

corresponding depositions of the egesta. That result enables quantitative estimates (ha sheep “') to

be made of the stocking intensities experienced in each of the different parts of the range (SIP =

stocking intensity of the part), by combining flock size, part area, and range egesta accumulations in

an appropriate formula.

BRILL COMMUNICATION

A SYSTEMATIC EFFECT OF STOCKING INTENSITY UPON THE SPECIFIC

DEFOLIATION RATE OF SALTBUSH BY SHEEP

This extends carlicr studies of sheep grazing saltbush

shjubland near Whyalla, Sourh Australia, where limes

spent in che difference parts af ihe flock’s range had been

shown to be indivaled by (he corresponding depositions

of (he egesta!®. That result enables quantitative estimates

(ha sheep |) to be wade of the stocking inteusities

experienced in cach ol the different parts of the range

(SIP. stocking intensity of the part), by combining flack

size, part area, and ranke caesta accumulations it an

appropriate formula.”

We also has been shown) Uhat SIP varies greatly

throaghout each flock 's range ina consisten| way, whether

the full-scale paddocks of the region or in very small

experimental enclosures. Roughly a third of the range

experiences SIP grading upwards from the paddock

avenge shocking intensity (PSt=roral area divided! by Mock

sive), the remainder wrading downwards. Greatest

Tnlensilies are-ol yhagnitides equivalent ta about 7 PSI;

Juwest meastirable intensities have values roughly

equivalent to the PSI/16.

Lasuly. it las been shown, in several cases, by tise ot

4 leat-marking tectiniqueé that the extent of defohation

of saltbushes jo ie various parts of the rangeland. ts

lincurly refitted (co He concomitant accurmularions of sheep

cesta in those pars Thus the sijuation has been reached

where wiferred SEP and its immediate effects on plants

such as sallbush, can be studied across the various open

Jovaliries, WithOul constraining the Mock’s behaviour.

The present reparr describes an unexpected new

quantitative feature of those inter-relationships, revealed

from a smal] enclosure of sallhush stocked with sheep.

An enclosure 35% 100m was feneed aff in the midst of

extensive saltbush shrubland on Middleback Station neat

Whyalla, 5, Aust, a locity deseribed ji detail by Barker

and Noble". The sheibland was dry and devoid af any

preen grass, due to drought. Survey poles were ser about

this enelosure such that observers could visually sector

iL uto ten equal cells, and eaeh cell mito halves, by line

of-sight, A drinking-trough and a holding pen were

installed af one end,

Ineaeli voll, bushes were counted sind 100 teaves of (vel)

outermost foliage were marked, alistiburing the marks

widely amonpst (he bushes’. The percentage loss of

salthust foliage fren each cell wats estimated alsa by Ure

wietliod of Andrew et af! A [lock of sever merino

werhers (20 sheep ha ‘) was introduced and left fur six

days except for an inspection period every 24 h, during

which the sheep were penned, Al each inspection, all egesta

was recovered and measured trom each hall-cell separately,

counts wea made of the loss af murked Jeaves, and the

saltbush foliase bioniass was estimated in each cell During

davlight, the activity of the Mock was observed from a

distance,

Contry to tua) oucormes, the sheep in this enclosure

did pot setlie down for nearly three days, Instead they

spent much more time than expected in Ure southertt

(dovn-yvind) end of [he enclosurG just standing, Noe reason

for this Was apparent. During the first chree days a high

propornomal marked leaves which were fosp from bushes

could be observed Uneaten, lying on the gronnd, and thus

were eVidently broken oll simply by the passage of the

sheep, These were removed. By (he mornitie of the fourth

day (he sheep were grazing normally.

However, no staristically-significant relationships could

be Jenjonstrated at the end of the experiment, between

cell evesta accumulation and cither of cell salibush lea!

loss, or cell salthash foliage biomass reciction, Even when

the two vamped-on cells were disregarded, no signiticant

trends could be detected from the remaining cells. This

was contrary fo the results of at least mvo earlier

experiments, in which the relationships were significant.

From a general point ol view, the outcome thus

appeared lo be of analypical grazing episode (big. 1) in

which flock behaviour was too aberrant tor the expected

egesto Ueposition-saltbush defoliacion relationships to be

evypressedl.

Il was (herefure remarkable to discover that in cach vel!

considered separately, the propressive accumularion of

egesta and the progressive removal of marked saltbush

leaves by the sheep, were fairly closely and sinoortily

related (Fig. 2). The turther remarkable feature was that

cumulative

Q paddock area 1

(——

6 o

= 2? '

les

: $

oO. = ®

@ RS — Sa ES

oc 4

3 g

oo 0.5 II

on 2 ~¢

3 0.25

0.125

lig. 1. The cumulative distribution of log, SIP (stocking

intensity of the part) for the 20 paris of the sheep-

stocked saltbush enclosure. The right-hand scale

expresses SIP variation in terms of PSL (paddock

average slockim intensity). By conmparison with Hilder’s

1964 data (see Fig. | of Lange 1985), note rhe atypically

low proportion af SIP = PSI.

174

the slopes of these relationships, i.c. egesta accumulated

per tagged leaf taken—appeared Lo vary between cells in

a Very systematic way.

600

egesta (g. f.wt. )

20 30

% leaves removed

Fig. 2. Cumulative egesta accumulation versus cumulative

loss of marked saltbush leaves for 3 representative cells

from the enclosure, Note how slopes are steeper in cells

that accumulated more egesta. Lines with less (han 6

points involved days with no sheep Visits.

That is shown in Fig. 3 for the eight non-camped cells,

where these slopes are plotted against the total lresh

weights of sheep ceesta deposited on the cells over the six-

day period. The equation of the linear regression is:

y= -24 + 649%, 17 = 0.86, p < 0.001,

where y = g egesta deposited per 1% tagged leaf removed

(= slope), and x is kg egesta deposited. The intercept is

nol significant,

When the slopes are plotted against the natural

logarithm of cell egesta accumulations, all ten cells

including the camp-sites are accommodated in a very

highly significant regression:

y 156) 88.5 In (x), > » 0.92, p < 0,001,

In this case the intercept is significant.

These results reveal an unsuspected quantitative inter-

relationship in flock-browse plant interaction, which is too

significant to dismiss without atlention.

—_

100

9 €gesta /1% leaf removed

ro)

1 2 3

kg egesta

Fig. 3. Slopes as in Fig. 2, for each of the 8 non-camped

cells of the enclosure, versus the corresponding totals

of sheep egesta accumulated in cells over the 6-day

period,

On face value, the results imply that as SIP rises, the

systematic defoliation rate of the saltbush by the sheep

falls.

Since marked leaves were observed lying detached upon

the ground, during the early part of the six-day period,

interpretation must allow for effects due to the mere

passage ol sheep, as well as direct browsing.

On general grounds, one might have thought that it

there was to be an effect of this nature, then it might have

increased not decreased the specific defoliation rate. Thal

is, crowding as SIP increased might have been expected

to increase incidental physical damage to salibushes, thus

removing more leaves per sheep, not less, But the reverse

applied. Bush density did vary slightly from cell to cell,

but not in any way thal explained this effect.

The effect remains unexplained and serves as a reminder

that little is yet understood of line details at the grazing

interface between sheep and sallbush. Since it is

demonstrated so far only from this single experiment, it

requires verification, and further (rials will be undertaken,

The author gratefully acknowledges support from The

Broken Hill Proprietary Co. and Mitsubishi Motors

(Australia) Lid, for the Middleback Field Centre

Programme. Andrew Nicolson provided the sheep and

field access.

175

Noble, I. R. (1979) In D. Graetz & K. Howes (eds.)

Studies in The Australian Arid Zone IV. Chenopod

Shrublands. C.S.I.R.O. (Aust.) Div. of Land Res.

‘Lange, R. T. & Willcocks, M. C. (1978) Aust. J. Expt.

Agric. An. Husb. 18, 764-767.

*Lange, R. T. (1983) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107, 137.

(1985) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 109, 167-174. Managem., pp. 125-143.

A. (1984) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 108, 11-12. 7 Andrew, M. H., Noble, I. R. & Lange, R. T. (1979) Aust.

Barker, S. (1979) Jn D. Graetz & K. Howes (eds). Studies Rangel. J. 1, 225-231.

in The Australian Arid Zone IV. Chenopod Shrublands.

C.S.1.R.O. (Aust.) Div. of Land Res. Managem., pp.

83-106.

R. T. LANGE, Botany Dept, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O. Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001.

NEW RECORDS OF SPIDERS (ARACHNIDA: ARANEAE) FROM SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY BERNARD GUERIN

Summary

The spider fauna of South Australia is largely unknown due to a lack of systematic collecting over

the years. Few studies have been published and these are based on material collected incidentally to

other groups. Thus the larger and wandering spiders are better known than cryptic and nocturnal

species.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

NEW RECORDS OF SPIDERS (ARACHNIDA: ARANEAE) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

The spider fauna of Sourh Australia is Janzely unknown

due to a lack of systematic collecting over the years, Few

studies have been published and these ape based on

material collected invidentally to other groups!2496,

Thus the larger and wandering spiders are berer krown

than eryptic and nocturnal species.

Scvenleen spiders are recorded here, including two

families and Gight genera previously unrecorded in South

Australia, Voucher specimens have been deposited in the

South Australian Museum, The family placement of

genera follows Davies (1985)’, and Brignoli (1983)* for

families not covered by Davies (1985).

Family; Hahniidae,

Seorospilus bicolor Simon, 1886

These spiders superficially resemble small Nicadamus

but are much smiller and live under gum bark. Known

previously {rom ‘Tasmania’, the family is characterized by

a Transverse row of spinnerets. The specimens collected

were from Aldgate (35°01 S, 138°44'E) under zum burk

(SAM NIOSSI17).

imm

Fig. L Verteal view of THenurins,

Fumily: Gnaphosidae,

THonunius Simon, 1908

Generally uecepied now to he in the Gnaphosidae®.

Female spider collected ina pitfall trap trom the Toolache

Waterhole region (28''21'S, 40°25 E, SAM N1985120), The

specimen Has. very lone anterior spinnerets starting mid-

ventrally (Fig. 1). Long spinning tubes are present on the

anterior spitmerens, The posterior spinnerets are

moderately long, thus distinguishing the gefitios fromm

Myandra and Molvcria, Honunilus quadricauda (the type

species) Was described from a single male from blarvey,

W.A. The long spinning tubes were not noied, The female

remains unknown,

Also of nore with this specimen are the structures on

the terminal joints of the mid-ventral spinnerets, ane on

each jou (Fig. 1). No large spinneret sensory organs are

noted in the literalure so their function remains anknown,

Lampona scutata Strand, 1913

Collected in pilfall fraps at Hambidge Conservation

Park (33¢24'S, 135455 E, SAM NI9BS118), Granite Downs

(2656'S, 133°30°E) and the lake edge of Lake Hart

(31°40'S, 136°40'E), The latler specimen was in an old

kangaroo skull.

LT. seutate is Similar in shape to the common L-

cylindrata, Juveniles havea bright orale cephalothorax

with bright orange scutes on the dorsal and ventral

abdomen. Matare specimens are dark red with darker

seutes, The type locality is *Zentral-Australien” ® | have

been unable to locale any literature record of the species

since the deseription,

Lampona asperrima Wickovan, 1950

A mature female was pittall trapped at Muckera

(30°02'5, 130°03'E, SAM NIYRS119), Known only from

Reevesby Island*. Similar to L. sewtata but it differs in

eye arrangement, relative spinneret lengths and genitaha.

bamily: Araneidae.

Dolophones themisoides Rainbow, 1915

A specimen was collected in a pitfall trap al Muckera

on the Nullarbor (30°02'S, 130°03'L, SAM 61985123).

Originally described from “Moorilyanna Native Well,

Central Australia” (26°52'S, 133°0V Ey, 1 have not

Jocated any subsequent literalure records,

Araneus psittacinus (Koch, 1887)

A number of these orb weavers have been found in the

Adelaide Hilly and suburbs (SAM N1I985124-N1985125).

Almost the entire body is bright green with a variable

patiern on the dorsal abdomen. Some haye fo patrern,

some havea yellow stripe, some have bright red spots and

still others have white or yellow stripes with a bright red

border. Some have a longitudinal stripe, somea (ransverse

one. Both males and females have been found with

different colour patterns. Examination of the genitalia

indicates they are conspecific.

178

Family: Mimeticie.

Arevs: simsoni (Simon, 1893)

An adult collected on honeysickle (Lorticera japonica)

ay Aldgate (35°01'S, 138°44'E, SAM N19851 26). Numerous

young were on the sucrounding bushes. Their

cephalothoray and abdomen colours ranged from black

and white to a deep red shade. Colour variation in this

genus has been reported!”

Areys walckénaer] Simon, 1879

Mule and females of this spider have beer found on

shrubs at Aldgate and Bridgewater (SAM N1985127/128).

A, walekerueri is cocorded from eastern Australia, WA,

and Java! The W.A. record ts doblous(B, Y. Main pers.

comim.).

Family: Theridiidae,

Phoroncidia triluberculata (Hickroan, 1951)

Specimens were collected at Aldgate (S5'00'S, 13844'E,

SAM N1985129), The type locality is Launceston,

Tasmania, which suggests that the species will oceur in

Victoria, The spiders were found on a single vertical line

OF sik, about 44 of the way to the top, One had its tine

between two leaves on a ferice of honeysuckle, the others

berween two pieces of bark on a pine tree.

Phoroncidia sexinberculata (Keysenling, 1890)

Two specimens haye been found on bushes at

Bridgewater and Aldgate (SAM NI985130). Known

previously fram N.SW, and Qld,

Faurmtily: Thomisidae.

Seecortomus formivorus Rainbow, 1900

Several specimens were collected in January on cifterent

plants inthe aiddle of g large paddock in the Middleback

region near Whyalla (32"57'S, 137°24'E, SAM NL9BS131-

1985132). They were found in small web-cases!. There

Were Numerous ants (Jridanwriney purpurens) on the

Mants and spiders were seen to eat these. A number of

the spiders had web-cases joined together, living semi

conimunally Previously recorded (rom three Ipeations in

N.SMW."* this species may be more widely disttibuted Uian

records suggest. The genus is also Known from Queensland

{V. Davies, pers. comm.).

Bomts larveta Koch, 1873

Two males and two females collected at Aldyute

(35-0NS, (38°44 E, SAM N1985133-NI98S134). Colours

vary i the females: one is brown Whereas the other has

bright wreen legs and cephalothorax and a whine abdomen

Lintoriinately, the original description did nor figure the

femole genitalia. Both these females have identical

nemlalia, The brown female was on brown reeds and the

preen female was on a greeny-blue wormwood shrib

Cynrbacha fesiiva Koch, 1874

Specimens collected ar Aldgate and in Adelaide suburbs

(>AM NI9831351. ‘The species is common in the eusiern

stales5, Also reported Irom 5. Aust. is a six-sparted

Cymbacha'®, alihough some young C. fesriva also

appear ta have six-spots,

Sutvihella sp.

Vhe only member of this genus reported in S. Aust. |s

Sidvmelia trapezia (Koch, 1873). It is common all over

Austratia!’, Two specimens front Aldgate and

Bridgewater SAM NI98S136) differ in bein hirsuce: They

also differ ftom the only deseribed birsuie member, &

hirsuta (Koeh, 1873), in having two Jona posterior

projections from the abdomen. They superficially resemble

the undescribed specimen photographed by Mascord

(1980, p, 99, No. 6),

Paruily; Philadromicac

Tibellus. sp.

Specimens of this genus have been found on a grass

tussock in a dry ereek-bed at Granite Dowy)s (26°56'S,

133°30)E, SAM N1985229). They differ from the only

described Australian species, 7 tened/uy (Koch, 1876), and

superficially appear (o differ from the undescribed species

shown in Mascord (1980), It js likely that it isa new species.

‘These are the first reported menjbers of the fainily

Philodroniidae in S.A,

Tamily; Miturgidae:

Miturga agelenina Simon, 1909

Specimens collected at Hughes (30°35°S, 129°30' ER,

SAM NIQSS138-N1985139). They are well known from

W.A. and the Easter states! 7, Only reported in S.A,

from Reevesby fsland*. Specimens were found in pairs 1

the web.

Family: Zoridac,

Thasvraea sp.

Specimens of this spider have been iound ar Aldgate,

Stirling and Bridwewarer (SAM N1985137), all in the

Adelaide Hills, They are also known to be widespread tn

South Australia (D, Hirst, pers. comu.).

I wish to thank De M. B. Thompson and G Medin

lor collecting the Monvnrius: thanks lo Jeu Thurmer for

the drawings and for notiving the sructure on the erminal

spinneret joints of Monunivs, | wish to iiank b. Jansen

forthe Nullarbor, Bridgewater and Hambidge spiders and

some trom Middleback; B, Gilbert for other Bridgewater

spiders; David Hirst for identilying the Thasvraed: Jenn

Thurmer for a Cynthacha; and to the NPWS for

permission to collect in some areas. False want to thank

Margaret Davies for extensive editorial help.

‘Hickman, V, Y. (1944) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 68, 18-48:

iHlickman, ¥. ¥. (1950) Proc. R- Soe, Vie. 60, 1 16.

"Hogg, EL R. (1896) lraneidue. In Report of the Horn

Expedition 10 Central Ansiralia, Pt 2. Zoology, 409356.

*Pullgine, R. H. (1914) Trans. RB. Soc, S$. Aust, 3h,

447-443,

‘Rainbow, W. J. (1915) Trans. RB. Soe, S. Aust, 39,

172-792.

“strand, FE, (1913) Zoulogische Jahtbuecher 35, 599.424,

"Pavies, ¥. T. (1985) Arancomorpiiae, tn “Zoolsgicil

Catalogue of Australia, Vol, 3, Arachnida’ (Australia

Government Printing Service, Canberra),

“Brignoli, P.M, (1983) “A Catalogue of the Araneae

described Warieee 1940 und 1941" (Manehester

University Press, Manchester).

“Higkman, Vo ¥. (1948) Pap. Pro, RL Suc, Tas. 1998,

23s

Clyne,

Melbourne).

'! Heimer, S. (1984) Entomologische Abhandlungen 47,

155-178.

Hickman, V. V. (1951) Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tas. 1950,

3-24.

3Mascord, R. (1980) “Spiders of Australia” (Reed,

Sydney).

D. (1969) “Australian Spiders” (Nelson,

179

Rainbow, W. J. (1900) Rec. Aust. Mus. 3, 169-175.

1 Rainbow, W. J. (1911) Rec. Aust. Mus. 9, 107-319.

‘Tee, D. & Southcott, R. V. (1979) “Spiders and other

arachnids of South Australia” (South Australian

Museum, Adelaide).

"Simon, E. (1909) Araneae, 2nd part. Jn Michaelsen, W.

& Kartmeyer, R. (Eds.) “Die Fauna Sud-West

Australiens”, pp. 155-212 (Fischer, Jena).

BERNARD GUERIN, Department of Psychology, University of Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067.

CELAENIA ATKINSONI (ARACHNIDA, ARANEAE): NEW RECORD FOR

SOUTH AUSTRALIA WITH A DESCRIPTION OF THE MALE

BY BERNARD GUERIN

Summary

Male and female Celaenia atkinsoni (Pickard-Cambridge) were collected from the Adelaide Hills.

These represent the first record of this species for South Australia and provide an opportunity to

describe the previously unknown male of the species.

BRIEF COMMUNICANON

CELAENIA ATKINSON] (ARACHNIDA, ARANEAE); NEW RECORD FOR SOUTH

AUSTRALIA WITH A DESCRIPTION OF THE MALE

Mile and female Celvenia arkinsent (Pickard-

Cambridge) were collected from the Actelaide Hills. These

represent the first record of (his species for Sout) Australia

ikl provide an opportunity to deseribe the previously

unknown male of the species.

lamily Aratieicise,

Celaenia vikinson( (Pickard-Cambridge, 1879)

Two females were found at night hanging from

horivontal silk-lines about 10 em long ina garden in

Aldwate GS-U1'S, 138) 44°, SAM S198S121). The line may

protect [hem from the many ants and Clubianidae foubd

on the same bush, alehough ats main function is thought

kinhere/, is common in Adelaide suburbs, The lack of

shoulder humps in the later easily differentiates the two.

A snate was beaten off a bush at Bridgewater (35°01,

845'T, SAM NI985122) and seems to be the

tindeseribed male of €) arkinsond eis 138 mm in total

length, about 1 that of the fernale, Like the first aod

second jnstirs’, (We abdoniinal proniberances are smaller

than those of the adult. They appear as shoulder humps

in bein unterive on the ubdamen (Fig. 1). The pacern

of setae is the same as in the Temales. CL a/Kinsoni is

known from eastern Austealia and New Zealand? All

specimens Were collected in late December/early January.

A briet deseriptioan of the male follows. Abbreviations for

eye measurements are suindard.”

0.5mm

Fis, ), Dorsal abdomen of male Celvenia atkinsoni.

Measurenenr (in fam): Body Tength, bags Carapace

Jonwih. 0.63; Caraupace width. 0.63; Abdomen longth, 0.873

Abdomen widlh, (13; Abdomen height, 0.75. Lee lenetlis

are shown in ‘Table 1.

Colour: Carapace light yellow will two posterior brow

stripes. on either sideof the Muhest point. Palps, chehverse,

mayitlae aad lubiony all light yellow. Sternum yellowish

willt browa border, Legs yellowish with distal half of

mekitarsi and patel orange. Basal and distal ribia orange,

femur orange, Abdomen white with brawn mark ies:

Spinnerets yellow surrounded by white.

Ceérdpave: Pointed in tront, wider posterianiy. Eyes on

raised (uberele projecting over clypeus. Stagte black clavate

seta in centre, Two smaller black setae belween PME,

Tanil d. Length (ini af porionis of rhe lez in male

Celacnia atkinsoni 4M NIG8S122),

Metlarsus Tarsus Total

| U.32 “il O19 Ot) O.0T 0,80

2 28 7.09 U6 0.06 1.07 0.66

3 O15 ),07 OV .07 on7 0,47

4 0.2) 04 OI 0,09 O47 OST

Fyes: Eves in (We rows. From above both eve rows strongly

revurveel, Eye mitig AME: ALE: PMES PLE | 4: 2:5; 2.

AME senuraied [ram each other by |.3~ their diameter

and from ALL by 3 limes their diameten PME separnued

front cach other by O.80¢ their diameter and trom PLE

hy Lae their diameter. The lateral eyes are conuguous.

The clypeus is 4.46 diamerer of AME,

Aatertar ventral: Manillae converging. Labuin rrianwukar.

Srernuen Stecnuny as long as wide, widesr between secon

coxde ancl rounded posteriorly,

Lees: Lengi order 1,2, 4,3, Lightly clothed in fine hairs.

Black clavate hair on both distal tibia}. Three tarsal claws

Abdomen Wider than long. Two dorsal anterior humps

slightly projectinu over the side of the abdomen, Postenor

surface slopes Sieeply, Number of black clavate hairs on

the autenor humps, While elivale hairs jn places. Six

spinnerels, conival, Anterior pair larmest

Genitalia: Sec Vig. 2.

O.25mm

Pin. 2. Genitalia of male Celdenir atkinsan,

182

I wish to thank B. Gilbert for the male Ce/aenia; thanks 'Main, B. Y. (1982) Bull. Brit. Arach. Soc. 5, 425-432.

to Jenni Thurmer for the drawings; and thanks to Hickman, V. V. (1970) Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tas. 105, 75-81.

Margaret Davies for editorial help. My thanks also totwo — 3Mascord, R. (1980) “Spiders of Australia.” (Reed,

reviewers for helpful comments. Sydney).

BERNARD GUERIN, Department of Psychology, Univerisity of Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067.

AN ALLEGED ARCHAEOCYATH FROM CAPE DENISON, ANTARCTICA

BY J. B. JAGO AND R. L. OLIVER

Summary

There have been numerous attempts to reassemble the Antarctic and Australian parts of

Gondwanaland as they were prior to their Mesozoic rifting and subsequent movement apart.

Attempts such as those of Sproll & Dietz and Smith & Hallam were based largely on morphological

best fits of continental margins; other attempts were based largely on reversing seafloor spreading

patterns.

BRIFE COMMUNICATION

AN ALLEGED ARCHAEOCYATH FROM CAPE DENISON, ANTARCTICA

There have been numerous atlentpts to reasseinble the

Antarctic and Australian pares of Gondwanaland is (hey

were pila to ther Mesozoe piltine and subsequent

movement apuri Attempts such a8 those of Sproll &

Vier! and Smith & Hallam* were based largely on

morphological best fits of continental margins, other

aliempis? were based largely on reversine seafloor

spreading purtterns.

Reconstruchons based on the geology of te two

continents have generally jised one of (wo approaches:

(1) avoniparien ef the geology af northern Vierorioa

Land, Antarctica with that of Tasmania, particularly

with respect 10 the Cambrian and Ordovician rocks

ol both areas’?

12) A comparison ot the geology of the Fast Aataretic

shield with that of the Preeaimbrian of southern

Australia, pacricularty with respeer to the isatopic

wes?

Pies in, b show reconsiractions based respeedively on

ihe two approaches.

One of (he problems in using the eeology of ihe

opposmie margins has beer Ue presence of large gaps in

the pre-Mesovoie geology of bath cantinenis. On the

Australian continent the Tertiary sediments of rhe bucla

aud Murray Basins occupy laree areas whereas ta

Aulurctica substantial regions are jee-vavered.

One piece af Information which has been used by some

auhors ll jn either conlinental or palacouvouraphic

revonsiruction has been the repart by Mawsen!*thal an

erratic collected during the 191-1914 Australasian

Anrarcnic Expedition in morsing at Cape Denison contains

aw possible member of (ire Archaeoeyarha, Mawson (p, 349)

Noted jm ane case (NO. 346) a forsterite marble now

serpentinised, there is figured on the fave of the rock

outrlines.of what may very well have originally been fossil

archacovyathinae. The outlines are recorded in yellow

green serpentinite Which shows Up agaist de white cock”,

This veport ys signifieait i tat ie fie rock does yideed

contain Arehacoegiatha then it could suggest a link with

the archagocyathanaich limestones of ihe lower

Cumbrian ol he Adelaide Guasyncting, ie, Cupe Denison

vould be placed opposite the Adelaide Geosyneline on a

'Sproll, W. BP, & Dicte, ROS. (1969) Nature 222, 445-448,

‘Smith, A, Gy & Hatta, A, (1970) Nature 225, 139-144,

‘Playes, PR Ro & Ringis, J. (1973) Natiie 243, 354-458,

JOriffiths, OR. 974d) Naltuce 249, 336-338,

‘Laird, M. G.. Conper, R.A. & age, BR 11977) Nature

265, WLIO,

“Laied, MG, (ISBN) 4, BR. Sow NZ, $(, 425-448.

“Jaye, & BL (1981) ft Creswell, Mo ML. & Vella, Po (eds).

Conmlwana bive (Batkena, Rotlerdagi) 19-204,

“Lovering, 4b, Travis, G. A. Comaford, 1, & Kelly,

PR. QYRT) Spee, Pulls peal. Soe Aust. 7. 199-203.

“Oliver, Ry &,, Coopen J AO & Travtove, AQ J, (1983) dir

Oliver, Rob, James, BR, & dapo, J.B. eds). Agioetic

Larihh Seienge (Austrian Agademy of Science,

Comberra), 64-08,

cootiental reassembly, as has mideed been proposed by

some authors?! alihoueh the closest Knows outetops at

archaeocvathan lmnestone in Antarctica to Cape Denisan

are from the revion between the Byed und Norcal

Glaciers of rhe Transantarcric Mountains, some 1400

km to the southeast,

The bedrock geotegy of the Commonwealth Bav/Cape

Denison ates comprises granodibrite gneisses intruded by

aplitic and amphibalivic dykes’ 4. Rooks in the Cape

Denison area are either of amphibolite or grariulite

facies’; the eranodiorite eneiss 14 of very Late Archaean

age’, Erratics found in the moraines ut Cape Denison

incluce conulonmierates and urkases'*, various igneous

rocks‘, and a considerable variety of meiumorphic

rocks! GIKI2202122 The great majority off (ue ernaties

collected by the 1911-1914 expedition are metamorphic

rocks",

Specimens collected hy Misono are housed in the

Geology Depariment, University of Adehkude Aq

inspection of specimen IL6 (alsa numbered 16669) shows

the urchaevevarban-lke struchire deseribed by Mawson

(Fig. 2). However, in the opinion of the wrirers, ihe itlleped

urchaeouyath clearly vonsists simply of randomly onented,

fibrous serpentinite formed diving the metimorphisn of

impure limestone. The degree of metamerphisey of the

rock ts such that any fossils are unlikely to haye survived

the metamorphie process, Glastonbury, whoa described

specimen 316 a6 e forsterite marble makes ne invention of

the presence of possible archavacyaths.

Henee itis concluded that althoush if is quite possible

ona continental drift reconstuetion (har Cape Denison

Was justaposed with the archaeoeyathan bearing

limestones of the Adelwde Geosyneling, the crane used

by Mawson should oot be tised as evidence in support of

this because it docs nor contunm semnmants of

Archaeoevitha. Another poi is that the erratte could

have been derived from within quite a lage area ol bast

Antarctiea, [tis also of interest ta nore thar Truswell”!

has shown (hat sea-lMoar oaiples coltected by Mawson

during the W9N-19i4 Australisian Antarctic Expedition

ean be used fo suppor an) Antareriva-Austratia

reconstruction?" in whieh Cape Derisen is placed

opposite the Adelaide Geosyneling

Veevers, J & Powell, C2 McA. (1974) Jn Veevers, J. b

(Ed). Phanerozoic earth Wistary ot Avstenlia

(Clarendon, Oxford) 282-289.

"Shergald, J. UL, dago. ib B, Cooper, Ro A. & Laurie,

4 R.. (985 tat, Union geo}, Science Publ, 19,

Mawson, D. (1940) Sedimentary rocks, Australasian

Antarche Expedition 19}1-|4. Scfeutific Reports Series

A 4, (HL), 347-367,

"“Dwird, M.G. (198i) Jy Holland, C. H. (Eu.) Lower

Palacozvie of the Middle Fast, Bastern und Southern

Alrica, and Antarctica. (Wiley, London) 287-214,

“Stillwell, FL. (1918) Austalasiat) Antareric Expedition

{911-14 Scivnlific Reports, Seties A, > (1), 1230,

“Chastonburcy, oO. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic

Pxpedinon MI) lt4, Scieanfie Reports Series A 4 t4),

114-134,

184

~ W.A. ~

~ ~

YILGARN

BLOCK

EAST ANTARCTICA

& +

ova

YILGAAN

BLOCK

~ nm

EAST ANTARCTICA

os +

=> Middle Cambrian to Early Ordovician LLL} Adelaidean to Cambrian

Precambrian (Undifferentiated) ? Late Precambrian to Ordovician

Fig. 1. Continental reconstruction alternatives. See text for details. AG, Adelaide Geasyncline, SB, Smithton Basin.

DT, Dundas Trough. AT, Adamsfield Trough, STR, South Tasman Rise. BG, Bowers Group, RBG, Robertson Bay

Group.

Vig. 2. Two views of (he specimens containing [he alleged archaeoeyath, bath at natural scale. The fibrous serpentinite

is present an ihe rieht hand side of the upper photograph and at the top of the lower photograph.

Stilwell, FLL, (1023) Australasian Antarctic Expedition

II -I4. Scientific Reports Series A 3 (4), 259-280.

"Coulson, A. b (1925) Australasian Antarche Expedition

IMi-I4. Scientilic Reports Series A 3 (5), 281-305,

'SClastonbury, dO, G, (1940) Australasian Antarctic

Expedition I91{-l4. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (6),

IN3-146,

“Kleeman, A. W. (1940) Australasian Antirctic

Expedition 1911-14, Scientific Reports Series A 4 (7),

197-292,

“Pifley, C. E. (1923) Australasian Antarctic Expedition

19-14. Scientific Reports Series A. 3 (2), 231-244,

“lGlastonbury, J. O. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic

Expedition 19tI-14. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (8),

295-322.

UGlasionbury, J. O. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic

Expedition 191]-14, Scientific Reports Series A 4 (9),

“Mawson, D, (1940) Australasian Antaretic Expedition

, ta-l4. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (13), 405-432.

“ Truswell, E. M. (1982) J. geal. Soc, Aust. 29, 343-356.

Crook, K. A. W. & Belbin, L. (1978) J. geal. Soe, Aust,

25, 23-40.

/Veevers, J... Powell, CG Mead. & Johnson, B.D. (1975)

Earth Planet. Sci, Letts 27, 383-87.

J.B, JAGO, School of Applied Geology, South Australian Institute of Technology, PO. Bos 1, Ingle Farm, S. Aust,

5098 and R. L, OLIVER, Geology Department, University of Adelaide, (1.7.0, Box 498, Adelaide, S. Aust. S001,

THE MUSGRAVE RANGES EARTHQUAKE OF MARCH 30, 1986

BY B. BARLOW, D. DENHAM & K. MCCUE

Summary

On 30 March 1986 at 0854 UT (1824 local time) a large earthquake (Ms ~ 5.8) occurred near

Marryat Creek by De Rose Hill in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (see Fig. 1). The main

shock was followed in the next seven days by five aftershocks which were large enough (magnitude

greater than 3) to enable instrumental locations to be made (Table 1). A further 12 unlocatable

aftershocks were detected by the closest seismograph station at Alice Springs.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

THE MUSGRAVE RANGES EARTHQUAKE OF MARCH 30, 1986

On 30 March 1986 at 854 UT (1824 loval time) a large

carthquake (My - 5,8) occurred near Marryat Creck by

De Rose Hill in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (see

Fig, 1). The main shock was followed in the nest seven

days by five aftershocks which were lurge enough

(magnitude greater tham 3) to enable instrumental

locations to be made (Table 1), A further 12 unloeatable

allershocks Were detevied by the closest semouraph

auilion at Alice Sprinys.

The main earthquake occurred in (he eastern end of

the Musgrave Block. This is a Precambrian crystalline

basement feature, previously thought to be aseismig. Only

one poorly lovated carthguake has been recorded within

100 kim of the epicentral area if the past 30 vears. Most

uetivily in South Australia is confined to (he Flinders

Ranges Seismic Zone',

A reconnaissance survey of the fell area has vevealed

a13 km long arewale thrust fault, cenvex to the norchwest,

willpa maximum throw of 0.6 metre. [he scarp outcrops

ina sandy clay with no bedrock exposure. On the cast-

west limb there wits d substantial component of left-lateril

sirtke slip, reaching a maximum af about 0.8 m1. On the

yormh-south limb there was a smaller ammount of dextral

Mike Shp. The north-south limb dips al about 60 degrees

to she west and (he dip of the eas\-west limb, measured

al Uw surface, is 30 degrees (o the south,

The main shock was well recorded al all of the

Australian Seismmogranh stalions and at many stauons

worldwide. The US National Earthquake Information

Service (NEIS) eaniputed an epicentre close to 26.23",

132.70°R using P wave dala from the global seismic

network. This epicentre 7s not considered to be well located

because Whe closest station (at Alice Springs) was more

than 300 kin from the epicentre and all stations in ihe

cdistunve range 5-17 degrees were amilled because of high

nevative travel Lime residuals (relative to. the Jeffreys-Bullen

velocity model), The computed location, based on P and

S recordings on the 12 closest Australian s[auions, and

using a velocity model appropriate to South Australia,

places the epicentre 30 km further cast (hig. 1). The

mavroseismic epicentre, defined by the surface breakage

(faulting), lies about midway between these two

instrumental solutions.

The NEIS jhaenitudes obtained from teleseismic

observations were my, 5,7 and M.S.8. These values

translate lo Richter magnitudes My 6 and 5,5 respectively,

Phe average Richler magnitude determined on the S.Aust.

seismic network was My 5.2, although the cpicentral

distances involved lic outside the range of applicability

of the Jocal magnitude formula,

A preliminary fault plane solution has been obtaimed

using P wave first motions from all available Australian

stalions, supplemented by recordings from China, Tidia,

Japan and Panua New Guinea. The results are shawn in

Fig. 2 and indicate a mechanism comprising thrust and

strike slip faulting, consistent with the ma¢roseismic

evidenve. The pressure axis is close io horizontal and strikes

N220°F, The east-wesl nodal plane dips at 67 to the soutlt

and mutehes (he orientation and sense of motion observed

on the east-west limb of the mapped surface fault,

Insufficient stations recorded (he aflershocks to enable

additional fault plane solutions to be obtained. However,

the first motion directions read for stations ar Nectar

Brook, Partacauna, Roopena and Woomera in South

Australia, were inconsistent from one alershock to the

neat, implying a Hon-uniform rupture sequence,

Intensity questionnaires were distribured to hundreds

of homesteads and post offices covering w large arca of

South and Central Australia, in an attempt 10 produce

an jsoseismal map for the earthquake. Ol the 227

questionnaires returned, 88s reporied not felt. The

compiled data for ihe felt area are shown ip Fig. 1. Because

‘Taate t. Hvpoventral parameters: for the Musgrave Ranges earthiyuake of 30th March, 1986 and aftershocks,

eT RE EEEE UIE SSESESSSSS SESSA SSSI

Date Origin Time Lat Long. Depth Magnitude No. of

il M S (°S) (Bb) (km) M, Stanoans

W) Mat, 1886 OS 53 53.2 46.234 142.697 1 My 5.8 126 (NEIS)

(Matin Shack) 57

(Main Shock) OR 53 SS4 26.285 a.n9 1 M, (SA) 4.2 12 (SA)

(Main Stivek) O8, 53 48 4 26.33 132.52 ma) 28 (BMR)

26 199 132.83 shallow Surface faulling!

3) Mar., (986 O06 12 02,5 26.178 132.075 4 3.3 5

oy 25 ATA 26,208 LA) R13 24 3.1 4

Ol Apr., 1986 {1 42 55.65 26,252 13).864 3 43 5

9 Ape, TYs6 08 20 00.10 26.220 131.973 18 3.) $

U6 Ape, 1986 li 44 OT RS 26.2710 132,04 5 3A) 3

> Macroseismic epicentre (intersection of ewst-west and north-south fault traces).

NELLIS : US National Earthquake Information Service.

SA : SA. Seismic Network, augmented by stations ut Alice Springs, Warburton and Mount tea.

BMR > Bureau of Mineral Resources, Australian Seismoyraph network,

188

130° 132°

Ap S.A. Network epicentre

Yo Zone intensity

134° 137°

136°

pBALIGE SPRINGS

24°

[Deep Well

[een SIMPSON

IV ¢ - Ha DESERT

“

AYERS / Angas Downs

4 ROCK 4-5 -~7o. jo

M “3 V Put N

“Sp, ve / / \ oFinke

) /Mulga Park

4Noes L 8 nf _6 Kulfera N.T

— eee ee mR - YI Og ea TS rt So ae Sa —_---- 26°

4 F.

al \ ad / S.A,

\ 6b ¢

\ ‘ De Rose Hill

‘\ ie ot cot oPedirka

” Foranite owns

2godnadatta

A NEIS epicentre

F Fault trace

Fig. 1. lsoseismal map of the Musgrave Ranges earthquake. Intensity values are on the Modified Mercalli Scale. The

Arabic numbers denote point observations whereas the Roman numerals define the isoseismal zones. The zero

designation corresponds to “not felt”. The map also shows the instrumental locations of the epicentre and the east-

west and north-south fault traces.

24/G653-9/2

of the sparsity of the population, damage was minor, being

confined to cracked walls in the nearest homesteads at De

Rose Hill and Victory Downs Station, The maximum

intensities were MM VI. Several localities, as far away as

150 km, recorded intensity MM V. Minor shaking was

reported at Alice Springs, 300 km to the north, and Cooper

Pedy, 350 km to the south, although towns such as

Oodnadatta which were closer to the epicentre experienced

no felt effects. There were isolated (anomalous) reports

of the earthquake (MMII/IIT) from places as distant as

Olary and Quorn.

Fig. 2, Fault plane solution for the Musgrave Ranges

earthquake. Solid and open circles represent compressive

and dilative first motions respectively, plotted on an

equal area Stereographie projection of the lower focal

sphere. The circumscribed crosses show nodal planes

and the pressure (P) and tension (T) axes. The numbers

represent the trend and plunge of the focal planes and

poles.

189

At the time of writing another large earthquake (M, ‘Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. (1986)

~ 5.5) occurred in the same area of the Musgrave Ranges Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 110(4), 145-154.

on 11 July 1986 at 0718 UT. It was preceded by a M, 3.8

earthquake on 10 July at 2210 UT.

We wish to thank R. McDougall and A. McArdle for

assistance in data preparation and analysis.

B. BARLOW, D. DENHAM, T. JONES, K. McCUE, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C-T. 2601, G. GIBSON,

Phillip Institute of Technology, Bundoora 3083, Vic. and S. GREENHALGH, School of Earth Sciences, Flinders

University of South Australia, Bedford Park, S. Aust. 5042.

FOOD OF THE ANENOME ANTHOTHOE ALBOCINCTA AT WEST

ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY S. A. SHEPHERD AND J. D. GRAY

Summary

Anthozoans are ubiquitous on rocky substrata in temperate waters yet there have been few studies

of their natural diet in southern Australia or elsewhere. The anenome Anthothoe albocincta

(Stuckey) is the most common anthozoan at West Island, South Australia (35°37°S, 134°52°E) and

occurs on the northern side of the island at 4-5 m depth, at a mean adult population density of 12.5

m -2(SE ~*.8), with a mean column diameter of 10.1 mm (size range 7-14 mm). The species is

described and figured by Thomas & Shepherd.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

FOOD OF THE ANEMONE ANTHOTHOE ALBOCINCTA AT WEST ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Anthozoans are ubiquitous on rocky substrata in

lempergle waters! yer there have bean few studies of their

natural diet in southern Australia? or elsewhere’4. The

anemone Alnthothoe albocineta (Stuckey) is the most

common anthozoan at West Island, South Australia

(35°37'S, 134°52'B) and ocetirs on the northern side of

the island al 4-5 m depth, at a mean adult population

densuy of 12,5 m *(SE~2.8), with a mean column

diameter of 10.1 mm (size range 7-14 mmi), The species

is deseribed and figured by Thomas & Shepherd.

During the Course of an experimental investigation of

the settlement of abalone” we examined the role of this

anemone asa polential predator of settling abalone larvae.

This species, like most anemones, is a passive suspension

feeder thal captures prey, usually zooplankton, brought

10 the tentacles by ambient currents’,

The habitat of .4_ alboeincra is usually near the sand-

line on rocky subsirata, under boulders or at the entrance

of crevices. The tentacles project into the current and (he

tentacular crown fans outwards and. down to within a few

millimetres of the subsimalum enabliny the tentacles to sieve

the water passing between them. Up to 200 conical

tentacles to 1S mm long are borne on the ora! disc.

Distance between the larger, inner tenfacles js aboul

2-4 mm atthe mid points and to 8 mm at the tips. The

finer, ouler tentavles are spaced 0.5-1 mm upart ar the

mid polit and up to 2 mm apart at the tips. Particles

cuptured are passed from ihe outer to inner tentacles and

iien fo (he mouth. Mean mouth size of the sample was

2.3 min bot it can expand considerably.

We observed no-diurnal rhythm in the expansion and

contraction of tentacles and usually 60-90% of

Taste 1. Covlenteran cantents of Anthothoe albocineta.

A, albocincta were expanded day and night, Ln this respect

this anemone resembles most other studied subtidal

temperate species that have zooxanthellac®-

11) this note we describe the coelcnteran vortents of a

sumple ol 38 adult 4. a/bocinere taken at West 1. during

Decernber 1984 when competent abalone larvae are

expected to settle. Samples were preserved in formalin

and sea-water and subsequently examined in the laboararory

under 40~ magnification with a dissecting microscope.

Mesenterial filaments of A. albocine/a ace numerous and

if was necessary (o dissect each anemone and serape the

Hlaments to free partly digested prey.

The eoelenteron contents of the sample of A. albocincta

are given in Table |. Crustacean appendages and other

crustacean fragments are (he most abundant items but

positive identifications were not possible due to partial

digestion; their size and shape suggested that many of

them are probably amphipods, Judging from the abun-

dance of complete and fraymented crustaceans found in

the coelenteron, the abundance of common taxa is in the

order: aniphipods, estracods and copepods. OF the non-

crustacean living prey, inyerlebrale eggs are the most

abundant by far, with bivalve and gastropod larvae ard

foraminiterans less common. There are also quantities of

macro-alzal Tragments and tragments of encrusting

Orgunisms such as sponge, bryozoans and coralline algae

(included in red alae in Table 1). The mean length range

of prey categories is fram 0.17 mm to 2,08 mm with

standard deviations ringing from 1/3 to greater than the

means.

The size distribution for all prey items (Fig. 1) is skewed

to smaller sizes willra mode at 0.4-0.6-mm. However thts

Length (mrn) Length range (mm)

| i

n Mean 1S8.D min, max.

Amphipods 10 2.08 1,28 0.75 4.71

Cladocerans 2 0.48 0.24 0.3] 0.65

Copepods 12 0.66 {).27 0.28 115

lsopods 1 0.80 — _ —

Mysids 1 5.25 - —

Ostravods aS 0.54 0.18 O15 1.03

Crusiiéan appendayes 327 0.57 (),38 13 3,49

Other crustacean fragments H9 (1.69 4,54 0.09 6.13

Gastropead larvac 10 0.56 Odd O19 1.50

Bivalve larvae \4 .40 OAS O15 0,59

Annelids 2 1.29 1.56 O19 a:

Nematodes ii 0.36 (1.23 0.13 U.88.

Foraminiferans | 0.27 Nil O10 (h4s

Sponge lrazmenis 11 0.17 U.U6 0,09 (28

ryoxoan fragments 35 0.97 1.24 0.18 6.25

Invertebrate e2es 238 0.16 012 0.04 1.38

Green alpac (fragments) 28 L.80 | 64 033 6.89

Brown and ced algae (iragments) 42 0.95 1.69 ONT LO.85

Dinoflagellates 4 0,29 (WAS 0,23 0.80

Spines, spicules 1s 0,92 121 0,20 4,69

Shell fragments 7 OS! O14 O30 0,70)

TOTAL 1235

FREQUENCY

_s,

100-

Meaty etal

1 2 >2

LENGTH(mm)

Fig. 1. Length frequency distribution of all prey items

(continuous line) and crustacean fragments and

appendages (dashed line) in the coelenteron of A.

albocincta,

distribution largely reflects the distribution of crustacean

fragments and appendages derived from fewer, larger

individuals,

'Thomas, I. M. & Shepherd, 8. A. (1982) In S. A,

Shepherd & I. M. Thomas (eds) “Marine [nvertebrates

of Southern Australia Part 1” pp, 161-169 (Govt Printer,

, Adelaide).

“Ayre, D. J. (1984) Ophelia 23, 149-153.

{Purcell, J. E. (1977) Bull. S. Cal. Acad. Sci. 76, 168-172.

4Sebens, K. P. (1981) Biol. Bull. mar. biol. Lab., Woods

Hole 161, 152-171,

‘Van- Praet, M. (1985) Ady. Mar. Biol. 20, 66-101.

The coelenteron contents of this anemone is similar in

terms of taxonomic prey categories to that of other

temperate anemones studied’ and we likewise conclude

that the diet of this anemone, in summer at least, is

principally of demersal crustaceans and larvae of benthic

organisms. Lts ability to capture plankton over a wide size

range and in particular, active species like amphipods,

implies that it is capable of capturing weakly swimming

prey such as abalone larvae in the size range 0).25-

0.5 mm*!", Nevertheless, while this anemone may be a

potential predator of abalone larvae, its importance as a

predator depends on presently unknown ecological factors

such as the sieving efficiency of the tentacular crown, Its

effect on the density of settling larvae may in fact be slight,

since a study of abalone settlement using experimental

boulder structures found more newly. settled abalone on

structures with anemones present than on structures from

which they had been removed®.

We thank the Department of Fisheries for a student

grant, Michelle Jenkins for technical help and Dr R. Black

for helpful criticism of the manuscript.

Shepherd, S. A. & Turner, J. A. (1985) J. Exp. Mar,

Biol. Ecol. 93, 285-298.

'Sebens, K. P. & Koehl, M. A. R. (1984) Mar. Biol. 81,

ge 271.

'Sebens, K. P. & DeReimer, K. (1977) Mar. Biol. 43,

247-256.

Leighton, D. L. (1972) Fishery Bulletin 70, 373-381.

"Garland, C. D., Cooke, S. L., Grant, J. F. & MeMeekin,

T. A. (1985) J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol, 91, 137-149.

S. A. SHEPHERD and J. D. GRAY, Department of Fisheries, 135 Pirie Street, Adelaide, South Australia, 5000.

ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF A HYLID TREE FROG FROM

QUEENSLAND

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER AND GRAEME F.. WATSON

Summary

The nomenclature of Australian frogs currently is labile and a number of areas of disagreement

need to be addressed before any degree of stability can be achieved. One of the numerous issues

involved is the correct name to be applied to a single species of hylid tree frog occurring in North

Queensland. At present three names are used in the literature: Litoria eucnemis (Lonnberg), L.

genimaculata (Horst) and L. serrata (Andersson).

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF A HYLID TREE FROG FROM QUEENSLAND

The nomenclature ol Australian frags currently is labile

and a number of areas of disagreement need ta be

addressed before any deyree of stability can be achieved.

One of the numerous issues involved is the correct fame

(o be applied (oa single speaies of hylid tree frog oecurring

in North Queensland, At present three names are used in

the literature; Litoria eucrentis (Lonnberg)!?, ree

Litoria serrata Was described in 1916" from specimens

taken ar Atherton, Carrington and Malanda, and was

referred to (he synonymy of L. eucnenis of New Guinca

by Loveridge®. The aetion was supported by Copland?

but was questioned hy Moore!!’, Because of this

uncertainty the Lype specimens were reexarnined, compared

with additional series and considered conspecific by

Tyler!

Subsequent use of [te name L. serrata for (he Austrahan

poptlation!? follows Cogaer' who adopted it in the tirst

edition of his lield guide, with the comment “It has

recently been regarded as conspecific with Liferia

eucnemis, & species from the Huen Peninsula in New

Guinea.” Cogger clearly believed thal this was nol the vase,

but did not render the evidence upon which he based his

pinion,

More recently the speeific identity of the Australian

population has been changed? to 4, genimaculata, a

species Ueseribed from New Guinea The change is

justified by the authors only by the comment “/. serrata

of Cogwer (1975),.” The name /, genivnuculata has now

been incorporaled jo a list of the amphibian fauna of

Queensland’.

Ir is apparent front the above summary thit recent

nomenclatural changes have been implemented without

the presentation of any substantive evidence in support

of those changes.

In New Guinea @. eucaenis and L, genimaculata are

revarded as distinct bul closely related species differing

in adult size and maximum extent of interdigital

webbing).

Tyler considered the two species lo be allopatric bul

more recently they have been demonstrated to be sympatric

over a portion of their geographic range. and readily

distinguishable by differences in male call’*. Both species

produce calls described as “sort "ls no doubt caused by

their lack of vocal sacs! *Y,

An audiospectrogram of a call of L. gentmaculata

provided by Zweilel'* depicts a series of nine notes emitted

ula rate Of approximately 6/sec. In contrast the call of L-

eucnemis is more complex and described as “groups of

low, soft, chuckling noles and finished . . with several

louder, shorter pulsed calls", Zweifel’s figures of the call

of each species indicate that there is no possibility of L,

evenemis aad L. genimaculara being canspecilic,

The call of an Australian specimen (Queensland

National Parks and Wildlife Service collection N 32472)

from Weather Station Creek is biphasic with pulse

repetition rates of 34,8 and 52,5 pulses see ' respectively,

Comparable values from. Zweitel's'* recording of

L. encnemis trom New Guinea are 23,5 and 165 pulses

sec |. Although there is similarity in (he low pulse rate

calls, (hey differ markedly in the number of pulses, 30 in

the Australian frog compared with 16 in the New Guinea

specimen. In the case of the high pulse rate calls the

differences in pulse fepetition rates are conspicuous

whereas the number of pulses (17 and 23 respectively)

differ only slightly.

More and improved recordings fron Australia and New

Guinea are required to resolve the issue of whether the

allopatric populations variously knownas L. eucnernis

and L. serrata are Conspecitic.

MULL 4AM

2 ‘Q 6 8B 1.0

TIME IN SECONDS

eet yt GAA.

12 1.4 +6 18 20 22

Fig. 1, Audiaspeetrogram (300 Hy lilter) of calls of Liroria ewcnemis recorded by K. R- McDonald, Air temp, 23°C.

Tape=Dept Zoolowy, University of Adelaide, K. MeD (10). Analysed on a Kay Digital Sonagraply Model 7800.

194

Nevertheless, there is no justification for considering

L. genimaculata a member of the Australian fauna. If

L, genimaculata does occur in Australia it will be an

‘Tyler, M. J. (1976) “Frogs.” (Collins, Sydney).

"Barker, J. & Grigg, G. (1977) “A field guide to

Australian frogs.” (Rigby, Adelaide).

{Kikkawa, J., Monteith, G, B. & Ingram, G. (1981) Jn A.

Keast (ed.), “Ecological biogeography of Australia.” (W,

Junk, The Hague).

‘Ingram, G. J. & Covacevich, J. (1981) Mem. Qld Mus.

20, 291-306.

‘Cogger, H. G., Cameron, E, & Cogger, H. (1983)

“Zoological catalogue of Australia. Vol. 1. Amphibia

and Reptilia.” (Australian Government Publishing

Service, Canberra).

“Dennis, A. & Trenerry, M. (1984) N. Qld Nat. (184),

2-9.

Andersson, L. G. (1916) Vetensk. Akad. Hand]. 52(9),

1-20.

‘Loveridge, A. (1935) Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard

78, 1-60.

*Copland, S. J. (1957) Proc, Linn. Soc. N.SW. 82(1),

9-108.

addition to the fauna and not a nomenclatural replacement

of L. eucnemtis.

We are indebted to Mr K. R. McDonald for providing

the tape recording from which Fig. 1 was prepared.

"Moore, J. A. (1961) Bull. Amer. Mus, Nat. Hist. 121(3),

149-386.

"Tyler, M. J. (1965) Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 145(1),

91-106.

Dingle, J. G. (1979) “Checklist of Queensland native

animals.” Part 1. Amphibians, reptiles and mammals.

(Queensland Agric. Coll,, Lawes.) (Mimeo).

“Cogger, H. G, (1975) “Reptiles and amphibians of

Australia,” (Reed, Sydney).

'SHorst, R. (1883) Notes Leyden Mus. 5(22), 235-244,

Tyler, M. J. (1968) Zool. Verhandl. (96), 1-203.

Menzies, J. 1. (1976) “Handbook of common New

Guinea frogs.” Wau Ecology Institute Handbook No. 1.

(Wau, Papua New Guinea).

"Tyler, M. J. & Davies, M. (1978) Aust. J. Zool. Suppl.

Ser. (63), 1-47.

'S¢weifel, R. G. (1980) Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat, Hist,

165(5), 387-434.

"Tyler, M. J. (1971) Univ, Kansas Publ. Mus. Nat. Hist.

‘ 19(4), 319-360,

Tyler, M. J. (1972) Zool. Anz. 189, 331-336.

MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498 G.P.O., Adelaide, 5. Aust. 5001, and

GRAEME F. WATSON, Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052.